NFPA 72 Spanish - Free PDF Download (2023)

Description: NFPA 72 English...

National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code NFPA® 72 2013 Edition

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

1 Batterymarch Park, PO Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02169 International Codes and Standards Organization

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS FOR USE OF NFPA DOCUMENTS NFPA® codes, standards, recommendations, and guides ("NFPA Documents") are developed through the consensus standards development process approved by the American National Standards Institute. This process brings together volunteers representing different views and interests to build consensus on fire and safety issues. While the NFPA manages the process and establishes rules to promote fairness in consensus development, it does not independently test, evaluate, or verify the accuracy of information or the validity of judgments contained in NFPA documents. NFPA disclaims liability for any personal injury, property damage, or any other damages of any kind, whether special, indirect, consequential, or compensatory, arising directly or indirectly from publication, use, or reliance on NFPA documents. The NFPA also does not guarantee the accuracy or completeness of the information published here. In issuing and making NFPA documents publicly available, NFPA is not responsible for performing professional or other services on behalf of any other person or entity. The NFPA is also not responsible for the fulfillment of any obligation of any person or entity to any other person. Anyone using this document should rely on their own independent judgment or, if necessary, seek the advice of a competent professional to determine the appropriate exercise in any particular circumstance. NFPA has no authority or responsibility to monitor or enforce the content of NFPA documents. NFPA also does not list, certify, test, or inspect any product, construction, or installation pursuant to this document. Any certification or other declaration of compliance with the requirements of this document is not assignable to NFPA and is the sole responsibility of the certifier or the person or organization making the declaration.

NFPA is not responsible for the accuracy or correctness of this Spanish translation. In case of conflict between the English and Spanish versions, the English language will prevail.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

Updating NFPA Documents Users of NFPA codes, standards, recommendations, and guides ("NFPA Documents") should note that this Document may be replaced at any time with the release of new editions or, from time to time, the Publication may be modified by temporary temporary changes. A current official NFPA document consists of the current edition of the document along with any preliminary interim amendments and any errata in effect at that time. To determine whether a document is the current edition and whether it has been amended by issuing tentative interim amendments or corrected by issuing errata, consult the appropriate NFPA publications, such as the National Fire Codes® Subscription Service. Fire Codes), visit the NFPA website at www.nfpa.org or contact the NFPA at the address below. Interpretations of NFPA Documents Any oral or written statement not processed in accordance with Section 6 of the Governing Committee Project Regulations shall not be considered an official position of the NFPA or any of its committees, and shall not be considered or used as performance officer. . Patents The NFPA takes no position on the validity of any patent rights referenced, related, or asserted in connection with any NFPA document. Users of NFPA documents are solely responsible for determining the validity of patent rights and the risk of infringement of such rights, and NFPA shall not be responsible for any infringement of patent rights arising from use of or reliance on the results of the NFPA documents. NFPA adheres to the policy of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) regarding the inclusion of patents in the American National Standards ("ANSI Patent Policy") and hereby issues a notice pursuant to that policy: NOTE: The User You are encouraged to choose the option that compliance with an NFPA document requires the use of an invention protected by patent rights. NFPA takes no position as to the validity of such patent rights or whether such patent rights constitute or include essential patent claims under the ANSI Patent Policy. If, in connection with the ANSI Patent Policy, the owner of a patent has declared its willingness to license those rights on terms that are reasonable and non-discriminatory to applicants seeking such a license, copies of these filing statements are available upon request from NFPA. For more information, contact the NFPA at the address below. Laws and Regulations Users of NFPA documents should consult applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations. The NFPA does not intend to promote actions that do not comply with applicable law through the publication of its codes, standards, recommended practices and guidelines, and such documents should not be construed as a violation of law. Copyright NFPA documents are copyrighted and owned by NFPA. They are available for a variety of uses, both public and private. This includes use by reference in laws and regulations, as well as use in private self-regulation, standardization and promotion of safe practices and methods. By making these documents available for use and acceptance by government and private users, NFPA does not waive any copyright in this document. Use of NFPA documents for regulatory purposes must be accepted by reference. The term "accepted by reference" means that only the title, edition, and publication information are cited. Deletions, additions and changes requested by the assuming authority must be noted separately. To help the NFPA track the use of its documents, agencies adopting NFPA standards must notify the NFPA (Attn: Secretary, Standards Council) in writing of such use. For technical assistance or questions about accepting NFPA documents, contact NFPA at the address listed below. For More Information Any questions or other communications regarding NFPA documents and any requests for information about the procedures governing the process of developing NFPA codes and standards, including information about procedures for requesting authoritative interpretations, proposing interim amendments. NFPA during regular review cycles must be submitted to NFPA Headquarters, addressed to: NFPA Headquarters Attn: Secretary, Standards Council 1 Batterymarch Park P.O. PO Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101[Email protected]

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

Original document title: NFPA 72® National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code® 2013 Edition

Title in Spanish: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code NFPA 72® 2013 Edition

Translation and layout by: Languages around the world (expert translation)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Technical Review: Ing. Yosti Méndez Sales Manager XTRALIS Latin America NFPA 72® Seminars for Teachers in Spanish

NFPA is not responsible for the accuracy or correctness of this Spanish translation. In case of conflict between the English and Spanish versions, the English language will prevail.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NFPA® 72

National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 2013 This edition of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, was prepared by the Technical Committees on Fundamentals of Fire Alarm and Signaling Systems, Testing and Maintenance of Systems, Alarm Devices, and signaling, initiating devices for fire alarm and signaling systems, notification devices for fire alarm and signaling systems, fire alarm and signaling systems for protected premises, emergency communication systems, fire station alarm and signaling systems monitoring, public emergency communication systems, and single and multiple station alarm and residential fire alarm systems, issued by the Technical Correlation Committee on Signaling Systems for the Protection of Life and Property, and implemented by the NFPA in its Association The Reunion Technique June held June 11-14, 2012 in Las Vegas, NV. It was issued by the Standards Council on August 9, 2012, effective August 29, 2012, and replaces all previous editions. On August 9, 2012, five preliminary interim amendments (TIAs) were issued, identified by boxed notes in the appropriate sections of the document. For more information on interim amendments, see Section 5 of the NFPA Rules for Governance Committee Projects, available at: http://www.nfpa. org/assets/files/PDF/CodesStandards/TIAErrataFI/TIARegs.pdf.

Origin and Evolution of NFPA 72 The development of NFPA signaling standards dates back to 1898 with the formation of the Thermoelectric Fire Alarm Committee. The 1905 edition of NBFU 71A, National Council of Fire Underwriters Standards and Requirements for the Construction, Installation and Use of Signaling Systems Used in the Transmission of Signals Affecting Fire Risk, is recommended as prescribed by the National Fire Protection Association. and related documents from 1903 are among the first signaling standards published in conjunction with the National Fire Protection Association. Subsequent standards to earlier standards were consolidated into the National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72. The first edition of the National Fire Alarm Code, published in 1993, was a consolidation of the 1989 edition of NFPA 71. Installation, Maintenance, and Use signaling equipment for the headquarters service; the 1990 edition of NFPA 72, Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Guard Signal Systems; the 1990 edition of NFPA 72E, Automatic Fire Detectors; the 1989 edition of NFPA 72G, Guide for Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Notification Devices for Protective Signaling Systems; the 1988 edition of NFPA 72H, Guide to Test Procedures for Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, and Signaling Systems for Proprietary Protection; and the 1989 edition of NFPA 74, Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Home Fire Alarm Equipment. Many of the requirements in these standards were identical or very similar. Recommendations extracted from the guides (NFPA 72G and NFPA 72H standards) became mandatory requirements. The 1996 edition of NFPA 72 included several technical changes that addressed topics such as the Americans with Disabilities Act, software testing, fire safety models, and communications. The 1999 edition represented a major change in the Code's content and organization. Chapters have been reorganized for ease of use by users and to provide a logical structure. A new chapter on public fire reporting has been added and many technical revisions have been made. Appendix B (formerly Appendix B) has also been updated for ease of use, several irrelevant terms have been removed, and Chapter 3 has been reorganized to allow for a more logical approach. The 2002 edition reflected a major editorial revision of the Code to comply with the latest edition of the NFPA Technical Committee Documents Manual of Style. These revisions included the addition of three administrative chapters to the beginning of the Code: "Governance", "Referenced Publications" and "Definitions". The administrative chapters are preceded by eight technical chapters in the same order as in the 1999 edition. Other editorial revisions included a splitting of multiple requirements paragraphs into individual numbered paragraphs for each requirement, a reduction in the use of exceptions, and the use of section headings and their subdivisions and a reorganization to limit paragraph numbering to six digits. The 2002 edition included a number of technical revisions throughout the Code. These included a comprehensive review of power supply requirements; a new requirement for damage to fire alarm systems; additional requirements for verification and approval of performance-based detection system designs; review of standards for survival systems in case of fire attack; the implementation of standards for an alternative approach to acoustic signaling; the addition of performance-based design-related requirements for visible signage; Moved maintenance and testing requirements for residential fire alarm systems and single and multi-station alarm systems to Maintenance and Testing chapter; and revisions to restore the standards already established for residential fire alarm devices from the 1996 edition of the Code. The 2007 edition featured several technical modifications, many of which were incorporated to accommodate new technology. NFPA 72, NFPA, and the National Fire Protection Association are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts 02169. Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA Not allowed for reproduction or networking without license from IHS

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

This edition of NFPA 72 was approved as a United States National Standard on August 29, 2012.

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

and benefit from new research results. Changes have been made to better integrate mass notification systems and other systems with fire alarm systems. In addition, changes were made to several areas of the Code to increase clarity and improve its application. Some of the most significant changes introduced in the 2007 edition relate to fire panel protection, personnel qualifications, heat detector response time, smoke detector spacing, duct smoke detection, detectors with multiple sensor inputs, video image flame and smoke detection, annunciator synchronization, audible annunciators, exit indicators, haptic annunciators, various types of fire alarm systems for premises, protected areas, and systems for improving radio communication with firefighters within a building. The 2007 edition also included significant changes to the residential smoke alarm requirements, including changes to the smoke alarm interconnect requirement for existing homes, changes to the additional smoke alarm requirement for more residential units, modified and large voice commands for this purpose as part of the signal notification for smoke alarms. Changes incorporated into the 2007 edition to improve and clarify code content included those relating to suppression system inputs to the fire detection system, emergency alarm/voice communication systems, interfacing the fire detection system with the elevator systems and obtain the means to show the central station service. In addition, a complete amendment to the Closing Minutes form has been included, along with examples of completed forms. The 2007 edition also included the addition of two new appendices: one to provide guidelines for the design of mass notification systems and another to replace the content of the previous fire service interface design appendices with a service interface standard. of firefighters. The 2010 edition of the Code included a major change in the scope and organization of the document. This was reflected in the new title National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. The expanded scope of the Code included emergency communication systems beyond the traditional scope of fire alarm systems. A new chapter on Emergency Communication Systems (ECS) has been added to include requirements for a variety of systems used to communicate information in various emergency situations. The Emergency Communication Systems (ECS) chapter included new systems such as building mass notification systems, large scale mass notification systems, distributed receiver mass notification systems, enhanced two-way radio communication systems, routing and emergency communication systems. refuge areas. The Emergency Communication Systems (ECS) chapter also includes two systems previously included in the chapter on fire detection systems for protected installations: (inside buildings, fire emergencies) emergency voice/alarm communication systems and emergency services cable (telephone) in buildings from both directions. Two other new chapters have also been added in the 2010 edition: The new Circuits and Pathways chapter contains requirements and information previously covered in the chapters on fundamentals of fire detection systems and the chapter on fire detection systems. This new chapter includes track and circuit performance (class) designations and track survivability designations, as well as general wiring requirements, presented in a format that allows its use for all types of systems specified in the code. The new Emergency Controls and Interfaces chapter contains the requirements and information previously contained in the Fire Alarm Systems for Protected Buildings chapter. In this chapter, the term fire protection function has generally been replaced by the term emergency control function to reflect the potentially wider application beyond pure fire detection systems. This new chapter also includes new provisions for elevators for use by on-site first responders and elevators for controlled occupant evacuation. The 2010 edition has been significantly reorganized to accommodate the new chapters in a logical order, and reserved chapter numbers have been inserted to minimize the possibility of future renumbering. The overall organization has included administration chapters, support chapters, and system chapters, as well as a large number of appendices for your convenience. Significant changes were also incorporated into the 2010 edition to reflect the broader application of the Code to emergency communications systems. This includes changes to the Fundamentals chapter to cover power requirements, signal priorities, signal discrimination, and documentation requirements; Changes to Protected Locations chapter to better accommodate non-fire detection systems in combination systems; Amendments to the chapter on monitoring stations and the chapter on public emergency call systems to allow their use in emergency call communication systems; and amendments to the Testing and Maintenance Chapter to include requirements for inspection, testing and maintenance of bulk messaging systems and enhanced two-way radio communication systems. In addition to the content of the new chapters, the 2010 edition included important technical changes. This included new requirements for signage for the deaf and hard of hearing, new requirements and guidelines for the design, installation and testing of voice communication systems to ensure speech intelligibility, and major changes to the requirements for installing smoke detectors. ceiling applications. , flat and inclined. Changes to the Monitoring Stations chapter in the 2010 edition included the removal of four obsolete transmission technologies that are no longer in effect: active multiplex transmission systems, McCulloh systems, unencrypted direct-connect systems, and private microwave systems . The Other Transmission Technologies subsection has been moved and is now the default subsection for monitoring station communication methods. Changes included in the 2010 edition in the chapter Single and multi-station alarm systems and multi-station residential alarm systems

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72- 2

ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT

72- 3

It contained new provisions related to connecting smoke alarms to wireless technology, new provisions for designating people with hearing loss, and new requirements and guidelines for the placement of smoke alarms and detectors. The 2010 edition included two new guidance appendices, Appendix C on system design and performance and Appendix D on speech intelligibility. Previous editions of this document have been translated into languages other than English, including Spanish. The 2013 edition of the Code builds on the organizational changes introduced in the 2010 edition. A new Chapter 7, “Documentation”, has been added to improve the usability of the document. The chapter provides a central location for all documentation requirements set out in the Code. In some cases, documentation standards are included directly in the new chapter. In other cases, references to the location of documentation requirements contained in other chapters are included. For example, the new chapter provides minimum documentation requirements applicable to all systems covered by the Code, while additional documentation requirements that may apply are found elsewhere in the Code or in any other applicable law, code or standard for reference. The Record of Completion and Inspection, Test and Maintenance forms are included at the end of the chapter and have been completely modified for ease of use, with a basic form for simple systems and supplemental forms for more complex systems. Chapter 10, "Getting Started", has been reorganized for the 2013 edition to provide a more user-friendly flow of application requirements. Also, the requirements for monitoring circuits that were in the previous edition of Chapter 10 have been moved to a more logical location in Chapter 12, "Circuits and Paths". Changes have also been made to extend the applicability of the inspection and testing tables in Chapter 14, "Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance." The visual inspection table has been updated adding new inspection methods for each of the components along with inspection frequency. The Test Method and Test Frequency tables have been combined into a single table so that the test method appears along with the test frequency for each component. The component lists in both tables have been reorganized and aligned to make it easier to find components and devices. The 2013 edition of the Code also includes many technical updates. This includes changes to Chapter 10, “Fundamentals,” which require monitoring station operators and fire detection system service providers to report certain non-operating conditions to the system component authority. Service personnel inspection, testing, and qualification requirements have been updated to better reflect the skill level required for each type of activity. Changes have also been made to Chapter 18, "Notification Appliances", which require documentation of the locations where audible notification appliances must be present, as well as documentation of the audibility levels that must be present. Coverage area requirements for visible notification devices have also been added. Changes were made to Chapter 21, “Emergency Control Function Interfaces” to reference elevator removal requirements when installing sprinklers in elevator shafts. Requirements for occupant evacuation elevators have also been completely revised to align with changes introduced in ASME A.17.1/B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. Changes were made to Chapter 24, “Emergency Communication Systems,” to reflect the use of microphones, the use of visible text and graphical notification devices for primary or supplemental notification, and to update requirements for the emergency command center. Changes have been made to Chapter 26, “Monitoring Station Alarm Systems”, to relate to alarm signal verification, alarm signal content, and signal recovery. These changes were introduced in part to help emergency services better manage problems related to false alarms. Additionally, new definitions for unwanted alerts have been added to more accurately identify the sources of these alerts. Changes were also made to update the communication methods mentioned in Chapter 26. DACT). Changes were made to Chapter 29, "Single and Multi-Station Alarms and Residential Fire Detection Systems," to reflect the connection of sprinkler water flow switches to multi-station alarms and to add new requirements for detector immunity from smoke to common sources of false alarms.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 4

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Technical Correlation Committee on Signaling Systems for the Protection of Persons and Property (SIG-AAC) Robert P. Schifiliti, Präsident R. P. Schifiliti Associates, Inc., MA [SE] Lee F. Richardson, Verwaltungssekretär National Fire Protection Association, MA Douglas M. Aiken , Lakes Region Mutual Fire Aid, NH [U] Representative. International Association of Municipal Signs Andrew G. Berezowski, Honeywell Inc., CT [M] Representative. National Association of Electrical Manufacturers J. Robert Boyer, GE Security, NJ [M] Richard W. Bukowski, US National Institute of Standards and Technology, MD [RT] Merton W. Bunker, Jr., US Department of State, VA [U] John C. Fannin, III, SafePlace Corporation, DE [U] Louis T. Fiore, LT Fiore, Inc., NJ [IM] Representative Bruce Fraser Central Station Alarm Association, Fraser Fire Protection Services, MA [SE] John K. Guhl, Chief California State Fire Department, CA [E] Rep. Internationale Vereinigung der Feuerwehrchefs

Vic Humm, Vic Humm & Associates, TN [SE] Peter A. Larrimer, US Department of Veterans Affairs, PA [U] James M. Mundy, Jr., Asset Protection Associates, Ltd., NY [M] Rep. Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc. Lynn Nielson, City of Henderson, NV [E] Thomas F. Norton, Norel Service Company, Inc., MA [IM] Rep. US Naval Historic Center (Docket VL: 72) Paul E. Patty, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Rodger Reiswig, SimplexGrinnell, FL [M] Tom G. Smith, Cox Systems Technology, OK [IM] Rep. National Association of Electrical Contractors Lawrence J. Wenzel, Hughes Associates, Inc., CT [SE]

Adjunto Jeffrey R. Brooks, Tyco Safety Products, MA [M] (substituto de R. Reiswig) Thomas P. Hammerberg, Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc., GA [M] (substituto de J. M. Mundy, Jr.) Jack McNamara, Bosch Security Systems, NY [M] (Adjunto A.G. Berezowski)

Lawrence J. Shudak, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] (on behalf of P.E. Patty) Frank L. Van Overmeiren, FP&C Consultants, Inc., IN [SE] (on behalf of V. Humm);

no vote

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Art Black, Carmel Fire Department/Carmel Fire Protection Association, CA [E] TC Representative in Supervision of Station Fire Alarm Systems Shane M. Clary, Bay Alarm Company, CA [IM] TC Representative in Basics of Station Alarm Systems Fire Kenneth W Dungan, Risk Technologies, LLC, TN [SE] Rep. CT in Initiating Devices for Fire Alarm Systems Daniel T. Gottuk, Hughes Associates, Inc., MD [SE] Rep. CT in Home Fire Alarm Systems Raymond A. Grill, Arup Fire, DC [SE] Rep. TC for Benachrichtigungsgeräte für Brandmeldesysteme Jeffrey G. Knight, Feuerwehr der Stadt Newton, MA [U] Rep. TC for öffentliche Brandmeldesysteme J. Jeffrey Moore, Hughes Associates, Inc., OH [SE] Rep. TC on Fire Alarm systems in protected premises

Wayne D. Moore, Hughes Associates, Inc., RI [SE] Rep. TC in Emergency Communication Systems Martin H. Reiss, The RJA Group, Inc., MA [SE] Rep. Life Safety Correlation Committee Timothy M. Soverino, Nantucket, MA [U]TC Rep. Fire Alarm System Testing and Maintenance Evan E. Stauffer, Jr., US Department of the Navy, PA TC Rep. Public Service Communications Benjamin B. Aycock, Charlotte-Mecklenburg, NC (Member Emeritus) Dean K. Wilson, Hughes Associates, Inc., PA [SE] (Member Emeritus)

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

COMMITTEE STAFF

72- 5

Fire System Fundamentals Technical Committee (SIG-FUN) (Chapter 1-10) Shane M. Clary, President Bay Alarm Company, CA [IM] Sanford E. Egesdal, Secretary Egesdal Associates PLC, MN [SE] William R Ball , Joint National Committee on Learning and Training, IN [L] Representative of the International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Andrew G. Berezowski, Honeywell Inc., CT [M] Representative of the National Association of Electrical Manufacturers Robert A. Bonifas, Alarm Detection Systems, Inc. ., IL [IM] Rep. Central Station Alarm Association Manuelita E. David, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, CA [I] Daniel G. Decker, Safety Systems, Inc., MI [IM] James Ditaranto, Commercial Electrical Systems, FL [IM] ] Lawrence Esch, Control Engineering and World Safety, IL [E] Representative, Illinois Association of Fire Inspectors David W. Frable, US General Services Administration, IL [U] Daniel J Gauvin, Tyco/SimplexGrinnell, MA [M] David Goodyear, Sen eca College, Canada [SE] Kevin M. Green, Detection Logic Fire Protection, Inc., CA [IM] Jeffrey S. Hancock, Valero Energy Corporation, TX [U] Scott Jacobs, ISC Electronic Systems, Inc., CA [IM ] Jon Kapis, The RJA Group, Inc., CA [SE]

Walter J. Kessler, Jr., Approvals FM, MA [I] Fred M. Leber, Leber/Rubes Incorporated, Canada [SE] Chester S. Maciaszek, Savannah River Nuclear Solutions, LLC, SC [U] Richard A. Malady, 1999; Fire Fighter Sales & Service Company, PA [IM], Rep. Ass. National Fire Equipment Distributors Maurice Marvi, HSB Professional Loss Control, NJ [I] Jack McNamara, Bosch Security Systems, NY [M] James M. Mundy, Jr., Asset Protection Associates, Ltd., NY [M] Rep . Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc. Thomas F. Norton, Norel Service Company, Inc., MA [IM] Rep. United States Naval Historic Center. UU. David J. Stone, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Ed Vaillancourt, E&M International, Inc., NM [M] Rep. Todd W. Warner Fire Suppression Systems Association, Brooks Equipment Company, Inc., NC [M] Rep. Fire Protection Equipment Manufacturers Association William F. Wayman, Jr., Hughes Associates, Inc., MD [SE] Jeffrey D. Zwirn, IDS Research & Development, Inc., NJ [SE]

Alternate Eric J. Apolenis, The RJA Group, Inc., CA [SE] (substitute for J. Kapis) John Craig, Jr., Safety Systems, Inc., MI [IM] (substitute for D.G. Decker) Bob Elliott, FM Permits, MA [I] (Alternate W.J. Kessler, Jr.) Kimberly A. Gruner, Fike Corporation, MO [M] (Alternate E. Vaillancourt) Robert M. Hill, Tapes Fire Protection, MA [M] (Alternate J.M. Mundy, Jr.) Edward Loughney, Southwestern Idaho Electrical JATC, ID [L], (substitute for W.R. Ball) Maria Marks, Siemens Building Technologies, MD [M];

(Substituting for A.G. Berezowski) Carroll L. Quinn, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, TX [I] (Substituting for M.E. David) Lawrence J. Shudak, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT], (Substituting for D.J. Stone) Robert A. Williams, II, 1999; Vector Security Inc., VA [IM] (substitute for R.A. Bonifas) Dennis R. Yanek, Tyco/ADT Security Systems, NJ [M] (substitute for D.J. Gauvin);

Lee F. Richardson, NFPA Liaison Officer This list represents the membership at the time the committee voted on the final text of this issue. There may have been changes in composition since then. The classification code is at the end of the document. This list represents the members at the time the committee voted on the final text of this issue. There may have been changes in composition since then. The classification code is at the end of the document. NOTE: Membership of the Committee does not, in and of itself, constitute an endorsement of the Association or of any document prepared by the Committee on which the member serves. Committee Responsibilities – This committee has primary responsibility for the basic common system documents for signaling systems, including definitions, certification requirements, installation, maintenance, power supply, equipment location, system compatibility and interfaces.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-6

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Technical Committee for Testing and Maintenance of Fire Reporting Systems (GIS-TMS) (Chapter 14, Appendix D and Appendix G) Timothy M. Soverino, Governor Nantucket, MA [U] Rep. International Municipal Signs Association Mark L. Rochholz, Secretary Schirmer Engineering Corporation, IL [I] Brooks H. Baker, III, University of Alabama at Birmingham, AL [U] Rep. American Society of Health Engineers Leonard Belliveau, Jr., Hughes Associates, Inc., RI [SE] Jeffrey R. Brooks, Tyco Safety Products, MA [M] Merton W. Bunker, Jr., USA. US Department of Defense, VA [US. UU.] Robert E. Butchko, Siemens Building Technology, Inc., NJ [M] Louis Chavez, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Charles M. Cope, XL Global Asset Protection Services, NC [I] Scott D. Corrin , Univ of California-Riverside, CA [U] Scott R. Edwards, Gentex Corporation, MI [M] Rep. National Association of Electrical Manufacturers Peter C. Harrod, The RJA Group, Inc., MA [SE] Herbert B. Hurst, Jr., Savannah River Nuclear Solutions, LLC, SC [U] Jame s B. Jackson, IBEW Local 99 JATC , RI [L] Rep. International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers William E. Johannsen, AFA Protective Systems, Inc., FL [IM] Robert H. Kelly, Fire Protection Equipment Company Inc., MI [IM] J. David Kerr, Plano Fire Department, TX E ] Representative . NFPA-Feuerwehrabteilung

David E. Kipley, AREVA NP, Inc., IL [U] Rep. Edison Electric Institute Chuck Koval, US General Services Administration. UU., WA [U] Peter A. Larrimer, US Department of Veterans Affairs. UU., PA [U] Joseph B. McCullough, Western Technical Services, Inc., CO [IM] James Murphy, Vector Security Inc., PA [IM] Rep. Central Station Alarm Association John E. Nelligan, National Fire and Security, Inc., MA [IM] Michael J Reeser, Santa Rosa Fire Equipment Service Inc., CA [M] Rep. California Automatic Fire Alarm Association Inc. James R. Schifiliti, Fire Safety Consultants, Inc., IL [SE] George E. Seymour, Total Safety U.S., Inc. , TX [IM] Rep. National association. Derek Shackley Fire Equipment Distributors, Pacific Auxiliary Fire Alarm, CA [M] Rep. Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc. Rick D. Sheets, Brink's Home Security, TX [IM] Rep. National Burglar and Fire Alarm Association Frank L. Van Overmeiren, FP&C Consultants, Inc., IN [SE]

Additions Bill Isemann, Guardian Fire Protection Services LLC, MD [IM] (Added by G.E. Seymour) Jon Kapis, The RJA Group, Inc., CA [SE] (Added by P.C. Harrod) Peter Leszczak, US Department of Affairs, CT [U] (Attachment by P.A. Larrimer) Chester S. Maciaszek, Savannah River Nuclear Solutions, LLC, SC [U] (Attachment by H.B. Hurst, Jr.) Joseph L. Palmieri, Carter Brothers, LLC, MA [M] (added by de D. Shackley) Michael D. Sides, XL Global Asset Protection Services, FL [I] (added by C.M. Cope)

Lee F. Richardson, NFPA Liaison Officer This list represents the membership at the time the committee voted on the final text of this issue. There may have been changes in composition since then. The classification code is at the end of the document. NOTE: Membership of a committee does not, in and of itself, constitute an endorsement of the association or any document developed by the committee to which the member belongs. Committee Responsibilities: This committee has primary responsibility for documents and requirements for proper inspection, testing and maintenance of fire detection and emergency communications systems, interface devices, associated emergency control functions and associated components of signaling systems , both for new and new systems. existing equipment

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Timothy E. Adams, American Society for Healthcare Engineering, IN [U] (contribuição de BH Baker, III) Anthony Bloodworth, Siemens Building Technologies Inc., TX [M] (contribuição de R.E. Butchko) Larry R. Dischert, Tyco/ADT Security Services, Inc., NJ [M] (Anexo de J.R. Brooks) Scott G. Grieb, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, IL [I] (Anexo de M.L. Rochholz) John F. Gudmundson, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., CA [RT] ( Alternativo L. Chavez) Rick Heffernan, SDi, NJ [M] (Alternativo S. R. Edwards) Vic Humm, Vic Humm & Associates, TN [SE] (Alternativo F. L. Van Overmeiren)

COMMITTEE STAFF

72-7

Technical Committee on Fire Alarm System Initiating Devices (SIG-IDS) (Chapter 17 and Appendix B) Kenneth W. Dungan, President Risk Technologies, LLC, TN [SE] Martin H. Reiss, Secretary The RJA Group, Inc. , MA [SE] Chris Marrion, Arup Fire, NY [SE] Samuel M. Miller, BP Exploration (Alaska) Inc., AK [U] Ovid E. Morphew, Jr., Design/Systems Group, TX [IM] Rep Independent National Association of Fire Alarm Dealers. James W. Mottorn, II, Bosch Security Systems, NY [M] Lynn Nielson, Henderson City, NV [E] Daniel J. O'Connor, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, IL [I] Ronald D. Ouimette, Siemens Building Technologies, Inc., NJ [M] Paul E. Patty, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] James C. Roberts, North Carolina Department of Insurance, NC [E] David L. Royse, Potter Electric Signal Company, MO [ M] James R. Schario, Electrical Industry Training Center (IBEW/NECA), MO [L], Rep. International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Michael D. Sides, XL Global Asset Protection Services, FL [I] Mark Swerdin, Zurich North America , NY [I] Lawrence J. Wenzel, Hughes Associates, Inc., Connecticut [SE]

William P. Adams, Apollo Fire Detectors America, GA [M] Rep. National Electrical Manufacturers Association Wayne J. Aho, Xtralis, Inc., MA [M] Mark S. Boone, Dominion Resources Services, VA [U] Rep. Edison Electrical Institute Win Chaiyabhat, Aon Global Risk Consulting, ME [I] John A. Chetelat, Honeywell Life Safety Group, CT [M] Representative John M. Cholin Fire Suppression Systems Association, J. M. Cholin Consultants Inc., NJ [SE] Bruce Elmer, TVA Fire and Life Safety, Inc., MI [U] Rep. The Home Depot Gary P. Fields, The Protectowire Company, Inc., MA [M] Cheryl A. Gagliardi, FM Approvals, MA [I] Robert A Hall, R. A. Hall & Associates, NJ [SE] Robert L. Langer, Amerex Corporation, AL [M] Rep. Norbert W. Makowka, National Association of Fire Equipment Dealers, IL [IM] Rep. National Assn. der Feuerwehrfachhändler --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,`---

congressperson

Mark E. Agar, Fire Equipment Company Inc., MI [IM] (agent N.W. Makowka) Michael B. Baker, Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc., OR [M] (agent L.L. Leimer) Thomas C. Brown, The RJA Group , Inc., MD [SE] (agent of M.H. Reiss) Michael Earl Dillon, Dillon Consulting Engineers, Inc., CA [SE] (agent of R.A. Hall) Scott M. Golly, Hughes Associates, Inc., MD SE] ( L.J. Wenzel Alternate) John A. Guetzke, Guetzke & Associates, Inc., WI [IM] (O.E. Morphew, Jr. Alternate) Michael A. Henke, Potter Electric Signal Company, MO [M] (D. L. Royse Alternate); Thomas S Lentz, Aon Risk Services, Inc., IL [I] (Deputy W. Chaiyabhat);

Noura Milardo, FM Global, MA [I] (substitute for C.A. Gagliardi) John L. Parssinen, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] (substitute for P.E. Patty) Richard S. Pawlish, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, IL [I] substitute by DJ O'Connor) Sean Pisoni, TVA Fire and Life Safety, Inc., WA [U] (Alternate B. Elmer) Brian E. Swanick, Siemens Building Technologies Inc., NJ [M] Alternate R. D. Ouimette) Jerry Trotter,; City of Henderson, NV [E] (alternate of L. Nielson) Fred J. Wenzel, Jr., XL Global Asset Protection Services, TX [I] (alternate of M.D. Sides) Michael Yakine, Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.; ; , MA [M] (alternative for J. A. Chetelat)

Lee F. Richardson, NFPA Liaison Officer This list reflects the members participating at the time the committee voted on the final text of this edition. There may have been changes in composition since then. The qualification guide is provided at the end of this document. NOTE: Membership of a committee does not, in and of itself, constitute an endorsement of the association or any document developed by the committee to which the member belongs. Committee Responsibilities: This committee has primary responsibility for documents and requirements for proper inspection, testing and maintenance of fire detection and emergency communications systems, interface devices, associated emergency control functions and associated components of signaling systems , both for new and new systems. existing equipment

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 8

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Notification Apparatus Technical Committee for Fire Alarm Systems (SIG-NAS) (Kapitel 18 and Anhang E) Raymond A. Grill, Präsident Arup Fire, DC [SE] David O. Lowrey, Sekretär City of Boulder Fire Rescue, CO [E] Joe Achak, Fire Sentry Corporation, CA [M] Fire Suppression Systems Association Representative David E. Becker, Fire Equipment Services Company, KY [IM] Rep. National Assn. Robert F. Bitter fire equipment distributors, Honeywell Inc., MO [M] Thomas Carrie, Jr., Schirmer Engineering Corporation, IL [I] Daniel M. Grosch, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Jeffrey M. Klein, System Sensor, IL [M] Rep. Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc. Neal W. Krantz, Krantz Systems & Associates, LLC, MI [IM] Rep. NFPA Industrial Fire Protection Section

Warren E. Olsen, Fire Safety Consultants, Inc., IL [E] Representante da Associação de Inspetores de Incêndios de Illinois Maurice M. Pilette, Mechanical Designs Ltd., MA [SE] Jack Poole, Poole Fire Protection, Inc., KS [SE] Sam P. Salwan, Environmental Systems Design, Inc., IL [SE] Robert P. Schifiliti, R. P. Schifiliti Associates, Inc., MA [SE] Daniel L. Seibel, Wolverine Fire Protection Company, MI [IM] Morris L. Stoops, GE Security, KS [M] Paul R. Strelecki, Siemens Building Technologies, Inc., NJ [M] Thomas C. Williams, Safety Systems, Inc., MI [IM]

Doug Kline, Nowak Supply Fire Systems, IN [M] (Suplente de J. Achak) Michael J. Knoras, Jr., Schirmer Engineering Corporation, GA [I] (Suplente de T. Carrie, Jr.) David O. Lowrey, Bombardeiros da cidade de Boulder, CO [E] James Mongeau, Space Age Electronics, Inc., MA [M] (Nachtrag von J. M. Klein)

Alan D. Moors, Siemens Building Technologies, Inc., NJ [M] (Suplente de P. R. Strelecki) David Newhouse, Gentex Corporation, MI [M] (Suplente de NEMA Rep.) Robert M. Pikula, Reliable Fire Equipment Company, IL [IM] (Suplente de D. E. Becker)

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

congressperson

COMMITTEE STAFF

72- 9

Protected Facilities Fire Systems Technical Committee (SIG-PRO) (Chapters 12, 21, 23 and Anhang C) J. Jeffrey Moore, President Hughes Associates, Inc., OH [SE] Scott Barrett, World Electronics, Inc., FL [M] James G. Bisker, US-Energieministerium, DC [U] David J. Burkhart, Code Consultants, Inc., MO [SE] Anthony J. Capowski, Tyco/SimplexGrinnell, MA [M] Harry M Corson, IV , Siemens Fire Safety, NJ [M] John Craig, Jr., Safety Systems, Inc., MI [IM] Paul F. Crowley, FM Approvals, MA [I] Keith W. Dix, West Metro Fire Department, CO [E ] Joshua W. Elvove, US General Services Administration, CO [U] Thomas P. Hammerberg, Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc., GA [M] Scott D. Harris, AFA Protective Systems, Inc., NY [ IM] Mark D Hayes, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, TX [I] Daniel J. Horon, CADgraphics, Incorporated, MN [M] Vic Humm, Vic Humm & Associates, TN [SE] Jim R. Kern, Kern Service Technicians, TN [ SE] Thomas E. Kuhta, Willis Corporation, NJ [I] Peter Leszczak, USA - Veteranenministerium, CT [U] Fletcher MacGregor, Marsh USA Inc., MI [I]

Scott T. Martorano, The Viking Corporation, MI [M] Rep. National Fire Sprinklers Association Jebediah J. Novak, Cedar Rapids Electrical JATC, IA [L] Rep. International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers John R. Olenick, Vector Security Inc., MD [IM] Rep. Central Station Alarm Association Harris M. Oliff, Security and Fire Enterprises, Inc., CA [IM] Rep. California Automatic Fire Alarm Association Inc. Kurt A. Ruchala, FIREPRO Incorporated, MA [SE] Yogesh B Shah, Honeywell Life Safety/Notifier, CT [M] Representante da Associação de Sistemas de Supressão de Incêndio Lawrence J. Shudak, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Ralph E. Transue, The RJA Group, Inc., IL [SE] Bogue M Waller, Nash Lipsey Burch, LLC, TN [U] Representante da Sociedade Americana de Engenharia de Saúde Fred J. Wenzel, Jr., XL Global Asset Protection Services, TX [I] Carl F. Willms, Fire Security Technologies, Inc., Nova Jersey [SE]

James F. Barth, Huntington, VT [SE] (KA Ruchala Representative) Shane M. Clary, Bay Alarm Company, CA [IM] (HM Oliff Representative) Charles M. Cope, XL Global Asset Protection Services, NC [I] ( substitute for F.J. Wenzel, Jr.) Diane P. Doliber, Wilmington, NC [SE] (substitute for J.R. Kern) Gary Girouard, Tyco/SimplexGrinnell, MA [M] (substitute for A.J. Capowski) Jacob P. Hemke, Code Consultants, Inc., MO [SE] (substituting D.J. Burkhart) Walter J. Kessler, Jr., FM Approvals, MA [I] (substituting P.F. Crowley) Neil P. Lakomiak, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] (Deputy L.J. Shudak ) Peter A. Larrimer, Department of Veterans Affairs two US. UU., Pennsylvania [U] (Rep. P. Leszczak)

Timothy John Attorney, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, CA [I] (alternate to M.D. Hayes) David J. LeBlanc, The RJA Group, Inc., MA [SE] (alternate to R.E. Transue) Michael D. Mann, American Professional Services, Inc ., OK [IM] (agente de J.R. Olenick) Wayne D. Moore, Hughes Associates, Inc., RI [SE] (agente de J.J. Moore) Joseph Ranaudo, AFA Protective Systems, Inc., NY [IM] (agente de SD Harris) Scott F. Ruland, Fike Corporation, MO [M] (Deputy YB Shah) Donald Struck, Siemens Fire Safety, NJ [M] (Deputy HM Corson, IV) Jeffery G. Van Keuren, GE Security, FL [M ] (Substituindo T. P. Hammerberg) Frank L. Van Overmeiren, FP&C Consultants, Inc., IN [SE] (Substituindo V. Humm) Sem voto

Benjamin B. Aycock, Charlotte-Mecklenburg, NC, (Member Emeritus) Lee F. Richardson, NFPA Liaison This list represents the membership as of the date the committee voted on the final text of this edition. There may have been changes in composition since then. The classification code is at the end of the document. NOTE: Membership of the Committee does not, in and of itself, constitute an endorsement of the Association or of any document prepared by the Committee on which the member serves. Committee Responsibilities: This committee has primary responsibility for documents related to the installation and operation of signaling systems for protected facilities, including their connection to activation devices, signaling devices and other devices related to the control of buildings within buildings.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

congressperson

72-10

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Emergency Communications Systems Technical Committee (SIG-ECS) (Chapter 24) Wayne D. Moore, President Hughes Associates, Inc., RI [SE] Steven D. Admire, Communications Design, TX [IM] Christopher Afuwah, Corps New York City Fire Department, NY [E] Oded Aron, Port Authority of New York and New Jersey, NJ [U] Peter Binkley, Evax Systems, Inc., CT [M] Daniel Bridgett, US Department of the Navy. UU., CA [E] Whit Chaiyabhat, Georgetown University , MD [U] Thomas M. Chambers, Vector Security Inc., PA [IM] Rep. Central Station Alarm Association Joe L. Collins, Flughafen Internationaler Dallas/Fort Worth, TX [U] Joseph Dafin, US General Services Administration. UU., DC [U] John Dorney, Acoustic Technology, Inc., MA [M] John C. Fannin, 2010, III, SafePlace Corporation, DE [U] Bruce Fraser, Fraser Fire Protection Services, MA [SE] John S Fannin, 2010, III Fuoto, AMEC Earth and Environmental, Inc., VA [SE] Charles E. Hahl, Protection Engineering Group, Inc., VA [SE] Raymond N. Hansen, US Department of the Air Force. UU. , FL [U] Waymon Jackson, University of Texas at Austin, TX [U]

Scott Lacey, Lacey Fire Protection Engineering, AR [SE] Robert J. Libby, The RJA Group, Inc., MD [SE] Derek D. Mathews, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Daniel L. Meneguin, House of Representatives Wisconsin, WI [E] James Mongeau, Space Age Electronics, Inc., MA [M] Rep. Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc. Scott Pelletreau, Fire Safety Consultants Inc., IL [E] Rep. Illinois Association of Fire Inspectors Joseph Ranaudo, AFA Protective Systems, Inc., NY [IM] Rodger Reiswig, SimplexGrinnell, FL [M] Sean C. Remke, FP&C Consultants, Inc., IN [SE] Jason R. Scott, US Army Garrison, AL[U] James P Simpson, Joint National Learning and Training Committee, MN[L]Rep. International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Andrew B. Woodward, Arup, MA [SE]

June A. Ballew, Cooper Notification, NJ [M] (Alternative to J. Mongeau) Laura E. Doyle, US General Services Administration, DC [U] (Alternative to J. Dafin) Jeffry T. Dudley, Department of Aeronautics Force, VA [U] (Work of R. N. Hansen) Raymond A. Grill, Arup Four, DC [SE] (Work of A. B. Woodward) J. Jeffrey Moore, Hughes Associates, Inc., OH [SE] (Employed by W. D. Moore ) Denise L. Pappas, Valcom, Inc., VA [M] (NEMA Alternate Representative)

Thomas J. Parrish, Telgian, AZ [IM] (Alternate for SD Admire) Todd C. Shearer, Tyco/SimplexGrinnell, NJ [M] (Alternate for R. Reiswig) Joseph M. Swiderski, III, The RJA Group Inc. IL [SE] (representing R.J. Libby) Jack Taddeo, New York City Fire Department, NY [E] (representing C. Afuwah) Larry D. Watson, American Professional Services, Inc., OK [IM] (representing T.M. Cameras). )

Lee F. Richardson, NFPA Liaison Officer This list reflects the members participating at the time the committee voted on the final text of this edition. There may have been changes in composition since then. The qualification guide is provided at the end of this document. NOTE: Membership of a committee does not, in and of itself, constitute an endorsement of the association or any document developed by the committee to which the member belongs. Committee Responsibilities: This committee is primarily responsible for documents related to risk analysis, design, application, installation and performance of emergency communication systems and their components. Communication systems for public emergency services covered by NFPA 1221 are not within the scope of this committee, except when connected to two-way repeaters installed in the building and when trouble and supervisory signals must be monitored from the alarm system. building.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

congressperson

COMMITTEE STAFF

72-11

Comitê Técnico de Sistemas de Alarme de Incêndio para Estações de Supervisão (SIG-SSS) (Capítulo 26) Art Black, Presidente Carmel Fire Dept/Carmel Fire Prot Assoc., CA [E] Geoffrey Aus, Menlo Park Fire Protection District, CA [E] Robert Bitton , Supreme Security Systems, Inc., NJ [IM] Representante da Central Station Alarm Association Edward R. Bonifas, Alarm Detection Systems, Inc., IL [IM] J. Robert Boyer, GE Security, NJ [M] Rep. National Electrical Manufacturers Associação Thomas C. Brown, The RJA Group, Inc., MD [SE] Robert F. Buckley, Signal Communications Corporation, MA [M] Paul M. Carroll, Central Signal Corporation, MA [M] Rep. Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc. Scot Colby, Bayou Security Systems, Inc., LA [IM] Rep. National Burglar & Fire Alarm Association E. Tom Duckworth, Insurance Services Office, Inc., TX [I] Patrick M. Egan, Wählen Sie Sicherheit, PA [IM] Bob Elliott, FM-Zulassungen, MA [I]

Louis T. Fiore, L. T. Fiore, Inc., NJ [SE] Harvey M. Fox, Keltron Corporation, MA [M] Robert Gillespie, Jr., Departamento de Bomberos de Thompsonville, CT [U] Rep. Asociación Internacional de Señales Municipales Richard Kleinman, AFA Protection Systems Inc., NY [IM] Gene Monaco, Monaco Enterprises, Inc., WA [M] Anthony Mucci, Tyco/ADT Security Services, Inc., FL [M] Donald C. Pannell, Ciudad de Memphis , TN [E] Isaac I. Papier, Honeywell, Inc., IL [M] Jeffrey R. Roberts, XL Global Asset Protection Services, MS [I] Steven A. Schmit, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Robert V Scholes, Fireman's Fund Insurance Company, CA [I] James H. Smith, James H. Smith Consulting, Inc., TX [SE] Sean P. Titus, Fike Corporation, MO [M] Rep. Fire Suppression Systems Association Suplentes

Joe Achak, Fire Sentry Corporation, CA [M], (agente de S.P. Titus) David A. Blanken, Keltron Corporation, MA [M] (agente de H.M. Fox) James S. Crews, Fireman's Fund Insurance Company, GA [I] (Alternativa para R.V. Scholes) Cheryl A. Gagliardi, FM Approvals, MA [I] (Alternativa para B. Elliott) Gordon G. Hope, Jr., Honeywell, Inc., NY [M] (Alternativa para I.I. Paper) Richard A .Mahnke, The RJA Group, Inc., IL [SE] (substituto de TC Brown) Derek D. Mathews, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., .

IL [RT], (Deputy for S.A. Schmit) Charlie G. McDaniel, XL Global Asset Protection Services, WV[I], (Deputy for J.R. Roberts) Robert Mitchell, Bay Alarm Company, CA [IM] (Deputy for R. Bitton ) Rodger Reiswig, SimplexGrinnell, FL [M] (replacing A. Mucci) Frank J. Tokarz, Monaco Enterprises, Inc., WA [M] (replacing G. Monaco) Richard E. Vinciguerra, Malden City Fire Department, NH [U ], (replacement for R. Gillespie, Jr.)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Committee Responsibilities: This committee has primary responsibility for documents relating to the installation and operation of signaling systems for protected installations, including their connection to activation devices, signaling devices and other devices related to the control of buildings, within the premises by.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-12

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Public Fire Alarm Systems Technical Committee (GIS-PRS) (Chapter 27) Jeffrey G. Knight, Chairman, City of Newton, MA [U] Representative. International Association of Municipal Signs Douglas M. Aiken, Mutual Fire Aid Lake District, NH [E] R Bruce Allen, RB Allen Company, Inc., NH [IM] William Ambrefe, City of Beverly, MA [E] Robert J Campbell , Braintree, MA [SE] Daniel R Dinwiddie, LW Bills Company, MA [M] Sidney M Earley, TLC Systems, MA [IM] Emerson B Fisher, King-Fisher Company, IL [M] John K Guhl, Fire Department of the State of California, CA [E] Rep. Paul T Kahle, Code Consultants, Inc. , MO [SE]

Robert E. Lapham, Signal Communications Corporation, MA [M] Robert Malanga, Fire and Risk Engineering, NJ [SE] Rep. Fairmount Fire Company No. 1 Leo F. Martin, Jr., Martin Electrical Code Consultants, MA [SE] Max McLeod, Siemens Building Technologies, Inc., AL [M] Robert E. Myers, Proteção contra incêndios da costa este, VA [IM] Isa Y. Saah, The Protection Engineering Group, PC, VA [SE] Frank J. Tokarz, Mónaco Unternehmen, Inc., WA [M]

Deputado Brendan F. Donnelly, Code Consultants, Inc., MO [SE] (alternando P.T. Kahle) Charles E. Hahl, The Protection Engineering Group, Inc., VA [SE] (alternando I.Y. Saah);

Nathaniel M. Johnson, City of Laconia, NH Fire Department [U] (substituindo J.G. Knight) Gene Monaco, Monaco Enterprises, Inc., WA [M] (substituindo F.J. Tokarz);

Lee F. Richardson, NFPA Liaison Officer This list represents the membership at the time the committee voted on the final text of this issue. There may have been changes in composition since then. The classification code is at the end of the document. NOTE: Membership of the Committee does not, in and of itself, constitute an endorsement of the Association or of any document prepared by the Committee on which the member serves. Committee Responsibilities: This committee has primary responsibility for documenting the proper configuration, performance, installation, and operation of public emergency response systems. The scope of the Committee is limited to systems using parallel and serial telephones, encrypted or voice coded networks using landline and/or radio frequency (RF) technologies to provide a combination of emergency call services, whether manual or auxiliary. Voice alarm notifications over the public switched telephone network using the universal emergency number 9-1-1 or any other reasonable number to dial are beyond the scope of this committee.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

COMMITTEE STAFF

72-13

Single and Multiple Station Alarms and Residential Fire Alarm Systems (SIG-HOU) Technical Committee (Chapter 29) Daniel T. Gottuk, Präsident Hughes Associates, Inc., MD [SE] Bradley B. Barnes, GE Security , ODER [M] Representative of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association H. Wayne Boyd, US Safety and Engineering Corporation, CA [M], Representative of the California Automatic Fire Alarm Association Inc. Dan Cantrell, Brink's Home Security, TX [IM] Melissa K. Chernovsky , Exponent, Inc., MD [SE] David E. Christian, Gentex Corporation, MI [M] Rep. Automatic Fire Alarm Association, Inc. Thomas G. Cleary, US National Institute of Fire Alarm Technology and Standards, MD [RT] James J Convery, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, NY [I] Laurence J. Dallaire, Code Consultants, Inc., NY [SE] Darrell Dantzler , US Department of State, MD [U] Edward M. Fraczkowski, EBL Engineers, LLC, MD [SE] Robert B. Fuller, Fire Code Analysts, Inc., CA [C] John Knecht, Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc ., IL [RT]

Anna Kryagin, Port Authority of New York and New Jersey, NJ [U] Joseph L. Lynch, III, Director of Marketing City of Irondale, AL [E] Jeffrey L. Okun, Nuko Security, Inc., LA [IM] Stephen M Olenick, 2010, Combustion Science & Engineering, Inc., MD [SE] Steven Orlowski, National Association of Home Builders, DC [U] John L. Parssinen, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] Forrest J. Pecht, US Environmental Protection Agency. Access Council, DC [C] Larry Ratzlaff, Kidde Safety, IL [M] Michael L. Savage, Sr., Middle Department Inspection Agency, Inc., MD [E] Richard M. Simpson, Vector Security Inc., PA [ IM ] Rep - Central alarm association

Deputy Oded Aron, Port Authority of New York and New Jersey, NJ [U] (Alternate for A. Kryagin) Edward J. Babczak, US Department of State, MD [U] (Alternate for D. Dantzler) Lawrence Brown, Association National of Home Builders, DC [U] (on behalf of S. Orlowski) Manuelita E. David, Schirmer Engineering Corporation, CA [I] (on behalf of J.J. Convery) Wendy B. Gifford, United Technologies Corporation (UTC), IL [M] (Repute L. Ratzlaff) Jeffery P. McBride, EBL Engineers, LLC, MD [SE] (Repute E. M. Fraczkowski)

Vincent B. Mori, BRK Brands, Inc./First Alert, IL [M] (Anexo de B.B. Barnes) Paul E. Patty, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., IL [RT] (Anexo de J.L. Parssinen) Rick D. Sheets, Brink's Home Security, TX [IM] (sucessor de D. Cantrell) Samuel T. (Ted) Stoler, Vector Security Inc., PA [IM] (sucessor de R.M. Simpson) Jason A. Sutula, Combustion Science & Engineering, Inc., MD [SE] (Suplente de S.M. Olenick)

Non-voting Arthur S. Lee, US Consumer Product Safety Commission, MD [C] Lee F. Richardson, NFPA Liaison Officer This list represents the members at the time the committee voted on the final text of this issue . There may have been changes in composition since then. The classification code is at the end of the document. NOTE: Membership of the Committee does not, in and of itself, constitute an endorsement of the Association or of any document prepared by the Committee on which the member serves. Committee Responsibilities: This committee is primarily responsible for documents relating to the performance, installation, operation and use of single and multi-station alarms and residential fire alarm systems.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-14

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Chapter 1 Administration ................................................... 72- 16 1.1 Scope of application ..................................... .. ........ . ........ 72- 16 1.2 Purpose ........................ .. ..... ...... ..................................... 72 − 16 1.3 Application ... . .................................................. ........... .. .. ............. 72− 16 1.4 Retroactive effect ..................... .... .. . .. ............ 72− 16 1.5 Equivalence ............. . .... ..... ..................................................... 72- 17 1.7 Requirements for Adoption of the Code ..... 72- 17 Chapter 2 Reference publications ................................... 2.1 In general ..... ............................................................ . ... .. ...... 2.2 NFPA publications ..................................... .... ... ... 2.3 Other publications ..................................... . ................ .2.4 References on the fragments in the mandatory sections ............... ... ....... ....... ..... ..

72– 17 72– 17 72– 17 72– 17

Chapter 3 Definitions ..................................... ...... ...... ..... 3.1 General .................................. ...... . .. ................... 3.2 Official NFPA Definitions ..................... . . .. ...... 3.3 General definitions of terms ..................................... .. . . ...

72– 18 72– 18 72– 18 72– 19

72– 77 72– 77 72– 77 72– 78

Chapter 11 Reserved ................................................................ . . . ....... Chapter 12 Circuits and Paths .................................... ... . .. 12.1 Application .................................. . ... .... 12.2 General ..................... ..... ..... .. . . ............ 12.3 Road Class Designations ............... ... .. .. ... .. 12.4 Footprint Survival . ..................................... ... ...... 12.5 Common track designations ........................

72–78

10,19 10,20 10,21 10,22

Reserved ................................................. . .... ... ...... 72 − 36

Chapter 5

Reserved ................................................. . .... ... ...... 72 − 36

Chapter 6

Reserved ................................................. . .... ... ...... 72 − 36

Chapter 7 Reserved ................................................... .. 72 − 36 7.1 Application (SIG -FUN) ........................................... . ... . ........... 72- 36 7.2 Minimum required documentation (SIG-FUN) ...... 72- 36 7.3 Design documentation (layout) ........ .. . . .. 72− 37 7.4 Workshop drawings (installation documentation) (SIG-FUN) ............................ .. .. .. . .. .................. 72− 37 7.5 Completion documentation .......... . ................... 72- 38 7.6 Inspection, test and maintenance documentation .... (SIG-TMS) .......... . . .................................................. ........... .. . ............ 72- 39 7.7 Registers, Registers and Registers ............................ . .................................................................. . ............... .. 72- 40 7.8 Forms ............................ . ............... ... .... .......... 72- 38 Chapter 8 Reserved .... ........ ......... ... .... .......... ............ ............ .... 72- 40 Reserved .. ... ....... .......... ........ ............ ......... 72-40

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Chapter 10 Basics ..................................................... ................ ...... ........ .... ... 72-40 10.1. Application ................................................. ............ 72- 40 10.2 Purpose ..................... . ............... 72− 40 10.3 Equipment ............... . .................................................. ........... . .......... ... 72− 40 10.4 Installation and structure ............................ .... .. ....... 72− 69 10.5 Qualification of personnel ............................ ..... ... . 72- 69 10.6 Power supplies .................................. . .... ..... .. 72− 70 10.7 Signal priority ............... .. .. . .......... .. 72− 74 10.8 Status recognition and signaling ......... 72− 74 10.9 Reactions. .................................................. ........... .. .. ............ ............ 72− 74 10.10 Identification marks .. .. .............. .................................. .. ................ ... 72− 74 10.11 Priority signals from emergency communication systems ... (ECS) .... ......... .............. .................. 72- 74 10.12 Alarm signals .. ..... .. .. ...... ..................................................... ..... .. ........ .. 72- 75 10.13 Deactivation of a fire alarm message ............................. ..... .... .................................................. 72− 75 10.14 Signal supervision .. . . ..... ..................................... ... 72− 75 10.15 Error messages ..................................... ....... . ..... .. 72- 76 10.16 Status indicators of the emergency control functions .............. .. ... ........... 72- 76 10.17 Notification Appliance Circuits and Control Circuits ............... . ..... ............... 72− 76 10.18 Announcements and Announcement Zones .. ... . ...........................72-77

Chapter 13 Reserved ..................................... ... .. 72- 80 Chapter 14 Inspection, testing and maintenance ............ 72- 80 14.1 Application ..................... .. .. ..... .. ........................... 72-80 14.2 General .. .............. .. .................................................. .. .. ......... ..................... ....... 72− 80 14.3 Inspection .... .... ........ ... .. ........................ .... 72− 85 14.4 Check . .................................................. ........... .................................................. 72- 85 14.5 Maintenance ....................... . ................................ 72− 104 14.6 Recordings ...... . ........... ........... .................................... ....... .... . 72- 105 Chapter 15 Reserved ............................................ .... . .. .... 72- 105 Chapter 16 Reserved .......... .................. ..... ..... . ... .................. 72- 105 Chapter 17 Boot Devices .............. .. .... ...... .. .... ............ 17.1 Application....... ....... .... ...... .. .. ......................... 17.2 Purpose ..... ... .... ..... . . ..................................................... .... ........ .. ............ 17.3 Performance Based Design ............... ..... ..... ...... ... 17.4 General requirements ..................................... ............. ......... .. .... 17.5 Requirements for detectors and smoke and heat detectors. .................................................. ............ 17.6 Detector Heat detector Fire detector 17.7 Smoke detector Fire detector 17.8 Radiant energy detector Fire detector ............. . .. ... ..... ....... 17.9 Combined, multi-criteria and multi-criteria multi-sensor detectors ............... 17.10 Gas detection ...... ............... .................... .... . ...... 17.11 Other fire detectors ................................... 17.12 Detection of the operation of other automatic systems extinguishing .................................... 17.13 Detection of the operation of other automatic extinguishing systems ... .... ........ ............. 17.14 Manually Operated Alarm Releasing Devices ......... ........ .. ......... ....... 17.15 Electronic control device for fire extinguishers ..... .......... ..... ..... .. ..................................................... 17.16 Heartbeat Triggers .. Chapter 18 D Notification devices .......... 18.1 Application ..................... .... . ......................................... 18.2 Purpose.. . .................................................. ........... .. .. ........... 18.3 General............... ....... .. ......... . . .................. 18.4 Acoustic characteristics ..................... ..... .. .... ..................... 18.5 Visible functions - public mode ............ . ......... 18.6 Visible features ................................................... ...................... . ......... . .. 18.7 Additional Visual Signaling Method ............... 18.8 Audible Text Devices ....... ....... .... ... . ..... ................... 18.9 Visible Text Widgets...... ...... ...... ... ............... 18.10 Touch Devices......... ..... ..... ......... ... ..................... 18.11 Standardized Communication Services Interface

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72– 78 72– 78 72– 78 72– 78 72– 79 72– 79

72-18

Chapter 4

Chapter 9

Integrity Monitoring .................................... Documentation and Reporting .... . . ... . ................... Out of service ............... ...... .. ... .. ... Undesired alarms ................................... ...... ... ... ...

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 105 72- 105 72- 106 72- 106 72- 106 72- 106 72- 107 72- 108 72- 115 72- 116 72- 117 72- 117 72- 117 72- 117 72- 117 181- 2 − 2 119 72- 119 72- 119 72- 119 72- 119 72- 122 72- 125 72- 125 72- 125 72- 125 72- 126

COMMITTEE STAFF

72-15

Emergency................................................. ............ 72- 126 Chapter 25 Reserved ..................... ... . ............. 72- 155 Chapter 20 Reserved ............... .......... . ...... 72- 126 Chapter 21 Emergency Control Functions and Interfaces ................................... . ................................ 21.1 Application ............. . ...... ...... . ......................................... ..... 21.2 General .. ...................................... ..... .. .. ... .................. 21.3* Removal of elevators for the fire brigade .......... . ....... .................. 21.4 Interrupting the power supply to lifts . ...... ................................... 21.5 Elevators for firefighters access ............. .......... ...... .. .. ............. ................. ....... ... .... 21.6 Elevators for evacuating occupants ..................................... ......... .............. .... ............... 21.7 Heating, Ventilation and Air Systems Conditioning (HVAC) .. .................. . ............ ......... twenty-one .8 Clearing doors and windows ................... . .................. 21.9 Forced closure of doors ................... .... ......... ..... ........ ...... 21.10 Home screen sound notification systems ............ .......... ........... .. .. ............... ......... . .

72− 126 72− 126 72− 126 72− 127 72− 128 72− 128 72− 129 72− 129 72− 130 72− 130 72− 130

Chapter 22 Reserved ................................................... . . ..... .. 72− 130 Chapter 23 Fire Alarm Systems for Protected Premises ..................................... ...... ..... ..... .... 72 − 130 23.1 Application............ .... ..... .... .. .................. 72− 130 23.2 General ............ ............. ............................................................ ...... ....... 72- 131 23.3 System properties. ... .... ............. 72− 131 23.4 System Performance and Integrity. ... .... ............. 72 − 131 23.5 Performance of Initiating Device Circuits (IDC) ............... . 72 − 132 23.6 Performance of Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) ........................ .... .. ...... .... ....... 72− 132 23.7 Performance Notification Device Circuits (NACs) ......... 72- 132 23.8 System requirements ..................................... . ............ . ..... 72- 132 23.9 Voice/alarm emergency fire communication in building spaces ................................... .... 72- 137 23.10 V pre-recorded (digital) voice and sound fire alarm systems ......... 72- 137 23.11 Activation of the extinguishing system .. . ..... 72 − 137 23.12 Signaling outside the premises ..... 72 − 137 23.13 Surveillance patrol guard service ... .. 72 − 138 23.14 Signal suppression system (exception message) .. ..................................... . . ... ... 72- 138 23.15 Emergency control functions in protected installations............................ .. .. ..... .. ........... ...... 72− 138 23.16 Special requirements for low-power (wireless) radio systems ......... . .. .................................................................. . ....... 72- 138 Chapter 24 Emergency Communication Systems (ECS) ..................... .. .. .. 24.1 Request .... ........ ..... ... ................... ..... .. ... ........ 24.2 Purpose..... .... ... .................. ..... .. ... ................... ... ... ....... 24.3 Qualities of the Generator ..... .... .. ........................ .............. ....... 24.4-inch EG Emergency Communication Systems . .................... ................ .. .... . 24.5 Two-way emergency call systems in buildings .............................. 24.6 Information, command and control. ...... 24.7 Performance Based Design of Mass Notification Systems .......................... ...

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72− 139 72− 139 72− 139 72− 140 72− 141 72− 150 72− 153 72− 154

Chapter 26 Monitoring station alarm systems ..................................................................... ...... .......... 26.1 Order .................. . ...................................................... 26.2 General....... . .. ... ...... . ................................ 26.3 Central fire alarm systems ............ ..... ........................................... ... ...... .............. ...... ..... 26.4 Building monitoring station systems ........... . ................. ............... .... ............. . ......... . .................................................. ........... .. ................................................ ... ............. .... 26.5 Remote monitoring of fire alarm systems in stations ......................................... ........... ..... 26.6 Communication methods for monitoring station alarm systems ..................... ...... Chapter 27 Public emergency notification systems . ......... .......... ....... 27.1 Application.............. ...... .... . ................................ 27.2 General principles ..................... ......... .... .... .............. 27.3 Operation and maintenance .......... . .... .... 27.4 Communication methods............................ 27.5 Alarm processing devices..... .... ........... 27.6 Alarm Stations............................ . . . ......... 27.7 Public cable system ....................... 27.8 Communication systems (ECS )... ... ..................................... . ...

72- 155 72- 155 72- 155 72- 155 72- 161 72- 161 72- 162 72- 169 72- 169 72- 170 72- 170 72- 171 72- 171 72- 176 72- 179 72- 1

Chapter 28 Reserved................................................................ . ... ..... . .. .... ....... 72− 182 Chapter 29 Single- and Multi-User Detectors and Domestic Fire Alarm Systems ............ .. ... . . ......................................... 29.1 Application .. . .................................................. .. ........ 29.2 Goal .... .................................. . .... ............ 29.3 Basic requirements ....... ..... . ................................ 29.4 Assumptions........ ..... . ..................... .. 29.5 Detection and Notification.... . ............... ................. 29.6 Power supplies............ . ........... .......... 29.7 Device performance ............ ............ . ...... 29.8 Installation ................................... . ....................... ..... .. 29.9 Optional functions ..... ..... .. . ..................... 29.10 Maintenance and Testing ......... ... ... . ............ 29.11 Notes and instructions ......... ... .. ................ .... ......

72− 182 72− 182 72− 182 72− 182 72− 183 72− 183 72− 184 72− 185 72− 187 72− 189 72− 189 72− 189

Anhang A

Explanatory material ......................................................... 72−190

Attachment

Automatic Fire Detector Spacing Design Guide ..... 72-303

appendix C

System design and performance guide ......................................................... .... .... .. .... .... 72-349

Appendix D

Speech intelligibility ................................................... 72- 351

the appendix is

NEMA SB 30, Fire Service Interface and Detectors ....................... 72-363

Anhang F.

NFPA 72 Code Adoption Ordinance Model ......................................... .. . ........ 72−363

Appendix G

Wiring Diagrams and Guide to Testing Fire Alarm Circuits ..................................................... .. ......... ..... ............... 72- 372

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Chapter 19 Reserved .................................. 72-126

72-16

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

NFPA 72®

National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 2013 Edition IMPORTANT NOTICE: This NFPA document is made available for your application, subject to important notices and legal disclaimers. These notices and disclaimers are found in all publications that incorporate this document and can be found under the heading "Important Notices and Disclaimers About NFPA Documents". They can also be obtained from the NFPA or viewed at www.NFPA.org/disclaimers.

NOTE: An asterisk (*) after the number or letter designating a paragraph indicates that explanatory material for that paragraph is to be found in Appendix A. Non-editorial changes are indicated by a vertical line next to the paragraph, table or figure in which the change has been made. These rules have been included to help the reader locate changes made in the previous edition. If one or more entire paragraphs have been removed, this deletion should be indicated by a bullet between the remaining paragraphs (•). Any reference in square brackets [ ] following a section or paragraph identifies material taken from another NFPA document. For the reader's convenience, Chapter 2 lists the full titles and editions of the source documents for the required extracts, and Appendix G lists the full titles and editions of the source documents for the non-mandatory extracts. Extracted text may be edited for consistency and style and may include changes to the inner paragraph and other references as appropriate. All requests for interpretation or modification of the extracted text must be addressed to the technical committee responsible for the source document. A reference in parentheses ( ) following a paragraph indicates the Committee's responsibility for that section or paragraph. Committee acronyms are given a key corresponding to the acronym that appears in committee listings at the front of the document. All information about referenced publications can be found in Chapter 2 and Appendix G.

1.1.2 The provisions of this chapter apply throughout the Code, unless specifically indicated. 1.2* Purpose. 1.2.1 The purpose of this Code is to define the means to activate, transmit, notify and announce signals; performance levels; and the reliability of various types of fire alarm systems, monitoring station alarm systems, public emergency notification systems, fire alert devices, emergency communication systems, and their components. 1.2.2 This Code defines the characteristics associated with such systems and also provides the information necessary to modify or upgrade an existing system to meet the requirements of a particular system classification. 1.2.3 This Code specifies the minimum required performance levels, the level of redundancy and the quality of the installation. However, it does not specify the unique methods by which the above requirements must be met. 1.2.4* This Code should not be construed as requiring a higher level of protection than would be required by applicable fire or building codes. 1.3 Application. 1.3.1 Alarm systems shall be classified as follows: (1) fire alarm systems (a) domestic fire alarm systems (b) protected premises (installations) fire alarm systems (2) alarm systems fire alarm monitoring station (a) central (service) station alarm systems (b) remote control station alarm systems (c) property control station alarm systems. (3) Public emergency notification systems (a) Auxiliary alarm systems - Local power type (b) Auxiliary alarm systems - Bypass type 1.3.2 Emergency communication systems shall be classified as follows: (1) Systems one-way emergency communication systems (a) Mass Notification Systems for Distributed Receivers (b) Emergency Alarm/Fire Communications Systems in Buildings (c) Mass Notification Systems in Buildings (d) Mass Notification Systems in Large Areas (2) Two-way Emergency Communications Systems (a) Emergency Communications Systems in Buildings 1.3. 3 Any direct or implied reference to a specific type of hardware is for clarity and should not be construed as an endorsement of that hardware.

Chapter 1 Administration 1.1 Scope. 1.1.1 NFPA 72 covers the application, installation, location, performance, inspection, testing, and maintenance of fire detection systems, monitoring station alarm systems, public alarm systems, fire warning devices, and communication systems (ECS) and its components.

1.3.4 The purpose and meaning of terms used in this Code are the same as in NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, unless otherwise specifically defined in this document. 1.4 Retroactivity. 1.4.1 Unless expressly stated, this is not intended to

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

PUBLIC REFERENCES The provisions of this document apply to any site, equipment, structure or facility that existed or was authorized for construction or installation prior to the effective date of this document. 1.4.2 In cases where the competent authority determines that the existing situation implies a manifest danger to life or property, the retroactive application of the provisions of this diploma must be allowed. 1.5 Equivalence. 1.5.1 Nothing in this Code will prevent the use of any system, method, device or apparatus of quality, performance, fire resistance, effectiveness, durability and safety equal to or greater than those prescribed in this Code. 1.5.2 Technical documents must be presented to the competent authority only as proof of equivalence. 1.5.3 Equivalent systems, methods, devices or apparatus must be approved. 1.6 Units and Formulas.

72-17

(National Fire Protection Association), 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471 NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers, Ausgabe 2010. NFPA 13, Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems, Ausgabe 2013. NFPA 25, Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Hydraulic Fire Protection Systems, 2011 Edition. NFPA 37, Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines, 2010 Edition. NFPA 70®, National Electrical Code, 2011 Edition NFPA 75, Standard for Fire Protection of Electronic Computer Data Processing Equipment, Ausgabe 2013. NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems, Ausgabe 2012 NFPA 101®, Life Safety Code, Ausgabe 2012. NFPA 110 , Standard for Standby and Emergency Power Systems, Ausgabe 2013 .

1.6.1 The units of measurement contained in this Code are expressed in units commonly used in the United States (inch-pounds). 1.6.2 The International System of Units (SI), when included, is shown in parentheses after inch-pound units. 1.6.3 When both systems of units are presented, either system must be accepted to meet the requirements of this Code. 1.6.4 When both systems of units are shown, users of this code must use a variety of units consistently and not change units.

NFPA 111, Standard for Standby and Emergency Systems for Stored Electrical Energy, 2013 Edition. NFPA 170, Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols, 2012 Edition. NFPA 601, Standard for Safe Fire Loss Prevention Services , 2010 Edition. NFPA 720, Standard for Installing Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning Devices. NFPA 1221, Standard for Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Communication Systems for Emergency Services, 2013 Edition.

1.6.5* The values given for measurements in this Code are expressed with the appropriate level of precision for their execution and practical application. The application or implementation of such values is not expected to be more accurate than the specified precision.

NFPA 1600®, Disaster/Emergency Management and Business Continuity Programs, Ausgabe 2010.

1.6.6 When extracted text contains values expressed in a single system of units, the values in the extracted text have been preserved without conversion to preserve the values specified by the competent technical committee in the source document. .

2.3 Other Publications.

1.7 Code Acceptance Requirements. This Code shall be administered and enforced by the competent authority designated by the governmental body. (See Appendix E for an example of favorable legislation.)

NFPA 1620, Standard for Incident Planning, 2010 Edition.

2.3.1 ANSI Publications. American National Standards Institute, Inc., 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036. ANSI A-58.1, Building Code Requirements for Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures. ANSI S1.4a, Specifications for Sound Level Meters, 1985, revised 2006. ANSI S3.41, National Standard for Sound Signals for Emergency Evacuation, 1990, revised 2008.

Chapter 2 Reference publications 2.1 General. The documents listed in this chapter, or parts of them, are referenced in this Code and should be considered as part of the requirements of this document. 2.2 NFPA Publications. State Association of Firefighters

ANSI/ASME A17.1/CSA B44-10, Elevator and Escalator Safety Code, 2010. ANSI/IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code, 2007. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Fiber Optic Electrical Cable standard for electrical components, June 2008

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

ANSI/UL 217, Standard for Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms, 2006, Revised 2012. ANSI/UL 268, Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems, 2009. ANSI/UL 827, Standard for Fire Alarm Services Fire Alarm Central Station Alarm System, 2008. ANSI/UL 864, Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, 2003, Modified 2011. ANSI/UL 985, Standard for Units for Domestic Fire Warning Systems fires, 2000 , modification 2008.

loop, 2004. 2.3.6 Other publications. Dictionary of the Spanish Language ¸ Twenty-second Edition published by the Royal Spanish Academy (2003). 2.4 References to Fragments in Required Sections. NFPA 70®, National Electrical Code, 2011 Edition. NFPA 96, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Safety of Commercial Kitchen Appliances, 2011 Edition. NFPA 101®, Human Safety Code, 2012 Edition.

ANSI/UL 1638, Visual Signaling Devices - Private Mode Emergency Signaling and General Service Signaling, 2008.

NFPA 654, Standard for the Prevention of Fire and Dust Explosions in the Manufacturing, Processing and Handling of Combustible Solid Particles, 2013 Edition.

ANSI/UL 1730, Standard for Smoke Detector Monitors and Accessories for Single Housing Units in Multi-Family Homes and Hotel/Motel Rooms, 2006, published May 2007.

NFPA 720, Standard for Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning Devices, 2012 Edition.

ANSI/UL 1971 Standard for Signaling Equipment for the Hearing Impaired, 2002 revised 2008.

NFPA 1221, Standard for Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Communication Systems for Emergency Services, 2013 Edition. NFPA 5000®, Safety and Building Code, 2012 Edition.

ANSI/UL 1981, Central Station Automation Systems, 2003. UL 2017, Standard for General Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems, 2008, Modified 2011. ANSI/UL 2572, Mass Notification Systems, 2011. ANSI/UL 60950 , Information Technology Equipment: Segurança - Parte 1: Requisitos Gerais, 2007.

2.3.2 Publication of the EIA. Alliance of Electronic Industries, 2500 Wilson Blvd, Arlington, VA 22201-3834. EIA Tr 41.3, Telephones. 2.3.3 IMSA Publications. International Municipal Signal Association, 165 East Union Street, Newark, NY 145130539. "IMSA Official Specifications for Cables", 1998. 2.3.4 ISO Publications. International Organization for Standardization, 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, Case postale 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland. ISO 7731, Workplace hazard signs - Audible hazard signals. 2.3.5 Telcordia Publications. Telcordia Technologies. One Telcordia Drive, Piscataway, NJ 08854. GR-506-CORE, Generic Requirements for Local Access Transport Area (LATA) Switching Systems: Signaling for Analog Interface, 2006. GR-909-CORE, Generic Requirements for Fiber over systems in

Chapter 3 Definitions 3.1 General. The definitions contained in this chapter apply to the terms used in this Code. When such terms are not defined in this chapter or any other chapter, they shall be defined using their generally accepted meanings within the context in which they are used. The Dictionary of the Spanish Language, Twenty-Second Edition, shall be the source of the commonly accepted meaning. 3.2 Official NFPA Definitions. 3.2.1* Approved. Acceptable by the competent authority. 3.2.2* Competent Authority (AHJ). The organization, agency or person responsible for enforcing the requirements of a code or standard, or approving equipment, materials, a facility or a process. 3.2.3* Code (Code). A regulation, which is a set of provisions that cover a broad subject or that can become law independently of other codes and regulations. 3.2.4 Labelling. Equipment Materials to which a label, symbol or other identification or marking is attached, in accordance with an organization accepted by the authority having jurisdiction and associated with the evaluation of the product, subject to periodic production inspections of the marked equipment or materials, and whereby the manufacturer demonstrates compliance with relevant standards or specific performance. 3.2.5* List. Equipment, materials or services included in a list published by an organization accepted by the competent authority and associated with the evaluation of products or services subject to periodic inspection

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72-18

THE DEFINITION

72-19

the production of equipment or identification of materials or periodic inspections of services, and the inclusion of which establishes that the equipment, material or service conforms to relevant established standards or has been evaluated and found suitable for a particular purpose.

3.3.10 Air sampling detector. See 3.3.66, Detector.

3.2.6 Must (should). Indicates a mandatory requirement.

3.3.12.1 Auxiliary alarm control panel (auxiliary alarm box). Central alarm that can only be operated by one or more remote trigger devices, or auxiliary alarm system used to send an alarm to the communication center. (SIGPRS)

3.2.7 Must. Indicates a recommendation or what is advisable but not mandatory. 3.3 General definitions. 3.3.1 Accessible (applies to Equipment) Permits approach not protected by closed doors, elevations or other effective means. [70, 2011] (SIG-FUN) 3.3.2 Accessible (Accessible) (applied to cabling methods) Can be removed or exposed without damaging the structure or surface of a building, or not permanently removed from the structure or surface of a building including your building. [70, 2011] (NEXT FUN)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.3 Accessible, easy (easily accessible) [Accessible, easy (easily accessible)]. Quickly accessible for maintenance, renovation or inspection, without the need for those who need easy access to climb or climb over obstacles, or resort to portable ladders, etc. [70, 2011] (SIG-FUN) 3.3.4 Accessible Spaces (applied to detection coverage, in Chapter 17). Hidden rooms or areas of the building that can be accessed through panels, doors or other easily movable elements (e.g. ceiling panels) that can be opened. (SIGIDS) 3.3.5 Confirm. Confirm that a message or signal has been received by pressing a key or selecting a software command. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.6* Acoustically Distinguishable Space (ADS). Emergency communications system notification area, or a subdivision thereof, which may be an enclosed or physically defined space, or which may be distinguished from other spaces by different acoustic, environmental or usage characteristics, such as: B. Reverberation weather and ambient sound pressure level. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.7 Active Multiplex System. A multiplexed action system in which signaling devices such as transponders are used to transmit status signals from each trigger or trigger circuit within a predetermined time period such that non-receipt of that signal can be interpreted as a dubious sign. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.8 Addressable Device. A discreetly identified component of a fire detection system, ie independently identifiable or used to individually control other functions. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.9 Adverse condition. Any condition on a communication or transmission channel that interferes with the correct transmission and/or interpretation of change of state signals at a monitoring station. (See also 3.3.257.10, error signal.) (SIG-SSS)

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

3.3.11 Alert (Alert). danger warning (SIG-FUN) 3.3.12 Alarm control panel (alarm box)

3.3.12.2 Combined fire alarm and patrol box. Manually operated station for the separate transmission of a fire alarm signal and a separate patrol surveillance signal. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.12.3 Manual Fire Alarm Box. Manual device for activating a fire alarm signal. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.12.4 Alarm Master Station (Alarm Master Box). Public access alarm station which may also be operated by one or more remote release devices or an auxiliary alarm system used to send an alarm to the communications center. (SIG-PRS) 3.3.12.5 Publicly Access Alert Box. Public access residence housing a portable transmitter used to send an alarm to the communications center. (SIG-PRS) 3.3.13 Alarm Service (Alarm Service). The service required after receiving the alarm signal. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.14 Alarm signal. See 3.3.257, sign. 3.3.15 Alarm system (Alarm system). See 3.3.105 Fire alarm system; Article 3.3.284, Monitoring station alarm system; Item 3.3.215, Public emergency call system; 3.3.87.1.2, Fire Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication System Installed in the Building; and 3.3.87.1.3, Mass detection systems installed in buildings. 3.3.16 Alarm verification function. A feature of automatic fire detection and alarm systems, intended to reduce false alarms, where smoke detectors report alarm conditions for a minimum period of time or acknowledge alarm conditions within a period of time. Specific time after reboot to be accepted as valid. Alarm activation signals. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.17 Warning sound. A signal to get occupants' attention before the next voice message is issued. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.18 Analog trip device (sensor) [Analog trip device (sensor)]. See 3.3.132, Trigger Device. 3.3.19 Auxiliary Functions. Auxiliary functions are those non-emergency activations of the permitted audible, visual and textual output circuits of fire alarms or mass notifications. Auxiliary functions may include general paging systems, background music or other non-emergency signals. (SIG ECS)

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–20

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

3.3.20 Detectors. A unit having one or more indicator lights, alphanumeric displays or other equivalent means, each display providing information about the status, condition or location of a circuit. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.21 residential building. A building or parts thereof comprising three or more residential units with separate kitchens and bathrooms. (SIG-HOU) [5000, 2012] 3.3.22 Application of sound notifications. See 3.3.173, Notification Device. 3.3.23 Automatic Extinguishing System Supervision Device. See 3.3.132, Trigger Device. 3.3.24 Automatic Fire Detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.25 Operation indicators for automatic fire extinguishing or suppression systems. See 3.3.66, Detector.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.26 Automatic Control Unit (AUC). See 3.3.59, Control Unit. 3.3.27 Auxiliary Alarm System. See 3.3.215 Public Emergency Notification System. 3.3.28 Auxiliary Alarm Center (Auxiliary Box). See 3.3.12, Alarm Station. 3.3.29* Average Ambient Sound Level. Root mean square, an A-weighted sound pressure level measured over the period a person was present or 24 hours, whichever is less. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.30 Construction of beams. See 3.3.37, Roof Surfaces. 3.3.31 Building fire alarm system. See 3.3.105 Fire alarm system. 3.3.32 Building Fire Safety Plan. Documentation including information on using alarms, transmitting alarms, responding to alarms, immediate area evacuation, evacuating smoking rooms, preparing floors and buildings for evacuation and firefighting. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.33 Carrier. Radio frequency energy that can be modulated by voice or signal pulses. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.34 transport system. Media in which multiple channels are transmitted at the same time, modulating each channel on different carrier frequencies and demodulating at the receiving points to restore the signals to their original form. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.35 Chap. The surface of a room, regardless of its height. The false ceiling areas have two ceilings, one visible from the ground and the other above the false ceiling. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.35.1 Level limits. Flat roofs or with a slope less than or equal to 1 in 8. (SIG ID)

3.3.35.2 Sloping roof. Roofs with slope greater than 1 in 8. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.35.3* Roof with sloped top. Roofs sloped in two directions from maximum height. Curved or vaulted roofs can be thought of as gables with a slope calculated as the slope of the stretched rope from its highest point to its lowest point. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.35.4* Upper part of the shed on slope. Roofs where the maximum height is at one end and the slope projects at the opposite end. (SIGIDS) 3.3.36 Ceiling height (high ceiling). The height from the floor of a room to the ceiling of the room. (GIS-IDS) 3.3.37 roof surfaces. 3.3.37.1 Support Structure. Roofs with solid elements, structural or non-structural, that project from the roof surface more than 4 inches (100 mm) and are spaced more than 36 inches (910 mm) at the center. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.37.2 Lead carrier (carrier). A support for rafters or rafters, running at right angles to the rafters. If the top of the stud is 4 inches (100 mm) from the ceiling, the stud is an important factor in determining the number of detectors and should be considered as such. On the other hand, if the top of the beam is more than 100 mm (4 inches) from the ceiling, the beam plays no role in determining the detector's position. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.37.3* Flat roofs (flat roof). Ceiling surfaces that are not interrupted by continuous projections, such as. B. Solid conduit or cable ties extending more than 4 inches (100 mm) below ceiling surface. (SIGIDS) 3.3.37.4 Solid Joint Construction. Roofs with solid structural or non-structural members that project more than 4 inches (100 mm) below the roof surface and are spaced less than 36 inches (910 mm) or less at the center. (SIGIDS) 3.3.38 Central Station. See 3.3.283.1, Central Monitoring Station. 3.3.39 Central Station Alarm System. See 3.3.284.1, Central Station Service Alert System. 3.3.40 Central Station Service. See 3.3.285. monitoring station service. 3.3.41 Central Station Service Alarm System. See 3.3.284 Monitoring station alarm system. 3.3.42 Central Monitoring Station. See 3.3.283, monitoring station. 3.3.43 channel (channel). A path for transmitting voice or other types of signals that uses modulation of light or alternating current within a frequency band. (SIG-SSS)

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

DEFINITIONS 3.3.43.1 Communication Channel. Circuit or path connecting a substation to a monitoring station through which signals are transmitted. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.43.2 Derived channel. Signaling line circuit that uses a local route of a public switched network connected as an active multiplex channel while allowing that route to be used for ordinary telephone communications. (SIG-SSS)

72-21

of NFPA 72 where signals are transmitted between a protected property and a monitoring station. Depending on the type of transmission used, signals can be sent on a single defined path or on multiple paths, depending on what is available when the signal is sent. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.57* Condition (Condition). Location, state of the environment or state of the equipment of a fire detection or signaling system. (NEXT FUN)

3.3.43.3* radio channel (radio channel). A frequency band wide enough to be used for radio communication purposes. (SIG-SSS)

3.3.57.1 Abnormal (out of the ordinary) condition. Situation, environmental condition, or equipment condition that requires some type of signal, notification, communication, response, action, or service. (NEXT FUN)

3.3.43.4 Transmission Channel. A circuit or path that connects transmitters to monitoring substations or through which signals are transmitted. (SIG-SSS)

3.3.57.1.1* Alarm Condition. Abnormal condition that poses an imminent threat to life, property, or mission. (NEXT FUN)

3.3.44 circuit. A means of supplying electricity or a means of communication between two or more locations (see 3.3.190). (SIGPRO)

3.3.57.1.2* Pre-alarm condition. An abnormal condition that poses a potential threat to life, property, or mission and has time available for investigation. (NEXT FUN)

3.3.45 circuit interface. See 3.3.137, Interface. 3.3.46 Smoke detection in fog chamber. See 3.3.269, Smoke Detection. 3.3.47 Encoded/or (encoded). An audible or visual signal that contains several discrete bits or units of information. (SIGNALS) 3.3.48 Combined detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.49 Combined emergency communications systems. See 3.3.88, Emergency Communication Systems - Combined. 3.3.50 Fire Alarm and Patrol Combo Box. See 3.3.12, Alarm Station. 3.3.51 Combined System (Combined System). See 3.3.105 Fire alarm system. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.52 General conversation mode. See 3.3.294 Conversation mode. 3.3.53* Communications Center. A building, or part of a building, configured specifically for the primary purpose of providing emergency communications services or emergency response services (PSAP) to one or more public safety agencies on behalf of law enforcement authorities. [1221, 2013] (SIGPRS) 3.3.54 communication channel. See 3.3.43, channel. 3.3.55 communication circuit. Any signal path in an emergency communications system that carries voice, audio, data, or other signals. (SIGECS) 3.3.56 communications cloud. The range of communications supported by unregulated communications service providers in the jurisdiction

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

3.3.57.1.3* Monitoring Condition. Abnormal condition related to the monitoring of other systems, processes or devices. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.57.1.4* Fault status. An anomaly of a system due to an error. (NEXT FUN)

Illness

3.3.57.2 Normal state. Circuits, systems and components function as designed and there are no abnormal conditions. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.58 Contiguous Property. See 3.3.207, property. 3.3.59 Control Unit. Component of a system that monitors input and output signals through various types of circuits. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.59.1* Autonomous Control Unit (AUC). Main control unit for a mass notification system installed in a building. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.59.2 Emergency Communications Control Unit (ECCU). System capable of sending bulk notifications to individual buildings, zones of buildings, individual outdoor speaker arrays or zones of outdoor speaker arrays or; a building, multiple buildings, outdoor areas or a combination thereof. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.59.3 Fire Alarm Control Unit. See 3.3.102, Fire Control Panel. 3.3.59.4 Wireless Control Unit. Component that sends/receives and processes wireless signals. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.60 Day Home. A building or part of a building where more than 3 but not more than 12 persons are cared for, maintained and supervised by someone other than a member of their family(ies). legal guardians). , for less than 24 hours a day. [101, 2012] (SIG-HOU)

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-22

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

3.3.61 fire control panel for dedicated functions. See 3.3.102, Fire Control Panel. 3.3.62 Direct alarm system with dedicated function. See 3.3.105 Fire alarm system. 3.3.63 Disability. Condition that affects the operation or reliability for which the part, system or equipment was designed. (SIG-TMS) 3.3.64 Signal of Default. See 3.3.257, sign. 3.3.65 Derived Channel (Drafted Channel). See 3.3.43, channel. 3.3.66 Detector (Detector). Device to be connected to a circuit with a sensor that responds to a physical stimulus such as gas, heat or smoke. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.1 Air sampling detector. Detector composed of a distribution network of tubes that extends from the detector to the areas to be protected. An exhaust fan in the detector housing draws air from the protected area and directs it through air sampling ports and ductwork to the detector. At the detector, the air is analyzed to determine if any fire products are present. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.2 Automatic Fire Detector. Device designed to detect the presence of fire and take action. For the purposes of this Code, automatic fire detectors are classified as: detectors operating for automatic fire suppression or suppression systems, gas fire detectors, heat detectors, other fire detectors, fire detectors with energy heating and smoke detectors. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.3 Indicators of operation of automatic extinguishing or extinguishing fire systems. Device that automatically detects the operation of a fire extinguishing or suppression system by means appropriate to the system in use. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.4* Combined detector. Device that responds to more than one fire phenomenon or uses more than one operating principle to perceive one of these phenomena. Typical examples are a combination of a heat detector and a smoke detector or a combination of slew rate and fixed temperature heat detector. The named device has listings for each sensor method used. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.5 Electrical Conductivity Heat Detector. Linear or point sensing element in which resistance changes as a function of temperature. (SIG-IDS) --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.66.6 Fire Gas Detector. Device that detects the gases produced by a fire. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.7* Fixed temperature detector. A device that reacts when its controller overheats to a specified level. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.8* Flame detector. Fire detector with radiant energy sensor that detects radiant energy

triggered by a flame. (See A.17.8.2) (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.9 Gas Detector. A device that detects the presence of a specific concentration of gas. Gas detectors can be point or linear type. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.10 Heat detector. Fire detector that detects an abnormally high temperature or an increase in temperature, or both. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.11 Line type detector. Device in which acquisition is continuous along a path. Typical examples are rate-of-lift type pneumatic tube detectors, projection beam type smoke detectors, and heat sensitive cables. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.12* Multicriteria detector. A device that contains multiple sensors that respond separately to a physical stimulus, such as heat, smoke, or combustion gases, or that uses more than one sensor to detect the same stimulus. This sensor is capable of generating only one alarm signal from the sensors used in the project, independently or in combination. The sensor output signal is mathematically evaluated to determine when an alarm signal is warranted. The evaluation can take place at the detector or at the control unit. This listener has a single list that defines the main function of the listener. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.13* Multisensor detector. A device that contains multiple sensors that respond separately to physical stimuli, such as heat, smoke, or combustible gases, or that uses more than one sensor to detect the same stimuli. Device capable of generating multiple alarm signals from each of the sensors used in the project, independently or in combination. The sensor output signals are mathematically evaluated to determine if the signal is justified. The evaluation can take place at the detector or at the control unit. The named device has listings for each sensor method used. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.14 Other Fire Detectors. Devices that detect phenomena other than heat, smoke, flame or gas produced by a fire. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.15 Response velocity pneumatic tube heat detector. Linear detector consisting of a small diameter tube, usually copper, installed on the ceiling or walls along the protected surface. The tube terminates in a sensing unit that contains diaphragms and associated contacts that are configured to operate under a specified pressure. The system is sealed except for calibrated openings that compensate for normal temperature changes. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.16 Beam Design Type Detector. A type of opaque photoelectric smoke detector that projects the beam through the shielded surface. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.17 Fire detector with radiant energy detection. Device that detects radiant energy such as ultraviolet, visible or infrared light emitted as a product of combustion, obeying the laws of optics. (SIG IDS) 3.3.66.18*

Detector

Von

payment of damages

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

Von

speed

(Bowl

compensation detector SETTINGS). A device that responds when the rate of temperature rise of the air surrounding the device reaches a predetermined value, regardless of the rate of temperature rise. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.19* Response speed detector. A device that reacts when the temperature reaches a value that exceeds the specified value. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.20 Smoke detector. Device that detects visible or invisible particles from a burn. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.21 Spark or ember detector. Fire detector sensitive to radiant energy, intended to detect sparks or embers or both. This device is generally said to work in dark environments and in the infrared part of the spectrum. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.66.22 Point type detector. Device in which the detector element is concentrated in a specific area. Typical examples are bimetallic detectors, fusible alloy detectors, certain pneumatic speed-up detectors, certain smoke detectors and thermoelectric detectors. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.67 Digital Alarm Communicator Receiver (DACR). A component of a system that accepts and displays signals sent over the public switched telephone network by digital alarm communicator transmitters (DACTs). (SIG-SSS) 3.3.68 Digital Alarm Communication System (DACS)]. System in which signals from a Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) located in the protected building are transmitted over the public telephone network to a Digital Alarm Communicator Receiver (DACR). (SIG-SSS) 3.3.69 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT). A component of a system located where boot devices or groups of devices are connected. The DACT hijacks the connected phone line, dials a predefined number to connect to a DACR, and transmits signals indicating a change in state to the initiating device. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.70 Digital Alarm Radio Receiver (DARR). Component of a system consisting of two components: one that receives and decodes radio signals and another that announces the decoded information. Both components can be housed in the same control center or separated by a data transmission channel. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.71 Digital Radio Alarm System (DARS). System in which signals from a digital radio alarm transmitter (DACT) located in the protected premises are transmitted via a radio channel to a digital radio alarm receiver (DARR). (SIG-SSS)

72-23

Objection to hard copy. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.74 Distributed Recipient Mass Notification System (DRMNS) See 3.3.87, Emergency Communication System. 3.3.75 donor antenna. Outdoor antenna placed on the top of the building where a radio communication improvement system works for public safety. (SIGECS) 3.3.76 donor page. Location of the repeater or base station that the enhanced public safety radio communication system communicates with. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.77 dormitory (bedroom). Building or room within a building that has facilities for group sleeping and is capable of accommodating and working together under one roof more than 16 non-family members in the same room or in a series of interconnecting rooms, with or without meals, but without individual kitchen facilities. [101, 2012] (SIG-HOU) 3.3.78* dual port. Double opening without wall or frame between the two doors. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.79 Downlink. Radio signal from base station transmitter to public security service subscriber portable receiver. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.80 Dual Control. The use of two main trunks through separate routes or different methods to control a communication channel. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.81 housing unit. One or more rooms furnished for complete and independent purposes of order and cleanliness, with space for eating, living and sleeping; Kitchen facilities and equipped with washing facilities. [5000, 2012] (SIG-HOU) 3.3.81.1 Apartment building. Buildings with three or more residential units. (SIG-HOU) 3.3.81.2 Single Residential Unit. Single unit building. (SIG-HOU) 3.3.82 Effective Masked Threshold. Minimum sound level at which the audio signal is audible in ambient noise. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.83 Electrical conductivity heat detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.84* embers (embers). Particles of solid matter that emit radiant energy on their surface due to their own temperature or the combustion process. (See also 3.3.275, Spark.) (SIGIDS) 3.3.85 Emergency Command Center. See 3.3.89, Emergency Communications System - Emergency Command Center

3.3.72 Digital Alarm Radio Transmitter (DART). A component of a connected system or integral part of a Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) and used to provide an alternate radio transmission channel. (SIG-SSS)

3.3.86 Emergency Communications Control Unit (ECCU). See 3.3.59, Control Unit.

3.3.73 Screen or Viewer (Display). Visual representation of data, in

3.3.87 Emergency communication system (Emergency

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

communication system). System intended to protect human life by indicating the existence of an emergency situation and transmitting the information necessary to facilitate an appropriate response and action. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.87.1 One-way emergency communication system. One-way emergency communication systems are intended to transmit information to persons located in one or more specified indoor or outdoor areas in the event of an emergency. It is expected that emergency notifications will be communicated audibly, visually, or by text, or any combination thereof. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.87.1.1 Distributed Recipient Mass Notification System (DRMNS) A distributed recipient mass notification system is a system whose purpose is to communicate directly with specific individuals and groups who may not be in a contiguous area. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.87.1.2 Voice/alarm communication system for indoor fire emergencies. Specific manual or automatic equipment to generate and distribute voice instructions, alarm and evacuation signals corresponding to a fire emergency to the occupants of a building (SIG-ECS) 3.3.87.1.3 Mass notification system installed in a building (In- House Mass Notification System). System for providing information and instructions to persons located in one or more buildings or other spaces through the use of intelligible verbal communication, including methods of communication by visible signs, text, numbers, tactile or other means. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.87.1.4 Wide Area Reporting System. Large area mass notification systems are typically installed to provide real-time information to offsite locations and may have the ability to communicate with other notification systems deployed on one or more campuses, military base, city hall or similar contiguous area. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.87.2 Two-way emergency communication system. Two-way emergency communication systems fall into two categories: systems likely to be used by building occupants, and systems intended for use by firefighters, police, and other emergency services. Two-way emergency communication systems are used for both the exchange of information and the transmission of information such as but not limited to addresses, message recognition, local environmental and human conditions, and to ensure that help arrives. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.88 Emergency Communication Systems - Combination. Various emergency communication systems, such as fire alarm, mass notification, fire brigade communication, emergency shelter communication, elevator communication or others, which can be controlled by a single communication system or operated by connecting several control system. (SIG ECS)

3.3.89* Emergency Communications System - Emergency Command Center. The rooms or areas serviced during an emergency by designated emergency management personnel. The room or area has the control and communication facilities of the system used for one or more buildings, and the competent authorities receive information from facility sources or systems or from regional or national (general) sources or systems and then disseminate it as required. appropriate. information to an individual, a building, multiple buildings, the campus perimeter, or a combination thereof, in accordance with the facility's emergency plan. The room or area has the controls and indicators from which the ECS systems located in the room or area can be manually controlled as required by the emergency plan and emergency management coordinator. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.90* Emergency Control Function Interface Device. A listed component of the fire detection or signaling system that is directly connected to the system that operates the emergency control function. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.91* Emergency control functions. Building, fire and emergency control systems or elements activated by the fire detection system or emergency communication system that increase the safety of occupants' lives or control the spread of harmful effects from fire products or other hazardous products. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.92* Emergency Response Center (ERF) facilities. Structure, or part of a structure, that houses emergency response teams or personnel responsible for alarm response activities. [1221, 2013] (SIG-PRS) 3.3.93 Emergency Response Plan (Emergency Response Plan). Documented set of measures to implement the response to natural, technological, man-made and other emergencies, developed by the interested parties based on the information obtained during the risk analysis. (SIGECS) --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,`---

72–24

3.3.94* evacuation (evacuation). The removal of occupants from a building. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.95 evacuation signal. See 3.3.257, sign. 3.3.96 Area of evacuation signs. See 3.3.320, zone. 3.3.97 Execution Software. See 3.3.272 Software. 3.3.98 Audible Dialing Out Notification Device. See 3.3.173, Notification Device. 3.3.99 false alarm (false alarm). See 3.3.307, Unwanted Alarm 3.3.100 Field of View. the continuous cone

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE DEFINITION

72–25

extends outside the detector within which the detector's effective sensitivity is at least 50 percent of its listed or certified sensitivity on the axis. (SIG ID)

in the apartment, the purpose of which is to warn neighbors of the presence of a fire so that they can leave the premises. (NEXT HOU)

3.3.101 Fire Alarm Control Interface (FACI). See 3.3.137, Interface.

3.3.105.3 Municipal Fire Alarm System. Public emergency call system. (Next PRS)

3.3.102* Fire Control Panel (FACU). A fire detection system component, equipped with primary and secondary power supplies, that receives signals from initiating devices or other fire detection control units and processes those signals to determine part or all of the fire detection system's output functions. fire detection. (SIG PRO)

3.3.105.4* Fire alarm system for protected places (installations). Fire alarm system on protected objects. (SIG PRO)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.102.1 Master Fire Control Panel. Fire control panel that serves as a local fire control panel for the protected object or part of it and accepts input from other fire control panels. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.102.2 Protected Area Control Unit (Local) [Protected Area Control Unit (Local)]. Fire alarm control panel serving the protected object or part of it. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.102.2.1 Function-specific fire panel (Dedicated function fire panel). Fire control unit of a protected installation, the purpose of which is to provide for the operation of a specially designated emergency control function. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.102.2.2 Release of Service Fire Alarm Control Unit. Fire control panel for protected installations specifically listed for release service that is part of a fire suppression system and provides control outputs to release a fire suppression agent based on manual or automatic input. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.103 Evacuation/fire alarm signal tone generator. A device that produces a fire/evacuation alarm tone when commanded. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.104 Fire Alarm Signal. See 3.3.257, sign. 3.3.105 fire alarm system. A system, or part of a combined system, consisting of components and circuitry adapted to monitor and indicate the status of a fire alarm or enabling device supervisory signal and to initiate appropriate response to such signals. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.105.1* Combined system (combined system). Fire detection system in which components are shared wholly or partially with a non-fire detection system. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.105.2 Domestic Fire Alarm System. System of devices that use a fire alarm control panel to generate an alarm signal

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

3.3.105.4.1 Building Fire Alarm System. Fire detection system in protected locations, which meets any of the characteristics referred to in point 23.3.3.1, which meets the general fire detection requirements of a building or buildings and notifies firefighters, occupants or both. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.105.4 .2 Function-specific fire alarm system (Dedicated-function fire alarm system). Fire alarm systems for protected premises specifically installed to perform the emergency control function(s) where a building fire alarm system is not required. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.105.4.3 Release fire alarm system. Fire detection system for protected installations that form part of a fire-fighting system and/or provide control inputs to a fire-fighting system related to the operation of the fire-fighting system and outputs for other signals and notifications (GIS -PRO) 3.3. 106* Fire Command Center. Main room or area, with or without personnel present, displaying detection status, alarm communications, control systems, and other emergency systems from which the system can be manually controlled. (SIGECS) 3.3.107 Electronic Monitoring of Fire Extinguishers. A device connected to a controller that monitors the fire extinguisher in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.108 Vigilante Firefighter (Firefighter). Building staff members or tenants trained to perform assigned tasks in the event of a fire. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.109 Fire Alert Equipment. Any detector, alarm, device or material in connection with a domestic fire alarm or single or multi-station detection system. (SIG-HOU) 3.3.110 Fire gas detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.111 Fixed temperature sensor. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.112 Call. Body or flow of gaseous material involved in the combustion process, which emits radiant energy in specific wavelength bands determined by the combustion chemistry of the fuel. In most cases, a part

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–26

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

of radiant energy emitted is visible to the human eye. (SIGI)

High-performance speakers suitable for voice and audio communication in large outdoor areas. (SIG ECS)

3.3.113 Flame Detector. See 3.3.66, Detector.

3.3.126 hotel (hotel). Buildings or groups of buildings under the same management that have sleeping accommodation for more than 16 people and are mainly used for the accommodation of travelers in transit with or without meals. [101, 2012] (SIG-HOU)

3.3.114 Flame detector sensitivity. The distance along the optical axis of the detector at which the detector can detect a fire of specified size and combustible material within a specified period of time. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.115 frequency (frequency). Minimum and maximum time between events (SIG-TMS). 3.3.115.1 Weekly frequency. Fifty-two times a year, once a week. 3.3.115.2 Monthly frequency. Twelve times a year, once a month. 3.3.115.3 Quarterly frequency. Four times a year with a minimum of 2 months and a maximum of 4 months. 3.3.115.4 Half-yearly attendance. Twice a year with a minimum of 4 months and a maximum of 8 months. 3.3.115.5 Annual Frequency (Annual Frequency). Once a year with a minimum of 9 months and a maximum of 15 months. 3.3.116 access device (gateway). Device for transmitting serial data (digital or analogue) from the fire control panel to other control units in the building system, to devices or networks, and/or from other control units in the building system to the fire control panel (SIG -PRO) 3.3.117 Main support (conveyor). See 3.3.37, Roof Surfaces. 3.3.118 Guard passing notification point. Device activated manually or automatically to show the route traveled and the time of a patrol. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.119 Patrol surveillance signal. See 3.3.257, sign. 3,3,120 rooms. Accommodation combining living, sleeping, washing and storage facilities in a single compartment. [101, 2012] (SIG-HOU) 3.3.121 Guest suite. Accommodation with two or more adjoining rooms forming a compartment, with or without doors between these rooms, containing living, sleeping, washing and storage rooms. [101, 2012] (SIGHOU) 3.3.122* Hearing loss. Total or partial decrease in the ability to recognize or understand sounds. (SIGNS) 3.3.122.1 Profound Hearing Loss. Hearing threshold of more than 90 dB. 3.3.123 Heat Alert. Alarm with one or more stations, reacting to heat. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.124 Heat detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.125 High Performance Speaker Array (HPSA). orders of

3.3.127 Domestic fire alarm system (Domestic Fire Alarm System). See 3.3.105 Fire alarm system. 3.3.128 Hunting Group. Group of related telephone lines within which an incoming call is automatically transferred to an available (idle) telephone line to be answered. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.129* Identified (as applied to the Equipment) [Identified (as applied to the Equipment)]. Recognized as suitable for the purpose, function, use, environment, application, etc. specific when described in a specific requirement of the Code. [70, 2011] (SIG-PRS) 3.3.130* Out of service (deterioration). Abnormal condition in which a system, component or function is not operational and the condition may cause the system or unit to not function when required. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.130.1* Emergency Impairment. Abnormal condition in which a system, component, or function is out of service due to an unexpected malfunction. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.130.2* State of planned decommissioning (planned deterioration). Abnormal condition in which a system, component, or function is out of service due to a previously scheduled task. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.131 Mass Notification System in Buildings. See 3.3.79, Emergency Communication System. 3.3.132 Initiation Device. System component that causes a change of state to be transmitted, e.g. B. a smoke detector, fire alarm train station or monitor switch. (SIGIDS) 3.3.132.1 Analog trigger device (sensor). Trigger device that emits a signal indicating varying degrees of condition, as opposed to a traditional trigger device that can only indicate an on and off condition. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.132.2 Monitoring device for automatic extinguishing systems. Device that responds to abnormal conditions that may affect the proper operation of an automatic sprinkler system or other fire extinguishing or suppression system, including but not limited to control valves, pressure levels, fluid levels and temperatures, power and operation pump, engine temperature and overspeed, and ambient temperature. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.132.3 Unrecoverable activation device. Device in which the sensing element must be destroyed during operation. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.132.4 Recoverable activation device

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

DEVICE SETTINGS). Device in which the sensing element is normally not destroyed during operation, the restoration of which can be carried out manually or automatically. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.132.5 Signal Initiator Surveillance Device. releasing device, such as B. a valve safety switch, water level indicator, or low pressure switch in a dry pipe sprinkler system where the change of state indicates an abnormal condition and the recovery to an abnormal condition that is normal for fire safety or life safety system; or a need for action relating to patrols, fire suppression systems or equipment, or the maintenance characteristics of related systems. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.133 Boot Device Circuit. Circuit to which automatic or manual release devices are connected, where the received signal does not identify the individual device being operated. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.134 inspection personnel. See 3.3.193, Staff. 3.3.135 Intelligibility. quality or state of intelligibility. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.136* Understandable (Understandable). Be understandable; understandable; Of course. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.137 interface (interface). 3.3.137.1 circuit interface. component of a circuit connected to tripping devices or control circuits or both; notification devices or circuits or both; system control outputs; and other signal line circuits with a signal line circuit. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.137.1.1 Signaling Line Interface. A system component that connects a signal line circuit to any combination of trip devices, trip device circuits, notification appliances, notification appliance circuits, system control outputs, and other signal line circuits. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.137.1.2* Emergency control function interface. The interface between the fire detection system emergency control function interface device and the component controlling the emergency control function. (SIG PRO). 3.3.137.2* Fire alarm control interface. The fire alarm control interface coordinates signals to and from the fire alarm system and other systems. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.138 Ionization smoke detection. See 3.3.269, Smoke Detection. 3.3.139 Leg Ease. Part of a communication channel that connects no more than one protected facility to a major or minor trunk section. The branch section comprises the part of the signal transmission circuit from its connection point with the connection section to the point where it ends inside the equipment protected by one or more transponders. (SIG-SSS) --`,,`,`` ,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.140 Level Limits. See 3.3.35, cover slab.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72–27

3.3.141 Life Safety Network. A type of composite system that transmits fire control data through access devices to other control units in the building system. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.142 Line Detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.143 Residential area. All rooms in a residential occupancy that may normally be occupied, with the exception of sleeping/living rooms or changing rooms, bathrooms, lavatories, kitchens, closets, hallways, storerooms or other outbuildings and similar areas. [101, 2012] (SIG-HOU) 3.3.144 Load capacity. Maximum number of discrete fire detection system elements that can be used in a given configuration. (SIGSSS) 3.3.145 Local power type auxiliary alarm system. See 3.3.215 Public Emergency Notification System. 3.3.146* Local Operations Console (LOC) Equipment used by authorized personnel and emergency response personnel to activate and operate a mass notification system installed in a building. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.147 Guest house or pension (accommodation or pension). Buildings or parts thereof not classified as single or double dwellings, including sleeping accommodation for a total of 16 persons or less, temporarily or permanently, without personal care services, with or without meals, but without separate cooking facilities for single occupants. [101, 2012] ( SIGHOU) 3.3.148 power outage. Reducing the available charging voltage below the point where the device can function as intended. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.149 Low power radio transmitter. A device that communicates with associated controller/receiver devices using low power radio signals. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.150 Maintenance (Maintenance). Work, including but not limited to repair, replacement and maintenance, performed to ensure proper operation of the equipment. (SIGTMS) 3.3.151 Malicious alert. unwanted alarm

Version 3.3.307.1,

3.3.152* Managed Facility Based Voice Network (MFVN). A network with an on-site physical base capable of transmitting real-time signals without format changes and managed, operated and maintained by the service provider to ensure quality and reliability of service from subscriber location to network access points public switched telephone (PSTN). or other point-to-point MFVN networks. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.153 Manual Fire Alarm Box. See 3.3.12, Alarm Station.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–28

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

3.3.154* Instructions published by the manufacturer. Published installation and operating documentation provided for each product or component. The documentation includes instructions and information necessary for the intended installation, maintenance, and operation of the product or component. (GIS TMS)

Users and the defined access policy. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.168 Network (Network) 3.3.168.1 Wireless Network (Wireless Network). Communication method used in the public emergency notification system when constituted by a wireless communication infrastructure. (Next PRS)

3.3.155* Bulk notification priority mode. Mode of operation in which all fire alarm notifications to residents are replaced by the mass emergency call action. (SIG ECS)

3.3.168.2 Wired network. Communication method used in the public emergency notification system when constituted by a cabled communication infrastructure. (Next PRS)

3.3.156* Mass notification system. See 3.3.87.1.3, Mass Notification System Installed in a Building. (SIG PRO)

3.3.169 network architecture (network architecture). Physical and logical design of a network and the design's inherent ability to transfer data from one point to another. (SIG ECS)

3.3.157 Alarm Master Station (Master Box). See 3.3.12, Alarm Station.

3.3.170 Non-Contiguous Property. See 3.3.207, property.

3.3.158 Master Fire Control Panel. See 3.3.102, Fire Control Panel.

3.3.171* Not Required (Not Required). A component or group of components in a system that is installed at the owner's option and not because of a building or fire code. (NEXT FUN)

3.3.159 Multicriteria detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.160 apartment building. See 3.3.81, housing unit. 3.3.161 Multi-station alarm. Single station alarm that can be linked to one or more additional alarms so that activating one of them causes the corresponding alarm signal to act on all linked alarms. (SIG-HOU) 3.3.162 Multistation alarm device. Two or more single-station devices that can be connected so that activation of one triggers all built-in or separate audible alarms; or a single station alarm device that has connections to other detectors or to a fire control panel. (SIG-HOU) 3.3.163 Multiplexing (Multiplexing). A method of signaling characterized by the simultaneous or sequential transmission, or both, and reception of multiple signals on a signaling line circuit, transmission channel, or communication channel, including means for effectively identifying each character. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.164 Multisensor Detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.165 Municipal fire alarm box (street box). Public access alarm station. (See 3.3.12, alarm station). 3.3.166 Municipal Fire Alarm System. See 3.3.105 Fire alarm system. 3.3.167 Network-Centric Alerting System (NCAS) A network-centric alerting system includes a web-based alerting and management application that allows all operators and administrators to access system resources based on user privileges .

3.3.172 Unrecoverable activation device. See 3.3.132, Trigger Device. 3.3.173 Notification Device. A component of a fire alarm system, such as a bell, horn, speaker, light, or text display, that emits audible, tactile, or visual signals, or any combination thereof. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.173.1 Sound notification device. Notification device that alerts through the sense of hearing. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.173.1.1 Sound notification application exit signaling. Audible notification device that indicates building exits and evacuation areas via the auditory sense for evacuation or relocation purposes. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.173.1.2* Device for audible text notifications. A notification device that provides a variety of audible information. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.173.2 Ring notification application. Notification device that alerts by touch or vibration. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.173.3 Visible notification device. Notification device that alerts via the sense of sight. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.173.3.1 Visible text notification device. Notification device that transmits a series of visible information through an alphanumeric or image message. Visible text notification devices display temporary text, permanent text, or icons. Visible text notification devices include, but are not limited to, notifiers, monitors, cathode ray televisions (CRTs), monitors and printers. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.174 notification device circuit. Circuit or path connected directly to one or

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

SETTINGS more notification devices. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.175 Notification Zone. See 3.3.320, zone. 3.3.176 false alarm (false alarm). See 3.3.307.2, Unwanted Alarm. 3.3.177* Habitable (Habitable). Enclosed space or space intended for human habitation. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.178 Occupied Area. Facilities area regularly occupied by people. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.179* Octave Band. Bandwidth of a filter covering a frequency band of factor 2. (SIGNAS) 3.3.179.1 One-third octave band. Bandwidth of a filter that covers a frequency range by a factor of 2⅓. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.180 Takeoff. Connecting to the public switched telephone network in preparation for dialing a telephone number. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.181 Third octave band. See 3.3.179, octave band. 3.3.182 One-way emergency communication system. See 3.3.87, Emergency Communication System.

72–29

Optical fiber, radio carrier, or other medium that connects two or more locations. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.191 Path of Survival. The ability of a conductor, optical fiber, radio carrier, or other means of carrying system information to remain operational during a fire. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.192 Permanent Visual Record (Record) Printed record, between bars or perforations, immediately readable, not easily alterable, of all changes in status that have occurred (SIG-SSS) 3.3.193 Personnel (Personnel) . 3.3.193.1 Inspection Personnel. Persons who perform a visual inspection of a facility or part thereof to determine that it is in good working order, in the correct location, and free from physical damage or conditions that affect its operation. (SIG-TMS) 3.3.193.2 Maintenance service personnel (service personnel). Persons who perform such procedures, adjustments, component replacements, programming, and maintenance of the system as specified in the manufacturer's service instructions and which may affect any aspect of the system's performance. (GIS TMS)

3.3.183 hung up. Disconnect from the public telephone network. (SIG-SSS)

3.3.193.3 System Designer (System Designer). Responsible for drawing up plans and specifications for the fire detection and signaling system that comply with the provisions of this Code. (NEXT FUN)

3.3.184 Open Area Detection (Protection) [Open Area Detection (Protection)]. Securing an area, such as B. a room or room, by detectors to give early warning of fire. (SIG ID)

3.3.193.4 System Installer (System Installer). Responsible for the professional installation of fire alarm and signaling systems in accordance with the plans, specifications and requirements of the manufacturer. (NEXT FUN)

3.3.185 Mode of operation.

3.3.193.5 Personnel in charge of testing (testing personnel). Individuals who perform procedures used to determine the expected state of a system by performing acceptance tests, reacceptance tests, or periodic physical inspections of systems. (GIS TMS)

3.3.185.1 Private operation mode. Sound or visual signaling only for people directly involved in the execution and direction of the initiation of actions and emergency response in the area protected by the fire detection system (SIG-NAS 3.3.185.2 Public mode of operation). Audible or visual signaling to occupants or occupants of the area protected by the fire alarm system. (SIG-NAS) 3.3.186 Other Fire Detectors. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.187* Property. Any property or building or its contents which is under the legal control of the occupant by contract or title or deed. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.188 Pager system. System whose purpose is to locate one or more persons, for example, by speaking through a loudspeaker, audible or visible coded signals or light indicators (SIG-PRO) 3.3.189 Parallel telephone system. Telephone system in which a separate line circuit is used for each fire alarm control panel. (SIG-SSS) --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.190 path (paths). Each circuit, conductor,

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

3.3.194 Smoke detection by photoelectric light obscuration. See 3.3.269, Smoke Detection. 3.3.195 Optoelectronic smoke detection by light scattering. See 3.3.269, Smoke Detection. 3.3.196 Annex (Annex). One or more buildings under common ownership or control on a single lot. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.197 Rotation speed pneumatic tube heat detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.198 Positive Alarm Sequence. Automatic sequence leading to an alarm signal, even if manually delayed for investigation purposes, unless the system is reset. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.199 Power supply (power pack). Operation of a source of electrical power, including the circuits and terminations that connect it to dependent system components. (NEXT FUN)

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

3.3.200 Primary Battery (Dry Cell) Non-rechargeable battery that requires periodic replacement. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.201 Main Trunk Facility. The part of a transmission channel that connects all branches to a primary or secondary station. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.202 Main contractor. The entity contractually responsible for providing central station services to a subscriber as required by this Code. The prime contractor can be a publicly traded central station or a publicly traded local alarm service company. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.203 Private mode of operation. See 3.3.185, Mode of Operation. 3.3.204 Private Radio Signaling (Private Radio Signaling). Radio system under control of object surveillance station. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.205 Profound hearing loss. See 3.3.122, hearing loss. 3.3.206 Projection Beam Type Detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.207 Ownership. 3.3.207.1 Contiguous Property. A protected facility of an individual owner or user that is situated on adjoining property, including buildings thereon, that is not separated by a public road, right of way, owned, owned or used by others, or a watercourse that is not belong to the same owner. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.207.2 Detached Ownership (Disconnected Ownership). Single owner or user protected facilities where two or more protected facilities controlled by the same owner or user are separated by a road, waterway, transportation right of way, or third party property (GIS-SSS). 3.3.208 heritage surveillance agency. See 3.3.283, monitoring station. 3.3.209 Proprietary Monitoring Station Alert System. See 3.3.284 Monitoring station alarm system. 3.3.210 Station Service Owner Supervision. See 3.3.285. monitoring station service. 3.3.211 Protected Premises (Protected Premises). Physical location protected by a fire detection system. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.212 Protected Local Control Unit (Local). See 3.3.102, Fire Control Panel. 3.3.213 Fire alarm system for protected premises (premises). See 3.3.105 Fire alarm system. 3.3.214 Loudspeaker System. Electronic amplification system with mixer, amplifier and speakers, used to amplify a specific sound and distribute the "sound" to the entire audience.

around a building. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.215 Public emergency alarm notification system. System of alarm triggering devices, transmitting and receiving equipment, and communications infrastructure (other than a public switched telephone network) used to communicate with the communications center to provide any combination of manual or supplementary alarm service (SIG-PRS ) 3.3.215.1* Auxiliary device Alarm system. Protected location fire alarm system or other protected location emergency system and the system used to connect the protected location system to the public emergency notification system for transmission of an alarm to the communications center. (SIG-PRS) 3.3.215.1.1 Type of Local Energy of the Auxiliary Alarm System. Auxiliary system utilizing a locally complete set of parts, tripping devices, relays, power supplies and associated components to automatically activate a master or auxiliary alarm station on circuits that are electrically isolated from public safety alarm notification system circuits. SIG-PRS) 3.3.215.1.2 Auxiliary alarm system bypass type. Auxiliary system electrically connected to the public alarm system and extending a public alarm circuit to interconnect tripping devices within protected premises which, when placed in service, open the public alarm circuit Auxiliary Alarm Center. The main or auxiliary alarm station is powered to initiate transmission without any help from a local power source. (SIG-PRS) 3.3.215.2 Type A Public Emergency Alarm Notification System. System in which an alarm is received from an alarm control panel and sent to the fire department either manually or automatically. (SIG-PRS) 3.3.215.3 Type B Public Emergency Alarm Notification System. System by which an alarm is transmitted automatically from an alarm control panel to fire brigades and, if used, to additional alarm devices. (SIGPRS) 3.3.216 Public Operation Mode. See 3.3.185, Mode of Operation. 3.3.217 Public Security Agency. fire protection authorities, rescue services or security forces. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.218 Public Safety Radio Enhancement System for Public Safety Radio Communications. System installed to ensure the effective operation of radio communication systems used by firefighters, emergency services or

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72–30

DEFINITIONS of security forces. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.219 Public Safety Radio System. Radio communication system used by fire protection agencies, emergency services or law enforcement agencies. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.220 Public Telephone Network. See 3.3.290, Carrier Telephony Network. 3.3.221 Public Access Fire Alarm Box. See 3.3.12, Fire Alarm Control Panel. 3.3.222* Qualified (Qualified). Competent and capable person or company who has completed the requirements and training for a specific area in a manner acceptable to the competent authority. [96, 2011] (SIG-TMS) 3.3.223 Radiant energy detection fire detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.224 Radio Alarm Relay Station Receiver (RARSR). System component that receives radio signals and is located at a repeater station located at a remote receiving location (SIG-SSS) 3.3.225 Radio Alarm Supervisory Station Receiver (RASSR)]. System component that receives data and reports it to the control center. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.226 Radio Alarm System (RAS). System in which signals from a Radio Alarm Transmitter (RAT) located in a protected building are transmitted via a radio channel to two or more Radio Alarm Repeater Station Receivers (RARSR) and notified by a Radio Alarm Repeater Receiver. Supervisory Station Radio Alarm (RASSR) located at ( SIG -SSS) 3.3.227 Radio Alarm Transmitter (RAT)]. System component, located in protected locations and to which devices or groups of tripping devices are connected, which transmits signals indicating a change in the state of these devices. (SIGSSS) 3.3.228 radio channel (radio channel). See 3.3.43, channel. 3.3.229* radio frequency (radio frequency). Number of frequency cycles of electromagnetic waves transmitted by radio in 1 second. [1221, 2013] (SIG-PRS) 3.3.230 Offset Detector (Tariff Offset Detector). See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.231 Response Rate Detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3,3,232 draw records. Drawings (as-built or "as-built") that document the location of all equipment, devices, wiring sequences, wiring methods, and system component connections when installed. (NEXT FUN)

72–31

3.3.233 Closing Act. Document attesting the characteristics of installation, operation (execution), service and equipment with the representation granted by the owner, system installer, system provider, service provider organization and competent authority. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.234 Activation of the fire alarm system. See 3.3.105 Fire alarm system. 3.3.235 Fire Alarm Control Unit Service Release. See 3.3.102, Fire Control Panel. 3.3.236 Relocation. Move occupants from a fire zone to a safe area within the same building. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.237 Remote Monitoring Station. See 3.3.283, monitoring station. 3.3.238 Remote Monitoring Station Alarm System. See 3.3.284 Monitoring station alarm system. 3.3.239 Remote Monitoring Station Service. See 3.3.285. monitoring station service. 3.3.240 repeater station. Location of equipment necessary for transmitting signals between monitoring stations, substations and protected facilities. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.241 reconfiguration (reset). A control function that attempts to return a system or device to its normal non-alarm state. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.242 Residential occupation in residences for the elderly and reception centers (occupation of residents and nursing). Occupancy of the home and accommodation of four or more residents without blood relationship or affinity with the owners or operators to provide personal care services.[101, 2012] (SIG-HOU) 3.3.243 ). Profession that provides sleeping accommodations for purposes other than medical care or confinement and correctional services.[101, 2012] (SIG-HOU) 3.3.244* Response (Response). Actions taken when a signal is received. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.244.1* Response to an alarm (Alarm Response). Response to reception of an alarm signal. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.244.2* Response to a pre-alarm (Pre-Alarm Response). Response to reception of a pre-alarm signal. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.244.3* Monitoring response. Response when receiving a heartbeat signal. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.244.4* Response to an error (Trouble Response). Response to receiving an error signal. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.245 Recoverable trigger device. See 3.3.132, Trigger Device. 3.3.246 Risk Analysis (Risk Analysis). process that enables

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

characterize the possibility, vulnerability and magnitude of incidents related to natural, technological and man-made disasters and other emergencies involving worrying scenarios, their probability and their possible consequences. (SIGECS) 3.3.247 Messenger (Executor). Persons not included in the required number of operators available at central, surveillance or intelligence stations (or otherwise in contact with such stations) for immediate deployment to protected facilities (SIG-SSS) 3.3.248 Intelligence service (corridor service ). Service provided by a courier on the protected premises, including restoring, resetting, and silencing any device that transmits fire alarm or surveillance or jamming signals to a location outside the premises. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.249 Scanner (Scanner). Equipment located in the telephone company's communications center that monitors each section of the branch and transmits status changes to the alarm center. Processors and related equipment may also be included. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.250 Secondary Trunk Facility. The portion of a transmission channel that connects two or more but less than the total number of branch sections to a trunk section. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.251 Selective talk mode. See 3.3.294 Conversation mode. 3.3.252 Separate sleeping area. The area of a dwelling in which bedrooms or beds are located. [720, 2012] (SIG-HOU) 3.3.253 maintenance service personnel (service personnel). See 3.3.193, Staff. 3,3,254 roof shapes. Roof shapes can be classified as sloped or flat. (SIG ID)

Carbon monoxide levels at or above the alert level that may pose a risk to the human safety of occupants and require immediate action. [720, 2012] (SIG-FUN) 3.3.257.3 sign of delinquency. Sign indicating the need for action associated with surveillance by surveillance personnel or system attendants. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.257.4 evacuation signal. A prominent alarm sign that lets occupants know they need to be evacuated from a building. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.257.5* Fire alarm signal (Fire alarm signal). Signal resulting from manual or automatic detection of a fire alarm condition. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.257.6* Patrol supervision signal. Signal generated when a guard activated a patrol reporting station while on patrol. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.257.7* Pre-alarm signal. Signal resulting from the detection of a pre-alarm condition. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.257.8 recovery signal. Signal resulting from the return to normal of an initial device, system element or system. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.257.9* Monitoring signal. Signal resulting from the detection of a monitoring condition. (SIGFUN) 3.3.257.10* Trouble signal. Signal resulting from the detection of an error condition. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.258 signal transmission sequence. The Digital Alarm Communicator (DACT) transmitter receives a dial tone, dials numbers from the Digital Alarm Communicator Receiver (DACR), receives confirmation that the DACR is ready to receive signals, transmits the signals, and receives confirmation that the DACR has accepted the signal before it disconnects (hangs up). (SIG-SSS)

3,3,255 store designs. Documents containing system information such as B. Property location, scaled floor plans, equipment wiring details, commonly used equipment installation details, standpipe details, wire/conductor sizes, and installation information. address and other information required by the installer to complete the installation of fire alarms. (NEXT FUN)

3.3.259 signal line circuit. Path of a loop between any combination of devices or addressable devices, loop interfaces, control units, or transmitters over which various system input or output signals, or both, are transported (SIG-PRO)

3.3.256 Auxiliary Bypass Alarm System. See 3.3.215 Public Emergency Notification System.

3,3,261 individual housing units. See 3.3.81, housing unit.

3.3.257* Sign. A message indicating a condition communicated by electrical, visual, audible, wireless or other means. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.257.1* Alarm signal (Alarm signal). Signal resulting from manual or automatic detection of an alarm condition. (SIGFUN) 3.3.257.2 Carbon Monoxide Alarm Signal. sign pointing to a

3.3.260 signal line circuit interface. See 3.3.137, Interface.

3.3.262 Single station alarm. Detector consisting of a mounting assembly containing a sensor, control components and an alarm annunciator in a unit operated by a power source internal to the unit or obtained at the installation site. (SIG-HOU) 3.3.263 Single Station Alarm Device. Assembly incorporating the detector, control equipment and audible alarm device in one unit powered by a power supply internal to the unit or obtained from the installation site (SIG-HOU)

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72-32

DEFINITIONS 3.3.264 Site Specific Software. See 3.3.272 Software. 3.3.265 pitched roof. See 3.3.35, cover slab. 3.3.266 Pitched gable roof. See 3.3.35, cover slab. 3.3.267 Shed sloped top. See 3.3.35, cover slab. 3.3.268 smoke detector. Alarm from one or more stations responding to smoke. (SIG-HOU) 3.3.269 Smoke detection. 3.3.269.1 Smoke detection in fog chamber. Principle by which an air sample is taken from the protected area into a high humidity chamber, combined with a pressure drop in the chamber to create an environment where the resulting moisture in the air condenses on any smoke particles present, forming a cloud. Cloud density is measured using a photoelectric principle. The density signal is processed and used to communicate an alarm condition when it meets predefined criteria. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.269.2* Ionization smoke detection. Principle in which a small amount of radioactive material is used to ionize the air between two electrodes of different charge to detect the presence of smoke particles. Smoke particles entering the ionization volume reduce the conductivity of the air, reducing ion mobility. The reduced conductance signal is processed and used to communicate an alarm condition when it meets predefined criteria. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.269.3* Smoke detection by photoelectric light obscuration. Principle using a light source and a light-sensitive sensor in which most of the source's emissions are concentrated. When smoke particles enter the light path, some of the light is scattered and some is absorbed, reducing the amount of light reaching the receiving sensor. The attenuation signal is processed and used to transmit an alarm condition when it meets predefined criteria. (SIG ID)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.269.4* Optoelectronic Light Scattering Smoke Detection. A principle that uses a light source and a light-sensitive sensor arranged so that rays from the light source do not normally strike the light-sensitive sensor. When smoke particles enter the light path, some of the light is scattered by reflection and refraction at the sensor. The light signal is processed and used to communicate an alarm condition when it meets predefined criteria. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.269.5* Video Image Smoke Detection (VISD). Principle that uses automatic real-time analysis of video images to detect the presence of smoke. (SIG-IDS) 3,3,270 smoke detectors. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.271 Smooth roof. See 3.3.37, Roof Surfaces.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72-33

3.3.272 Software (Software). Programs, instruments, procedures, data and the like executed by the central processing unit of a product and which affect the functional performance of that product. For purposes of this Code, software is one of two types: executive software and site-specific software. (SIG-TMS) 3.3.272.1 Executive Software (Executive Software). Control and monitoring program that manages the execution of all other programs and directly or indirectly generates the product functions necessary for their execution. Running software is sometimes called firmware, BIOS, or running program. (SIG-TMS) 3.3.272.2 Site Specific Software. A program separate from, but controlled by, the running software that allows inputs, outputs and system settings to be selectively set to meet the needs of a specific installation. In general, it defines the type and quantity of hardware, user-defined assignments, and specific operational characteristics of a system. (SIG-TMS) 3.3.273 Solid beam construction. See 3.3.37, Roof Surfaces. 3.3.274 distance (distance). Dimension measured horizontally, based on allowable range of fire detectors. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.275* Spark. Movable solid particle that emits radiant energy on its surface due to its temperature or the combustion process. [654, 2013] (SIG-IDS) 3.3.276 Spark/ember detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.277 Spark/Ember Detector Sensitivity. The amount in watts (or fraction of a watt) of radiant energy from a point source radiator, applied as a unit phase signal at the detector's maximum sensitivity wavelength, required to produce a detector alarm signal within the detector's alarm time. specified response. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.278 Point type detector. See 3.3.66, Detector. 3.3.279 Interested Party(ies). Any person, group or organization that may be affected, may be affected or perceive itself to be affected by the risk. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.280 Stratification. Phenomenon in which the upward movement of smoke and gases ceases due to loss of buoyancy. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.281 Subscriber (Subscriber). Recipients of one or more contracted monitoring station signal services. In the case of multiple non-contiguous buildings belonging to a single owner, the term refers to each of the protected establishments or to their extension to the local administration (SIG-SSS) 3.3.282. A substation is a normally unmanned location remote from the monitoring station and connected to the monitoring station by one or more communication channels. The interconnection of signals on one or more transmission channels from protected equipment to one or more transmission channels.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-34

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

This is where communication with the control center takes place. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.283 Monitoring Station. Installations that receive signals from the fire alarm systems of the protected premises and where personnel present at all times respond to these signals. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.283.1 Central Monitoring Station. A monitoring station listed for central station service and also commonly offering less stringent monitoring station services such as B. Remote Monitoring Services. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.283.2 Asset surveillance body (own surveillance body). Monitoring station in joint ownership with the fire detection system(s) of the protected premises it monitors (monitors) and at which alarm, supervisory or trouble signals are received and where personnel are present at all times to monitor the operation and examine the signals. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.283.3 Remote Monitoring Station. Monitoring station where alarm, supervisory or trouble signals, or any combination of these signals, are received from the protected premises fire detection systems and where personnel are present at all times to respond. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.284 Supervision of station alarm systems. 3.3.284.1 Central Station Service Alarm System. System or group of systems in which the operation of circuits and devices is automatically transmitted, recorded, maintained and monitored by a listed central station, consisting of competent and experienced servers and operators who, on receipt of a signal, take appropriate action as required by this code. Such a service must be controlled and operated by a person, company or entity whose business is the supply, maintenance or supervision of monitored alarm systems. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.284.2 Own Monitoring Center Alarm System. Installation of an alarm system for adjoining and non-adjoining properties below a property from a proprietary monitoring station located on the protected premises or at one of several non-adjoining protected premises constantly attended to by trained and competent personnel. Includes fire detection systems for protected premises, proprietary monitoring station, power supplies, signal activation devices, activation device circuits, signal annunciation devices, automatic recording devices, permanent and visual signals, and initiating devices of alarm. operation of emergency building control services. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.284.3 Remote Monitoring Station Alarm System. Fire detection system for protected installations (except those connected to a public emergency response system) where alarm, surveillance or trouble signals are automatically transmitted from a station, recorded and monitored

Remote monitoring with competent and experienced servers and operators who, upon receiving a signal, perform the actions required by this Code. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.285 Monitoring Station Service. 3.3.285.1 Call Center Service. Use of a system or group of systems, including fire detection systems for protected premises, whereby the operation of circuits and equipment is notified, recorded and supervised from a listed central station with competent and experienced personnel acting on receipt of a signal of action required by this Code. Associated activities at protected facilities, such as installation, inspection, testing, equipment maintenance and operator service, are the responsibility of the central station or a local listed alarm service company. The central station service must be controlled and operated by a person, company or corporation whose business it is to provide such contracted services or who own the protected premises. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.285.2 Own Monitoring Center Service. Use of a system or group of systems, including fire detection systems for protected locations, where the operation of circuits and equipment is signalled, recorded and supervised by a control station co-owned by the protected locations and which has competent operators and experienced personnel to intervene upon receipt of a signal as required by this Code. Associated activities at the protected site, such as installation, inspection, testing, equipment maintenance and operator service, are the responsibility of the owner. The proprietary monitoring station service is controlled and operated by the entity that owns the protected facility. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.285.3 Remote Supervision Station Service. Use of a system, including fire detection systems in protected installations, in which the operation of circuits and equipment is signaled, recorded and supervised by a control station composed of competent and experienced operators who, on receipt of a signal, will take action required by this Code. Activities related to protected facilities, such as B. Installation, inspection, testing and maintenance of equipment are the responsibility of the owner. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.286 Supervision Service. Service needed to monitor the conduct of patrols and the operational status of fixed suppression systems or other systems to protect people and property. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.287 supervision signal. See 3.3.257, sign. 3.3.288 Heartbeat Initiator Device. See 3.3.132, Trigger Device. 3.3.289 Supplementary. As used in this Code, supplemental refers to equipment or operations not required by this Code and designated as such by the appropriate authority. (NEXT FUN)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE DEFINITION

3.3.290.1 Loop Start Telephone Circuit. A loop-start telephone circuit is an analog telephone circuit that supports loop-start signaling as described in Telcordia GR-506CORE, Generic Requirements for Local Access Transport Area (LATA) Switching Systems: Signaling to Interface analog, or Telcordia GR-909-CORE, Generic Requirements for Fiber-in-Loop Systems. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.290.2 Public Telephone Network. Assembly Assembly of communications equipment and telephone service providers using managed facility-based voice networks (MFVNs) to allow the general public to establish communication channels through unique area codes. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.291 System Operator. Person trained to operate and/or activate a mass notification system. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.292 System Unit. Active sets in the control center to receive, process, display signals or record their changing state; Failure of any one of these subsets will result in the loss of multiple alarm signals from that unit. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.293 Haptic Notification Device. See 3.3.173, Notification Device. 3.3.294 Conversation mode (conversation mode). Means of communication within a general building used specifically for emergency functions. These are commonly known as firemen's phones, although they can also be used to communicate with firefighters and/or fire departments, including prison inmates, during an emergency, for example between a fire control center and a specific location, such as a ladder, staircase, or emergency kit location. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.294.1 General conversation mode. Ability to conference multiple phones into a single call. It is similar to what was previously known as Shared Line (SIG-ECS) 3.3.294.2 Polling Talk Mode. Ability for fire control center personnel to receive notification of incoming calls and select which call to answer. This includes the ability to switch between incoming calls and multi-phone conference locations. Selective calling can include the ability to initiate calls to emergency services. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.295 Personnel in charge of testing (testing personnel). See 3.3.193, Staff. 3.3.296 Audible Text Notification Apparatus. See 3.3.173, Notification Device. 3.3.297 Provision for visible text notifications. See 3.3.173, Notification Device.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

3.3.298 transmission channel. See 3.3.43, channel. 3,3,299 channels. System component that provides an interface between signal line circuitry, trip unit circuitry, or control unit circuitry, and the transmission channel. (SIG-SSS) 3,3,300 transponders (transponders). Group of multiplex functions of the alarm transmission system on protected objects. (SIG-SSS) 3.3.301 error signal. See 3.3.257, sign. 3.3.302 Two-Way Emergency Communication System. See 3.3.87, Emergency Communication System. 3.3.303 Public Emergency Notification System Type A. See 3.3.215 Public Emergency Notification System. 3.3.304 Public Emergency Notification System Type B. See 3.3.215 Public Emergency Notification System. 3.3.305 Accidental Alarm (Accidental Alarm). See 3.3.307.3. 3.3.306 Unknown alarm. See 3.3.307.4. 3.3.307*Unwanted alarm. Any activated alarm that is not the result of a potentially dangerous condition. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.307.1 Malicious alert. Unintentional activation of an alarm triggering device by a malicious person. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.307.2* False alarm. Unintentional activation of a signaling system or alarm triggering device in response to a stimulus or condition that is not the result of a potentially dangerous condition. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.307.3 Accidental alarm (Accidental alarm). Accidental activation of an alarm triggering device by an unintentional person. (SIG-FUN) 3.3.307.4 Unknown alarm. Accidental activation of a device that triggers an alarm or system output function whose cause has not been identified. (SIGFUN) 3.3.308 Uplink. Radio signal from public security service subscriber portable transmitter to base station receiver. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.309* Video Image Flame Detection (VIFD). Principle of automatic analysis of video images in real time to detect the presence of flames. (SIG-IDS) 3.3.310 Video Image Smoke Detection (VISD) See 3.3.269, Smoke Detection. 3.3.311 Visible Notification Device. See 3.3.173, Notification Device. 3.3.312 Voice Message Priority.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3.3.290 telephone network operator. A set of communication and exchange facilities jointly operated by authorized service providers that allow the general public to establish transmission paths through discrete voting. (SIG-SSS)

72–35

72-36

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Bulk notification prioritization scheme. (SIG ECS)

Chapter 5 Reserved

3.3.313 WATS (Wide Area Telephone Service). Phone company service that allows you to reduce costs for certain phone call arrangements. Using the inbound WATS system or the 800 service number, calls can be placed from anywhere in the continental United States to the destination of the call at no cost to the caller. Outbound WATS is a service that allows a subscriber to make an unlimited number of calls within a predetermined area from a designated telephone line, without incurring service charges, for a fixed fee and depending on the total duration of all calls. (SIG-SSS)

Chapter 6 Reserved

Chapter 7 Documentation 7.1 Application. (SIG-FUN) 7.1.1 The project documentation, acceptance and completion of the new systems required by the provisions of this Code must comply with the minimum requirements described in this chapter.

3.3.314*wavelength. Distance between the peaks of a sine wave. Any radiant energy can be described as a wave of a specific wavelength. Wavelength is used as a unit of measurement to distinguish different parts of the spectrum. Amplitude is measured in microns (µm), nanometers (nm), or angstroms (Å). (SIG ID)

7.1.2 Documentation of the modification, maintenance and testing of existing systems previously installed pursuant to this Code must comply with the minimum requirements described in this chapter.

3.3.315 Wide Area Mass Reporting System. See 3.3.87, Emergency Communication System.

7.1.3* Where required by applicable law, code or regulation, or any other part of this Code, the requirements of this chapter or parts thereof will apply.

3.3.316 Wide Area Signaling. Signage intended to provide warnings and information for outdoor open spaces, e.g. B. campus, neighborhood streets, a city, town, or community. (ADDRESS)

7.1.4 Except as required by any other applicable law, rule or regulation, the documentation requirements described in this Chapter do not apply to Chapter 29.

3.3.317 Wireless Control Unit. See 3.3.59, Control Unit.

7.1.5 This chapter describes documentation requirements, but does not prohibit the provision of additional documentation.

3.3.318 Wireless protection system. A system or part of a system that can send and receive signals without the aid of connecting cables. It must be able to consist of a wireless control unit or a wireless repeater. (SIG PRO)

7.1.6 The requirements contained in other chapters also apply, unless they conflict with what is specified in this chapter. 7.2* Minimum required documentation. (SIG-FUN) 7.2.1 When documentation is required by the compliance authority, the following list represents the minimum documentation required for all fire alarm and emergency communication systems, including new systems and additions or modifications to existing systems :

3.3.319 WiFi repeater. Component for transmitting signals between wireless devices, devices and control units. (SIG-PRO) 3.3.320 Zone (Zone). Delimited area within the protected premises. A zone can define an area from which a signal can be received or transmitted, or an area in which some type of control can be performed. (NEXT FUN)

(1)* Written narrative summary expressing the purpose and description of the system. (2) Schematic of risers (3) Layout plans showing location of all devices and control equipment (4) Workflow in an I/O matrix or form with description (5) Equipment datasheets (6) Manufacturer's published instructions, including operating and maintenance instructions (7) Battery calculations (if batteries are supplied) (8) Voltage drop calculations for detector circuits (9)* Complete record of inspections and tests in accordance with the provisions of 7.6.6 and 7.8. 2(10) Complete record of completion of installation in accordance with the terms of 7.5.6 and 7.8.2(11) Copy of site-specific software, if applicable

3.3.320.1* evacuation signal area. An area consisting of one or more detection zones in which signals are operated simultaneously. (SIG-ECS) 3.3.320.2 Notification area. A prominent area of a building bounded by the exterior walls of the building, the boundaries of a fire or smoke compartment, floor partitions or other fire safety divisions, of which occupants are expected to receive collective notice. (SIGPRO)

Chapter 4 Reserved

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

DOCUMENTATION

72–37

(12) Records drawings (as constructed) (13) Periodic inspection, testing and maintenance documentation as described in Section 7.6 (14) Records, record keeping and record keeping as described in Section 7.7

7.3.5.3 Fire detectors with radiant energy sensors. Radiant energy detection design documentation shall be provided in accordance with Clause 17.8.

7.2.2* The person responsible for the system design (layout) must be identified in the system design documents.

7.3.6.1 If it is necessary to carry out a risk analysis, the results and considerations of this analysis must be documented.

7.2.3 All fire detection system drawings shall use the symbols described in NFPA 170, Standard for Safety and Emergency Fire Symbols, or other symbols accepted by the appropriate authority. 7.3 Project documentation (layout). 7.3.1* The requirements of Section 7.3 apply only where required by any other applicable law, regulation or rule; In other parts of this Code; or in project plans or specifications. (SIG-FUN) 7.3.2* When required by applicable law, code or standard, or any other part of this Code, design (design) documentation shall be prepared prior to installation of new systems. (SIG-ECS) 7.3.3* When required by applicable law, code or standard, or any other part of this Code, preliminary plans should be prepared. (SIG ECS)

7.3.6 Risk Analysis Documentation. (SIG-ECS)

7.3.6.2 If so determined by the interested parties, the security and protection of the risk analysis documentation must comply with the provisions of point 7.3.7 and number 7.7. 7.3.6.3 The risk analysis documentation must detail the different scenarios evaluated and the expected results. 7.3.6.4 The risk analysis for mass reporting systems shall be documented in accordance with the provisions of 7.3.6 and 24.3.11. 7.3.7* Performance-based design documentation. 7.3.7.1 The performance-based design documentation for fire detection must comply with the provisions of clause 17.3. (SIG ID)

7.3.4 Notice. (ADDRESS)

7.3.7.2 Performance-related design documentation for flashing lights (strobe lights) shall comply with the provisions of 18.5.5.6.2. (ADDRESS)

7.3.4.1* The requirements set out in 7.3.4 apply only where required by any other applicable law, code or standard, or elsewhere in this Code.

7.3.7.3 A copy of the approval documentation resulting from performance-based projects shall be attached to the registration plans as specified in 7.5.6. (NEXT FUN)

7.3.4.2 The documentation specified in 7.3.4 will be required, in whole or in part, by any other applicable law, code or regulation, or elsewhere in this Code.

7.3.8 Emergency plan documentation. (SIGECS)

7.3.4.3 Design documentation shall include design and ambient audible sound pressure levels in accordance with the provisions of 18.4.1.4.3. 7.3.4.4 The analysis and design documentation for narrowband audio signaling must comply with the provisions of 18.4.6.4. 7.3.4.5 The Acoustic Distinction Space (ADS) documentation must comply with the provisions of 18.4.10. 7.3.4.6 Design documents must indicate which spaces and areas will have visible notice and which will not, as described in 18.5.2.1. 7.3.4.7 Performance-based design alternatives for flashing light (strobe) design shall meet the provisions of 18.5.5.6.2. 7.3.5 Detection. (SIG-IDS) 7.3.5.1 Fire detectors with thermal sensors. Heat detection design documentation shall be provided in accordance with Section 17.6. 7.3.5.2 Fire detectors with smoke sensors. Design documentation for smoke detection shall be provided in accordance with Clause 17.7. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

7.3.8.1 When it is necessary to develop an emergency plan, eg. B. for a mass reporting system, the results of the plan must be documented. 7.3.8.2 If so determined by the interested parties, the security and protection of the emergency response plan documentation must comply with the provisions of point 7.7.3. 7.3.8.3 The emergency plan must document the different scenarios evaluated and the expected results. 7.3.9 Assessment Documentation. (SIG-FUN) 7.3.9.1* The evaluation documentation, as indicated in items 23.4.3.1 and 24.4.3.24.2, must contain one or more statements signed by the person responsible for the project and evaluation and the result that prove the technical performance of the decision and that you find them reliable and acceptable for the specific application. 7.3.9.2 A copy of the assessment documentation shall be retained for the life of the system, to be retained with the documents required in 7.7.1.6. 7.4 Workshop plans (installation documentation). (SIGFUN) 7.4.1* The requirements of Section 7.4 apply only where required by any other applicable law, regulation or rule; In other parts of this Code; or in project plans or specifications.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

7.4.2* The business plans must be drawn up on the scale specified in sheets of uniform size with plans of each floor. 7.4.3 The workshop plans for the fire detection and emergency communication systems must contain the basic information and serve as a basis for the registration plans (as built) required by the provisions of 7.5.2. 7.4.4 Registration plans shall include the following information: (1) Name of protected facility, owner and occupants (if applicable) (2) Name of installer or contractor (3) Location of protected facility (4) Legend and symbols on device in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 170 or other symbols accepted by the appropriate authority. (5) Date of issue and any changes 7.4.5 Floor plans must be drawn to the specified scale and must include the following information, as appropriate for the specific system: (1) Floor or level identification (2) Orientation ( indicates north ) (3) Graphic scale (4) All walls and doors (5) All partitions extending up to 15 percent of ceiling height (if applicable and if this information is known) (6) Descriptions of rooms and areas ( 7) Equipment / system component locations (8) Fire alarm main power disconnect means locations (9) Monitoring/control interface locations with other systems (10) System screw locations (11) Type and number of devices/system components on each circuit, floor, or level (12) Type and number of conductors and conduits (if used) for each circuit c (13) Identification of all ceilings greater than 3.0 m (10 ft) ) when a system an automatic fire detection system is proposed with rd (14) Details of roof geometries, including rafters and solid beams, where an automatic fire detection system is proposed (15) When known, the acoustic properties of compartments 7.4.6 As plans of installation risers must be coordinated with the floor and must contain the following information: (1) General arrangement of the system in the cross-section of the building (2) Number of risers (3) Type and number of circuits in each riser (4) Type and number of devices/system components on each loop, on each floor or level (5) Number wire per loop 7.4.7 Control Unit Plans All Control Units (i.e. h Devices listed as controller or controller accessory must be provided). controller), power supplies, battery chargers and detectors and must contain the following information:

(1) Identification of control equipment shown (2) Location(s) of control equipment (3) All field wiring terminals and terminal designations (4) All field connected circuits and field wiring terminals circuit field (5) All displays and hand controls ( 6) Field connections to signaling equipment, display equipment, or monitoring station emergency security control interfaces, if applicable. 7.4.8 Typical wiring diagrams shall be provided for all tripping devices, notification appliances, remote displays, detectors, remote test stations and power supply and end-of-line monitoring devices. 7.4.9* A detailed schematic or matrix of I/O operations shall be provided to describe the sequence of operations. 7.4.10 System calculations shall include the following: (1) Battery calculations (2) Notification device circuit voltage drop calculations (3) Other required calculations, such as: B. Line resistance calculations, if required 7.5 Documentation of Completion. 7.5.1* The requirements of Section 7.5 apply only where required by any other applicable law, regulation or rule; In other parts of this Code; or in project plans or specifications. (SIG-FUN) 7.5.2 Before requesting final approval of the installation, the contractor responsible for the installation shall, if required by the competent authority, provide a written declaration that the system has been installed in accordance with the approved requirements. Designs and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and applicable NFPA requirements. (SIG-FUN) 7.5.3 All systems, including new systems and additions or modifications to existing systems, must include the following documentation, which must be provided to the Owner or Owner's Representative upon acceptance of the system: (1) * By user manual and instructions published by the manufacturer covering all system equipment (2) Approval plans (as constructed) as required by 7.5.5(3) A complete record of completion as per 7.5. 6(4) For software-based systems, a copy of the site-specific software registration per 7.5.7 (SIG-FUN) 7.5.4 Owner's manuals for emergency communication systems shall conform to the provisions of Section 24.8. (GIS-ECS) 7.5.5 Record plans (according to the plan). (NEXT FUN)

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72–38

DOCUMENTATION 7.5.5.1 Record drawings must consist of current factory drawings and drawings that reflect the actual installation of all devices, components and wiring in the system. 7.5.5.2* An operational sequence in input/output matrix or narration format shall be provided with recording times to reflect actual time at the time of completion. 7.3.5.3 Where applicable, modified calculations shall be provided in accordance with the provisions of 7.4.10 showing changes due to installation conditions. 7.5.5.4 The approval plans must be delivered to the owner with a copy kept in the documentation cabinet as established in number 7.7. 7.5.5.5* Record plans shall include approval documentation resulting from deviations, performance-based designs, risk analysis and other deviations or system assessments. 7.5.6 Minutes of Closing. (SIG-FUN) 7.5.6.1* The Closing Protocol must be documented in accordance with the provisions of Clause 7.5.6, through the Closing Forms, Figure 7.8.2(a) to Figure 7.8.2(f), or an alternative document containing only the items in Figure 7.8.2(a) to Figure 7.8.2(f) that apply to the installed system. 7.5.6.2* Completion Protocol documentation must be completed by the installation contractor and submitted to the Compliance Authority and Owner upon completion of the task. Documentation of the completion protocol may form part of the written statement required in 7.5.2 and part of the document demonstrating compliance with the requirements of 7.5.8. If more than one contractor is responsible for the installation, each contractor must complete sections of that contractor's documentation. 7.5.6.3* The preparation of completion record documentation will be the responsibility of the Qualified and Competent Person as specified in 10.5.2. 7.5.6.4 The Closure Protocol documentation will be updated to reflect any additions or changes to the system and will always be kept up to date. 7.5.6.5 The updated copy of the termination registration documents must be kept in a documentation cabinet as described in 7.7.2. 7.5.6.6 Modifications. 7.5.6.6.1 Any changes to the fire detection or signaling system made after the initial installation must be recorded in a modified version of the original completion documents. 7.5.6.6.2 The modified final document shall contain the date of modification. 7.5.6.6.3* If the original or most recent System Completion Report is not available, a new System Completion Report documenting the configuration must be provided.

--`,,`,``,`````,``

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72–39

of the system as observed during work on the current project. 7.5.6.7 Electronic Closing Law. 7.5.6.7.1 If approved by the competent authority, the record of completion may be on an electronic file instead of on paper. 7.5.6.7.2 If the file is electronic, the final document of the protocol must be accessible through standard software and have a backup copy. 7.5.7 Site-specific software documentation shall comply with the provisions of Section 14.6.1.2. (SIG-TMS) 7.5.8* Installation conformity verification. (SIGFUN) 7.5.8.1 When required by the competent authority, the compliance of the entire installation with the requirements of this Code, implemented by reference codes, specifications or other criteria applicable to the specific installation, must be certified by a qualified and impartial technician third-party organization accepted by the competent authority. 7.5.8.2 Verification of the conformity of the installation must be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the test methods and requirements indicated in points 14.4.1 and 14.4.2. 7.5.8.3 Verification shall ensure that: (1) All components and functions are installed and functioning as specified in the approved drawings and order of operation. (2) All required system documentation is complete and on-site. (3) For new monitoring station systems, verification will also verify the proper location, transmission and reception of all signals that are to be transmitted off-site and meet the requirements of 14.4.1 and 14.4. (4) For existing control center systems that have been extended, modified or reconfigured, verification is required only for the new task and retesting is permitted in accordance with Chapter 14. (5) Written confirmation has been provided that all necessary corrections actions have been completed. 7.5.9 Central station service documentation shall conform to 26.3.4. (SIG-SSS) 7.5.10 The remote station's service documentation must comply with the provisions of 26.5.2. (SIG-SSS) 7.6 Inspection, Test and Maintenance Documentation. (SIGTMS) 7.6.1 The documentation of the test plans must be provided in accordance with the provisions of 14.2.10. 7.6.2 The quality test documentation must be provided in accordance with the provisions of 14.6.1. 7.6.3 Documentation of the retest must be provided in accordance with the provisions of 14.6.1.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–40

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

7.6.4 The documentation of the recurrent tests and tests will be presented in accordance with the provisions of points 14.6.2 to 14.6.4. 7.6.5 Decommissioning documentation will be provided in accordance with Section 10.21. 7.6.6 Inspection and Test Record. The record of all inspections, tests and maintenance in accordance with 14.6.2.4 shall be documented using the Inspection and Test Record Forms, Figure 7.8.2(g) to Figure 7.8.2(l) or an alternative record containing all applicable data . some information shown in Figure 7.8.2(g) to Figure 7.8.2(l). 7.7 Records, Record Keeping and Record Keeping. 7.7.1 Records. (SIG-FUN) 7.7.1.1 A complete record of testing and operation of each system shall be retained until the next test and for a period of 1 year thereafter, unless more stringent requirements are specified elsewhere in this Code . 7.7.1.2* The recording must be available for evaluation and, if applicable, reported to the competent authority. Archiving of records in any format should be permitted if paper copies of these records can be readily provided upon request. 7.7.1.3 If off-site monitoring is envisaged, records of all signals, tests and operations observed at the monitoring station, including the public emergency notification system, shall be retained for a period of at least 1 year, unless that stricter requirements are placed on the monitoring station. others specified in this Code.

7.7.3.1 The security of system documentation is determined by interested parties. 7.7.3.2* When such documents cannot be protected from public access, confidential information may be removed from the registration documents provided that the owner keeps the complete documentation accessible to the competent authority in a place designated by the owner. 7.8 Forms. 7.8.1 General. 7.8.1.1* The requirements of Section 7.8 apply only where required by any other applicable law, regulation or rule; In other parts of this Code; or in project plans or specifications. (SIG-FUN) 7.8.1.2 When specific forms are required by any other applicable law, code or standard; In other parts of this Code; or in design drawings or bills of quantities, shapes with patterns and content that deviate from the provisions of Section 7.8 are permitted, provided they present the minimum required content. (SIG-FUN) 7.8.2* Forms for final reports, inspection and test reports and risk analysis. Unless otherwise permitted or required in 7.5.6, 7.6.6 or 7.8.1.2, the forms shown in Figure 7.8.2(a) through Figure 7.8.2(l) shall be used to document the final record and the inspection and test report. . (NEXT FUN)

Chapter 8 Reserved

7.7.1.4 The necessary documents on the structure and functioning of the system must be maintained during the useful life of the system. 7.7.1.5 Modifications and changes made to the systems shall be recorded and these records shall be maintained with the original system design documents.

Chapter 9 Reserved

7.7.1.6* The system documents must be stored in the documentation cabinet in accordance with point 7.7.2. 7.7.2 Access to Documents. (NEXT FUN)

Chapter 10 Basic

10.1 Application

7.7.2.1 With any new system, a documentation cabinet must be installed in the system's control unit or other approved location in the protected area. 7.7.2.2* All registration documents must be kept in the documentation cabinet. 7.7.2.3 If the documentation cabinet is not located next to the system control unit, its location must be identified on the system control unit. 7.7.2.4 The documentation cabinet must be clearly marked with the words: SYSTEM REGISTRATION DOCUMENTS.

10.1.1 The basic functions of a complete fire detection or signaling system must meet the requirements of this section. 10.1.2 The requirements of this chapter are applicable to the systems, equipment and components mentioned in chapters 12, 14, 17, 18, 21, 23, 24, 26 and 27. 10.1.3 The requirements of chapter 7 apply when they are mentioned in Chapter 10.

7.7.2.5 The contents of the cabinet must be accessible only to authorized personnel.

10.2 Purpose. The purpose of fire detection and signaling systems is primarily to report alarm, observation and fault conditions; alert occupants; Call for help and control of emergency control functions.

7.7.3 Document Security. (SIG ECS)

10.3 Equipment.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-41

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-42

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,`

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-43

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-44

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72–45

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-46

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-47

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72-48

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-49

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

THE ESSENTIAL

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72–50

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-51

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-52

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-53

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-54

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72-55

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72-56

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-57

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72-58

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-59

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–60

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-61

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-62

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72-63

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72-64

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

72–65

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72-66

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–67

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

THE ESSENTIAL

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72–68

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

THE ESSENTIAL

10.3.2 System components must be installed, tested, inspected and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and this Code. 10.3.3* All devices and apparatus which derive their power from the trigger circuit or signal wire circuit of a control unit shall be listed for use with the control unit. 10.3.4 Any equipment that must be rewound or reset to continue normal operation must be restored to its normal state and maintained in normal operating condition as soon as possible after any abnormal condition. 10.3.5 The device shall be designed to perform its functions under the following conditions: (1)* At 85 percent and 110 percent of the nameplate primary (primary) and secondary (spare) input voltages ( 2 ) On ambient temperatures of 0 °C (32 °F) and 49 °C (120 °F) (3) At 85% relative humidity and ambient temperature of 30 °C (86 °F)

against unauthorized use. 10.5 Personnel Qualifications. 10.5.1 System Designer. 10.5.1.1 Drawings and specifications for fire detection systems and emergency communication systems shall be developed in accordance with the provisions of this Code by persons experienced in the design, use, installation and proper testing of the systems. 10.5.1.2 State or local certification requirements must be followed to determine personnel qualifications. In accordance with state or local certification regulations, qualified personnel must include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following: (1) personnel registered, licensed, or certified by a state or local agency (2) certified personnel by a nationally certified body organization is recognized certification certification accepted by the appropriate authority (3) Personnel who have been factory trained and certified in the design of fire detection systems and in the design of emergency communication systems of the specific type and manufacture and accepted by the competent authority

10.4 Installation and Design.

10.5.1.3 The system designer must be identified in the system design documents.

10.4.1* All systems must be installed in accordance with the specifications and standards approved by the competent authority.

10.5.1.4 The system designer shall provide evidence of their qualifications or certifications, if requested by the competent authority.

10.4.2 Devices and appliances must be arranged and installed in such a way that unintentional operation or failure is not caused by vibration or shock.

10.5.2 System Installer.

10.4.3 The device must be installed in locations where the conditions do not exceed the voltage, temperature and humidity limits specified in the instructions published by the manufacturer. 10.4.4* In areas that are not continuously occupied, automatic smoke detection shall be provided at the location of each fire alarm control panel, detector power extension circuit, and monitoring station transmitting equipment to report a fire at that location. Exception: Where environmental conditions prohibit the installation of automatic smoke detection systems, automatic heat detection is permitted. 10.4.5 Initiation Devices. 10.4.5.1 Manual or automatic activation devices must be selected and installed to minimize false or inadvertent alarms. 10.4.5.2 Releasing devices shall meet the requirements of Chapter 17 and Chapter 23. 10.4.5.3 All manual alarms shall be activated from a manual fire alarm control panel or via a switch operated or located in a locked cabinet with key or equivalent protection.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

10.5.2.1 Personnel responsible for installing fire detection systems and emergency communication systems must be qualified or supervised by persons qualified to install, inspect and test the systems. 10.5.2.2 State or local certification requirements must be followed to determine personnel qualifications. In accordance with state or local certification regulations, qualified personnel must include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following: (1) personnel registered, licensed, or certified by a state or local agency (2) certified personnel by a nationally certified body organization is recognized certification accepted by the competent authority (3) Personnel trained and certified for the installation of fire detection systems and for the installation of emergency communication systems of a specific type and brand and which are accepted by the competent authority. 10.5. 2.3 The system installer must prove their qualifications and/or certifications upon request from the responsible body. 10.5.3* Inspection, testing, maintenance and repair personnel. (SIG-TMS) Personnel, either individually or through their affiliation with an organization registered, licensed, or certified by a state or local agency, must be recognized as qualified and experienced in inspection, testing, and testing.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

10.3.1 Equipment constructed and installed in accordance with this Code must be listed for the purpose for which it is used.

72-69

72–70

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Maintenance of previous systems provided for in this Code. 10.5.3.1* Inspection Personnel. Inspections will be carried out by personnel who, thanks to their training and experience, have developed the appropriate skills acceptable to the competent authority or who fulfill the requirement of point 10.5.3.3. 10.5.3.2* Personnel responsible for examinations. The personnel in charge of the tests must have the necessary knowledge and experience for the tests of the fire detection and signaling devices described in this Instruction that are accepted by the competent authority or that comply with the requirements of point 10.5.3.3. 10.5.3.3 maintenance and repair personnel. Maintenance and repair personnel must be qualified to maintain and repair the systems mentioned in the scope of this Code. Qualified personnel must include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following: (1)* Factory trained personnel certified for the specific type and brand of system being serviced (2)* Personnel certified by a recognized certification organization nationally, acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (3)* Personnel, either individually or through their affiliation with an organization, registered, licensed or certified by a state or local agency to provide service on systems within the scope of this Code (4) Personnel employed and qualified by an organization listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for service systems within the scope of this Code. 10.5.3.4 Programming. Personnel responsible for programming a system must be certified by the system manufacturer. 10.5.3.5 Qualification Test. Evidence of qualification must be submitted to the competent authority, if required. 10.5.4 Supervision of station operators. (SIG-SSS) 10.5.4.1 All operators working at the monitoring station shall demonstrate competence in all assigned duties in accordance with Chapter 26 in one or more of the following: (1) be certified by the receiver manufacturer (2) ) )* Be certified by an organization acceptable to the Jurisdictional Authority (3) Have received a license or certification from a state or local authority (4) Have received other training or certification approved by the Competent Authority of the Jurisdictional Authority 10.5.4.2 Must be provided proof of qualifications and/or certifications, if required by the competent authority. The list of licenses or qualifications must be updated in accordance with the requirements of the issuing authority or organisation. 10.5.4.3 Trainee operators shall be under the direct supervision of a qualified operator until they have obtained the qualification required in 10.5.4.1.

10.6 Power Sources. 10.6.1 Scope. The provisions of this section apply to power supplies used for fire detection systems in protected premises, monitoring station alarm systems, public emergency alarm systems, and emergency communication systems and equipment. 10.6.2 Compliance with the Code. All power supplies must be installed in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, for such equipment and the requirements set forth in this subsection. 10.6.3 Power Sources. 10.6.3.1 The electrical supply must comply with the provisions of point 10.6.3.2 or point 10.6.4. 10.6.3.2 Unless configured in accordance with 10.6.4, at least two independent and reliable sources of power, one primary and one secondary, shall be provided. 10.6.3.3 Each power supply must have adequate capacity for the application. 10.6.3.4 The control of the integrity of the electrical supply will be carried out in accordance with the provisions of item 10.5.9.6. 10.6.4 Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS). 10.6.4.1 The UPS device shall be configured for a Type O, Class 24, Level 1 system in accordance with NFPA 111, Standard for Error Signals for Stored Standby and Emergency Power Systems in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.15. 10.6.5 Primary Power Supply. 10.6.5.1 Branch. The branch circuit supplying fire detection equipment or emergency communication systems must not feed any other loads and must be powered by one of the following sources: (1) Commercial power and light. (2) A motor generator, or an equivalent generator as defined in 10.5.10.2, which is used at all times by a person specially trained in its operation. (3) A motor generator, or equivalent generator, produced in accordance with 10.5.10.2 in conjunction with light and commercial power, and used at all times by a person specially trained in its operation. 10.6.5.2 Circuit identification and accessibility. 10.6.5.2.1 The location of the branch circuit disconnect device shall be permanently marked on the control unit. 10.6.5.2.2 The means of isolating the system circuit shall be permanently marked as to its purpose, in accordance with the following: (1) "FIRE ALARM" for fire detection systems

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

PRINCIPLES (2) "EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION" for emergency communication systems (3) "FIRE ALARM/ECS (or SCE)" for combined fire alarm and emergency communication systems shall have a red mark. 10.6.5.2.4 The red mark must not damage overcurrent protection devices or cover the manufacturer's markings. 10.6.5.2.5 The means for disconnecting the circuit must be accessible only to authorized persons. 10.6.5.3 Mechanical protection. Branch circuits and connections must be protected from physical damage. 10.6.5.4 Circuit Breaker Interlock. When a circuit breaker is the disconnecting means, a circuit breaker interlock device must be installed. 10.6.5.5 Overcurrent Protection. An overcurrent protective device of sufficient capacity to support a load and capable of interrupting the maximum short-circuit current to which it can be subjected must be provided on each ungrounded conductor. 10.6.6* Continuity of Power Supply. 10.6.6.1 The secondary power supply shall automatically power the protected building system within 10 seconds if the primary power supply does not provide the minimum voltage required for proper operation. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

10.6.6.2 The secondary power source shall automatically supply power to monitoring station facilities and equipment within 60 seconds if the primary power source does not supply the minimum voltage required for proper operation. 10.6.6.3 Required signals must not be lost, interrupted or delayed for more than 10 seconds as a result of a primary power failure. 10.6.6.3.1 Storage batteries used specifically for the system or UPS and arranged in accordance with the provisions of NFPA 111, Standard for Emergency Power Systems and Stored Reserve, are permitted to supplement the secondary power source to supply the power needed during operation. Transfer warranty period. 10.6.6.3.2 When a UPS is used as specified in 10.6.6.3.1, a positive means shall be provided to isolate the input and output of the UPS system while maintaining continuity of power to the load. 10.6.7 Secondary Power Supply. 10.6.7.1 Secondary Power Operation. 10.6.7.1.1 Secondary power operation must not affect the required performance of a monitoring station or monitoring station system, including alarm, monitoring and fault indications and signals. Exception: When operating with secondary current monitoring

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72-71

the audio amplifier should only be needed in the presence of an alarm. 10.6.7.2* Capacity. 10.6.7.2.1 The secondary power supply must have sufficient capacity to operate the system with idle load (system operation without an alarm condition) for at least 24 hours and, at the end of this period, must be able to respond to any alarm. notification devices required for evacuation or directing assistance to the scene of an emergency, for 5 minutes, except as permitted or required by the following: (1) Battery calculations must include a 20 percent safety margin. percent of the calculated ampere-hour rating . (2) The secondary power source for the building's emergency fire alarm/voice communication service must be capable of operating the system at idle load for at least 24 hours and then operating the system during a fire or other emergency situation for a specified period of time 15 minutes at maximum connected load. (3) The capacity of the secondary power supply for the monitoring station facilities and equipment must be capable of supporting operation for at least 24 hours. (4) The secondary power supply for high-power loudspeaker arrays used for large-area bulk messaging systems shall meet the provisions of 24.4.4.4.2.2. (5) The secondary power supply for visible text display devices shall comply with the provisions of paragraph 24.4.4.4.7.1. (6) Secondary power supply capacity for large-scale mass notification systems Emergency call centers must be able to support operations for at least 24 hours. (7) The secondary power supply for buildings of mass notification systems shall be capable of operating the system at idle load for at least 24 hours and, in case of emergency, for at least 24 hours for a period of 15 minutes per month. Maximum connected. burden. (8) Secondary power supplies for enhanced two-way radio communication systems must meet the provisions of 24.5.2.5.5. 10.6.7.2.2 The required capacity of the secondary power source shall include all loads on the power source that are not automatically disconnected when switching to the secondary power source. 10.6.7.3* Secondary power supply for fire alarm systems and emergency communication systems in protected premises. 10.6.7.3.1 The secondary power source shall consist of one of the following: (1) A storage battery used specifically for the system laid out in accordance with 10.6.10. (2) An automatic ignition motor generator used for the branch circuit application specified in 10.6.5.1

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-72

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

and arranged in accordance with the provisions of point 10.6.11.3.1 and accumulators used specifically for the system with a capacity of 4 hours, arranged as described in point 10.6.10 Control unit and not part of the device, must be protected against damage. 10.6.7.4 Secondary power supply for monitoring station installations. 10.6.7.4.1 The secondary power source shall consist of one of the following: (1) Storage batteries for monitoring station equipment as specified in 10.6.10. (2) A branch circuit comprising an engine-driven self-starting generator arranged in accordance with 10.6.11.3.2.1 and 10.6.11.3.2.2 and 4-hour capacity monitoring station equipment accumulators implemented in accordance with 10.6.10 . (3) A branch circuit with generators driven by a multiple engine, at least one of which is automatically started in accordance with the provisions of 10.6.11.3.2.1 and 10.6.11.3.2.2. 10.6.7.4.2 When a secondary source of power is used to monitor station equipment, the provisions of 10.6.7.4.1(3) state that: 1) Each generator must be capable of supplying the required power. 2) Generators with manual start meet the requirements specified in 10.6.11.3.2.3 and 10.6.11.3.2.4. 3) Whenever manual starting generators are used, a person trained in this generator starting procedure will be on standby at all times.

an error signal as described in Section 10.15. 10.6.9.1.2 When the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) is powered by a control unit of the fire detection system of protected installations, the indication of power failure must comply with the provisions of number 10.6.9.1. 10.6.9.1.3 Monitoring of a power supply for auxiliary devices is not required. 10.6.9.1.4 Monitoring of the neutral conductor of a three-, four-, or five-wire alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) power supply is not required. 10.6.9.1.5 Monitoring of the main power supply by a central station is not required, provided that the fault condition is indicated as obvious to the operator on duty. 10.6.9.1.6 Monitoring the power of a motor-generator forming part of the secondary power source is not required, provided the generator is checked weekly in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 14.10.6 9.2* Power supplies and monitoring wiring of digital alarm communication systems shall comply with Sections 10.6, 10.6.9, 10.19 and 12.6. 10.6.9.3* Unless prohibited by an authority having jurisdiction, monitoring station alarm systems shall be configured to delay the transmission of primary blackout signals for a period between 60 minutes and 180 minutes. 10.6.9.4 Performance monitoring devices must be configured so that they do not interfere with the reception of alarm signals or fire supervision.

10.6.8 Power supply for remote location control equipment.

10.6.10* Storage batteries.

10.6.8.1* Additional power sources, when provided for control units, interface circuits or other equipment essential for system operation and located away from the main control unit, shall consist of a primary and secondary power source, which meets the same requirements as in 10.6 .1 bis 10.6.6 and 10.6.9.

10.6.10.1.1 Batteries must be marked with the month and year of manufacture in month/year format.

10.6.8.2 The location of each remote power source must be marked both on the main control unit and on the recording plans. The control unit display identification must be acceptable.

10.6.10.2 Location. Storage batteries must be located so that the equipment, including overcurrent protective devices, are not affected by battery gases and must meet the requirements specified in NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Section 480.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

10.6.8.3 The main control unit display shall meet the requirement set out in 10.6.8.2. 10.6.8.4 The location of any remote delivery must be identified in the registration plans. 10.6.9 Supervision of the integrity of the power supplies. 10.6.9.1 Unless required or permitted in 10.6.9.1.3 and 10.6.9.1.6, all primary and secondary power supplies shall be monitored for the presence of voltage at the point of connection to the system. 10.6.9.1.1 Failure of any of the supplies shall result in

10.6.10.1 Bookmarks.

10.6.10.1.2 If the manufacturer does not mark the battery with the month/year, the installer must obtain the date code and mark the battery with the month/year of manufacture.

10.6.10.2.1 Cells must be adequately insulated from earth. 10.6.10.2.2 Cells must be adequately isolated from crosses. 10.6.10.2.3 The cells must be mounted in such a way that they are protected against mechanical damage. 10.6.10.2.4 Frames must be adequately protected against damage. 10.6.10.2.5 When not in or adjacent to the control unit, the location of batteries and their chargers must be permanently marked on the control unit.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

BASICS 10.6.10.3 Battery charging. 10.6.10.3.1 Adequate facilities shall be provided to automatically maintain this battery fully charged under all normal operating conditions. 10.6.10.3.2 Adequate facilities shall be provided for recharging batteries within 48 hours after fully charged batteries have undergone a discharge-only cycle as specified in 10.6.7.2. 10.6.10.3.3 After receiving a full charge, the charge rate must not be so high as to damage the batteries. 10.6.10.3.4* Batteries must be drip or suspended charged. 10.6.10.3.5 Every rectifier used as a battery charge source must have the correct capacity. A rectifier used as a load medium must be powered by an isolation transformer. 10.6.10.4 Overcurrent Protection. 10.6.10.4.1 Batteries are protected from excessive charging current by overcharging devices. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

10.6.10.4.2 Batteries are protected against excessive charging current by overload devices or by automatic current limiting design at the load source. 10.6.10.5 Measurement. Charging devices must have built-in measuring devices or easily accessible connection devices for connecting portable measuring devices with which the charging voltage and charging current of batteries can be determined. 10.6.10.6 Battery charger integrity supervision. 10.6.10.6.1 The batteries and charger used must have adequate integrity monitoring means for detecting battery charger failure. 10.6.10.6.2 Failure of the battery charger shall result in activation of a fault signal in accordance with Section 10.15. 10.6.11 Engine Driven Generators. 10.6.11.1 Application and Installation. The application and installation of motor generators is carried out in accordance with the provisions of 10.6.11.2 to 10.6.11.7. 10.6.11.2 Main Power Supply. 10.6.11.2.1 Motor-powered generators arranged as the primary supply must be of an approved design. 10.6.11.2.2 Engine-powered generators provided as the primary supply shall be installed in an approved manner. 10.6.11.3 Secondary Energy Sources. 10.6.11.3.1 Protected facilities. 10.6.11.3.1.1 Engine driven generators used to supply secondary power to a fire detection system or emergency communication system in a listed building shall comply with NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency Power Systems, Backup and Secondaries, Chapter 4, Requirements for a Type 10 Class 24 Level 1 System.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72-73

10.6.11.3.1.2 The installation of engine-driven generators used to supply secondary power to a protected location fire detection system or emergency communication system shall meet the provisions of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Section 700. 10.3.11.3. 1.3 Where circuit survivability is required in another section of the Code, equivalent protection shall be provided for supply circuits. 10.6.11.3.2 Monitoring station. 10.6.11.3.2.1 Automatic starter motor driven generators used to supply secondary power to a monitoring station shall meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Standard for Backup and Emergency Power Systems, for a Type 60, Class 24, Level 2. 11.3.2.2 The installation of automatic starter driven generators used to provide secondary power to a monitoring station shall comply with the provisions of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 701. 10.6.11.3.2.3 The generators manual starters used to provide secondary power to a monitoring station must meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Standard for Standby Power Systems and Emergency Requirements for a Type M, Class 24, Level 2, compliant, engine driven generators used for a license to supply secondary power to a power station monitoring must be in accordance with the provisions of NFPA 70, Code El National Electrical Code, Article 702. 10.6.11.4 Performance, Operation, Test and Maintenance. Engine generator performance, operation, testing, and maintenance requirements must comply with the provisions of NFPA 110, Standard for Standby and Emergency Power Systems. 10.6.11.5 Capacity. The device must have sufficient capacity to operate the system under normal full load conditions, in addition to any other requirements imposed on the device. 10.6.11.6 Fuel. Unless required or permitted in 10.6.11.6.1 to 10.6.11.6.3, sufficient fuel shall be available for 6 test months plus the capacity specified in 10.6.7. 10.6.11.6.1 Emergency notification systems are subject to the requirements of Chapter 27. Have sufficient fuel to operate for a period of 12 hours at full load. 10.6.11.6.3 Fuel systems using natural gas, natural or otherwise, supplied by reliable pipelines are not required to have fuel storage tanks unless they are located in a Class 3 or higher seismic hazard zone , as indicated. It is defined in ANSI A-. 58.1, Building Code Requirements for Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures. 10.6.11.7

Battery

Charger.

Battery

apart

Von

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-74

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

To start the engine-generator, a separate tank and an automatic charger that are not used for other purposes must be provided. 10.7 Signal Priority. The priority of the signal must comply with the provisions of this section. 10.7.1 The priority signals of the Emergency Communication System (ECS), when evaluated by the interested parties through the risk analysis according to 24.3.11, may prevail over all other signals.

Recovery when the signaling device or system is restored to its normal state. 10.9 Answers. 10.9.1 Alerts. The response to an alarm signal must comply with the provisions of this Code. 10.9.2 Pre-Alert. The response to a pre-alert signal will comply with the provisions of this Code. 10.9.3 Supervision. The response to a heartbeat signal must comply with the provisions of this Code.

10.7.2 Fire alarm signals take precedence over all other signals, except as permitted in 10.7.1 or 10.7.3.

10.9.4 Errors. The response to an error signal must comply with the provisions of this Code.

10.7.3* Mass distress signals and alarms may take precedence over fire alarm signals in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 24.

10.10.1 Priority alarms, fire alarms, surveillance signals, pre-alarm signals and trouble signals must be announced in a clear and descriptive way.

10.7.4 Mass distress signals and messages may take precedence over supervisory and jamming signals, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 24. 10.7.5 Carbon monoxide detection signals may replace supervisory and alert. 10.7.6 Pre-alarm signals will have priority over supervisory and trouble signals. 10.7.7 Supervisory signals must have priority over trouble signals. 10.7.8 Intrusion alarms or other life-threatening signals may take precedence over surveillance and interference signals, provided the competent authority agrees. 10.7.9* If separate systems are installed, they may prioritize signals as specified in Section 10.7. 10.8 Recognition and Signaling of Conditions. 10.8.1 Detection of Abnormal Conditions. When required by this Code, the system shall have means for detecting and signaling abnormal conditions. 10.8.2 Detection of Alarm Conditions. When required by this Code, the system shall have means for detecting and signaling alarm conditions. 10.8.2.1 Detection of pre-alarm conditions. When required by this Code, the system shall have means for detecting and signaling pre-alarm conditions. 10.8.2.2 Detection of supervisory conditions. When required by this Code, the system shall be provided with means to detect and signal supervisory conditions. 10.8.2.3 Detection of Error Conditions. When required by this Code, the system shall have means for detecting and signaling fault conditions. 10.8.2.4 Detection of normal conditions. When required by this code, the system shall generate a signal

10.10 Identification Marks.

10.10.2 Audible alarm devices for a fire detection system must emit signals that are distinguishable from other similar devices used for other purposes in the same area that are not part of the fire detection system or emergency communication system . 10.10.3 Audible alarm notification devices for a carbon monoxide alarm system shall emit different signals from similar devices used for other purposes in the same area that are not part of the alarm system: carbon monoxide alarm firefighting fire or emergency communication system. 10.10.4* An audible notification device in one or more control units, linked to a system or located at a remote location, may be given the same audible characteristics for all warning functions, including, but not limited to, the above Alarm, Trouble and Watch provided the differentiation between the signals is made by other appropriate means, eg. B. a visible indication. 10.10.5* Supervisory signals will be distinguished from other signals by their tone, which will not be used for any other purpose, except as permitted in paragraph 10.4. 10.10.6 Trouble signals required for indication in protected installations shall consist of distinct audible signals which shall be different from alarm signals, except as permitted in 10.10.4. 10.10.7 The evacuation signals of alarm systems must be distinguished from other signals by their tone, they must comply with the requirements of point 18.4.2. and your sound may not be used for any other purpose. 10.10.8 Pre-alert signals must be distinguished from other signals by their tone, and their tone must not be used for any other purpose, except as permitted in 10.10.4. 10.11* Priority signals from emergency communication systems (ECS). A visual indication of priority signals will automatically be given within 10 seconds at the fire alarm control unit or other designated location. (SIG ECS)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

FUNDAMENTALS 10.12 Alarm signals. 10.12.1 Activation of alarm notification devices or emergency voice communications, emergency control functions and announcements in protected premises must occur within 10 seconds of activation of an initiating device. 10.12.2* An encoded alarm signal must consist of at least three complete rounds of the number of transmissions. 10.12.3 Each round of a coded alarm signal must consist of at least three pulses. 10.12.4* The reconfiguration of alarm signals must comply with the requirements of point 23.8.2.2. 10.12.5 Unacknowledged alarm signals shall not be interrupted if a tripping device or signal line circuit fails while an alarm condition exists on that circuit, unless the circuit containing the fault is used to connect alarm units. 10.12.6 An alarm signal disabled in protected places shall comply with the provisions of 10.12.6.1 and 10.12.6.2. 10.12.6.1 The audible and visual alarm signal provided by the control unit must be automatically reactivated only every 24 hours or less until the alarm signaling conditions have returned to normal. 10.12.6.2 Audible and visual alarms must operate until silenced or manually acknowledged. 10.13* Deactivation of a Fire Alarm Device. 10.13.1 The use of a means to override activated alarm notification devices shall be permitted. 10.13.2 When an occupant activates a means to deactivate the alarm signal, the audible and visual notification devices must be deactivated simultaneously. 10.13.2.1* When giving instructions by voice, visible devices that are in the same area where the loudspeakers are activated must also be activated when required by the emergency plan. (SIG-ECS) 10.13.3 The means of disabling the fire alarm shall be key operated or located in a locked cabinet or arranged to provide equivalent protection against unauthorized use. 10.13.4 The medium must meet the requirements specified in 10.18.1. 10.13.5 Subsequent Activation of Initiator Devices. 10.13.5.1 Subsequent activation of non-addressable activation devices on other activation device circuits shall cause the notification device to reactivate. 10.13.5.2 Subsequent activation of addressable releasing devices of a different type located in the same space or addressable releasing devices located in a different space on signal line circuits shall cause the notification device to reactivate.

72–75

10.13.6 A fire alarm notification override means that remains in the off position when an alarm condition does not exist shall operate an audible fault reporting device until the means is restored to its normal state. 10.14 Monitoring Signals. 10.14.1 Display heartbeat for auto recovery. Visual and audible indication of self-recovery supervisory signals and visual indication of recovery to normal condition shall be given automatically within 90 seconds at the following locations: (1) Fire alarm control unit for systems Fire alarm facility stations fire (2) Building fire control center for building alarm/radiotelephony systems (3) Control center locations for systems installed in accordance with Chapter 26 10.14.2 Display of interlock monitoring signals of fire alarm devices fire. 10.14.2.1 Visual and audible indications of lockout vigilance signals must be given within 90 seconds at the locations specified in 10.14.1. 10.14.2.2 The restoration of the lock surveillance signals must be indicated within 90 seconds at the locations specified in 10.14.1. 10.14.3 Coded Supervisory Signal. 10.14.3.1 A coded supervisory signal shall consist of two rounds of the transmitted number to indicate an abnormal supervisory condition. 10.14.3.2 A coded heartbeat may consist of one round of the number of transmissions to indicate restoration of the heartbeat to normal. 10.14.4 Combined supervisory alarm and signal coded circuits. When coded sprinkler supervision signals and coded water flow or fire alarm signals are transmitted on the same line signal circuit, steps must be taken to give priority to the alarm signal or repeat the signal enough to avoid loss of signal. an alarm signal. 10.14.5 Location of Supervisor Notification Devices. Audible surveillance devices must be in an area where they can be heard. 10.14.6 Reactivation of a Heartbeat. A supervisory signal disabled in protected installations shall meet the provisions of 10.14.6.1 and 10.14.6.2. 10.14.6.1 The supervisory sound and visual signal emitted by the control unit must be automatically reactivated every 24 hours or less until the conditions of the supervisory signal return to normal. 10.14.6.2 The supervisory audible and visual signal must operate until it is silenced or acknowledged manually. 10.14.7 Disabling Supervisor Notification Devices.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-76

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

10.14.7.1 The use of means to disable supervisory notification devices is permitted. 10.14.7.2 Media must be lock operated or located in a locked cabinet or arranged to provide an equivalent level of protection against unauthorized use. 10.14.7.3 The means for disabling surveillance notification devices shall meet the requirements of paragraph 10.18.2. 10.14.7.4 Subsequent activation of surveillance activation devices in other areas of the building shall result in the activation of surveillance notification devices as required by the system input/output matrix. 10.14.7.5 Disabling a monitor indicator means that remaining in the disabled position when a monitor condition does not exist shall activate an audible fault indicator until the device is restored to its normal state. 10.15 Error signals. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

10.15.1 Failure and recovery signals must be displayed within 200 seconds at locations identified in 10.15.7 or 10.15.8. 10.15.2 Indication of primary source failure signals sent to a monitoring station shall comply with 10.6.9.3. 10.15.3 A fault beep may be intermittent provided it sounds at least once every 10 seconds with a minimum duration of ½ second. 10.15.4 A single trouble beep is acceptable for announcing multiple trouble conditions. 10.15.5 Audible alarm devices must be located in an area where they can be heard. 10.15.6 Activated communication devices in protected premises shall continue to function unless manually silenced as permitted in 10.15.10.1. 10.15.7 Visual and audible fault signals and visual indications of restoration to normal shall be displayed at the following locations: (1) Fire control panel (central office) for alarm systems of protected buildings. (2) Voice/alarm emergency fire communication systems to building fire command center. (3) Location Headquarters or branch of systems established in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 26 10.15.8. Fault reports and their retrieval shall be displayed visually and audibly at the site surveillance location for installations constructed in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 26. 10.15.9* A disabled jamming signal in protected installations shall meet the provisions of 10.15. 9.1 and 10.15.9.2. 10.15.9.1 The audible and visual blocking signal must be automatically reactivated in the control unit every 24 hours or less until the conditions of the blocking signal return to normal.

its normal state. 10.15.9.2 The audible and visual trouble signal associated with the indication of primary battery depletion or failure of a wireless system, as required by 23.16.2(3) and (4), shall automatically repeat every 4 hours or any less. 10.15.10 Disabling Alarm Devices 10.15.10.1 It is allowed to use a device to disable alarm devices. 10.15.10.2 Media must be lockable or located in a locked cabinet or arranged to provide an equivalent level of protection against unauthorized use. 10.15.2.3 The means for disabling fault reporting devices shall meet the requirements of 10.18.2. 10.15.10.4 Where an audible fault signaling device is also used to indicate a monitoring condition as permitted in 10.10.4, a means of disabling the fault signaling device must not prevent subsequent activation of the fault signaling device. 10.15.10.5 Subsequent trouble signals shall result in the activation of trouble reporting devices as required by the system's I/O array. 10.15.10.6 A means of disabling fault reporting devices that remain in the disabled position when a fault condition does not exist shall operate an audible fault reporting device until the means is restored to its normal condition. 10.15.10.7* Unless otherwise permitted by the competent authority, alarm devices located within the protected premises of a monitoring station fire detection system shall automatically switch off in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 26 that have been silenced in protected premises every 24 hours. hours or less reactivated until fault conditions return to normal 10.16 Status indications of emergency control functions. 10.16.1 All controls specifically designed for the purpose of replacing an automatic emergency control function shall include a visible indication of the status of the associated circuits. 10.16.2* When status indicators are provided for emergency equipment or control functions, these indicators shall be arranged to reflect the actual status of the equipment or associated function. 10.17 Notification Appliance Circuits and Control Circuits. 10.17.1 A ground fault, open circuit or short circuit fault in the installation conductors of an alarm reporting device circuit shall not affect the operation of any other alarm reporting device circuit for more than 200 seconds, if the short circuit fault is present during the normal or on condition of the circuit.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ESSENTIALS 10.17.2* Notification appliance circuits to which notification appliances are not directly connected are considered control circuits. 10.17.3 Control circuits shall not conform to the requirements of paragraph 10.17.1, provided that the integrity of the circuit is controlled as specified in paragraph 12.6 and a fault in the installation cables results in: a trouble signal, as described in Section 10.15. 10.18 Ads and Ad Zones. 10.18.1 Alarm messages. 10.18.1.1 When required by other applicable law, regulation or rule, the location of a device initiating operation must be announced by visible means. 10.18.1.1.1 A visual indication of the location of an operational tripping device shall be by means of an indicator lamp, alphanumeric display, printed matter or other approved means.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

10.18.1.1.2 Visual announcement of the location of an operational enabling device must not be substituted for the means used to disable alarm reporting devices. 10.18.2 Monitoring and Fault Messages. 10.18.2.1 When required by another applicable law, regulation or standard, monitoring and/or fault conditions will be prominently disclosed. 10.18.2.1.1 Visible advertising must be an indicator light, alphanumeric display, print or other medium. 10.18.2.1.2 Visual reports of monitoring and/or fault conditions must not be overridden by any means used to disable monitoring devices or fault reporting. 10.18.3* Speaker access and location. 10.18.3.1 All necessary means of communication must be easily accessible to responsible personnel. 10.18.3.2 Any necessary means of public communication must be arranged as required by the authority having jurisdiction to enable an efficient response to the situation. 10.18.4 Display of alarm messages. Visible detectors must show all alarm zones. 10.18.4.1 If all alarm zones are not displayed at the same time, the origin zone must be displayed. 10.18.4.2 If all alarm zones are not displayed at the same time, it must be indicated that there are other alarm zones. 10.18.5* Announcement Zones. 10.18.5.1 For alarm notification purposes, each floor of the building shall be considered a separate zone. 10.18.5.2 For alarm purposes, if one of the floors of the building is divided into several zones by fire or smoke barriers and the fire safety plan of the protected places allows the displacement of occupants from the zone of origin to another zone of the same floor, each zone of Floors is reported separately. 10.18.5.3 If the system serves more than one building, each

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72–77

They have separate ads. 10.19 Integrity supervision of voice/alarm fire alarm communication systems installed in buildings. 10.19.1* Loudspeaker amplifiers and sound generating devices. If loudspeakers are not used to provide audible fire alarm signals, the trouble signal required in 10.19.1.1 to 10.19.1.3 shall conform to Section 10.15. 10.19.1.1 If primary power is available, failure of an audio amplifier will result in a trouble signal. 10.19.1.2 When an alarm occurs and the primary power supply is not available (ie the system is running on the secondary power supply), failure of an audio amplifier will result in a trouble signal. 10.19.1.3 Failure of any sound generating equipment will result in a trouble signal unless the sound generating equipment and amplifier are installed as integral parts and used only for a single listed loudspeaker. 10.19.2 Two-way telephone communication lines. 10.19.2.1 Supervisors installing two-way telephone communications circuits should be monitored for open fault conditions that could render all or part of the telephone communications circuit inoperable. 10.19.2.2 The installation conductors of two-way telephone communications circuits must be monitored for short-circuit fault conditions that render all or part of the telephone communications circuit inoperable. 10.19.2.3 Fault conditions of two-way telephone communications circuits shall result in a fault signal in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.15. 10.20 Documentation and Notice. 10.20.1 The documentation must comply with the provisions of Chapter 7. 10.20.2 The competent authority must be notified before installing or modifying equipment or wiring. 10.21* Out of order. 10.21.1 The owner of the facility or his designee must be notified if any facility or part of any facility is found to be inoperable. This state of the systems must include all events that make them out of service. 10.21.2 The system owner or his designated representative must retain the records for a period of 1 year from the date the out-of-service status was corrected. 10.21.3 The control center must inform the competent authority of all fire detection systems for which the necessary supervision has been completed. 10.21.4* The maintenance and repair service provider must notify the appropriate authority of any fire detection system that is out of service

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–78

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

10.21.5* If necessary, mitigation measures acceptable to the competent authority shall be implemented during the period when the system is out of service. 10.21.6 The System Owner or his designated representative shall be notified when an out of service status expires or is cancelled. 10.22* Unwanted alarms. For reporting purposes, alarm signals that do not result from hazardous conditions should be classified as undesirable and classified into one of the following categories: (1) Malicious alarm (2) False alarm (3) Accidental alarm (4) Unknown alarm

Chapter 11 Reserved

Chapter 12 Circuits and roads 12.1 Application. 12.1.1 The paths (connections) will be identified based on the performance characteristics defined in this chapter. 12.1.2 The requirements of Chapter 14 apply. 12.2 General. 12.2.1* The performance and survival characteristics of the signaling routes (interconnections) must comply with the terms defined in this chapter. 12.2.2 The designation of a track (link) class shall depend on the ability of the track (link) to continue to function under exceptional conditions. 12.2.3 The path designation shall also include the performance of the path (link) for fire attack survivability. 12.2.4 Installation of all wiring, cables, and track equipment must be in accordance with the provisions of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, and the applicable requirements of Sections 12.2.4.1 through 12.2.4.4. (SIG-FUN) 12.2.4.1 Fiber optic cables installed as part of the fire detection system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Section 770 and be protected from physical damage in accordance with NFPA requirements. 70, National Electrical Code, Art. 760. (SIG-FUN) 12.2.4.2 All power limited and non-power limited signaling system circuits entering a building shall be provided with transient protection. (SIG-FUN) 12.2.4.3* Fire alarm system wiring and equipment, including all circuits controlled and powered by

Equipment, such as the fire alarm system, shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of this Code and NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760. (SIG-FUN) 12.2.4.4* Wiring methods permitted in other sections of this Code for resist fire attack shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the requirements set forth in NFPA 70, Article 760. (SIG-FUN) 12.2.5 Grounding Connections. 12.2.5.1 All fire alarm systems must be tested to exclude ground faults. Exception: Parts of circuits or equipment that are intentionally and permanently grounded to provide ground fault detection, noise suppression, emergency ground signaling, and grounding for circuit protection are allowed. (SIG-FUN) 12.2.5.2* The conductive tracks must remain operational during the application of the single ground. (SIG FUN) 12.3* Road class designations. Roads must be designated as Class A, Class B, Class C, Class D, Class E or Class X based on performance. 12.3.1* Class A. A path is considered Class A if: (1) It includes a redundant path. (2) Operation will continue after a single open and a single non-open will result in a fault signal being reported. (3) Conditions affecting the intended operation of the line will be announced as a fault signal. (4) Operability is maintained during the application of a single earth fault. (5) A single ground condition will result in an error signal being reported. Exception: The requirements of 12.3.1(4) and (5) do not apply to non-conductive paths (eg wireless or fiber). 12.3.2* Class B. A path is considered Class B if it functions as follows: (1) Does not contain a redundant path. (2) Operability ends with a single opening. (3) Conditions affecting the intended operation of the line will be announced as a fault signal. (4) Operability is maintained during the application of a single earth fault. (5) A single ground condition will result in an error signal being reported.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

for more than 8 hours.

Exception: The requirements of 12.3.2(4) and (5) do not apply to non-conductive routes (eg wireless or fiber optic).

12.3.3* Class C. A path is considered Class C if its performance is: (1) It contains one or more paths whose operability is verified by end-to-end communications, but the integrity of individual paths is not verified. supervised. (2) Loss of end-to-end communication is announced. 12.3.4* Class D. A road is considered Class D if

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

LINES AND TRACKS It works as a failsafe when no faults are reported, although it works as expected in the event of a track failure. 12.3.5* Class E. A trail will be designated as Class E if its integrity is not monitored. 12.3.6* Class X. A path is considered Class X if its performance is: (1) It contains a redundant path. (2) Operation will continue after a single open and a single non-open will result in a fault signal being reported. (3) Operability will continue beyond a single short and failure of a single short will result in a fault signal being reported. (4) Operability persists through a combination of open fault and ground fault. (5) Conditions that affect the expected operation of the line will be announced as a fault signal. (6) Operability is maintained during the application of a single ground fault. (7) A single ground condition will result in an error signal being reported. Exception: The requirements of 12.3.6(3), (4), (6) and (7) do not apply to non-conductive routes (eg wireless or fiber optic). 12.3.7* Class A and Class X circuits using physical conductors (eg metallic, fiber optic) must be installed so that the outgoing and return conductors to and from the control of the device are routed separately. Circuit output and return (redundant) conductors are allowed in the same wire bundle (ie, multicore cable), jacket, or conduit only under the following conditions: --`,,`,``,`` `` `, `` `,``` ,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(1) For a distance not to exceed 3.0 m (10 ft) where the output and return conductors enter or exit the trip device, notification device, or control unit enclosures (2) For Single Channel taps to Individual Devices or Devices (3) For single channel drops to multiple devices or devices installed in a single room, do not exceed 1000 ft2 (93 m2) in area 12.4 Roadside Survival. All routes must comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 12.4.1 Level 0 Survival Routes. Level 0 runways shall not contain provisions for runway survival. 12.4.2 Level 1 Survival Routes. Level 1 route survival shall consist of the construction of routes fully protected by an automatic sprinkler system in compliance with NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, with all connecting conductors, cables, or other physical paths installed in metal conduit. 12.4.3 Level 2 Survival Paths. Level 2 Survival Paths must consist of one or more of the following:

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72–79

(1) Functional integrity cable with 2-hour fire resistance (2) Cable system (circuit protection system(s)) with 2-hour fire resistance (3) Enclosure or protected area with 2-hour fire resistance hours hours (4 ) Alternative performance with a 2-hour fire resistance certificate approved by the authority having jurisdiction 12.4.4 Survivability on Grade 3 roads. Survivability on Grade 3 roads shall consist of fully constructed construction roads protected by a sprinkler system system, NFPA 13, Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems, and meets one or more of the following: (1) circuit integrity wiring with a 2-hour fire rating (2) wiring (circuit protection system(s)) fire rated 2 hours (3) fire rated 2 hours enclosure or protected area rated (4) certified performance alternatives fire rated 2 hours, approx. gt by the Competent Authority 12.5* Common Addresses. Shared paths are named Tier 0, Tier 1, Tier 2, or Tier 3 based on their performance: 12.5.1* Tier 0 shared paths. Tier 0 paths do not need to segregate or prioritize data for security reasons rather than human security . 12.5.2* Level 1 split paths. Level 1 paths shall not be required to separate life safety data from non-human safety data, but shall prioritize all life safety data over non-human safety data . 12.5.3* Split level 2 paths: Level 2 paths must separate all life safety data from non-life safety data. 12.5.4* Level 3 Shared Courses. Level 3 courses must use designated Life Safety System equipment. 12.6* Monitoring the integrity and performance of the installation's conductive circuits and other signaling channels. (SIG-FUN) 12.6.1 Except as permitted or required by 12.6.3 to 12.6.14, all means of connecting equipment, appliances and cable connections shall be monitored to ensure the integrity of the connecting conductors or equivalent paths. so that the presence of a simple or open earth fault situation in the installation conductors or other signaling channels is automatically indicated within 200 seconds. 12.6.2 Unless otherwise permitted or required by 12.6.3 to 12.6.14, all means of connecting equipment, accessories and appliance connections and cables shall be monitored to ensure the integrity of the connecting conductors or equivalent means , so that restoration of a single trip condition or ground fault in the installation conductors or other signaling channels is automatically indicated within 200 seconds. (SIG-FUN) 12.6.3 Short circuits between conductors shall not require

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–80

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Monitor its health except as required by 12.6.16, 12.6.17 and 10.19.2. 12.6.4 Integrity monitoring is not required for a faultless branch circuit if a faulty circuit situation in the branch circuit wiring only results in loss of faultless service. 12.6.5 Integrity monitoring is not required for connections to and between auxiliary system components if the unique conditions of open circuit, ground connection and short circuit of the auxiliary equipment or connecting means, or both, do not affect required operation . signaling and/or fire protection. detection system. 12.6.6 Integrity monitoring is not required for an alarm reporting device circuit installed in the same room as the central control equipment, provided the reporting device circuit leads are installed in conduit or equivalently protected from mechanical failure.

Alarm. 12.6.16 A short lead in any alarm notification device circuit shall cause a trouble signal in accordance with Section 10.15, except as permitted in 12.6.5, 12.6.6 or 12.6.11. 12.6.17 When two or more systems are interconnected, the systems must be interconnected using Class A, B or X circuits as described in Clause 12. 12.7 Nomenclature. To identify the characteristics of system(s) connections and survivability requirements, the following identifying nomenclature shall be used: (1) system(s) connections. (2) Survival Levels (not required if level 0) (3) Shared Path Levels (not required if level 0)

12.6.7 Health monitoring is not required for a fault reporting device circuit.

Chapter 13 Reserved

12.6.8* Integrity monitoring is not required for connecting the listed devices within the same outlet.

Chapter 14 Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

12.6.9 Integrity monitoring is not required for connections between receptacles containing control equipment that are within 20 feet (6 m) of each other if the conductors are installed in conduit or equivalently protected against mechanical failure. 12.6.10 Integrity monitoring is not required for earth-sensing conductors where the individual insulation does not impede the required normal operation of the system. 12.6.11 Health monitoring is not required for central station circuits that support notification devices within the central station.

14.1 Application. 14.1.1 The inspection, testing and maintenance of the systems, their activation and signaling devices must meet the requirements of this chapter. 14.1.2 Inspection, testing and maintenance of single and multi-station heat and smoke detectors and domestic fire alarm systems shall meet the requirements of this chapter. 14.1.3 Procedures required by other parties that exceed the requirements of this chapter will be allowed. 14.1.4 The requirements of this chapter apply to new and existing systems.

12.6.13 Integrity monitoring is not required for the connection cables of a fixed computer and its associated keyboard, video monitor, mouse or touch screen, provided such connection cables are not longer than 2.4 m ( 8 feet). is a computer or data processing cable listed in NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, and where failure of the cable will not result in failure of required system functions not enabled by the keyboard, mouse, or touch screen.

14.2 General.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

12.6.12 Integrity monitoring is not required for continuously increasing line speed pneumatic systems where the wiring terminals of such equipment are multi-connected by electrically monitored circuits.

12.6.14 The monitoring of the integrity of the installation conductors for the condition of earth fault must not be required for the communication and transmission channels that go from a monitoring station to one or more substations or protected installations, or to both, in accordance with with the provisions of Chapter 8 and through one or more transmitters are electrically isolated from the fire alarm system (or circuits) when a single grounding condition does not affect the required operation of the fire alarm and/or signaling system . 12.6.15 The connecting means must be arranged in such a way that a single cut or ground fault does not activate a signal of

14.1.5 The requirements of Chapter 7 apply when referenced in Chapter 14. 14.2.1 Purpose. 14.2.1.1* The purpose of the initial and reacceptance inspections is to ensure compliance with the approved design documents and ensure that the installation complies with this Code and other required installation standards. 14.2.1.2* The purpose of the initial and experimental testing of fire detection and signaling systems is to ensure that the system works in accordance with the design specifications. 14.2.1.3* The purpose of the periodic inspections is to ensure that obvious alterations or damage that may affect the operability of the system are visually identified. 14.2.1.4* The purpose of the periodic inspection is to statistically guarantee operational safety. 14.2.2 Performance. 14.2.2.1 Performance Review. To ensure the integrity

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72-81

operational, the system must have an inspection, test and maintenance program.

The service provider must coordinate system testing to prevent disruption of critical building systems or equipment.

14.2.2.1.1 Inspection, testing and maintenance programs must meet the requirements of this Code and comply with the instructions published by the equipment manufacturer.

14.2.5 System Documentation. Before the system is repaired or tested, the owner or his representative must make a final record of all information required in Chapter 7 about the system and its modifications, including specifications, electrical diagrams, and floor plans. by request.

14.2.2.1.2 The inspection, test and maintenance programs must verify the correct functioning of the system. 14.2.2.2 Out of Service Conditions/Defects. 14.2.2.2.1 The requirements of clause 10.21 apply when a system has deteriorated. 14.2.2.2.2 Deficiencies in the system must be corrected. 14.2.2.2.3 If a defect is not corrected after completion of inspection, testing or maintenance of the system, the system owner or their designated representative must be notified in writing within 24 hours of the Out of Service status. 14.2.3 Responsibilities. 14.2.3.1* The owner of the property, building or system, or his designated representative, will be responsible for the inspection, testing and maintenance of the system and any changes or additions made to it. 14.2.3.2 When the property owner is not the occupier, the property owner may delegate authority and responsibility for inspection, testing and maintenance of fire safety systems to the occupier, manager or individual responsible for administration through special provisions in the contract of lease. , in the written user agreement or in the management agreement. 14.2.3.3 Inspection, testing or maintenance may be carried out by the owner of the building or facility or by any person or entity other than the owner of the building or facility, provided that it is carried out in accordance with a written contract. 14.2.3.4 Where the owner of the building or facility has delegated responsibility for inspection, testing or maintenance, a copy of the written delegation required in 14.2.3.3 shall be submitted to the appropriate authority at the time of the request. 14.2.3.5 Testing and maintenance of central station service systems shall be carried out in accordance with the contractual arrangements set out in 26.3.3. 14.2.3.6* Qualifications and experience of service personnel. Service personnel must be qualified in accordance with the requirements of 10.5.3 and have adequate experience. 14.2.4* Notice. 14.2.4.1 Before any test, all persons and equipment receiving alarm, surveillance or trouble signals, and all building occupants, must be informed of the test to avoid unnecessary reactions. 14.2.4.2 Upon completion of the test, those previously notified (and others, as the case may be) must be notified that the test has been completed. 14.2.4.3 The owner or his designated representative and the personnel who

14.2.5.1 The documentation provided must include current modifications of all fire alarm software and software modifications of all systems to which the fire alarm software is connected. 14.2.5.2 Fire detection software modifications and software modifications to systems with which the compatibility of fire detection software interfaces is to be checked in accordance with the requirements of 23.2.2.1.1. 14.2.6 Release Systems. Items 14.2.5.1 to 14.2.5.6 shall take into account the requirements for testing fire alarm systems that activate the fire-fighting system activation functions. 14.2.6.1 Personnel performing the test must be qualified and experienced in the specific arrangement and operation of suppression systems and activation functions and be aware of the risks associated with an unplanned discharge of the connected system. 14.2.6.2 Residents will be notified when a fire alarm system configured for release service is repaired or tested. 14.2.6.3 This Code does not require discharge tests of suppression systems. 14.2.6.4 The suppression systems must be protected against unexpected activation, including disconnection of trip solenoids or electric actuators, closing of valves, other actions or combinations thereof, for the specific system, during the system test. 14.2.6.5 The test must include the verification that the triggering circuits and components energized or activated by the fire detection system are electrically monitored for integrity and that they function as designed in case of alarm. 14.2.6.6 The suppression systems and the activation components must be restored to their operational operation condition after the completion of the system test. 14.2.7 Interface equipment and emergency control functions. 14.2.7.1* The personnel performing the test must be qualified and experienced in the location and operation of interface equipment and emergency control functions. 14.2.7.2 The test must be performed according to Table 14.4.3.2. 14.2.8 Automated Testing.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-82

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.3.1 Visual inspection of component 1.

all teams

6. 7. 8. 9.

Control equipment: (a) Fire detection systems monitored to verify alarm, supervisory and fault signals (1) Fuses (2) Equipment with interfaces (d) Lamps and LEDs (4) Primary (main) power supply (5 ) Fault signals ( a ) Unmonitored fire detection systems for checking alarm, supervision and trouble signals (1) Fuses (2) Equipment with interfaces (d) Lamps and LEDs (4) Power supply Primary power supply (Main) (5) Fault Signals Reserved Central Monitoring Alarm Systems - Transmitter (a) Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) (b) Digital Alarm Radio Transmitter (DART) (c) McCulloh (d ) McCulloh Radio Transmitter radio alarm (RAT) (e) All other types of communicators Fire emergency communication/voice alarm devices installed in buildings Reserved Reserved Reserved Batteries

(a) acid prickly pear

3. 4. 5.

Erstakzeptanz X

Periodic frequency method Ensure that there are no changes that affect the yearbook

14.3.4

Team effort. Investigate building modifications, occupancy changes, environmental changes, equipment location, physical obstructions, equipment orientation, physical damage, and cleanliness. Check a normal state of the system

X X X X

Anual Anual Anual

Semester

∫ Check a normal state of the system

X X X X

Weekly Weekly Weekly

Weekly

Yearly

Check the location, physical state and normal state of the system.

Yearly

Anual Anual

Yearly

Semester

Check location and status.

A month

Weekly

Check for corrosion or leaks. Check tightness of connections. Check the month/year of manufacture mark (all types). Visually check the electrolyte level.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Reference

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

10.6.10

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72-83

Table 14.3.1 Continuation component 10. 11. 12.

14. 15. 16. 17.

(b) Nickel Cadmium (c) Primary (Dry Cell) (d) Reserved Sealed Lead Acid Remote Indicators Notification Appliance Circuit Power Extensions Remote Power Supplies

Surge arrestor Reserved Fiber optic cable connections Initiating devices (a) Air sampling (1) General (2) Sampling system piping and sampling ports

(b) Detectors in ducts (1) General

(2) sampling tube

(c) Electromechanical actuation devices (d) Switches for extinguishing system(s) or fire suppression system(s) (e) Railway stations fire detectors (f) Heat detectors (g) Heat detectors Radiant fire power

Erstabnahme X X X X X

Frequency Periodic Half-yearly Monthly Half-yearly Half-yearly Annual

Yearly

biannual edition

Semester

Method

Reference

Check location and status. Check fuse values, if any. Check that the lamps and LEDs indicate the normal operating state of the device. Check fuse values, if any. Check that the lamps and LEDs indicate the normal operating state of the device. Check location and status. Check location and status.

10.6

17.7.3.6

Semester

Check location and status (all devices). Make sure the in-line filters, if any, are clean. Make sure the sampling system piping and fittings are properly installed, waterproof, and permanently connected. Confirm that the sampling tube is clearly marked. Make sure there are no openings or blocked sampling points. Make sure the detector is securely mounted. Make sure there are no return air ducts near the detector. Make sure the detector is installed so that it can measure the airflow at the correct point in the duct. Check for correct orientation. Confirm that the sample tube protrudes from the line as per the system design.

Semester

Semester Quarterly

Make sure that no points to be detected are hidden or outside the detector's field of view.

10.6

17.7.3.6

17.7.5.5

17.8

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-84

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.3.1 continuation

18. 19.

21. 22. 23.

26. 27. 28.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

24. 25.

Components

first acceptance

Frequency Periodic method Quarterly Make sure no points need to be detected

(h) Video image fire and smoke alarms

(i) Smoke detectors (excluding single-family and townhouses) (j) Projection beam smoke detectors (k) Signal monitoring devices (l) Water flow sensors Reserved combination systems (a) Systems/devices monitoring electronic extinguishers (b) Carbon monoxide detectors / systems Fire alarm control interface and emergency control function interface Patrol equipment Notification devices (a) Audible devices (b) Notification devices Text notification audible (c ) Visible devices (1) General (2) Current value in Candela units Audible notification devices Exit indication Two-way communication system reserved for refuge areas Alarm systems reserved for monitoring stations — Receivers (a) signal reception (b) public emergency notification systems transmission receiver equipment public access (b) substation (c) est main action (1) manual operation (2) auxiliary operation

Semester

obscured or out of the detector's field of view.

17.7.7; 17.11.5

Quarterly

Make sure the beam path is not obstructed.

Semester Quarterly

Check location and status (all devices).

Semester

Check location and status.

X X X

Rising Rising Rising

Check location and status. Check location and status (all devices).

Semester

18.5.5 18.5.5

Semester

Check that the rated current marking on Candela units corresponds to the approved plans. Check location and status.

Yearly

Annual Journal

X X X X

Check location and status.

Check signal reception. Check location and normal state. Check location and status.

Semester

annual semiannual yearbook

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Reference

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

29. 30.

Reserved ground detection system (a) Monitored for integrity (1) Control equipment (i) Fuses (ii) Interfaces (iii) Lamps/LEDs (iv) Main power supply (main) (2) Secondary power batteries ( 3) Trigger Devices ( 4) Notification Devices (b) Not fully monitored; installed prior to the adoption of the 2010 Edition (1) Control devices (i) Fuses (ii) Interfaces (iii) Lamps/LEDs (iv) Primary (main) power supply (2) Secondary batteries (3) Initiating devices (4 ) Device notification (c) antenna (d) transceiver

72–85

X X X X

Anual Anual Anual

X X X

Anual Anual Anual

Check a normal state of the system

X X X X

Semiannuals Semiannuals Semiannuals Semiannuals

X X X X

Semestral Semestral Semestral Anual Anual

Check location and status. Check location and status.

4.2.8.1 Automated test setups incorporating test equipment equivalent to that specified in Table 14.4.3.2 may be used with a frequency at least equal to that specified in Table 14.4.3.2 to meet the requirements of this chapter. 14.2.8.2 Failure of a device in an automated test shall result in an audible and visible failure signal. 14.2.9* Performance-based inspection and testing. As an alternative means of compliance, subject to the authority having jurisdiction, components and systems may be inspected and tested in accordance with a performance-based program. 14.2.10* Test Plan. 14.2.10.1 A test plan must be established to clearly define the test scope of the fire detection or signaling system. 14.2.10.2 The test plan and the results must be documented along with the test records. 14.3 Inspection. 14.3.1* Unless otherwise permitted in 14.3.2, visual inspections must be carried out in accordance with the schedule provided in Table 14.3.1 or more frequently if required by the competent authority.

Check a normal state of the system

The heading of column 2 of Table 14.3.1 has been changed to TIA. See page 1.

14.3.2 Devices or equipment that are inaccessible for safety reasons (for example, continuous process operation, live electrical equipment, radiation and excessive altitude) may be inspected during planned interruptions, if permitted by the competent authority. 14.3.3 Extension intervals must not exceed 18 months. 14.3.4 Visual inspection must be carried out to ensure that there are no alterations that affect the performance of the equipment. 14.4 Testing. 14.4.1 Initial Acceptance Tests. 14.4.1.1 All new systems must be inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 14. 14.4.1.2 The competent authority must be notified prior to initial acceptance. 14.4.2* Bump Tests. 14.4.2.1 When a tripping device, annunciator or control relay is added, it shall be tested for proper operation. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-86

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

14.4.2.2 When a tripping device, annunciator or control relay is removed, another control device, device or relay in the circuit shall be activated. 14.4.2.3 If alterations or repairs are made to the hardware of the control equipment, these must be verified according to the specifications in Table 14.4.3.2, points 1(a) and 1(d). 14.4.2.4 When changes are made to Site Specific Software, the following shall apply: (1) All functions known to be affected by the change, or identified in any way indicative of the changes, shall be 100 percent tested. (2) In addition, 10 percent of the tripping devices not directly affected by the change must also be checked, up to a maximum of 50 devices, and verify the correct functioning of the system. (3) A modified closing record must be prepared in accordance with 7.5.6 to reflect such changes.

14.4.2.5 Changes to system running software shall require functional testing of 10 percent of the system, including testing of at least one device on each input and output circuit to verify critical system functions such as devices, notification, external monitoring and reporting capabilities. 14.4.3* Test methods. 14.4.3.1* At the request of the authority having jurisdiction, the central station installation must be inspected to obtain complete information about the central station system, including specifications, wiring diagrams and floor plans submitted for approval prior to installation of equipment and wiring. 14.4.3.2* Systems and associated equipment must be tested in accordance with Table 14.4.3.2. Table 14.4.3.2 has been modified by a TIA. See page 1.

Table 14.4.3.2 First acceptance tests

periodic frequency

Components

1. 2.

All Devices Control Devices and Transponder (a) Functions

Yearly

(b) fuses (c) interface equipment

Anual Anual

Yearly

Disconnect and test all secondary (standby) power at full load, including alarm devices that require simultaneous operation. At the end of the test, reconnect all secondary (standby) power supplies. Try redundant power supplies separately.

Yearly

Check the operation of the control unit fault signals. Check callback functionality on systems with an error mute switch that needs to be reset.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(d) Lamps and LEDs (e) Primary power supply (main)

Signs of fire control panel failure (a) Acoustic and visual

Method See Table 14.3.1. Check the correct reception of alarm, monitoring and error signals (input signals); the operation of evacuation signals and auxiliary functions (output signals); loop monitoring, including open and ground fault detection; and power supply monitoring to detect loss of AC power and disconnection of secondary batteries. Consultation of assessments and follow-up. Check the integrity of single or multiple circuits containing an interface between two or more control units. Test the interface device connections by starting or simulating the operation of the monitored device. Check the signals to be transmitted in the control unit. Turn on lamps and LEDs.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72-87

Table 14.4.3.2 Tests

Components

first acceptance

periodic frequency

(b) Insolvent

Yearly

Monitoring Station Alarm Systems - Transmission Equipment (a) All Equipment

Yearly

(b) Digital Alarm Transmitter Communicator (DACT)

Method If the control unit has circuit breakers or circuit breakers, verify the performance of the intended function of each switch. Check error signal reception when a supervised function is disconnected. If the system has a ground detection feature, check the appearance of the ground fault indicator when an installation conductor is grounded. Activate an enabling device and verify alarm signal reception at an external location.

Create a tamper condition and check for receipt of a tamper signal at the remote site. Activate a triggering device and verify reception of a surveillance signal at the external location. If a transmission operator can operate under a single or multiple fault condition, activate an enabling device during the fault condition and verify receipt of an alarm signal and a fault signal at the remote location.

Test all system functions and features in accordance with the instructions published by the device manufacturer to verify proper operation, as described in the relevant sections of Chapter 26. Engage the Enabling Device, except the DACT, and check the Enabling Device for signal reception at the monitoring station within 90 seconds. After testing is complete, restore the system to its working state. If test leads are used, run the first and last test without using the test lead. Except for DACTs installed before the 2013 edition of NFPA 72 was passed that are connected to a telephone line (number) that is also monitored for adverse conditions through a local tributary channel, ensure that the DACT is connected to two separate transmission media. connected. Test the DACT for line seize capability by activating a signal when using the phone line (main line for DACTs that use two phone lines) for a phone call. FOR

Make sure the call drops and the communicator connects to the digital alarm receiver. Check that signal reception is adequate at the monitoring station. Ensure that each transmission attempt completes within 90 seconds from answering to hanging up.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-88

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.4.3.2 Continuation component

first acceptance

periodic frequency

Yearly

(e) Radio Alarm Transmitter (RAT)

Yearly

(f) Performance-based technologies

Yearly

Method Disconnect the phone line (main line for DACTs that use two phone lines) from the DACT. Ensure that the DACT trouble signal indication is issued within 4 minutes after the fault is detected in the installation's fire alarm control unit. Check telephone line fault signal reception at the monitoring station. Restore the phone line (main line for DACTs that use two phone lines), reset the fire alarm control unit and check if the false trouble signal on the phone line returns to normal. Make sure the monitoring station is receiving the DACT recovery signal. Disconnect the secondary transmission medium from the DACT. Ensure that the DACT trouble signal indication is issued within 4 minutes after the fault is detected in the installation's fire alarm control unit. Check reception of the secondary media failure signal at the monitoring station. Restore the secondary transmission medium, reset the fire panel and check if the trouble signal returns to normal. Check that the monitoring station is receiving the recovery signal from the secondary transmitter. Have the DACT send a signal to the DACR while simulating a fault on the phone line (number) (main line for DACTs that use two phone lines). Verify that the DACT uses the secondary communication path to complete the transfer to the DACR. Disconnect the main phone line. Verify that the DART sends a congestion signal to the monitoring station within 4 minutes. Activate the trigger device. Make sure the McCulloh transmitter generates no less than three full rounds of at least three signal pulses each. If there is metallic continuity end-to-end and circuit balanced, sequentially cause each of the following four fault conditions on the transmit channel and verify reception of the correct signals at the monitoring station: (1) open (2 ) ground (3 ) ) short between leads (4) Open and Ground If there is no metallic continuity end-to-end and with a properly balanced circuit, sequentially cause each of the following three fault conditions on the transmit channel and verify that signal reception is suitable in the monitoring station: (1) open (2) ground (3) Short circuit between conductors Causes failure between elements of transmission equipment. Check the indication of a fault on the protected equipment or the transmission of a fault signal to the monitoring station. Conduct tests to ensure the integrity of the transmission technology and the technology route is traced.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72-89

Table 14.4.3.2 continuation

Components

first acceptance

periodic frequency

Method

Emergency communication equipment (a) Tone amplifiers/generators (b) Silent incoming call (c) Off-hook indicator (soft ring) (d) Telephone jacks (e) Handset (f) Generator power system o motor

When using a single communication path, separate the communication path. Manually initiate the transmission of an alarm signal or have the registration (switching) signal transmitted automatically.b Ensure that the facility unit reports the error within 200 seconds of the transmission error. Restore the communication line. If multiple communication paths are used, disconnect all communication paths. Manually initiate transmission of an alarm signal. Make sure the plant control unit reports the error within 200 seconds of the transmission error. Restore all lines of communication.

Yearly

Verify correct switching and operation of backup equipment.

Yearly

Operate/start up and verify reception of correct optical and acoustic signals at the control unit.

Yearly

Install a telephone device or remove the telephone and check signal reception at the control unit.

Yearly

Visually inspect the telephone jack and initiate the communication path through the jack. Activate each telephone device and check its correct operation.

Yearly

A month

Secondary power supply (standby)c

(Video) Required Code & Standard of NFPA for #firesafety #detection #protection #electrical in #RMG sector.

Yearly

Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

Yearly

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

battery tests

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Operate the system with at least five terminals of your choice at the same time. Check the clarity and quality of the voice. If a system-specific engine-driven generator is used as the required power source, the building owner must verify generator operation in accordance with NFPA 110, the standard for standby and emergency power systems. Disconnect all primary (mains) power sources and check for the presence of the required primary power loss fault indicator. Measure or verify the system's alarm and standby power requirements and verify the capacity of the batteries to meet the alarm and standby requirements using data provided by the manufacturer. Operate general alarm systems for at least 5 minutes and emergency voice communication systems for at least 15 minutes. Reconnect the primary (main) power supply at the end of the test. If a dedicated UPS system is used as the required power source, the building owner must verify operation of the UPS system in accordance with NFPA 111, Standard for Emergency and Backup Stored Power Systems. Before performing battery tests, the tester must ensure that all system software stored in volatile memory is protected from loss.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–90

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.4.3.2 continuation

Components

first acceptance

(a) Replacement of the lead-acid battery (1)

periodic frequency

Yearly

(2) loader test

Yearly

(3) discharge test

Yearly

(4) load voltage test

Half year

(5) Specific gravity

Half year

(b) Replacement of nickel-cadmium type battery (1)

Yearly

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(2) loader test

Yearly

(3) discharge test

Yearly

(4) load voltage test

Half year

Method

Replace the batteries in accordance with the alarm system manufacturer's recommendations or when the current or voltage of the charged battery is less than specified in these recommendations. With the batteries fully charged and connected to the charger, measure the voltage on each battery with a voltmeter. Ensure voltage is 2.30 volts per cell ± 0.02 volts at 77°F (25°C) or as specified by the equipment manufacturer. With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Make sure the voltage level does not drop below specified values. The load test can be performed with a dummy load corresponding to the full fire detection load connected to the battery. With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Make sure the voltage level does not drop below specified values. The load test can be performed with a dummy load corresponding to the full fire detection load connected to the battery. During the charging process, make sure the battery voltage does not drop below 2.05 volts per cell. Measure the specific gravity of the liquid in the pilot cell or all cells as needed. Make sure the specific gravity is within the range specified by the manufacturer. Although specific gravity varies by manufacturer, a range of 1205 to 1220 is typical for common lead-acid batteries, while the typical range for heavy batteries is 1240 to 1260. Do not use a hydrometer that only displays pass or fail condition of the battery and not specific gravity, as such a display does not provide a true indication of battery condition. Replace the batteries in accordance with the alarm system manufacturer's recommendations or when the current or voltage of the charged battery is less than specified in these recommendations. When the batteries are fully charged and connected to the charger, connect an ammeter in series with the battery to be charged. Make sure the charging current meets the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of battery being used. In the absence of specific information, use 1⁄30 to 1/a of the nominal battery capacity. 25 With the battery charger disconnected, charge the batteries according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Make sure the voltage level does not drop below specified values. The load test can be performed with a dummy load corresponding to the full fire detection load connected to the battery. With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Make sure the voltage level does not drop below specified values. The load test can be performed with a dummy load corresponding to the full fire detection load connected to the battery. During charging, ensure that the float voltage for the entire battery is 1.42 volts per cell, nominal. If possible, measure cells individually.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72- 91

Table 14.4.3.2 continuation Periodic frequency

(1) Battery change

Yearly

(2) loader test

Yearly

(3) discharge test

Yearly

(4) Load Voltage Test 10. Public Emergency Call System - Wired System

Half year

Daily

11. Fernansager

Yearly

12. Reserved 13. Reserved

Components

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Method Replace the batteries in accordance with the alarm manufacturer's recommendations or when the current or voltage of the recharged battery drops below that specified in these recommendations. With the batteries fully charged and connected to the charger, measure the voltage on each battery with a voltmeter. Ensure voltage is 2.30 volts per cell ± 0.02 volts at 77°F (25°C) or as specified by the equipment manufacturer. With the battery charger disconnected, load test the batteries according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Make sure the voltage level does not drop below specified values. The load test can be performed with a dummy load corresponding to the full fire detection load connected to the battery. While charging, make sure the battery's performance meets the battery manufacturer's specifications. Manual power tests for public notice circuits must be performed and logged at least once every 24 hours. This evidence must include:

(1) Amperage of each circuit. Current changes in any circuit exceeding 10% should be investigated immediately. (2) Voltage from the terminals of each circuit within the terminals of the protective devices. Circuit voltage changes exceeding 10% should be investigated immediately. (3) eVoltage between ground and circuits. If this test gives a reading that exceeds 50 percent of the test specified in (2), the fault must be located and corrected immediately. Readings that exceed 25 percent should be considered immediately. These readings should be taken with a voltmeter calibrated for a resistance not to exceed 100 ohms per volt. Systems where each circuit is powered by a separate power supply (Forms 3 and 4) require a test between ground and each side of each circuit. Typical power supply systems (Form 2) require voltage tests between ground and each terminal of each battery and other power supply. (4) The reading of current to ground will be allowed instead of what is established in (3). If this test method is used, any reason that indicates a current reading greater than 5 percent of the supplied line current should be checked immediately. (5) Voltage to all common battery terminals, on side of fuse panel. (6) Voltage between battery common and ground. Abnormal soil readings should be investigated immediately. The tests given in (5) and (6) should only be applied to systems using an ordinary battery. If more than one common battery is used, each common battery must be tested. Check the correct functioning and identification of the detectors. If present, verify proper detector operation in a fault condition. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

first acceptance

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72–92

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.4.3.2 Continuation component

first acceptance

periodic frequency

14. Reserved 15. Conductor — Metallic (a) Eddy voltage

N / D

(b) ground faults

N / D

(d) Schleifenwiderstand

N / D

(e) Circuit integrity

N / D

Yearly

16. Conductor — Non-metallic (a) Optical fiber

N / D

(b) Circuit integrity

Method Test all installation conductors with a volt/ohmmeter to ensure that there are no stray (unwanted) voltages between the installation conductors or between the installation conductors and ground. Ensure that the maximum allowable leakage voltage does not exceed 1 volt AC/DC, unless a different limit is specified in the manufacturer's published instructions for the installed equipment. Test the insulation ground of all conductors in the installation, except those intentionally or permanently grounded, in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions for the installed equipment. Test All conductors in the installation, except those intentionally connected, must undergo conductor-to-conductor insulation tests in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions for the installed equipment. Also try these same ground wire circuits. Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of trigger and indicator circuit wiring leads shorted to the other end. Make sure the loop resistance does not exceed the limits specified in the manufacturer's published instructions for the installed equipment. During initial and proof tests, confirmation of the introduction of a fault in any monitored integrity check circuit will result in a fault indication in the fire alarm control unit. Open a connection to at least 10 percent of the initiating devices, notification devices, and controlled devices on all initiating device circuits, notification device circuits, and signal line circuits. Confirm that all circuits function as specified in Sections 23.5, 23.6 and 23.7. For periodic testing, test each activation circuit, each detector circuit, and each signal wire circuit for proper readings on the control unit. Confirm that all circuits function as specified in Sections 23.5, 23.6 and 23.7. Test the fiber optic transmission line with an optical power meter or optical time domain reflector that measures the relative power loss of the line. Test result data must meet or exceed ANSI/TIA 568-C.3, Standard for Fiber Optic Cabling Components, Against Fiber Optic Lines and Connection/Splicing Losses, and the published specifications of the controller manufacturer. During initial and proof tests, confirmation of the introduction of a fault in any monitored integrity check circuit will result in a fault indication in the fire alarm control unit. Open a connection to at least 10 percent of the initiating devices, notification devices, and controlled devices on all initiating device circuits, notification device circuits, and signal line circuits. Confirm that all circuits function as specified in Sections 23.5, 23.6 and 23.7.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72-93

Table 14.4.3.2 Initial acceptance of continuation

periodic frequency

N / D

Yearly

17. Initiator devicef

For periodic testing, test each activation circuit, each detector circuit, and each signal wire circuit for proper readings on the control unit. Confirm that all circuits function as specified in Sections 23.5, 23.6 and 23.7.

Yearly

(b) Fire suppression system(s) or fire suppression system(s), alarm switch(es) (c) Fire gas detectors and other

Yearly

(d) Heat detector (1) Fixed temperature, rotation speed, compensation rate, resettable, point type (no pneumatic tube type) (2) Fixed temperature, non-linear type, resettable (3) Fixed temperature type , point not resettable

Components

(a) Electromechanical trip device (1) Non-resettable connection

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(2) Resettable connection type

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Method

Check correct operation by removing fuse and associated device operation. If necessary, lubricate all moving parts. Check correct operation by removing fuse and associated device operation. If necessary, lubricate all moving parts. Operate the switch mechanically or electrically and make sure the fire control panel receives the signal.

Test fire gas detectors and other fire detectors according to the manufacturer's specifications and depending on the application.

Annually (see Perform Heat Test Using a Listed or Labeled Heat Source or 14.4.4.5) in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Ensure that the test method of installed equipment does not damage the non-resettable fixed temperature element of a fixed temperature/speed response detector combination.

Yearly

Do not run the heat test. Test functionality mechanically and electrically. Measure and record loop resistance. Examine the changes introduced in the acceptance test.

see method

Replace all devices after 15 years from initial installation or test 2 out of 100 detectors in the lab. Replace the 2 detectors with new devices. If one of the remote detectors fails, remove and test additional detectors to determine if there is a general fault with bad detectors or a localized fault with 1 or 2 bad detectors. If detectors are tested and not replaced, repeat tests at 5 year intervals.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-94

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.4.3.2 Initial acceptance of continuation

periodic frequency

(4) Non-resettable (general) (5) Linear type resettable, pneumatic hoses only (6) Single or multi-station heat detectors (e) Manual fire alarm stations (f) Radiant energy fire detectors

Yearly

Half year

(g) Smoke detectors - functional test (1) In dwellings other than single-family or two-family detector system

Yearly

Components

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(2) Single and multi-site smoke detectors connected to listed building systems (3) X-System smoke detectors in single-family and townhomes

Yearly

Method Do not perform heat tests. Test functionality mechanically and electrically. Perform heat tests (if there are test chambers on the circuit) with a listed and labeled heat source or in accordance with the detector manufacturer's published instructions, or perform a pressure pump test. Perform bump tests in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Do not run heat tests on non-resettable heat detectors. Operate fire alarm train stations in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Test key-operated advanced signal stations and manual fire alarm stations. Test flame detectors and spark/ember detectors according to the manufacturer's published instructions to determine if each detector is functioning properly. Determine the sensitivity of flame detectors and spark/ember detectors using one of the following methods: (1) Calibrated test method (2) Manufacturer calibrated sensitivity tester (3) Control unit (4) Calibrated sensitivity test approved by another test method that is directly proportional to the input signal from a list or approval of compatible fire detectors. If designed to be field adjustable, replace detectors that are outside the approved sensitivity range or adjust them to be within the approved range. Failure to determine the sensitivity of the flame detector and spark/ember detector using a light source that delivers an unmeasured amount of radiation at an undetermined distance from the detector.

Field test smoke detectors to ensure smoke enters the sensor chamber and an alarm response occurs. Use smoke or a listed and labeled product that is acceptable to the manufacturer or that conforms to published instructions. Other methods detailed in the manufacturer's published instructions can be used to ensure that smoke from the protected area enters the sensor chamber through the openings. Functionally test all single and multi-station smoke detectors connected to a protected location fire alarm system by placing the smoke detector in an alarm condition and ensuring that the protected location system is receiving a supervisory signal and not is generating a fire alarm signal. H

Perform bump tests in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72–95

Table 14.4.3.2 Continuation component

first acceptance

periodic frequency

(4) Air sampling

Yearly

(5) line type

Yearly

(6) Projected beam type (7) Smoke detector with built-in thermocouple (8) Smoke detector with control output functions (h) Smoke detector - sensitivity tests In dwellings other than single-family and semi-detached, detection system of smoke smoke

Yearly

N / D

Version 14.4.4.3

(h) Carbon monoxide detectors/carbon monoxide alarms for fire alarm purposes (j) Monitoring and activation devices (1) Control valve switches

Yearly

(2) High or low pressure switch

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Method Test in smoke or with a listed and labeled product acceptable to the manufacturer or in accordance with its published instructions. Test at the end of the sampling point or connection on each pipe run. Check airflow through any other ports or points. In addition to the tests required in Table 14.4.3.2(g)(1) and Table 14.4.3.2(h), duct smoke detectors using sampling tubes must be tested using an acceptable method to ensure that they are sampling properly. air to the manufacturer or in accordance with published instructions. Test the detector by introducing smoke, other aerosols, or an optical filter into the beam path. Operate both parts of the detector independently as described for the respective devices.

Ensure that the control capability remains operational even when all trip devices connected to the same trip device circuit or signal line circuit are in alarm.

Perform one of the following tests to ensure each smoke detector is within the indicated and marked sensitivity range:

(1) Calibrated test procedure (2) Sensitivity tester calibrated by the manufacturer (3) Listed controller supplied for this purpose (4) Smoke detector/controller arrangement where the detector activates a signal to the controller if its sensitivity is off of the listed sensitivity range. (5) Other calibrated susceptibility test method approved by the authority having jurisdiction Test equipment installed to ensure entry of CO into the sensor chamber by introducing it through openings in the sensor chamber from the product listed and acceptable to the manufacturer or labeled in accordance use their published instructions.

Operate the valve and verify that signal reception occurs within the first two turns of the handle, or one fifth of the stroke, or in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Operate the switch and verify that signal reception occurs when the required pressure increases or decreases by a maximum of 10 psi (70 kPa) from the required pressure level.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72-96

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.4.3.2 Initial acceptance of continuation

periodic frequency

Yearly

Half year

Yearly

(l) Multisensor or multicriteria fire detector or combined fire detector

Yearly

Press the abort button and verify the correct sequence and function.

Yearly

Activate the abort button and verify the development of the correct matrix with each of the commissioned sensors.

Yearly

Activate the kill switch and verify that the sequence and operation are correct according to the regulations of the competent authority. Observe the order specified in inventory drawings or system operating instructions. Activate a sensor or detector in each zone. Be sure to use the correct sequence when operating the first zone and then when operating the second zone.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Component (3) room temperature switch (4) water level switch

(5) Water temperature switch (j) Mechanical, electrosonic or pressure water flow sensor

18. Special hazard equipment (a) Break switch (dead man type) (b) Break switch (recycled type) (c) Break switch (special type)

(d) Cross zone detection circuit

Method Activate the switch and check for signal reception to indicate that the ambient temperature has dropped to 40°F (4.4°C) and returned above 40°F (4.4°C). Activate the switch and check the reception of the signal that indicates the increase or decrease in the water level by a maximum of 3 inches. (70 mm) above the required level within a pressure vessel or within a maximum of 12 inches. (300 mm) above the required level inside a non-pressurized container. Also check the recovery to the required level. Activate the switch and verify signal reception to indicate that the water temperature has dropped to 4.4°C (40°F) and recovered above 4.4°C (40°F). Water must flow through an inspector test port that indicates equivalent water flow from a single smaller orifice size sprinkler installed in the system for wet piping systems, or through a port alarm test bypass system for deluge, pre-action, or dry-pipe systems in accordance with NFPA 25, Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Hydraulic Fire Protection Systems. Test each of the sensor principles present in the detector (eg, smoke/heat/CO, etc.) independently to determine the specific sensor principle, regardless of the state of the configuration at the time of testing. In addition, test each detector in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions.

Test individual sensors together if the technology allows you to verify individual sensor responses. Carrying out the tests in the manner described for the respective devices, introducing the physical phenomenon into the sensor chamber of the element and verifying them electronically (magnets, analogue values, etc.) is not sufficient to meet this requirement. Confirm the result of each sensor test via the display on the detector or the control unit. If individual sensors cannot be tested individually, test the main sensor. Record all tests and results.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72–97

Table 14.4.3.2 Initial acceptance of continuation

periodic frequency

(e) Matrix-type circuit (f) Solenoid trip circuit (g) Lightning trip circuit (h) Zone checked, sequential circuit, or counter (i) Any of the above devices or circuits, or combinations thereof 19 Combined Systems (a) Electronic control device/system for fire extinguishers (b) Carbon monoxide detection system/device 20. Interface equipment

Yearly

Test the communications between the device connecting the fire extinguisher electronic monitoring device/system and the fire alarm control unit to ensure that the correct signals are received at the fire alarm control unit and fire control unit. fire alarm. if applicable.

Yearly

Test the communications between the device connecting the carbon monoxide detector/system and the fire alarm control unit to ensure that the correct signals are received at the fire alarm control unit and the fire alarm control unit .

Version 14.4.4.4

21. Patrol Equipment 22. Alarm Notification Devices

Yearly

Test the interface device connections by starting or simulating the operation of the monitored device. Make sure that the signals to be sent are received at the control unit. Demonstrate that the test frequency for connected devices is the same as required by applicable NFPA standards for monitored devices. Test the device in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions.

(a) Audiblesn

N / D

Yearly

Components

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Method Activate all sensors in the system. Verify proper matrix development with each sensor running. Check solenoid operation.

Use any glass flash lamp (AGI) or other manufacturer-approved test lamp. Check lamp or flash light operation. Activate the required sensors in at least four locations on the loop. Check the correct sequence for the first and second detectors in alarm. Check circuit supervision by creating an interrupt circuit.

For initial and service test tests, measure signal sound pressure levels with a sound level meter that meets the requirements of ANSI S1.4a, Specifications for Sound Level Meters, Type 2. Measure sound pressure levels at entire protected area to confirm that they meet the requirements of Chapter 18. Set the sound level meter to ANSI S3.41, United States National Standard for Audible Evacuation Signals, using the F [FAST] time weighting feature.

oVerify the operation of notification appliances for periodic tests.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72–98

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.4.3.2 Initial acceptance of continuation

periodic frequency

(b) Audible text notification devices (speakers and other voice message transmission devices)

N / D

Yearly

c) visible

N / D

Yearly

25. Two-way communication system for areas of refuge

Yearly

26. Special Procedures (a) Alarm Verification (b) Multiplexed Systems

Yearly

Components

23. Home screen sound notification device 24. Features

emergency control

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Method For initial and retest tests, measure sound pressure levels of the signal using a sound level meter that meets the requirements of ANSI S1.4a, Specifications for Sound Level Meters, Type 2. Measure sound pressure levels throughout area to confirm compliance with Chapter 18. Configure the sound level meter to ANSI S3.41, United States National Standard for Audible Evacuation Signals, using the F-Time Weighting (FAST) function. Check that the acoustic information is distinguishable and understandable, in accordance with the provisions of point 14.4.11. oVerify the operation of notification appliances for periodic tests. Perform initial and repeat tests in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Ensure that device locations are consistent with the approved design and confirm changes to the floor plan affect the approved design. Ensure that the current rating marking in candela units matches the approved drawing. Confirm that each of the devices has a flashing light. For periodic testing, verify that each device has flashing lighting. Perform the tests in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Check the triggering of devices in the emergency control functions interface for initialization, reset and retest. If an emergency control function interface device is disabled or disconnected while starting device tests, verify that the emergency control function interface device has recovered correctly. At a minimum, test the two-way communication system to verify operation and receipt of visual and audible signals at the transmitter and receiver units. Activate systems with more than five stations, with at least five stations operating at the same time. Check the clarity and quality of the voice. Check alarm delay and response of smoke detection circuits that detected alarm verification. Check communication between sending and receiving units with primary and secondary power. Check communications between sending and receiving units for open and short fault conditions. Verify communication between sending and receiving units in all directions when multiple communication paths are implemented. If there is redundant central control equipment, verify switching and all necessary functions and operations of secondary control equipment. Check all system functions and features in accordance with the provisions of the manufacturer's published instructions.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72-99

Table 14.4.3.2 Continuation component

first acceptance

periodic frequency

A month

27. Monitoring station alarm systems — Receiving equipment a) All equipment

(b) Digital Alarm Communicator Receiver (DACR)

A month

(d) McCulloh system

A month

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Method

Test all system functions and features in accordance with the instructions published by the device manufacturer to verify proper operation, as provided in the applicable sections of Chapter 26. Activate the trigger and verify receipt of the correct trigger signal at the control station. monitoring in 90 seconds. After testing is complete, restore the system to its working state. If test leads are used, run the first and last test without using the test lead. Disconnect each of the transmission media from the DACR and check for audible and visual warning of an error signal at the monitoring station. Have a signal transmitted on each individual input DACR line (track) at least every 6 hours (24 hours for DACTs installed prior to the adoption of the 2013 edition of NFPA 72). Check the reception of these signals. Causes the following states of all DARRs on all repeater and slave station receivers. Verify that the monitoring station is receiving the proper signal for each of the following conditions: (1) AC power failure to radio equipment (2) receiver malfunction (3) antenna and connecting cables failure (4) DARR auto shift indication (5) ) data link failure between the DARR and the monitoring station or substation Test and record the current of each circuit in each monitoring station and substation under the following conditions: (1) During functional operation (2) On each side of the circuit, with receiving equipment designed for conditioned open circuit. Induce a single open or ground condition on each transmit channel. If this error prevents the circuit from working, check to see if you have received an error signal. Cause each of the following conditions in each of the monitoring substations and in all radio receiving and transmitting equipment in the substations; Check for proper signal reception at the monitoring station: (1) RF transmitters operational (radiating) (2) AC power failure to radios (3) RF receivers malfunctioning (4) Automatic indicator transmission

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72–100

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.4.3.2 Initial acceptance of continuation

periodic frequency

(e) Radio Alarm Receiving Station Monitor (RASSR) and Radio Alarm Receiving Station Repeater (RARSR)

A month

Cause each of the following conditions in each of the monitoring substations and in all radio receiving and transmitting equipment in the substations; Check that the monitoring station is receiving the correct signals:

A month

(1) AC power failure to radio equipment (2) malfunction of RF receivers (3) auto switch indication, if applicable, causes any of the following conditions at each monitoring station or substation and on all monitoring equipment repeater radio reception and transmission stations; Verify reception of correct signals at monitoring station: (1) RF transmitters operational (radiating) (2) Loss of AC power to radios (3) Malfunction of RF receivers (4) Auto switch indication Run tests to ensure transmission integrity the engineering and technology path is monitored. When using a single communication path, separate the communication path. Be sure to report the track failure to the monitoring station within 60 minutes of the failure (within 5 minutes for communication devices installed prior to the adoption of the 2013 edition of NFPA 72). Restore the communication line. If multiple communication paths are used, disconnect all communication paths and be sure to report the path failure to the dispatcher within 6 hours of the failure occurring (within 24 hours for communicating devices (Issue). NFPA 72 2013) Restore all communication lines.

Half year

Components

f) Private microwave radiocommunication systems

(g) Performance-based technologies

28. Transmission facilities for public emergency call systems (a) Publicly accessible alarm center

(b) Auxiliary Station

Yearly

Half year

Yearly

Method

Activate initial public access facilities and verify receipt of at least three full rounds of signal pulses. Perform this test under normal circuit conditions. If the unit is equipped for open circuit (ground return) operation, test it in this condition as one of the semi-annual tests. Test each substation trip circuit by energizing a protected facility trip device connected to that circuit. Verify reception of at least three full rounds of signal pulses. Perform the tests required by 28(a). Perform the tests required by 28(b).

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72− 101

Table 14.4.3.2 continuation

Components

first acceptance

periodic frequency

N / D

29. Low power radio (wireless systems)

Yearly

30. Mass notification systems (a) Characteristics

(b) fuses (c) interface equipment

Anual Anual

(d) Lamps and LEDs (e) Primary power supply (main)

Yearly

(f) Audible text notification devices (speakers and other devices used to transmit voice messages) (g) Visible

Yearly

Method The following procedures describe additional acceptance and reacceptance test methods for verifying wireless protection system operation: (1) Use the manufacturer's published instructions and inventory drawings provided by the system provider to verify correct operation of the wireless protection system. agreement with the provider or its designee. representative completed the initial testing phase. (2) From the operating state, boot the system in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Confirm that an alternate communication path exists between the wireless control unit and the peripherals used to configure startup, display, control, and alerts. Test the system to identify alarm and error conditions. (3) Check the batteries of all system components monthly, except when the controller checks all batteries and all components daily. At a minimum, test control equipment to verify proper reception of alarm, monitor, and trouble (input) signals. the operation of evacuation signals and auxiliary functions (output signals); loop monitoring, including open and ground fault detection; and power supply monitoring to detect loss of AC power and disconnection of secondary batteries. Consultation of assessments and follow-up. Check the integrity of single or multiple circuits containing an interface between two or more control units. Test the interface device connections by starting or simulating the operation of the monitored device. Check the signals to be transmitted in the control unit. Turn on lamps and LEDs. Disconnect all secondary (standby) power sources and test the full load, including alarm devices that require simultaneous operation. At the end of the test, reconnect all secondary (standby) power supplies. For redundant power supplies, test each one individually. Measure the sound pressure level with a sound level meter that meets the requirements of ANSI S1.4a, Specifications for Sound Level Meters, Type 2. Measure and record levels throughout the protected area. Configure the sound level meter in accordance with ANSI S3.41, United States National Standard for Audible Evacuation Signals and apply the F-Time Weighting (FAST) feature. Record the maximum output signals when the emergency evacuation audible signal is activated. Make sure that the audible information is distinguishable and understandable. Perform the tests in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Ensure that device locations are consistent with the approved design and confirm changes to the floor plan affect the approved design. Ensure that the current rating marking in candela units matches the approved drawing. Confirm that each of the devices has a flashing light.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 102

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table 14.4.3.2 continuation

Components

first acceptance

periodic frequency

(h) Control unit functions, without displaying diagnostic errors.

Yearly

(i) Reconfiguration

Yearly

Control Unit Security (j) Control Unit Security (k) Audible/Visual Functional Test (1) Software Assurance (m) Secondary Power Test

(n) Wireless signals

Yearly

o) Antennas

Yearly

(p) Transceiver

Yearly

Method Check the incident log file and verify that the correct incidents are recorded. Check the system diagnostics log file; correct deficiencies reported in the process. Delete unnecessary log files. Delete unnecessary error files. Make sure you have enough free disk space. Make sure there is an unimpeded flow of cooling air. Change/clean filters, fans and air intake grilles. Shut down and restart the central control unit computer.

If remote control software is loaded on the system, make sure it is not enabled to prevent unauthorized access to the system. Send a notification to a diverse group of default recipient devices and acknowledge receipt. Add at least one receiving device of each type. Make a full backup of system software. Rotate backups in accordance with accepted site practice. Disconnect AC power. Check the status of the AC power failure alarm on the central control equipment. Check battery voltage while charging with AC power disconnected. Make sure the transmitted/reflected radio power is within specifications. Make sure the transmitted/reflected radio power is within specifications. Check that fixed electrical connections do not show visible corrosion. Check for correct operation and that the assembly is not affected.

Some transmission devices (such as cable modems, fiber optic interface nodes, and VoIP interfaces) are typically powered by the building's electrical system using an unsupported backup power source. This is to ensure that the test center verifies the total standby power required in Chapter 10. Also refer to Table 14.4.3.2, points 7 to 9 for testing secondary power supplies.

It may take up to 60 minutes for the registration (change) signal to be sent automatically.

Refer to Table 14.4.3.2, item 4(a) for testing transmission facilities.

Example: 4000 mAh × 1/25 = 160 mA of charging current at 25 °C (77 °F).

Voltmeter sensitivity changed from 1000 ohms per volt to 100 ohms per volt to minimize false ground readings (caused by induced voltages). W.

Initiating devices such as smoke detectors used to summon elevators, close flaps, or release doors that are held in the open position and are required by code (see NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, Article 9.6.3) to activate the Unit Fire Alarm Control Units (FACU) should be tested at the same frequency (annually) as these devices when producing an alarm signal. They are not monitoring devices, although they do activate a monitoring signal in the FACU. F

Thermal fuse detectors are commonly used to close fire doors and fire dampers. They are triggered by the presence of external heat, which melts a weld element in the chain link, or by a thermal electrical device which, when energized, generates heat in the body of the chain link, causing the chain link to seize, melt and dropping.

GRAMS

Please note that it is common practice for a smoke alarm manufacturer to test a particular aerosol supplier's product to determine if it is suitable for the smoke input test of their smoke alarm/detector. Magnets are not acceptable for smoke entry testing.

There are some detectors that use magnets as a calibrated instrument for the manufacturer's sensitivity test.

For example, it may not be possible to individually test the thermal sensor in a thermally enhanced smoke alarm.

Manufacturer's instructions should be consulted to ensure proper bump testing. It is expected that no gas or suppressant will be released during the solenoid test. See test plan in point 14.2.10.

Testing of the CO detection device must be performed in accordance with the requirements set forth in NFPA 720, Standard for Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Alert Equipment.

you

m A monitoring module installed in an interface device is not considered a monitoring device and therefore is not subject to the Semi-Annual Test Frequency requirement. Test frequencies for interface devices must comply with the provisions of the applicable standard. For example, fire pump control alarms such as B. phase reversal will be tested annually. If a phase reversal detection monitoring module is installed in the fire panel, it is not necessary to test the phase reversal four times a year.

Chapter 18 required 15 dB above average ambient noise for public spaces. Sometimes ambient noise levels differ from what the design was based on. The private mode of operation would require 10 dB above average ambient noise in the location where the device is located.

norte

If changes to the building, facility, or occupancy are identified, the owner must be notified of the changes. If necessary, new devices must be installed, which are verified according to the initial acceptance criteria.

See A.14.4.3.2 and Table 14.4.3.2, point 24.

PAG

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE

72- 103

14.4.3.3 Smoke and flame detectors with video images must be inspected, tested and maintained in accordance with the instructions published by the manufacturer.

Fire control panel when its sensitivity is outside the indicated sensitivity range (5) Other calibrated sensitivity test methods approved by the competent authority

Paragraph 14.4.3.4 was added by a provisional interim amendment (TIA). see page

14.4.4.3.5 Unless otherwise permitted in 14.4.4.3.6, smoke detectors with a sensitivity outside the listed and marked sensitivity range must be cleaned and recalibrated or replaced.

14.4.3.4 Gas detectors must be inspected, tested and maintained in accordance with the instructions published by the manufacturer. 14.4.4* Frequency of Tests. Unless otherwise permitted in other sections of this Code, testing must be performed according to the schedule specified in Table 14.4.3.2, or more frequently if required by the relevant authority. 14.4.4.1 Devices or equipment that are inaccessible for safety reasons (for example, continuous process operation, energized electrical equipment, radiation and excessive altitude) may be inspected during planned interruptions, if permitted by the competent authority. Extended intervals should not exceed 18 months. 14.4.4.2 Where automatic checks are performed at least weekly via a remotely monitored fire alarm control panel specifically listed for the application, the frequency of manual checks may be extended to an annual frequency. The provisions of Table 14.4.3.2 apply.

14.4.4.3.6 Smoke detectors listed as field adjustable may be adjusted, cleaned and recalibrated or replaced within the listed and marked sensitivity range. 14.4.4.3.7 Detector sensitivity must not be tested or measured with any device that emits an unmeasured concentration of smoke or other aerosol at the smoke detector or alarm. 14.4.4.4 The test frequency for interface devices must be the same as required by the applicable NFPA standards for the devices being monitored. 14.4.4.5 Point, resettable and fixed temperature detectors must be tested in accordance with the provisions of points 14.4.4.5.1 to 14.4.4.5.4. 14.4.4.5.1 Two or more detectors shall be tested annually on each trigger circuit. 14.4.4.5.2 Different detectors must be tested each year.

14.4.4.3* In non-single-family or two-family residences, the sensitivity of smoke detectors must be tested in accordance with the provisions of numbers 14.4.4.3.1 to 14.4.4.3.7.

14.4.4.5.3 The building owner shall keep test records showing which detectors have been tested.

14.4.4.3.1 Sensitivity must be checked within one year after installation.

14.4.4.5.4 Within 5 years, each of the detectors must have been tested.

14.4.4.3.3 If, after the second required calibration test, the sensitivity tests show that the device has remained within its listed and marked sensitivity range (or 4% light gray smoke obscuration, if unmarked), the time between calibration tests should be extended to a maximum of 5 years. 14.4.4.3.3.1 False alarm records and subsequent false alarm trends must be retained in case the frequency increases. 14.4.4.3.3.2 The calibration tests will be carried out in zones or areas where there is some increase in false alarms in relation to the previous year. 14.4.4.3.4 To ensure that each smoke detector is within its indicated and marked sensitivity range, it must be tested using one of the following methods: (1) Calibrated test method (2) Sensitivity test instrument calibrated by manufacturer (3) Mandatory instruments for this purpose Listed control devices (4) Smoke detector/fire alarm control panel arrangement, whereby the detector activates a signal in the

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

14.4.4.6* Circuit and track tests of each monitored circuit or track must be performed with initial acceptance or reacceptance tests to verify that the signals are indicated on the control unit for each of the abnormal conditions Sections 23.5 to 23.7. Paragraph 14.4.5 was incorporated by a Tentative Interim Amendment (TIA). (AUNT). See page 1.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

14.4.4.3.2 Thereafter, sensitivity shall be checked every two years, unless otherwise permitted under 14.4.4.3.3.

14.4.5 Single and multi-station smoke detectors. Smoke alarms and all connected devices should be inspected and tested at least monthly in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Responsibility for maintenance and testing must comply with the provisions of point 14.2.3. (SIG-HOU). 14.4.6 Domestic fire alarm systems.

14.4.6.1 Tests. Residential fire alarm systems must be tested at least once a year by a qualified technician according to the methods specified in Table 14.4.3.2. The installation company must provide this information to the customer in writing upon completion of the system installation. If the fire alarm system is monitored externally, the monitoring system manufacturer must inform the customer of this requirement annually. (SIG-HOU) 14.4.6.2 Maintenance. system maintenance

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 104

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Household fire alarm maintenance should be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. (NEXT HOU)

necessary to ensure compliance with the provisions of point 24.5.2.2.3

14.4.7 Replacement of smoke detectors in single-family and semi-detached residences.

(3) Annually or at intervals determined by the competent authority

14.4.7.1 Unless otherwise recommended in the manufacturer's published instructions, single- and multi-station smoke alarms installed in single-family and two-family homes shall be replaced if they do not respond to functional tests, but shall not remain in service longer than time. 10 years from date of manufacture. (NEXT HOU)

14.4.10.2 System Commissioning Test. System commissioning tests must comply with the following:

14.4.7.2* Combined smoke/CO alarms must be replaced when the end of life signal is activated or 10 years from the manufacturing date, whichever occurs first. (NEXT HOU)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

14.4.7.3 When batteries are used as a power source for single or multi-station smoke/combination smoke/CO detectors, they must be replaced in accordance with the instructions published by the equipment manufacturer. (SIG-HOU). 14.4.8 Central Station Circuits. Testing of all circuits coming from the central station must be carried out at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. 14.4.9 Public emergency notification systems. 14.4.9.1 Emergency power sources, except batteries, must be tested at least weekly in accordance with the provisions of points 14.4.9.1.1 and 14.4.9.1.2. 14.4.9.1.1 Tests must include operation of the power supply to supply power to the system for a continuous period of 1 hour. 14.4.9.1.2 The tests must require the simulated failure of the normal power supply. 14.4.9.2 Except as permitted in 14.4.9.3, test facilities shall be located in the communications center and any communications sub-centre, if used. 14.4.9.3 Test facilities for systems leased from a non-municipal organization may be installed in locations other than a communications center, if approved by the competent authority. 14.4.10* Emergency radio systems in buildings. The local fire department, building owner, or designated representative must inspect and test the operation of the building's emergency radio communication systems in accordance with the manufacturer's published requirements. 14.4.10.1 Signal Level Test. The signal level test will be carried out to verify the signal strength according to item 24.5.2.3 at the following times: (1) initial assessment of radio coverage as provided in items 24.5.2.2.1 and 24.5.2.2. 2 for new or existing buildings (2) After installing or modifying the security-enhanced radio communication system

(1) The building owner must ensure that a commissioning test of the complementary public transport system is carried out before final inspection by the competent authority. (2) The commissioning test must ensure that the bidirectional supply on each floor of the building meets the minimum supply requirements specified in 24.5.2.2.1 and 24.5.2.2.2. (3) The test must be performed on the frequencies assigned to the territory. (4) The test must be coordinated with the competent authority so that there is no impermissible interference in the public safety operation. (5) All tests must be performed at the frequency approved by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). 14.4.10.3* Test procedure. The test plan must ensure that tests are carried out throughout the building. The test methods must correspond to the information provided by the competent authority. 14.4.10.4* Measurement Parameters. Signal levels shall be measured to ensure that the system meets the criteria of 24.5.2.3 according to parameters specified by the competent authority. 14.4.10.5* acceptance test. An acceptance test of the public safety radio communications improvement system will be scheduled in coordination with the competent authority. Acceptance testing procedures and requirements will be those specified by the competent authority. 14.4.10.6* Annual tests. If an upgraded radio communication system is required for public safety, it should be the building owner's responsibility to have all active system components, such as signal amplifiers, newer power supplies and battery backup, tested at least once. every 12 months. The competent authority must be notified in advance and specify the procedures and requirements for annual inspections. 14.4.11* Speech intelligibility. 14.4.11.1 The intelligibility of voice communications using pre-recorded messages and manual voice commands must be verified in accordance with the requirements of 18.4.10. 14.4.11.2 It is not necessary to determine intelligibility by means of quantitative measurements. 14.4.11.3 Quantitative measurements described in Appendix D are permitted, but not mandatory. 14.5 Maintenance. 14.5.1 The system equipment must be maintained in accordance with

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

BOAT DEVICES

14.5.2 The frequency of maintenance of system equipment must depend on the type of equipment and local environmental conditions. 14.5.3 The cleaning frequency of the system's equipment must depend on the type of equipment and the local environmental conditions. 14.5.4 Any equipment that needs to be rewound or reset to maintain normal operation must be rewound or reset as soon as possible after each test and alarm. 14.5.5 Unless otherwise permitted in 14.5.6, the means of retransmission defined in Section 26.3 shall be tested at intervals not exceeding 12 hours. 14.5.6 When the means of transmission is the public switched telephone network, it will be possible to carry out tests at weekly intervals to confirm its operation for each of the communication centers.

14.6.2.4* A record of all inspection, testing and maintenance services must be provided in accordance with the provisions of point 7.8.2. 14.6.3 Monitoring Station Records. In the case of control center alarm systems, records of maintenance, inspection and test signals received at the control center must be kept for a minimum period of 12 months. 14.6.3.1 Records must be kept on paper or electronic media. 14.6.3.2 A paper record must be submitted to the competent authority upon request. 14.6.4 Simulated Operation Notification. If the operation of a special hazard installation, circuit, fire control panel or system interface is simulated, the inspection/test form must indicate that the operation was simulated.

14.5.7 As part of the tests required in 14.5.5, the retransmission signal and the time and date of the retransmission must be recorded at the central station.

Chapter 15 Reserved

Chapter 16 Reserved

14.6 Records. 14.6.1* Permanent Records. Upon successful completion of acceptance tests approved by the competent authority, the requirements specified in points 14.6.1.1 to 14.6.1.3 apply. 14.6.1.1 The owner of the building or his designated representative must receive a set of reproducible installation drawings, operation and maintenance manuals and a written operational description. 14.6.1.2* Site Specific Software. 14.6.1.2.1 For software-based systems, a copy of the site-specific software must be made available to the system owner or designee. 14.6.1.2.2 A copy of the Site Specific Software must be maintained on the Site in non-volatile, non-erasable, non-rewritable storage. 14.6.1.3 The owner of the system is responsible for keeping such records during the useful life of the system for inspection by any authority having jurisdiction. The use of paper or electronic media must be permitted. 14.6.2 Maintenance, Inspection and Test Records. 14.6.2.1 Records must be kept until the next event and for one year thereafter. 14.6.2.2 For systems using resettable, fixed temperature local heat detectors tested for several years, records shall be retained for 5 years of testing and one year thereafter. 14.6.2.3 Records must be maintained in a medium in which they can survive the retention period. The use of paper or electronic media must be permitted.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Chapter 17 Boot Devices 17.1 Application. 17.1.1 The performance, selection, use and disposition of automatic or manual release devices, including, but not limited to, fire alarm devices, devices that detect the operation of fire suppression and suppression systems, flow sensors, water pumps, pressure switches, fire alarm devices. - stations and other surveillance signal activation devices (including patrol notification) used to ensure timely alarm emission for surveillance, life safety and protection purposes a building, room, structure, area or object must meet to the minimum requirements specified in this chapter. 17.1.2* This chapter specifies the minimum trip device installation criteria required by any other law, regulation, standard or applicable section of this document. This chapter does not require the installation of initiator devices per se. 17.1.3 The requirements of Chapters 7, 10, 12, 21 and 24 must also be met, unless they conflict with this Chapter. 17.1.4 The requirements of Chapter 14 apply. 17.1.5 The requirements for single and multi-station alarm systems and fire detection systems for residential buildings shall be specified in accordance with Chapter 29 Persons familiar with the application of fire detection and detection systems and services. 17.1.7 The interconnection of the actuating devices with the

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

instructions published by the manufacturer.

72− 105

72-106

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Configurations of control devices and power supplies or with output signal systems that respond to external activation must be made as described in this Code or any other applicable statute, code or standard. 17.2 Purpose. Manual and automatic release devices shall contribute to the safety of life, fire safety and property protection by providing a reliable means of signaling other equipment arranged to monitor the release devices in response to these signals.

Remote alarm or surveillance indicators will be installed in an accessible location on the control unit (and on plans with their specific location and function) and will be clearly marked indicating their function and any device or equipment connected to each detector. 17.4.10* If the intention is to act when smoke/fire poses a threat to a specific object or space, the detector must be installed close to that object or space.

17.3* Performance Based Design.

17.5 Requirements for smoke and heat detectors.

17.3.1 Performance-based designs submitted to the authority having jurisdiction for review and approval must include documentation in an approved format for each scenario and applicable performance objective, together with any other calculations, models or other engineering aids used to prepare the proposal . performance and life safety.

17.5.1 Integrated assembly. Detectors must not be flush-mounted unless they have been tested or certified for flush-mounting.

17.3.2 The authority having jurisdiction will determine whether such identified performance objectives are appropriate and whether they have been achieved. 17.3.3 The authority having jurisdiction must pre-approve changes and deviations from the approved project or from the basis of the project. 17.4 General Requirements. 17.4.1 The requirements of 17.4.2 to 17.4.9 apply to all releasing devices. 17.4.2 A release mechanism must be protected if it is susceptible to mechanical damage. A mechanical protection device that protects a detector from smoke, heat, or radiant energy must be listed for use with the detector.

17.5.2* Partitions. If the partitions extend up to 15% of the ceiling height, the rooms separated by the partitions are considered separate rooms. 17.5.3* Detector Cover. 17.5.3.1 Total Coverage (Total). If required by other applicable laws, rules or regulations and unless otherwise modified in 17.5.3.1.1 to 17.5.3.1.5, full coverage includes all bedrooms, hallways, storage areas, basements, attics , attics and air spaces, false ceilings and other subdivisions and accessible spaces, and the interior of all closets, elevator shafts, enclosed stairs, elevators and slides.

17.4.4 The releasing devices must be installed in a way to facilitate the periodic inspection, test and maintenance.

17.5.3.1.2 Detectors in combustible blind spaces are not required if any of the following conditions exist:

17.4.5 Initiating devices must be installed in any area, department or location required by any other applicable law, regulation or standard.

(1) When ceiling is attached directly to the base of rafters of a flammable roof or floor. (2) When concealed space is fully occupied by non-combustible insulation (in the case of solid beam construction, insulation need only occupy the space from the ceiling to the bottom edge of the ceiling or floor beam). (3) Where there are small concealed spaces above spaces, provided such spaces do not exceed 50 ft2 (4.6 m2) in area. (4) In spaces formed by sets of casing or soffit columns in walls, floors or ceilings where the spacing between casing or soffit columns is less than 150 mm (6 inches).

17.4.6* Duplicate terminals or conductors must be provided in each activation device for the specific purpose of connection to the fire detection system to monitor the signal and wiring performance. Exception: Bootable devices connected to a system running required monitoring. 17.4.7 When smoke alarms are installed in hidden places more than 3.0 m (10 feet) above the finished floor or in places where the alarm indication or alarm monitor is not visible to the security services. emergency, alarms must be equipped with a remote control. alarm - or be equipped with a surveillance screen in a location acceptable to the competent authority. 17.4.8* When a remote alarm indicator for an automatic fire detector is in a concealed location, the location of the detector and the area protected by the detector must be clearly indicated on the remote alarm indicator by permanently attached signs or other approved means. . 17.4.9 When required by paragraph 17.4.7 and unless the specific detector or alarm supervision signal is displayed

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

17.4.3 Tripping devices must be supported regardless of their connection to the circuit conductors.

17.5.3.1.1 If restricted areas are constructed or contain combustible materials, they must be accessible and protected by one or more detectors, unless otherwise specified in 17.5.3.1.2.

17.5.3.1.3 Detectors are not required under open grid ceilings if all the following conditions are met: (1) The size of the grid frame is the smallest size of 1/4 of an inch (6.4 mm) the most. (2) Material thickness does not exceed the minimum. (3) Cavities make up at least 70 percent of the area of the roofing material. 17.5.3.1.4* When concealed accessible spaces above recessed ceilings are used as a return air plenum, meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems,

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

DETECTION DEVICES Detection must be accomplished by one of the following means: (1) Smoke detection must be provided in accordance with 17.7.4.2, or (2) Smoke detection must be provided at each of the chamber connections. return air to the central ventilation unit. . 17.5.3.1.5 Detectors are not required on open docks and cargo decks or in underground spaces if all of the following conditions are met: (1) the space is not accessible for storage or access purposes; unauthorized and is protected from the accumulation of windblown debris. (2) The room does not contain any equipment such as steam pipes, electrical wiring, ducts, or conveyor belts. (3) The floor above the room is airtight. (4) No flammable liquids are processed, handled or stored on the upper deck. 17.5.3.2* Partial or selective coverage. When another applicable law, code or regulation requires protection of only selected areas, the specified areas must be protected in accordance with the provisions of this Code. 17.5.3.3* Coverage is not required. 17.5.3.3.1 When a detector is installed to meet specific fire safety objectives, but is not required by law, rule or regulation, it must meet the requirements of this Code, except for the distance criteria already specified in chapter 17 17.5 .3.3. 2 When detectors are installed that are not required to meet specific fire safety objectives, it is not necessary to install additional detectors that are not required to meet those objectives. 17.6 Heat sensitive fire detectors. 17.6.1 Generally. 17.6.1.1* The heat detection project documentation must indicate the required performance objective of the system. 17.6.1.2 Designs that do not comply with clause 17.6.1.3 are considered mandatory and must be designed in accordance with the requirements of this chapter. 17.6.1.3* Performance-based designs must be made in accordance with Section 17.3. 17.6.1.4* Point heat detectors must include in their installation instructions specifications and listing documents for the operating temperature and response time index (RTI) as specified by the organization that lists the device. 17.6.2 Temperature. 17.6.2.1 Classification. Temperature or velocity compensated fixed point heat detectors shall be rated according to their operating temperature as indicated in Table 17.6.2.1. 17.6.2.2 Marking. 17.6.2.2.1 Color Coding. 17.6.2.2.1.1 Fixed point temperature or rate compensated heat detectors shall be

72- 107

marked with a color code as shown in Table 17.6.2.1.

Table 17.6.2.1 Temperature classification and color coding for heat sensitive fire detectors Nominal temperature range

maximum roof temperature

Code Classification °F °C °F °C Color Temperature Low* 100-134 39-57 80 28 Colorless Normal 135-174 58-79 115 47 Colorless Medium 175-249 80-121 155 69 High White 250-324 122- 162 230 111 Blue Extra High 325-399 163-204 305 152 Red Extra High 400-499 205-259 380 194 Green Ultra High 500-575 260-302 480 249 Orange *For installation in controlled environments only. Units must be labeled to indicate the maximum ambient temperature at the time of installation.

17.6.2.2.1.2 If the inherent color of the thermal detection fire detector is the same as the color coding required to identify the detector, one of the following provisions shall be placed in a conspicuous and visible color at the time of installation: (1 ) A ring on the surface of the detector (2) The operating temperature in digits at least 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) high 17.6.2.2.2 Operating temperature. 17.6.2.2.2.1 Fire detectors with a heat sensor must be marked with the indicated operating temperature. 17.6.2.2.2.2 Fire detectors with heat sensors, where the alarm limit can be defined locally, must be marked with the temperature range. 17.6.2.2.2.3 Point heat detectors must also be marked with their RTI. 17.6.2.3* Roof ambient temperature. Detectors with fixed temperature or velocity compensated elements shall be selected in accordance with Table 17.6.2.1 for the maximum expected ambient ceiling temperature. The detector's temperature rating must be at least 20°F (11°C) above the maximum expected ceiling temperature. 17.6.3 Location and space. 17.6.3.1 Flat Cover Slab. 17.6.3.1.1* Distance. One of the following requirements applies: (1) The distance between the detectors must not exceed the specified distance and the detectors must be located at a distance of half the specified distance, measured at right angles, from any wall or partition to an extension up to the top 15% of ceiling height. (2) All ceiling points must contain a detector

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

with a distance equal to or less than 0.7 times the certified distance (0.7S). 17.6.3.1.2 Irregular Areas. For irregularly shaped areas, the distance between detectors may be greater than the listed distance, provided that the maximum distance from a detector to the farthest point of a side wall or corner within its protected area is not more than 0.7 times the indicated distance. 17.6.3.1.3 Location. 17.6.3.1.3.1* Unless otherwise modified in 17.6.3.2.2, 17.6.3.3.2 or 17.6.3.7, heat sensitive spot fire detectors shall be ceiling mounted with a minimum spacing of 4 inches. (100 mm) of sidewall or for sidewalls up to 4 in. and 12 in. (100 mm and 300 mm) from the ceiling. 17.6.3.1.3.2 Unless the opposite is modified in 17.6.3.2.2, 17.6.3.3.2 or 17.6.3.7, linear heat detectors must be mounted on the ceiling or on the side walls at no more than 20 inches from distance. (510 mm) from the ceiling. 17.6.3.2* Solid Beam Construction. 17.6.3.2.1 Distance. Design spacing of heat detectors, measured at right angles to beams, should not exceed 50% of the spacing indicated. 17.6.3.2.2 Location. Detectors must be mounted at the bottom of the beams. 17.6.3.3* Beam structures. 17.6.3.3.1 Distance. 17.6.3.3.1.1 A platform is considered level when the beams do not project more than 4 inches. (100mm) below. 17.6.3.3.1.2 When beams project more than 4 inches. (100 mm) below the ceiling, the distance between point heat detectors towards the beams should not exceed two-thirds of the specified distance. 17.6.3.3.1.3 When beams project more than 18 inches. (460 mm) below the ceiling and more than 8 ft (2.4 m) o.c., each section formed by the joists must be treated as a separate area. 17.6.3.3.2 Location. When beams measure less than 12 inches. (300 mm) deep and less than 8 ft (2.4 m) o.c., detectors can be mounted on the underside of beams. 17.6.3.4* Roof slopes (roof slope and roof slope). 17.6.3.4.1 Distance. 17.6.3.4.1.1 Roof slope less than 30 degrees. If the roof pitch is less than 30 degrees, all detectors should be spaced using the ridge height. 17.6.3.4.1.2 Roof pitch of 30 degrees or more. All detectors, except those located on the crest, should be spaced using either the average slope height or the crest height. 17.6.3.4.1.3 The distance will be measured along a horizontal projection of the cover, depending on the species

roof construction. 17.6.3.4.2 Location. 17.6.3.4.2.1 A row of detectors must first be placed at or within 36 inches. (910 mm) from the apex of the roof. 17.6.3.4.2.2 Additional detectors will be placed as specified in point 17.6.3.4.1. 17.6.3.5 High ceilings. 17.6.3.5.1* On ceilings from 10 ft to 30 ft (3 m to 9.1 m) high, heat detector spacing must be reduced in accordance with Table 17.6.3.5.1 before any further reduction in beams is made or pending, if applicable. .

Table 17.6.3.5.1 Reduced Heat Detector Spacing by Ceiling Height Ceiling height greater than (>) in. in. in. 0 0 10 3.0 12 3.7 14 4.3 16 4.9 18 5.5 20 6.1 22 6.7 24 7.3 26 7.9 28 8.5

up to and including feet in m 10 3.0 12 3.7 14 4.3 16 4.9 18 5.5 20 6.1 22 6.7 24 7.3 26 7.9 28 8.5 30 9, 1

Exception: Table 17.6.3.5.1 does not apply to the following detectors, which are based on the integration effect: (1) Linear electrical conductivity detectors (see 3.3.66.11) (2) Pneumatic tube type thermal response rate detectors (see 3.3 66.15) In these cases, the manufacturer's recommendations for the correct setting of the alarm point and distance must be followed. 17.6.3.5.2* Minimum distance. The minimum distance between heat detectors must not be less than 0.4 times the ceiling height. 17.6.3.6* Integrated Thermal Sensors Mounted on Combined and Multi-Sensor Detectors. A thermal sensor integrally mounted to a smoke detector must be rated for a minimum distance of 50 feet (15.2 m). 17.6.3.7 Other applications. If a detector is used in any application other than open area protection, the manufacturer's published instructions must be followed. 17.6.3.8 Alternative design methods. Appendix B can be used as an alternative design method to determine detector spacing. 17.7 Fire detector Smoke detector. 17.7.1 Generally.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Multiply the given distance by 1.00 0.91 0.84 0.77 0.71 0.64 0.58 0.52 0.46 0.40 0.34

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72− 108

ACTIVATION DEVICES 17.7.1.1* The smoke detection project documentation must indicate the required performance objective of the system. 17.7.1.2* Drafts that do not comply with Section 17.7.1.3 are considered prescription drafts and must be made in accordance with the requirements established in this chapter.

72-109

17.7.2* Sensitivity. 17.7.2.1* Smoke detectors must be marked with their sensitivity and nominal production tolerance (percentage of obscuration per foot), as indicated.

17.7.1.3* Performance-based projects must be executed in accordance with Section 5.3.

17.7.2.2 Smoke detectors equipped to be field adjustable in sensitivity shall have an adjustment range of not less than 0.6 percent per obscuration per foot.

17.7.1.4 The requirements already specified in this clause apply only when the detectors are installed in common indoor locations.

17.7.2.3 If the sensitivity adjustment feature is on the detector, a method must be provided to reset the detector to its factory calibration.

17.7.1.5 When detectors are installed to control the propagation of smoke, they must be installed in accordance with the requirements of 17.7.5.

17.7.2.4 Detectors that have a facility to programmatically adjust their sensitivity need only be able to be labeled with their programmable range of sensitivity.

17.7.1.6 Smoke detectors must be installed in all areas where required by any other applicable law, code or regulation, or any other section of this Code.

17.7.3 Location and space. 17.7.3.1* General.

17.7.1.7 The selection and location of smoke detectors must take into account both the performance characteristics of the detector and the areas in which the detectors will be installed to avoid false or unintentional alarms or inadequate operation after installation.

17.7.3.1.1 The location and spacing of smoke detectors should be based on the expected smoke flows caused by the smoke cloud or high pressure jet created by the expected fire and any pre-existing ambient air flow present. in a protected area can be enclosure.

17.7.1.8* Smoke detectors must not be installed in any of the following conditions, unless they are specifically designed and certified for these expected conditions:

17.7.3.1.2 The design must consider the contribution of the following factors in predicting the performance of the detector in relation to anticipated fires to which the system tries to respond:

(1) Temperatures below 0°C (32°F) (2) Temperatures above 38°C (100°F) (3) Relative humidity above 93% (4) Air velocity greater than 300 ft/min . (1.5 m/sec) 17.7.1.9* The location of smoke detectors must be based on an assessment of potential environmental sources of smoke, humidity, dust or gases and electrical or mechanical interference to minimize false alarms. 17.7.1.10* The effect of the bed below the ceiling must be considered. The instructions in Annex B 17.7.1.11* Protection during construction must be applied. 17.7.1.11.1 If signal activation detectors are installed during construction, they must be cleaned and checked to operate at the indicated sensitivity or replaced before the final operation of the system. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

17.7.1.11.2 If detectors are installed during construction but not commissioned, they must be protected against debris, dust, dirt and structural damage in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and tested for operation at the indicated sensitivity or must be tested before of the installation. be replaced before the system is finally put into operation. 17.7.1.11.3 If detection is not required during construction, detectors must not be installed until all remaining works are fully conditioned.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

(1) Roof shape and surface (2) Roof height (3) Configuration of protected area contents (4) Combustion characteristics and probable equivalence relationship of expected fires to fuel loads within the protected area (5) Fire section ventilation (6) ambient temperature, pressure, altitude, humidity and atmosphere 17.7.3.1.3 When it is intended to protect against a specific danger, detectors must be able to be installed closer to the danger, in a position where the detector can intercept the smoke . 17.7.3.2* Point smoke detectors. 17.7.3.2.1* Point smoke detectors must be installed above the ceiling or, if located on a side wall, within 12 inches of the ceiling. (300 mm) from the ceiling to the top of the detector. 17.7.3.2.2* To minimize dust contamination, smoke detectors, when installed below raised floors, must be mounted only in the orientation for which they were certified. 17.7.3.2.3 On smooth ceilings, spacing for point smoke detectors shall be in accordance with Sections 17.7.3.2.1 to 17.7.3.2.4. 17.7.3.2.3.1* In the absence of specific performance-based design criteria, one of the following requirements applies: (1) Spacing between smoke detectors must not exceed a nominal spacing of 30 feet (9.1 m) and must be between the detectors at a separation of half the nominal space, the measurements

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 110

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

perpendicular to any wall or partition that extends upwards within 15% of the top of the ceiling height. (2)* All points above the ceiling must have a detector at a distance equal to or less than 0.7 times (0.7 s) the nominal distance of 30 feet (9.1 m). 17.7.3.2.3.2 In all cases, the instructions published by the manufacturer must be followed. 17.7.3.2.3.3 Other distances are allowed depending on ceiling height, different conditions or response requirements. 17.7.3.2.3.4 The flame detection instructions prescribed in Appendix B shall apply. 17.7.3.2.4.6. 17.7.3.2.4.1 For the purposes of release instructions for smoke detectors, massive beams are considered equivalent to joists. 17.7.3.2.4.2 The following applies to higher level limits:

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(1) In the case of ceilings with rafter edges less than 10% of the ceiling height (0.1H), distances from smooth ceilings are allowed. Point smoke detectors can be mounted on ceilings or at the bottom of beams. (2) For ceilings with beam depths equal to or greater than 10 percent of ceiling height (0.1 H): (a) When beam spacing is equal to or greater than 40 percent of ceiling height (0.1 H). 4H), point detectors must be located above the ceiling and can be arranged in each of the beam fields. (b) When beam spacing is less than 40% of ceiling height, point detectors can: i. Spacing of flat slabs parallel to the joists and spacing in the center of flat slabs perpendicular to the joists ii. Detector placement on ceiling or underside of beams (3)* For beam runs consisting of cross beams, including coffered or ribbed ceilings, the following applies: (a) For joist depths less than 10% of the ceiling height ( 0.1 H), the distance shall comply with the provisions of 17.7.3.2.4.2(1). (b) For rafter depths greater than or equal to 10 percent of roof height (0.1 H), spacing shall meet the provisions of 17.7.3.2.4.2(2). (4)* For corridors 15 feet (4.6 m) wide or less with solid ceiling beams or beams perpendicular to the length of the corridor: (a) Spaces between smooth ceilings are allowed. (b) Location of the point smoke detector on the ceiling, side wall or bottom of a solid beam or joist (5) For rooms of 84 m2 or less, the following shall be permitted:

(a) Using a flat ceiling space (b) Mounting point smoke detectors on ceilings or underside of beams 17.7.3.2.4.3* For sloping ceilings with beams parallel to the slope: (1) Spotlight detectors must be fixed to the ceiling within the span(s) of the beam. (2) Average height above ground will be used as ceiling height. (3) The distance will be measured along a horizontal projection of the ceiling. (4) Smooth ceiling clearances are permitted within spans parallel to the beams. (5) For beam depths less than or equal to 10 percent of ceiling height (0.1 H), point detectors evenly spaced from the ceiling should be placed perpendicular to the beams. (6) For joist depths greater than 10% of the ceiling height (0.1 H), for perpendicular distances to the joists: (a) For joist spacing greater than or equal to 40% of the ceiling height (0.4 H ), point detectors must be installed in each of the beam fields to be arranged. (b) When beam spacing is less than 40% of ceiling height (0.4H), point detectors are not required at all beam spans, but should not be more than 50% of the distance between beams . 17.7.3.2.4.4* For pitched roofs with beams perpendicular to the pitch: (1) Point detectors must be located at the bottom of the beams. (2) Average height above ground will be used as ceiling height. (3) The distance will be measured along a horizontal projection of the ceiling. (4) Smooth roof gaps are allowed within rafter spans. (5) For support depths less than or equal to 10% of ceiling height (0.1 H), point detectors should be placed at a uniform distance from the ceiling. (6) With depths greater than 10% of ceiling height (0.1H), point detectors should not be closer than (0.4H) and should not exceed 50% of the distance. 17.7.3.2.4.5* For inclined ceilings with spans of beams formed by crossing beams: (1) The detectors must be located at the bottom of the beams. (2) Average height above ground will be used as ceiling height. (3) The distance will be measured along a horizontal projection of the ceiling. (4) With support depths less than or equal to 10% of ceiling height (0.1H), point detectors should not be more than three supports apart and should not exceed the distance between smooth ceilings. (5) For beam edges greater than 10% of the height

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

LAUNCHING DEVICES from the ceiling (0.1H), point detectors must not be more than two prongs apart, but not less than (0.4H) and must not exceed 50% of the distance from the smooth ceiling. 17.7.3.2.4.6 In the case of sloping ceilings with massive beams, the detectors must be located at the bottom of the beam. 17.7.3.3* Pediment. First, the detectors must be spaced and placed 36 inches apart. (910 mm), measured horizontally. The number and spacing of any additional detectors should be based on the horizontal ceiling projection. 17.7.3.4* One water. First, the detectors must be spaced and placed 36 inches apart. (910 mm) from the raised side of the roof, measured horizontally. The number and spacing of any additional detectors should be based on the horizontal ceiling projection. 17.7.3.5 Raised Floors and False Ceilings. Rooms under raised floors and above false ceilings should be treated as separate rooms with respect to distances from smoke detectors. Detectors installed below raised floors or above dropped ceilings or both, including raised floors and dropped ceilings used for ambient air, should not be used in place of ambient detection. 17.7.3.5.1 The following applies to raised floors: (1) Detectors installed below raised floors shall be arranged in accordance with the provisions of 17.7.3.1, 17.7.3.1.3 and 17.7.3.2.2. (2) If the area below the raised floor is also used for outside air, detector spacing must also be in accordance with 17.7.4.1 and 17.7.4.2. 17.7.3.5.2 For Suspended Ceilings: (1) The spacing of detectors above false ceilings shall meet the requirements of 17.7.3 for ceiling configuration. (2) When detectors are installed on ceilings serving ambient air, the distances between detectors shall also comply with the provisions of 17.7.4.1 and 17.7.4.2. 17.7.3.6 Smoke Detector for Air Sampling. 17.7.3.6.1 Each sampling port of an air sampling smoke detector must be treated as a point detector in terms of location and spacing. 17.7.3.6.2 The maximum transport time of the air sample from the most distant sampling port to the detector must not exceed 120 seconds. 17.7.3.6.3* Sampling piping networks must be designed based on and supported by principles of solid fluid dynamics to ensure proper performance. 17.7.3.6.4 The design details of the sampling piping system must include calculations that reflect the flow characteristics of the piping system and each of the sampling ports. 17.7.3.6.5 The air sampling detectors must emit an error signal if the air flow is outside the range specified by the manufacturer.

72− 111

17.7.3.6.6* In-line sampling and filter ports, if used, must be kept unobstructed in accordance with the instructions published by the manufacturer. 17.7.3.6.7 The pipes and accessories of the air sampling network must be hermetic and permanently fixed. 17.7.3.6.8 The sampling system piping must be clearly marked as "SMOKE DETECTOR SAMPLING TUBE - DO NOT TOUCH" as follows: (1) Where the piping changes direction or branches (2) On each side of the walls, floors, or other barrier penetrations (3) Spaced in duct to allow a view of the room, but not more than 20 feet (6.1 m) 17.7.3.7* Projected beam smoke detector. 17.7.3.7.1 Projected beam smoke detectors must be located in accordance with the instructions published by the manufacturer. 17.7.3.7.2 The effects of stratification must be evaluated in the location of the detectors. 17.7.3.7.3 The jet dispersion must not exceed the maximum allowed in the equipment list. 17.7.3.7.4 When mirrors with projected beams are used, the mirrors must be installed in accordance with the instructions published by the manufacturer. 17.7.3.7.5 A projected beam smoke detector is considered equivalent to a series of localized smoke detectors for sloped and sloped ceiling applications. 17.7.3.7.6 Projected beam detectors and mirrors must be mounted on stable surfaces to avoid false or erroneous operation movement. 17.7.3.7.7 The beam must be designed in such a way that small angular movements of the light source or the receiver do not impair the functioning due to smoke or cause false or involuntary alarms. 17.7.3.7.8* The light path of projected beam detectors must always be kept free of opaque obstructions. 17.7.4 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC). 17.7.4.1* In environments served by ventilation systems, the detectors must not be located where the air flow impedes their operation. 17.7.4.2. In spaces below the raised floor and above the ceiling used as HVAC plenums, detectors shall be certified for the expected environment in accordance with 17.7.1.8. Space and detector locations should be chosen based on expected airflow patterns and the nature of the fire. 17.7.4.3* Detectors located in ducts or ambient air ducts must not be used as substitutes for open area detectors. When detectors are used to control the spread of smoke, the requirements of 17.7.5 shall be met. If open space protection is required, 17.7.3 applies.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 112

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

17.7.4.4 Detectors located in plenums or ambient air ducts may be alarm or monitoring devices. 17.7.5* Smoke detectors to control the spread of smoke. 17.7.5.1* Classifications. Smoke detectors installed and used to prevent the spread of smoke by activating the control of fans, air chambers, doors and other devices shall be classified as follows: (1) Area detectors installed in the relevant smoke compartments (2) ) Detectors installed in air duct systems (3) Video image smoke detection installed in associated smoke compartments 17.7.5.2* Restrictions. 17.7.5.2.1 Detectors installed in the air duct system mentioned in 17.7.5.1(2) shall not be used as a substitute for open space protection. 17.7.5.2.2 When protection of open areas is required, 17.7.3 applies. 17.7.5.3* Purposes.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

17.7.5.3.1 To prevent the recirculation of dangerous levels of smoke, a detector approved for use in air ducts must be installed on the air supply side of ventilation systems, as required by NFPA 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Ducts ventilation and air conditioning, and Section 17.7 .5.4.2.1. 17.7.5.3.2 When smoke detectors are used to selectively initiate operation of smoke propagation control equipment, the requirements of 17.7.5.4.2.2 apply. 17.7.5.3.3 When detectors are used to initiate operation of smoke control doors, the requirements of 17.7.5.6 apply. 17.7.5.3.4 When detectors are used to initiate operation of duct smoke locks, the requirements of 17.7.5.5 apply. 17.7.5.4 Order. 17.7.5.4.1 Area smoke detectors within smoke compartments. Area smoke detectors within smoke compartments may be used to control the spread of smoke by activating the operation of doors, sluices and other devices. 17.7.5.4.2* Smoke Detection for Air Duct System. 17.7.5.4.2.1 Air Supply System. When other NFPA standards require the detection of smoke in the air supply system, one or more detectors listed for actual air velocity shall be installed and located in the air supply duct downstream of the fan and fan filters. Exception: It is not necessary to install additional smoke detectors in the ducts of the air duct system.

passes through other smoke compartments not supplied by the duct. 17.7.5.4.2.2* Return air system. Unless otherwise modified in 17.7.5.4.2.2(A) or 17.7.5.4.2.2(B), when other NFPA standards require smoke detection in the return air system, one or more air velocity detectors up in the air. exits each combustion compartment or in the duct system before the air enters the return air system common to more than one combustion compartment. (A) It is not necessary to install additional smoke detectors in ducts where the air duct system crosses other smoke compartments not serviced by the duct. (B) When full area smoke detection is installed in accordance with 17.5.3.1 in all areas of the smoke compartment using the return air system, the installation of one or more of the additionally listed detectors is not required. for the present air velocity, air leaves any smoke compartment or duct system before air enters the return air system, provided its function is fulfilled by the wide area design of the smoke detection system. 17.7.5.5 Location and installation of detectors in air duct systems. 17.7.5.5.1 The detectors must be listed for the purpose for which they are used. 17.7.5.5.2* Air duct detectors must be installed to obtain a representative sample of the air flow. This installation can be done by any of the following methods: (1) Rigid mounting inside the duct (2) Rigid mounting on the duct wall with the sensing element protruding from the duct (3) Installation outside the duct with sample tubes mounted rigidly inserted 17.7.5.5.3 The detectors must be mounted in accordance with the instructions published by the manufacturer and must be accessible for cleaning through the installation of access doors or control units, in accordance with the provisions. of NFPA 90A, standard for installation of air conditioning and ventilation systems. 17.7.5.5.4 The position of all detectors in air duct systems must be permanently and clearly marked and recorded. 17.7.5.5.5 Detectors mounted outside a duct and using sample tubes to convey smoke from within the duct to the detector shall be constructed and installed to allow verification of air flow from the duct to the detector. 17.7.5.5.6 Detectors must be rated to operate over the entire range of air velocities, temperature and humidity expected at the detector when the ventilation system is in operation. 17.7.5.5.7 All penetrations of return air ducts close to detectors installed on or inside an air duct must be sealed to prevent the entry of external air.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

INJECTION DEVICES and the possible dilution or diversion of smoke within the duct.

Depth of wall section above door

17.7.5.6 Smoke detector for lock opening service. 17.7.5.6.1 Smoke detectors may form part of an open area protection system comprising the room, corridor or enclosed space on either side of the smoke control door and arranged and spaced in accordance with clause 17.7.3 to perform smoke detection. door opening service 17.7.5.6.2 Smoke detectors used exclusively to unlock smoke control doors shall be located and spaced as prescribed in 17.7.5.6. 17.7.5.6.3 When the release of smoke control doors is provided directly by smoke detectors, the detectors must be listed for release service. 17.7.5.6.4 Smoke detectors must be photoelectric, ionizing or another approved type. 17.7.5.6.5 The number of detectors required must be determined in accordance with the provisions of points 17.7.5.6.5.1 to 17.7.5.6.5.4.

72− 113

Mounted on the door frame

Smoke alarm listed for frame mounting or as part of a door closer kit

(B) If the depth of the wall section above the door is greater than 24 inches. (610 mm) on one side, only a ceiling mounted smoke alarm is required on the highest side of the entryway or a wall mounted smoke alarm is required on both sides of the entryway. Figure 17.7.5.6.5.1(A), Part D.(C)* applies when the depth of the wall section above the doorway is greater than 24 inches. (610 mm) on each side, two ceiling or wall mounted detectors are required, one on each side of the entrance. Figure 17.7.5.6.5.1(A), Part F applies. (D) When a detector is listed specifically for door frame mounting or when a listed integrated detector or combo mounting kit - door closer is used , use a detector only when necessary installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Figure 17.7.5.6.5.1(A), Parts A, C and E apply. 17.7.5.6.5.2 When a door is installed to prevent the transmission of smoke from one space to another in one direction only, detectors are located in the room where the smoke is retained must comply with the provisions of point 17.7.5.6.6, regardless of the depth of the wall section above the door. Alternatively, the use of a smoke detector that complies with the provisions of point 17.7.5.6.5.1(D) will be permitted.

Smoke detector for ceiling or wall mounting

B 4,0 pulg.–12,0 pulg. (100 mm–300 mm)

d = or 24 inches. d 0-24 inches. (610 mm) (0−610 mm) max. 5 feet (1.52 m) in d min, but not to the sides of the detector or less than 12 inches of detector range. (300 mm) Door Mounted One ceiling mounted detector on each side or one ceiling mounted detector on each side d2 > 24 in. (> 610 mm) More than 24 in. (610 mm) on one side only

Traction D 4.0. -12.0 heart rate. (100mm-300mm)

d1 24 pulg. (610 mm)

Detector or door closer mounted on the highest side

More than 60 inches. (1.52 m)

d2 > 24 pulg. (> 610mm)

A ceiling detector on the highest side or a wall detector on each side

More than 24 inches. (610mm) on both sides

5 feet (1.52 m) maximum minimum = d2

d1 24 pulg. (610 mm)

17.7.5.6.5.1 When doors are required to close in response to smoke flow in either direction, the requirements of 17.7.5.6.5.1(A) to 17.7.5.6.5.1(D) apply. (A) When the depth of the wall section above the door is 24 inches. (610 mm) or less, one ceiling-mounted smoke alarm on one side of the entryway or two wall-mounted smoke alarms, one on each side of the entryway, is required. Figure 17.7.5.6.5.1(A), Part A or B applies.

Ceiling or wall mounted

5 feet (1.52 m) maximum minimum =d

5 feet (1.52 m) soft maximum = d o

o d > 24 pol. (> 610mm)

Detector or door closing detector mounted on both sides

4,0" - 12,0" (100 mm - 300 mm)

Two G-detectors are required

Additional detectors may be needed

FIGURE 17.7.5.6.5.1(A) Detector position requirements for wall sections. 17.7.5.6.5.3 When there are multiple doors, additional ceiling mounted detectors shall be required as specified in 17.7.5.6.5.3(A) to 17.7.5.6.5.3(C). (A) When the distance between ports exceeds 24 inches. (610 mm), each door opening must be treated individually. Figure 17.7.5.6.5.3(A), Part E applies. (B) Each group of three or more ports shall be treated independently. Figure 17.7.5.6.5.3(B) applies. (C) Each group of doors greater than 20 feet (6.1 m) in width measured end to end must be treated separately. Figure 17.7.5.6.5.3(C) applies. 17.7.5.6.5.4 Where multiple doors and detectors listed are mounted in doorframes, or when sets of integrated or combined door closure detectors are used, there shall be one detector for each single or double door.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 114

NATIONAL REGULATION FOR FIRE NOTIFICATION AND SIGNALING Location of detectors.

CL A

simple door

On the center line of the door

Door offset from the corridor centerline

On the center line of the door

double door

On the center line of the door

b = 24 inches. (610 mm) or less

On the center line of separation

a = More than 24 inches. (610 mm)

In the center line of each door

CLB

a CL

FIGURE 17.7.5.6.5.3(A) Detector position requirements for single and double doors. Detector location(s)

b = 24 inches. (610 mm) or less; 3 openings; B = 6.1 m (20 feet) or less

One

b = 24 inches. (610mm) or less; more than 3 matches

On the center line of the center opening

Treat as two or more groups

a w

17.7.6 Special Considerations.

b = 24 inches. (610mm) or less; B = more than 6.1 m (20 feet)

17.7.6.1.1 Combined and multisensor smoke detectors having a fixed temperature element as part of the unit shall be selected in accordance with Table 17.6.2.1 for the maximum ceiling temperature expected in service. 17.7.6.1.2* The holes in the back of the detector must be covered with gaskets, sealants or other equivalent means and the detector must be mounted in such a way that the air flow inside or around the enclosure prevents the escape of smoke. enter during a fire or test condition. 17.7.6.2* Storage on High Shelves. The placement and spacing of smoke detectors for the tall bin should consider the product, quantity and configuration of the tall bin. 17.7.6.3 High Air Traffic Areas. 17.7.6.3.1 General. The purpose and scope of 17.7.6.3 is to provide guidance on the location and spacing of smoke detectors intended to provide early warning of fire in areas of high air movement. Exception: Detectors intended to control the spread of smoke are governed by the requirements of 17.7.5. 17.7.6.3.2 Location. Smoke detectors must not be located directly in the airflow of utility registers. 17.7.6.3.3* Distance.

FIGURE 17.7.5.6.5.3(B) Detector position requirements for door groups. CL

17.7.5.6.6.2 If ceiling detectors are installed in conditions other than those specified in 17.7.5.6.6.1, an evaluation based on technical criteria must be made.

17.7.6.1 Point detectors.

CL D

17.7.5.6.5.1(A)] (3) Not closer than shown in figure 17.7.5.6.5.1(A), parts B, D and F

Location of detectors Treat as two or more groups

FIGURE 17.7.5.6.5.3(C) Detector Location Requirements for Port Groups Over 6.1 m (20 ft) Wide. 17.7.5.6.6 The position of the detectors will be determined in accordance with the provisions of items 17.7.5.6.6.1 to 17.7.5.6.6.2. 17.7.5.6.6.1 If ceiling mounted smoke detectors are installed in a single ceiling for a single or double door, they shall be installed as follows [Figure 17.7.5.6.5.3 (subject to A)]: (1) On the centerline of the door (2) No more than 1.5 m (5 ft) measured along the roof and perpendicular to the door [Figure

17.7.6.3.3.1 The distance between smoke detectors must be reduced if the air flow in a given room exceeds 8 minutes per air change (total room volume) (equivalent to 7.5 air changes per hour). 17.7.6.3.3.2 If it is necessary to adjust the airflow spacing, the point smoke detector spacing should be adjusted as specified in Table 17.7.6.3.3.2 or Figure 17.7.6.3 3.2 before making any further adjustments. spacing required by this Code 17.7 .6.3.3.3 Air sampled or projected smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. 17.7.6.3.4 HVAC Engine Room. When HVAC machine rooms are used as a plenum for return air, the spacing between smoke detectors must not be reduced based on the number of air changes. 17.7.7 Smoke Detection by Video Image. 17.7.7.1 Video image smoke detection systems and all their components, including hardware and software, must be listed for smoke detection purposes.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

STARTING DEVICES Table 17.7.6.3.3.2 Smoke Detector Spacing Based on Air Movement (not applicable for spaces below floor or above ceiling) Minutes per air exchange 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Air changes per hour 60 30 20 15 12 10 8.6 7.5 6.7 6

Suporte do detector m2 ft2 125 12 250 23 375 35 500 46 625 58 750 70 875 81 900 84 900 84 900 84

72- 115

be protected from unauthorized changes. Any changes to component or software configuration must be tested in accordance with Chapter 14. 17.8 Fire Detectors with Radiant Energy Sensors. 17.8.1* General. 17.8.1.1* The radiant energy detection project documentation must specify the system's required performance objectives. 17.8.1.2 The purpose and scope of Section 17.8 is to provide requirements for the selection, location and spacing of fire detectors that detect radiant energy produced by burning materials. These detectors should be classified as flame detectors and spark/ember detectors. 17.8.2* Fire Characteristics and Detector Selection. 17.8.2.1* The type and quantity of fire detectors with radiant energy sensors must be determined based on the performance characteristics of the detectors and a risk analysis, including fuel combustion characteristics, fire propagation rate, environment, conditions environments and capabilities of equipment and means of extinguishing.

900 (83,6) 800 (74,3)

ft2 (m2) para detector

700 (65,0) 600 (55,7)

17.8.2.2* The selection of detectors with radiant energy sensors must be based on the following considerations:

500 (46,5)

(1) The correspondence between the spectral sensitivity of the detector and the spectral emissions of the fire or fires to be detected. (2) Minimize the possibility of false alarms from sources other than the fire inherent in the hazardous area.

400 (37,2) 300 (27,9)

17.8.3 Space Considerations.

200 (18,6)

17.8.3.1 General Rules.

100 (9,3) 60

50 40 30 20 air changes per hour

Figure 17.7.6.3.3.2 Areas with high air movement (do not use for spaces below the floor or above the ceiling).

17.7.7.2 Video image smoke detection systems must meet all applicable requirements of chapters 1, 10, 14, 17 and 23 of this Code. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

17.7.7.2.1 The systems must be designed according to the performance-based design requirements of Section 17.3.

17.8.3.1.1* Fire detectors with radiant energy sensors must be used in accordance with the listing or approval and the inverse square law that defines the magnitude of the fire versus the distance curve for the detector. 17.8.3.1.2 The number of detectors must be based on detectors positioned in such a way that none of the points to be detected in the danger area is obscured or outside the field of view of at least one detector. 17.8.3.2 Distance Considerations for Flame Detectors. 17.8.3.2.1* The position and spacing of the detectors must be the result of an evaluation based on technical criteria that include:

17.7.7.3* The video signals produced by component cameras of video image smoke detection systems must be able to be transmitted to other systems for other purposes only through output connections specially provided for this purpose by the system manufacturer.

(1) Size of fire to be detected (2) Fuel involved (3) Detector sensitivity (4) Detector field of view (5) Distance between fire and detector (6) Absorption of radiant energy from the atmosphere (7) Presence of external radiation sources (8) Purpose of the detection system (9) Required response time

17.7.7.4* All controls and software components must be

17.8.3.2.2 The system design must specify the size of the

17.7.7.2.2 The location and spacing of smoke detectors with video images must meet the requirements of 17.11.5.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 116

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Detect fires with flames of a specific fuel. 17.8.3.2.3* In applications where the fire to be detected may be in an area outside the optical axis of the detector, the distance must be reduced or detectors added to compensate for the angular displacement of the fire in accordance with published instructions. detector manufacturer. 17.8.3.2.4* In applications where the fire to be detected is caused by fuel other than the test fuel used in the approval or licensing process, the distance between the detector and the fire must be adjusted according to the fuel corresponding to the detector. . specified by the manufacturer. 17.8.3.2.5 Since flame detectors are line-of-sight devices, care must be taken to ensure that their required response within the fire envelope of the protected area is not compromised by the presence of components or other objects or materials intermediate opaques. . 17.8.3.2.6* Precautions must be taken to maintain the detector window clarity in applications where airborne particles and aerosols may cover the detector window between service intervals and affect sensitivity. 17.8.3.3 Space considerations for spark/ember detectors. 17.8.3.3.1* The position and spacing of the detectors must be the result of an evaluation based on technical criteria that include: (1) size of the sparks or embers to be detected (2) combustibles involved (3) ) sensitivity of the detector ( 4) Field of view of detector (5) Distance between fire and detector (6) Absorption of radiant energy from atmosphere (7) Presence of external radiation sources (8) Purpose of system detection (9) Required response time 17.8. 3.3.2* The system design must specify the size of sparks or embers from a given fuel to be detected by the system. 17.8.3.3.3 Spark detectors must be located so that all points within the cross section of the conveyor ducts, conveyors or ducts in which the detectors are located are within the field of view (as defined in 3.3.100) of at least one detector. 17.8.3.3.4* The position and spacing of the detectors must be adjusted according to the inverse square law modified by atmospheric absorption and the absorption of a non-combustible fuel in air according to the instructions published by the manufacturer. 17.8.3.3.5* In applications where the sparks to be detected may occur in an area outside the optical axis of the detector, the space must be reduced or detectors added to compensate the angular displacement of the fire as published. manufacturer's instructions. . 17.8.3.3.6* Precautions must be taken to preserve the clarity of the detector window in applications where the

Airborne particles and aerosols can coat the detector window and affect sensitivity. 17.8.4 Other Considerations. 17.8.4.1 Radiant energy sensor detectors must be protected by construction or installation to ensure that their optical performance is not affected. 17.8.4.2 Where necessary, radiant energy sensor detectors shall be shielded or otherwise located to avoid the effect of unwanted radiant energy. 17.8.4.3 When used outdoors, detectors incorporating radiant energy sensors must be shielded or otherwise located to prevent loss of sensitivity due to conditions such as rain or snow, but also to allow a field of view free of risk area. 17.8.4.4 A fire detector incorporating radiant energy sensors must not be installed in a location where environmental conditions exceed the extremes for which the detector is certified. 17.8.5 Flame detection by video image. 17.8.5.1 Video image flame detection systems and all their components, including hardware and software, must be listed for flame detection purposes. 17.8.5.2 Video image flame detection systems must meet all applicable requirements of chapters 1, 10, 14, 17 and 23 of this Code. 17.8.5.3* The video signals produced by cameras that are components of video image flame detection systems must be able to be transmitted to other systems for other purposes only through output connections specially provided for this purpose by the manufacturer of the video system. 17.8.5.4* All software and control components must be protected against unauthorized changes. Any changes in component or software configuration must be tested according to Chapter 14. 17.9 Combined, multicriteria and multisensor detectors. 17.9.1 Generally. Section 17.9 provides requirements for the selection, location, and spacing of multisensor, multicriteria, and combination detectors. 17.9.2 Combined Detectors. 17.9.2.1 A combination of detectors must be listed for each sensor. 17.9.2.2 Equipment lists shall determine location and spacing criteria in accordance with Chapter 17. 17.9.3 Detectors with multiple criteria. 17.9.3.1 Multicriteria detectors must be listed for the primary function of the device. 17.9.3.2 Due to device-specific software-controlled multi-criteria detector solution to reduce unwanted alarms and improve detector response to --`,,`,``,`````,` ` `,`` `, `,-`- `,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

BOAT DEVICES

72-117

B. an unspecified fire source, the location and distance criteria in the detector's installation instructions must be observed.

17.11.5.1.1 Consult the instructions published by the manufacturer for recommended uses and detector locations.

17.9.4 Detectors with Multiple Sensors.

17.11.5.2 The detectors must not be placed above their maximum listed or approved values.

17.9.4.1 A detector with multiple sensors must be listed for each sensor. Detector installation. 17.10 Gas Detection. 17.10.1 General. The purpose and scope of Section 17.10 is to establish requirements for the selection, installation and operation of gas detectors. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

17.10.2 Gas properties and detector selection. 17.10.2.1 Gas detectors must be listed for the specific gas or vapor they are designed to detect. 17.10.2.2 All gas detection systems installed in a fire detection system must meet all applicable requirements of chapters 1, 10, 14, 17 and 23 of this Code. 17.10.2.3 The requirements of this Code do not apply to gas detection systems used exclusively for process control. 17.10.2.4* The selection and location of the gas detectors must be based on an evaluation based on technical criteria. 17.11 Other fire alarms. 17.11.1 Detectors that operate on principles other than those covered in Sections 17.6 to 17.8 shall be classified as "Other Fire Detectors". 17.11.1.1 These detectors must be installed in all areas where they are required by other NFPA codes and standards or by the competent authority. 17.11.2* "Other Fire Alarms" must operate when subjected to the abnormal concentration of combustion effects that occur during a fire. 17.11.3 The detection arrangement must be based on the size and intensity of the fire to provide the necessary quantity of products and associated thermal elevation, circulation or diffusion for the operation. 17.11.4 The size and shape of spaces, air flow patterns, obstructions and other characteristics of the protected danger must be considered. 17.11.5 The spacing and location of detectors shall be in accordance with paragraphs 17.11.5.1 to 17.11.5.3. 17.11.5.1 The position and spacing of the detectors must be based on the principle of operation and an investigation based on technical criteria of the expected operating conditions.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

17.11.5.2.1 Smaller spacing will be used when the structural characteristics or other characteristics of the risk to be protected so require. 17.11.5.3 The location and sensitivity of detectors must be based on a documented assessment based on documented engineering criteria, including manufacturer's installation instructions and the following: (1) structural characteristics, size and shape of spaces and openings (2 ) occupation and uses of the area (3) ceiling height (4) roof shape, surface and obstacles (5) ventilation (6) environmental conditions (7) combustion characteristics of the combustible materials present (8) configuration of the contained in the area to protect 17.12 Detection of operation of other automatic extinguishing systems. 17.12.1* The requirements of Section 17.12 apply to devices that provide an alarm indicating water flow in the sprinkler system. 17.12.2* Activation of the activation device must occur within 90 seconds after the water flow in the alarm activation device when the flow is equal to or greater than that of a single smaller sprinkler. 17.12.3 Water movement caused by debris, small currents or fluctuating pressures must not cause an alarm. 17.13* Detection of operation of other automatic extinguishing systems. The operation of extinguishing systems or other fire extinguishing systems must trigger an alarm signal through the alarm activation devices installed in accordance with their individual certificates. 17.14 Devices for manually activating alarms. 17.14.1 Manually operated alarm activation devices to activate non-fire alarm signals are permitted if the devices are distinguished by a color other than red and a manual call point marking. 17.14.2 The combination of manual fire alarm stations and supervisory signaling stations is allowed. 17.14.3 Manual alarm activation devices must be securely mounted. 17.14.4 Manual alarm activation devices must be mounted on a contrasting background. 17.14.5 The operating part of a manual alarm activation device must not be less than 42 inches. (1.07 m) still

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

greater than 48 inches. (1.22 m) of the finished floor. 17.14.6 Manually operated alarm activation devices can be of single or double action. 17.14.7* The listed protective covers can be installed over single or double acting manually operated alarm release devices. 17.14.8 Manual fire alarm control units must comply with the provisions of articles 17.14.8.1 to 17.14.8.6. 17.14.8.1 Manual fire alarm calls may only be used to initiate fire alarms.

(abnormality) and the other indicates that the pressure has returned to its normal value. 17.16.2.2 The requirements of 17.16.2.2.1 to 17.16.2.2.4 apply to signal triggering devices for pressure control: 17.16.2.2.1 Pressure vessels. (A) A device for activating a tank pressure monitoring signal for a limited supply of pressurized water, such as. A pressure tank should indicate both high and low pressure conditions.

17.14.8.2 The fire alarm control panels must be installed so that they are clearly visible, unobstructed and accessible.

(B) The abnormal signal is activated when the required pressure increases or decreases by 10 psi (70 kPa).

17.14.8.3* Unless they are installed in an environment that prevents the use of red paint or red plastic, railway fire alarm stations must be colored red.

(A) A pressure monitoring signal tripping device for a dry-pipe sprinkler system shall indicate high and low pressure conditions.

17.14.8.4 Fire alarm triggers must be located 1.5 m (5 feet) from each exit door on each floor.

(B) The abnormal signal should activate when the pressure increases or decreases by 10 psi (70 kPa).

17.14.8.5* Fire alarm triggers must be provided in such a way that the distance to the nearest fire alarm trigger does not exceed 200 feet (61 m) measured horizontally on the same floor.

(A) A vapor pressure monitoring signal enabling device shall indicate the low pressure condition.

17.14.8.6 Fire alarm trigger stations must be mounted on both sides of group openings over 40 feet (12.2 m) wide and within 5 feet (1.5 m) of each side of the opening of the group. 17.15 Electronic monitoring device for fire extinguishers. An electronic fire extinguisher monitoring device shall display the states of a specific fire extinguisher to a fire alarm or other control unit, as required by NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. 17.16 Surveillance Enabling Devices. 17.16.1 Trigger Device for Control Valve Monitoring Signal. 17.16.1.1 Two independent and distinct signals must be activated: one indicating that the valve left its initial position (abnormality) and another indicating that the valve returned to its normal position. 17.16.1.2 The anomaly indicator signal must be activated in the first two turns of the steering wheel or during one fifth of the stroke of the valve control unit in relation to its normal position.

17.16.2.2.2 Sprinkler Dryness System.

17.16.2.2.3 Vapor pressure.

(B) The anomaly signal must be activated before the pressure drops below 110% of the minimum working pressure of the supplied steam powered equipment. 17.16.2.2.4 Other sources. An actuation device shall be provided to monitor pressure from sources other than those specified in 17.16.2.2.1 to 17.16.2.2.3, as required by the competent authority. 17.16.3 Signal Generator for Water Level Monitoring. 17.16.3.1 Two independent and distinct signals will be given: one indicating that the required water level has decreased or increased (abnormality) and the other indicating that it has returned to normal. 17.16.3.2 A device to activate a tank pressure signal must indicate high and low water conditions. 17.16.3.2.1 The anomaly signal must be activated when the water level drops 76 mm (3 inches) or rises 3 inches. (70mm). 17.16.3.3 Means for initiating a supervisory signal other than pressure tanks shall initiate a low water signal when the water level drops 12 inches. (300 mm).

17.16.1.3 The abnormality indication signal must not reset in any valve position other than normal.

17.16.4 Triggers for Water Temperature Monitoring Signals.

17.16.1.4 An actuation device to monitor the position of a control valve must not interfere with the operation of the valve, obstruct the view of its gauge or restrict access for valve maintenance.

17.16.4.1 A temperature monitoring device for a water storage tank exposed to freezing conditions shall activate two independent and distinct signals in accordance with 17.16.4.2.

17.16.2 Trigger Device for Pressure Monitoring Signal. 17.16.2.1 Two independent and distinct signals must be given: one indicating that the required pressure has increased or decreased

17.16.4.2 One signal must indicate a drop in water temperature to 4.4°C (40°F) and the other must indicate a recovery above 4.4°C (40°F).

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72− 118

REPORTING DEVICES 17.16.5 Tripping devices for monitoring the ambient temperature. An ambient temperature monitoring device should indicate a drop in ambient temperature to 4.4°C (40°F) and its recovery above 4.4°C (40°F).

Chapter 18 Notification Devices 18.1* Application. 18.1.1 The requirements of this chapter will be applied when required by the authority responsible for compliance; applicable law, code or standard; or other sections of this Code. 18.1.2 The requirements of this chapter must cover the reception of a notification signal and not the informational content of the signal. 18.1.3 The performance, location and assembly of signaling devices used to initiate or direct the evacuation or relocation of occupants or to notify occupants or personnel must be in accordance with this chapter. 18.1.4 The performance, location and mounting of detectors, monitors and printers used to display or record information for use by internals, employees, emergency teams or monitoring station personnel must be in accordance with this chapter.

72- 119

the installation documents (supplied with the device) containing the parameters defined in points 18.4.3 or 18.4.4. 18.3.2.3 Visible devices must contain on their identification plates a reference to their parameters or a reference to the installation documents (supplied with the device) containing the parameters according to item 18.5.3.1 or clause 18.6. 18.3.3 Physical Structure. 18.3.3.1 Equipment intended for use in special environments, such as B. External or internal locations, high or low temperatures, high humidity, dusty conditions and dangerous locations, or where they can be handled, must be listed for the planned application. 18.3.3.2* Notification devices used to issue non-fire signals must not contain the word FIRE or any fire symbol in any format (i.e. stamped, printed, etc.) on the device visible to the public. Detectors with multiple visible elements shall have fire symbol markings only on the visible elements used for fire signaling. 18.3.4* Mechanical Protection.

18.1.5* The requirements of this chapter apply to any area, space or function of the system when required by the authority responsible for the service; by any applicable law, code or regulation; or any other section of this Code where compliance with the provisions of this chapter is required.

18.3.4.1 Devices subject to mechanical damage must be adequately protected.

18.1.6 The requirements of Chapter 7 apply when referenced in Chapter 18

18.3.4.3 The effect of any shield, cover or lens on the field performance of the device must meet the approval requirements.

18.1.7 The requirements of Chapters 10, 14, 23 and 24 apply to the connection of notification appliances, control settings, power supplies and use of information provided by notification appliances. 18.1.8 Notification devices may be used indoors or outdoors and may be directed at the building, area or space in general or only at specific parts of a building, area or designated space in specific zones or sub-zones. 18.2 Purpose. Notification devices must provide the stimuli to initiate emergency response and deliver information to users, emergency services, and inmates. 18.3 General. 18.3.1 Listing. All signaling devices installed in accordance with Chapter 18 must be listed for purposes of use. 18.3.2 Identification Plates. 18.3.2.1 Detectors must include on their nameplates a statement of electrical requirements and certified audible or visible performance, or both, as defined by the listing authority. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

18.3.2.2 Acoustic devices must contain reference to their parameters or reference to on their nameplates

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

18.3.4.2 If protections, covers or lenses are used, they must be listed for use with the device.

18.3.5 Assembly. 18.3.5.1 The equipment must be supported regardless of its attachment to the circuit conductors. 18.3.5.2 The equipment must be assembled in accordance with the instructions published by the manufacturer. 18.3.6* Connections. Addressable terminals, cables, or communication media shall be provided to allow monitoring of the integrity of notification device connections. 18.4 Acoustic functions. 18.4.1* General Requirements. 18.4.1.1* An average ambient noise level greater than 105 dBA requires the use of one or more visible notification devices in accordance with the provisions of Section 18.5 if the application is in public mode, or in accordance with the provisions of Section 18.6 if the app is in a private location. 18.4.1.2* The total sound pressure level generated by the combination of the ambient sound pressure level with all sound alarm devices in operation must not exceed 110 dBA at the minimum listening distance. 18.4.1.3* Sound from normal or continuous sources lasting longer than 60 seconds must be taken into account when measuring the maximum ambient sound level. you shouldn't ask for this

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 120

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Noise from transient or abnormal sources is taken into account when measuring the maximum ambient noise level. 18.4.1.4 Audible alarm and evacuation signaling devices shall meet the requirements of 18.4.3 (Requirements for sound signals in public mode), 18.4.4 (Requirements for sound signals in private mode), 18.4.5 (Requirements for sleeping ). ) or 18.4.6 (narrowband tone signaling for excessive masking limits), as appropriate. 18.4.1.4.1* The designer of the audible notification system must identify the rooms and areas that will have audible notification and those where there will be no audible notification. 18.4.1.4.2* Unless otherwise specified in this Code, the coverage area for audible occupant communications must meet the requirements of any other applicable law, code or standard. When other applicable laws, codes or standards require audible notification to occupants of all or part of an area or space, coverage will only be in areas that can be occupied as defined in 3.3.178. 18.4.1.4.3 The system designer must document the sound pressure levels that the acoustic devices must generate in the coverage areas to meet the requirements of this Code during the planning and design of the notification system. The maximum expected ambient sound pressure level or the maximum expected sound pressure level lasting at least 60 seconds shall also be documented by the system planner for the fueling area to ensure compliance with the provisions of points 18.4. 3, 18.4.4, 18.4.5 or 18.4.6 for the service area.

on off

(B)

(A)

(B)

(A)

(C)

cycle

(a) Time (sec.)

References: Phase signal (a) on for 0.5 sec ±10% Phase signal (b) off for 0.5 sec ±10% Phase signal (c) off for 1.5 sec ±10% [(c ) = (a) + 2(b) ) ) )] The total cycle lasts 4 seconds ±10%

FIGURE 18.4.2.1 Time pattern parameters. The audible alarm signal pattern used to notify building occupants of the need to evacuate (leave the building) or move (from one area to another) shall be the standard evacuation alarm signal, consisting of a transient pattern of three wrists. The pattern will be as specified in Figure 18.4.2.1 and will consist of the following, in this order: (1) An "on" period of 0.5 seconds ± 10 percent duration (2) An "off" period of 0.5 seconds Seconds ± 10 percent Duration of three consecutive "on" periods (3) One "off" period of 1.5 seconds ± 10 percent Exception: If approved by the appropriate authority, continued use of the device. 18.4.2.2 A bell or single-pulse bell may sound at "on" intervals of 1 ± 10 percent of a second, with an "off" interval of 2 ± 10 percent after every third pulse in the "ignition" phase. . 18.4.2.3 The signal must be repeated for an adequate time for building evacuation purposes, but not less than 180 seconds. The minimum retry time must be able to be stopped manually.

18.4.1.4.5 If required by the competent authority, the documentation of the design sound pressure levels for the different service areas must be submitted for analysis and approval.

18.4.2.4* The standard evacuation signal must be synchronized within a notification zone.

18.4.1.5*Voice messages are not required to meet the audibility requirements of 18.4.3 (Requirements for sound signals in public mode), 18.4.4 (Requirements for sound signals in private mode), 18.4.5 (Requirements for sleeping areas), or 18.4.6 (narrowband tone signaling for excessive masking thresholds), although they must meet the intelligibility requirements of 18.4.10 where speech intelligibility is required.

18.4.3.1* To ensure that sound signals are clearly heard in public mode, they must have a sound level of at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum, unless otherwise permitted. otherwise in 18.4.3.2 through 18.4.3.5 Sound level lasting at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor in the required area in which the system will operate, using the A-weighted scale (dBA).

18.4.1.6 Sounders used to indicate exit need not meet the audibility requirements of 18.4.3 (Requirements for sound signals in public mode), 18.4.4 (Requirements for sound signals in private mode), 18.4.5 (Requirements for sleeping areas) or 18.4.6 (Narrow-band audible signaling for excessive masked thresholds), except as required in 18.4.7 (Requirements for exit audible indicators).

18.4.3.2 Where permitted by the authority having jurisdiction or other applicable regulation or standard, requirements for audible signaling may be reduced or eliminated when visible signaling is provided in accordance with clause 18.5.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

18.4.1.4.4 The design sound pressure levels that the detectors will generate for the different coverage areas must be documented for use during the system acceptance test.

18.4.2 Distinctive sign of evacuation. 18.4.2.1* To meet the requirements of clause 10.10,

18.4.3* Requirements for Audible Alerts in Public Mode.

18.4.3.3 Audible alarm devices fitted to elevator cars may use the audibility criteria for private mode devices set out in 18.4.4.1. 18.4.3.4 Whenever allowed by the competent authority, the audible alarm devices must be approved

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NOTIFICATION DEVICES

18.4.3.5 A signaling system to suppress or reduce ambient noise must comply with the provisions of points 18.4.3.5.1 to 18.4.3.5.3. 18.4.3.5.1 A signaling system used to cancel or reduce ambient noise must maintain a sound level of at least 15 dB above the average reduced ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level for a minimum period of 60 seconds after reducing ambient noise. , whichever is greater, measured at 1.5 m (5 ft) above the ground in the required area where the system will be used, using A-weighted scale (dBA). 18.4.3.5.2 Visible notification devices must be installed in affected areas in accordance with the provisions of Section 18.5 or 18.6. 18.4.3.5.3 Any relay, circuit or interface necessary to suppress or reduce ambient noise must meet the requirements of Chapters 10, 12, 21 and 23. 18.4.4 Privacy mode sound alert requirements. 18.4.4.1* To ensure that sound signals are heard clearly in privacy mode, they must have a sound level of at least 10 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, with a duration of at least least 60 seconds. , as applicable, is greater, measured at 1.5 m (5 ft) above the ground in the required area in which the system is to perform its service, using the A-weighted scale (dBA). 18.4.4.2* When permitted by the authority having jurisdiction or other applicable regulation or standard, the requirements for sound signaling may be reduced or eliminated when visual signaling is provided in accordance with clause 18.5. 18.4.4.3 A system for suppressing or reducing ambient noise must comply with the provisions of points 18.4.4.3.1 to 18.4.4.3.3. 18.4.4.3.1 An environmental noise reduction or cancellation system must be capable of producing a sound level of at least 10 dB above the average reduced ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level after the ambient noise reduction, as applicable, for a duration of at least 60 seconds The value is greatest measured at 1.5 m (5 ft) above the ground using the A-weighted scale (dBA). 18.4.4.3.2 Visible notification devices shall be installed in affected areas in accordance with Section 18.5 or 18.6. 18.4.4.3.3 Any relay, circuit or interface necessary to suppress or reduce ambient noise must meet the requirements of Chapters 10, 12, 21 and 23. 18.4.5 Requirements for sleeping areas. 18.4.5.1* If acoustic devices are installed to signal sleeping areas, they must have a sound level of at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level for a duration of at least 60 seconds or a tone level of at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at pillow height in the required area where the system will be placed

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Provide the service using A-weighted scale (dBA). 18.4.5.2 If a barrier, such as a door, curtain or retractable partition, is placed between the detector and the pad, the sound pressure level must be measured with the barrier placed between the device and the pad. 18.4.5.3* As of January 1, 2014, audible devices provided in dormitories for awake occupants must emit a low-frequency alarm signal that meets the following: (1) The alarm signal must be a square-shaped wave or have an equivalent activation capacity. (2) The wave must have a fundamental frequency of 520 Hz ± 10 percent. 18.4.6* Narrowband tone signaling for overly masked thresholds. 18.4.6.1 Masked limit tolerance. Audible tone signaling may meet the requirements for masked thresholds specified in this subsection and not the requirements for A-weighted signaling in 18.4.3 and 18.4.4. 18.4.6.2* Calculation Procedure. The effective masked threshold should be calculated in accordance with ISO 7731, Workplace hazard signals - Audible hazard signals. 18.4.6.3 Noise Data. The noise data for calculating the effective masked threshold must be the maximum value of noise lasting 60 seconds or more for each octave or 1/3 octave band. 18.4.6.4 Documentation. The analysis and design documentation must be submitted to the competent authority and must contain the following information: (1) Ambient noise frequency data, including date, time and place where measurements were taken for existing environments or the data designed for the environments vague (2) Frequency data of acoustic signaling devices (3) Calculations of the effective masking limit for each set of noise data (4) An indication of the sound pressure level that may be required in 18.4 .3 or 18.4.4 if the masking limit is not flagged. performed 18.4.6.5 Sound pressure level. For masked boundary signaling, the pitch of the audible signal shall meet the requirements of 18.4.6.5.1 or 18.4.6.5.2, but not for playback of recorded, synthesized, or live messages. 18.4.6.5.1 The sound pressure level of the audible audio signal must exceed the masked limit in one or more octave bands by at least 10 dB in the considered octave band. 18.4.6.5.2 The sound pressure level of the audible sound signal must exceed the masked threshold in one or more third octave bands by at least 13 dB in the considered third octave band. 18.4.7 Home Screen Audible Notification Device Requirements.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

installed in bathrooms, use the audibility criteria for private mode devices indicated in point 18.4.4.1.

72− 121

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

18.4.7.1* Output indicator audible notification devices must meet or exceed the sound level and frequency settings and guidelines specified in the manufacturer's documented instructions. 18.4.7.2* In addition to 18.4.7.1, at least ensure that the exit indicator and audible notification signals are clearly audible and produce the desired directional effects for a range of 50 feet (15.24 m) within an unobstructed route egress path Meets the audibility requirements of 18.4.6 in at least one octave band or one octave band within the effective frequency ranges of interaural time difference (ITD), interaural level, or loudness difference (ILD) or IID) and anatomical transfer function or head-related transfer function ( ATF or HRTF) location cues. The signal must pass through both the ambient noise and the fire alarm signal. 18.4.7.3 if required by the compliance authority; Any applicable law, code or regulation, or other section of this Code, requires that output audible indicators be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 18.4.7.4* When required by the authority responsible for compliance; by any applicable law, code or regulation; or other sections of this Code, the exit audible indicator must be installed at the entrance to all exits and escape areas of the building, as defined by applicable building or fire codes. 18.4.7.5 When sound signals are used at exit points to signal escape areas, they must provide a sound signal different from other exits that do not have escape areas. 18.4.8 Location of audible alarms for a building or structure.

18.4.9 Location of Audible Notification Devices for Wide Area Signaling. Audible signaling devices for wide area signaling must be installed in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority, approved design data and manufacturer's installation instructions to obtain the required performance. 18.4.10* Speech intelligibility. In Acoustically Distinguishable Spaces (ADS), where speech intelligibility is required, voice communication systems must reproduce pre-recorded, synthesized or live messages (e.g. via microphone, audio equipment, etc., telephone and radio ) in an intelligible voice. 18.4.10.1* The system designer must determine the ADS during the planning and design of all emergency communication systems. 18.4.10.2 Each ADS will identify whether or not it requires speech intelligibility. 18.4.10.2.1* Unless specifically required by other applicable law, code or regulation, or other paragraphs of this Code, understanding is not required on all ADSs. 18.4.10.3* If required by the compliance authority; Any applicable law, code or regulation, or any other paragraph of this Code, requires that ADS grants be submitted for review and approval. 18.4.10.4 It is not necessary to determine intelligibility by means of quantitative measurements. 18.4.10.5 The quantitative measurements described in D.2.4 are allowed, but not mandatory. 18.5* Visible Resources - Public Mode. 18.5.1* Visible Signaling. 18.5.1.1 Signage visible in public mode must meet the requirements of Section 18.5 when visible notification devices are used.

18.4.8.1 Where ceiling height permits and unless otherwise permitted in 18.4.8.2 to 18.4.8.5, wall mounted apparatus shall have its top surface above the finished floor at a height of not less than 90 inches. (2.29 m) and under ceilings finished at intervals of no less than 6 inches. (150 mm).

18.5.1.2* The coverage area for notifications of visible occupants will be that required by any other applicable law, regulation or standard. When other applicable laws, codes or standards require visible notice to occupants for all or part of an area or space, coverage will only be in areas that can be occupied as defined in 3.3.178.

18.4.8.2 Built-in or ceiling units are allowed.

18.5.2 Coverage Area.

18.4.8.3 If combined acoustic/optical devices are installed, the position of the installed device shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of 18.5.5. 18.4.8.4 Equipment that forms an integral part of a smoke alarm, smoke alarm or other activating device must be located in accordance with the requirements for that device. 18.4.8.5 Mounting heights other than those required in 18.4.8.1 and 18.4.8.2 are permitted provided that the sound pressure level requirements for public mode or 18.4.4 for private mode or point 18.4.5 for public areas are met. sleep depending on request.

18.5.2.1 The designer of the visible notification system must document the rooms and areas that will have visible notification and those where there will be no visible notification. 18.5.2.2* Unless otherwise required or specified in other sections of this Code, the coverage area required for visible occupant notification must meet the requirements of any other applicable law, code or standard. 18.5.2.3 If so required by the competent authority, the documentation of the effective intensity (in DC) of the visible signaling devices for the coverage area must be submitted for analysis and approval. 18.5.3 Properties of light, color and pulsation.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72− 122

NOTIFICATION DEVICES

18.5.3.2 The maximum duration of a pulse is 0.2 seconds with a maximum duty cycle of 40 percent. 18.5.3.3 The pulse width must be defined as the time interval between the initial and final points of 10% of the maximum signal. 18.5.3.4* Lights used exclusively to signal a fire alarm or complete evacuation intention must be transparent or nominally white and must not exceed 1000 cd (effective intensity). 18.5.3.5 The lights used to signal residents to seek information or guidance must be transparent, nominally white or any other color as required by the emergency plan and authority with jurisdiction over the area or building. 18.5.3.6* The strobe timing requirements of this chapter do not apply when visible detectors located inside the building are visible from outside the building. 18.5.4* Device photometry. The light output must meet the polar dispersion requirements of ANSI/UL 1971, Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired, or equivalent standards. 18.5.5 Location of Devices. 18.5.5.1* Wall-mounted devices must be positioned so that the total lens is not less than 80 inches. (2.03 m) or more than 96 inches. (2.44 m) above the finished floor or at the specified mounting height using the performance dependent alternative described in 18.5.5.6. 18.5.5.2 Where low ceiling heights do not permit wall mounting, at least 80 inches. (2.03 m) visible wall units must be mounted within 6 in. (150mm) from the ceiling. The size of the space covered by a flash of a given value must be reduced to twice the difference between the minimum mounting height of 80 inches. (2.03 m) and the lowest actual mounting height. 18.5.5.3* Visible notification appliances listed for parallel floor mounting may be placed above the ceiling or hung below the ceiling. 18.5.5.4* Spatial distance. 18.5.5.4.1 Spacing must be as indicated in Table 18.5.5.4.1(a) and Figure 18.5.5.4.1 or Table 18.5.5.4.1(b). 18.5.5.4.2 Visible Notification Appliances shall be installed as specified in Table 18.5.5.4.1(a) or Table 18.5.5.4.1(b) using one of the following: (1) A single Visible Notification Appliances (2 ) * Two groups of notification devices visible when the visual devices in each group are synchronized, in the same room or adjacent room within field of view. This must include synchronizing strobe lights operated by separate systems.

Table 18.5.5.4.1(a) Room Clearance for Wall Mounted Visible Notification Devices Minimum Required Light Output [Effective Intensity (in DC)] Maximum Room Size Four luminaires per room (one in feet in m One luminaire per light space per wall) 20 × 20 × 6.10 6.10 15 N/A 28 × 28 8.53 × 8.53 30 N/A 30 × 30 9.14 × 9.14 34 N/A 16 .5 × 16.5 110 30 55 × 55 16.8 × 16.8 115 30 60 108 × 360 108 × 360 × 18.3 135 30 63 × 63 19.2 × 19.2 150 37 68 × 68 7, 7 20.7 20.7 43 70 × 70 21.33.3.3.3.2 × 19.2 150 37 68 68 × 68 7.7 × 20.7 20.7 33 20.7 33 73 7.7 × 184 60 80 × 80 24.4 240 60 × 90.4 304 95 100 × 100.5 375 95 110 33.5 455 135 120 × 120 36.6 540 135 130 × 130 39.6 × 39.6 635 185 5

NA: Not acceptable

Table 18.5.5.4.1(b) Room Spaces for Ceiling Mounted Visible Devices Maximum Room Size

Linsenhöhe*

In feet 20 × 20 30 × 30 40 × 40 44 × 44 20 × 20 30 × 30 44 × 44 46 × 46 20 × 20 30 × 30 50 × 50 53 × 53 55 × 55 59 × 59 63 × 63 68 70×70

In feet 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

A m 6.1 × 6.1 9.1 × 9.1 12.2 × 12.2 13.4 × 13.4 6.1 × 6.1 9.1 × 9.1 13.4 × 13.4 14.0 × 14.0 6.1 × 6.1 9.1 × 9.1 15.2 × 15.2 16.2 × 16.2 16.8 × 16.8 18.0 × 19. 21,3 × 21 ,3

in millions 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 9.1 9.1 9.1 9.1 9.1 9.1 9.1 9.1 9.1

Minimum required light output (effective intensity); a light (cd) 15 30 60 75 30 45 75 80 55 75 95 110 115 135 150 177 185

*This does not prevent mounting lenses at lower heights.

(3) More than two visible notification devices or groups of devices

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

18.5.3.1 The flash rate must not exceed two flashes per second (2 Hz) and must not be less than one flash per second (1 Hz) throughout the device's indicated voltage range.

72− 123

72− 124

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

visual device

20 pes (6.1 m) 30 pes (9.1 m) 40 pes (12.2 m) 50 pes (15.2 m)

FIGURE 18.5.5.4.1 Spacing in rooms for visible wall-mounted devices. synchronously in the same room or adjacent room in the field of view flashing synchronously 18.5.5.4.3 the room distances as indicated in Table 18.5.5.4.1(a) and Figure 18.5.5.4.1 for wall mounted units shall be taken in the visible location of the notification device in the middle of the wall.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

18.5.5.4.4 In square spaces with offset equipment, or in non-square spaces, the effective luminous intensity (cd) of a visible wall beacon must be determined by the dimensions of the maximum size of the space obtained. measure the distance to the farthest wall or twice the distance to the farthest adjacent wall, whichever is greater, as required in Table 18.5.5.4.1(a) and Figure 18.5.5.4.1. 18.5.5.4.5 When the configuration of the room is not square, the square room size must be used, which allows covering the entire room or dividing the room into several squares. 18.5.5.4.6* When the ceiling height exceeds 30 feet (9.4 m), ceiling mounted visible notification devices must be hung 30 feet (9.4 m) or less or the specified mounting height, using the performance-based method described in 18.5 Alternative .5.6 applies or wall mounted visible detectors shall be installed in accordance with Table 18.5.5.4.1(a). 18.5.5.4.7 The provisions of Table 18.5.5.4.1(b) apply when the ceiling-mounted visible detector is in the center of the room. If the ceiling-mounted visible detector is not in the center of the room, the effective luminous intensity (cd) should be determined by doubling the distance from the device to the farthest wall to obtain the maximum room size. 18.5.5.5* Distances in corridors.

18.5.5.5.1 Installation of visible notification devices in corridors 20 feet (6.1 m) wide or less shall meet the requirements of 18.5.5.4 or 18.5.5.5. 18.5.5.5.2 Paragraph 18.5.5.5 applies to corridors not exceeding 20 feet (6.1 m) in width. 18.5.5.5.3 For a corridor application, the visible devices must be certified for at least 15 cd. 18.5.5.5.4 Corridors over 20 feet (6.1 m) wide must meet the spacing requirements specified in 18.5.5.4. 18.5.5.5.5* Visible notification devices must be no more than 15 feet (4.57 m) from the end of the aisle, with no more than 100 feet (30.5 m) between devices. 18.5.5.5.6 When there is a break in the concentrated line of sight, such as a fire door, elevation change or other obstacle, the area must be treated as a separate corridor. 18.5.5.5.7 In corridors where there are more than two alarm devices visible in the field of vision, they must flash synchronously. 18.5.5.5.8 Detectors mounted on the visible wall in corridors may be mounted on the end wall or side wall of the corridor in accordance with the spacing requirements of 18.5.5.5.5. 18.5.5.6* Performance Based Workaround. 18.5.5.6.1 In lieu of the requirements of 18.5.5, except 18.5.5.7, any structure providing illumination of at least 0.0375 lumens/ft2 (0.4036 lumens/m2) at any point within the covered area permitted in all angles specified in polar scatter planes for wall-mounted or ceiling-mounted visual devices in ANSI/UL 1971 Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired, or equivalent standards, calculated for the maximum distance from the display device. closer visual notification. 18.5.5.6.2 Documentation provided to the authority having jurisdiction shall include: (1) Inverse Square Law calculations using each of the vertical and horizontal pole extension angles specified in ANSI/UL 1971, Standard for Safety Devices. signage for people with hearing, specified are impairments or equivalent standards. (2) Calculations should take into account the effects of pinout using one of the following methods: (a) Percentages from the applicable table(s) of ANSI/UL 1971, Standard for Signaling Safety Devices for Persons with hearing impairment or equivalent standards. (b) Actual laboratory test results of the specific device to be used as recorded by the listing organization. 18.5.5.7 Sleeping areas. 18.5.5.7.1 Combinations of smoke detectors and visible detectors or smoke detectors and visible detectors must be installed in accordance with the applicable requirements of Chapters 17, 18 and 29.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NOTIFICATION DEVICES

Distance from ceiling to top of lens in. mm ≥24 ≥610 300 ft/min (>914.4 m) 100 °F (>91.44 m/min) (37.8 °C) Ions X X X X Photo O O X X Beam O O X X Air Sampling O O X X X: May affect detector sensor response. O: Generally does not affect detector response.

Table A.17.7.1.9(a) Common sources of aerosols and moisture particles Humidity

Outdoor Humidifiers Active Steam Showers Sinks Steam Tables Water Mist Combustion Products Chemical Exhaust and Exhaust Cleaning Fluids Household Appliances Curing Cutting, Soldering, and Soldering Dryers Hoods Fireplaces Machining Ovens Spray Paint Contaminants Atmospheric Corrosive Atmosphere Dust or Dirt Excess Tobacco Smoke Heat Treatment Towel and Bedding handling Pneumatic conveying Sawing, drilling and shredding Textile and agricultural processing Engine exhaust Diesel locomotives and trucks Engines without external ventilation Gasoline forklifts Heating element with accumulation of dust Abnormal conditions Incomplete exhaust Incomplete combustion

Table A.17.7.1.9(b) Sources of electrical and mechanical effects in smoke detectors Electrical noise and transients Vibration or shock Radiation High frequency Intense light Lightning Electrostatic discharge Power supply

Airflow gusts Excessive velocity

Consequently, the objectives and performance criteria for the fire detection system are part of a much larger strategy that often depends on the fire protection properties working in conjunction with the fire detection system to achieve the fire protection objectives.

smoke color

O X O O

Total fires for the plant. In a performance-based design environment, the designer uses computer models to demonstrate that the space used for automatic fire detectors connected to the fire detection system achieves the objectives defined by the system, demonstrating that the system meets the specified criteria for the design. system in construction documentation. Consequently, it is important that the design objectives and performance criteria for which the system was designed are clearly stated in the system documentation. A.17.7.1.8 Product listing standards include testing for transient deviations beyond normal limits. In addition to variations in temperature, humidity and speed, smoke detectors must function reliably under common environmental conditions such as mechanical vibration, electrical interference and other environmental influences. Testing for these conditions must also be performed by the test labs in your listing program. In cases where ambient conditions approach the limits specified in Table A.17.7.1.8, the detector manufacturer's published instructions should be consulted for further information and recommendations. A.17.7.1.9 Smoke detectors can be affected by mechanical and electrical influences, as well as aerosols and particles in protected rooms. The location of detectors should be such as to minimize the effects of aerosols and particles from sources such as those shown in Table A.17.7.1.9(a). Likewise, the influences of the electrical and mechanical factors shown in Table A.17.7.1.9(b) must also be minimized. While it may not be possible to completely isolate environmental factors, considering them during layout and design is beneficial to detector performance. A.17.7.1.10 Stratification of the air in a space can prevent air containing smoke particles or gaseous combustion products from reaching smoke detectors or ceiling mounted smoke detectors. Stratification occurs when the air containing the smoke particles or gaseous products of combustion is heated by the use of latent or fuming matter and, being less dense than the cooler surrounding air, rises until it reaches a level where there is no longer any difference in temperature. temperature. between this air and ambient air. Stratification can occur when using coolants

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 234

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Ceiling level smoke detector

device and cannot be used outside the smokehouse. The polychromatic light source used in the smoke chamber results in measurements that are highly dependent on the color of the smoke and do not take into account the wavelength-dependent variations in light transmission that occur as the ability to exhale fire and fuel changes. or as the smoke ages. . Furthermore, the measuring device uses a measure of light obscuration by smoke to infer a measure of light reflection when there is no correlation between these two optical properties.

A.17.7.3.1 Except for low energy fires, all smoke detectors, regardless of technology, rely on the cloud of smoke and the high pressure jet produced by the smoke detectors to carry the smoke vertically and through the ceiling to the detector, to the sample. aperture or the beam of light projected from the sensor. Once a sufficient concentration is achieved at least 900mm (3 inches) from the location of the detector, sample port or detection light beam, and in the case of point detectors, then sufficient flow velocity is achieved FIGURE A. 17.7. 1.10 Arrangement of smoke detectors to overcome resistance to flow in the measurement chamber, detectors to account for stratification. reacts with an alarm signal. Detectors are normally mounted above ceiling level to take advantage of the flow provided by the smoke cloud and the pressure build-up. An evaporation because the moisture introduced by these fire appliances, which generates a lot of heat and energy, creates a column of smoke that can condense into the smoke, causing it to fall to the ground. Therefore, high-velocity, high-temperature (column) smoke and a hot, high-pressure fast jet may be required to ensure a rapid response. This minimizes the time required to install sidewall smoke detectors or for smoke to travel to the detector. A smoldering fire creates spots under the ceiling. small plume of smoke, if it develops, and a virtually unnoticeable jet of high pressure. With these smoldering or small fires and the presence of possible circumstances, much more time elapses between ignition and detection. Layering should consider mounting part of the detectors below the ceiling. In areas with high ceilings, A.17.7.3.2 In areas with high ceilings, such as B. Atriums, consideration should be given to installing projected beam detectors or where smoke detectors located are not accessible for air sampling at different levels. (See Figure A.17.7.1.10.) For periodic maintenance and testing, the installation of projected beam detectors or air sampling should be considered in these cases. A.17.7.1.11 Dirt, dust (particularly drywall dust) and fine particles A.17.7. 3.2.1 See Figure A.17.7.3.2.1 for access to one of the smoke detectors and may take effect in certain cases Example of proper detector mounting. Defective detectors in the detector, which significantly reduce the life of the sidewalls mounted closer to the ceiling, are within the expected life of the detector. Faster. A.17.7.2 This Code refers to the sensitivity of A.17.7.3.2.2 Figure A.17.7.3.2.2 illustrating the installation of smoke detectors in relation to the percentage of installation below ground. A blackout is required to activate an alarm or generate a signal. A.17.7.3.2.3.1 A distance of 9.1 m (30 ft) is a guideline for smoke detectors tested with smoke sources other than the required designs. The application of this distance is based on different characteristics (eg color, particle size, customs of the community using fire alarms, particle quantity, particle shape). Unless otherwise specified in this Code, manufacturers, where there are explicit performance targets for listing and response authorities, must report smoke detection system occlusion percentage and use blackout methods that use a specific type of light gray smoke. based on performance described in Appendix B. The actual detector response will vary if the characteristics of the smoke arriving at the detector are different from the smoke used in the Detector Sensitivity. "30 feet (9.1 m) nominal" is 30 feet (9.1 m) ±5 percent [±18 in. (460mm)]. A.17.7.2.1 Production sensitivity variation should only be used as a reference for testing and should not be used as the sole basis for A.17.7.3.2.3.1(2). This is useful for calculating device locations. Corridors or Irregular Areas [See 17.6.3.1.1 and Percentage Detector Sensitivity Per Foot Figure A.17.6.3.1.1(h)] For irregularly shaped areas, the smoke distance is derived from the smoke box test, typically between detectors can be greater than the selected distance known as ANSI/UL 268 Derived Smoke Box Measurements, provided that the maximum distance between the detector and this indicator only applies in the context of the farthest point, side or corner of the wall within from the zone of

G72-220

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

72- 235

that produces a relatively high amount of heat with a significant thermal increase tends to fill the space between each bar or bars before moving on to the next bar or bars.

Here

While this phenomenon may not be significant in a small smoldering fire, where there is enough thermal impulse to cause stratification at the bottom of the beams, close spacing is recommended to ensure that the burn time detection matches this. ceiling even in a higher degree of heat fire mode.

Acceptable

Detector tip is acceptable here

300mm (12") maximum

A.17.7.3.2.4.2(3) The geometry and effect of the vessel is an important factor contributing to the development of smoke velocity, temperature and obscuration conditions in ceiling mounted smoke detectors located at entrances, beams or at the bottom of the smoke detectors where the bundles of smoke accumulated in the volume of the reservoir that spread towards the neighboring bays are located. Coffered or ribbed ceilings created with solid beams or beams, while slowing down the initial smoke flow, produce greater optical density, temperature rise, and gas velocities comparable to smooth, unrestricted ceilings.

Note: Measurements shown are for the edge closest to the detector.

nu side

FIGURE A.17.7.3.2.1 Example of proper installation of smoke detectors. Protection is not greater than 0.7 times the chosen distance (0.7 s) A.17.7.3.2.4 Detectors are spaced perpendicular to bars or beams to ensure that the detection time matches what would be experienced on a ceiling straight. Combustion products (smoke or heat) take longer to travel perpendicular to beams or beams due to the phenomenon where a cloud of smoke emanates from a fire

For coffered or ribbed ceilings with solid beams or beams, an alternative smoke detector grid arrangement (such as a staggered grid) with detectors positioned to take advantage of the rib effect due to deposits created by beam openings improves detector response of smoke and can allow a greater distance. See Figure A.17.7.3.2.4.2(3)(a) and Figure A.17.7.3.2.4.2(3)(b) for an example of staggered louvers. The alternative design of the smoke detector grille and the space must be justified by an engineering analysis that compares the alternative smoke detector grille design.

FIGURE A.17.7.3.2.2 Permissible (top) and non-permissible (bottom) mounting installations. raised floor panel

Box fixed to the structure

Junction box attached to floor stand

Steel angle or channel bracket

EMT Grandpa Smoke Detector

FMC o EMT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Underfloor mounting - allowed

raised floor panel

smoke detector

FMC o EMT

Underfloor mounting - not allowed

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 236

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

12 ft × 12 ft (3.7 m × 3.7 m) beams, 24 in. (610 mm) 180 s segment length 1/m

Weak current Strong current

segment under the roof

0,80 0,72 0,64 0,56 0,48 0,40 0,32 0,24 0,16 0,08 0,00

Segment at the base of the beam

FIGURE A.17.7.3.2.4.2(3)(a) Deep lightning reservoir and channeling effect. with the performance of smoke detectors on a flat ceiling of the same height, applying 30 ft (9.1 m) spacing for smoke detectors. Figure A.17.7.3.2.4.2(3)(a) illustrates the clustering and channeling effect resulting from the deep jet configuration. The strongest gas flows occur perpendicular to the jet opposite the fire location. The weakest flow occurs directed 45 degrees from the jet grid; However, the reservoir effect allows greater concentrations of smoke to flow from the stronger reservoirs in the area to the weaker reservoirs in the area. Figure A.17.7.3.2.4.2(3)(b) is a general example illustrating how a smoke detection grid can be offset 30 feet (9.1 m) from each other to optimize the duct effect and the bucket to use the discovery response. In the circle, the fire is divided into four bar sections that must fill with smoke before significant flows can occur in the next eight adjacent bar sections. This represents the worst case scenario for smoke to reach detectors placed above the circle. The other three fire locations shown require the fire to initially fill only one or two bays before spreading to adjacent bays.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.17.7.3.2.4.2(4) Corridor geometry is an important factor contributing to the development of smoke velocity, temperature and obscuration conditions in smoke detectors located in a corridor. This is based on the fact that the high pressure jet is confined or confined by nearby walls without the opportunity to incorporate air. For hallways approximately 15 feet (4.6 m) wide and for fires of approximately 100 kW or greater, models have shown that the performance of smoke detectors in railed hallways is comparable to the space between smoke detectors on a surface. smooth and open roof. A.17.7.3.2.4.3 A smoke detector shall be located in each beam channel. Computer modeling has shown that parallel (upward angled) jets are very effective at channeling smoke and that smoke propagation into adjacent parallel patches is rarely detectable.

in uneven areas for ceilings with flush beams. Computer modeling showed that point detectors should be placed at the bottom of perpendicular beams. A.17.7.3.2.4.5 The computational modeling showed that point detectors should be placed at the bottom of the vertical beams and aligned with the span center, as shown in Figure A.17.7.3.2.4.5. Modified fix: key assigned to X locations

A C B

Y21

XY24

FIGURE A.17.7.3.2.4.2(3)(b) Smoke detection grid moved to improve detection of depth beam effect. '+

3HQGLHQWH DVFHQGHQWH

FIGURE A.17.7.3.2.4.5 Spacing of Point Detectors for Sloped Ceilings with Beam Spans.

A.17.7.3.2.4.4 Spacing guidelines may apply

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

'+!

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX A A.17.7.3.3 See Figure A.17.6.3.4(a). A.17.7.3.4 See Figure A.17.6.3.4(b). A.17.7.3.6.3 A single pipe network has a shorter transport time than a multiple pipe network of similar pipe length; However, a multitube system offers a faster smoke transport time than a singletube system of the same overall length. As the exhaust opening in a pipe increases, the smoke transport time also increases. When practical, the lengths of tubes in a multiple tube system should be nearly equal, or else the system should be pneumatically balanced. A.17.7.3.6.6 The air sampling detector system shall be capable of withstanding dusty environments by air filtration, electronic particle size discrimination or other enumerated methods, or a combination thereof. The detector must be capable of providing optimal time delays of the emitted alarm signals to eliminate false alarms due to transient smoke conditions. The detector shall also include functionality to connect monitoring devices to record background information on smoke levels needed to set alarm and alarm levels and delays. A.17.7.3.7 For flat roofs, a distance of not more than 18.3 m (60 ft) between projecting beams and not more than half that distance between projecting beam and roof face shall be used as a guide. wall (parallel wall). to the beam path). Other distances should be determined based on ceiling height, airflow characteristics and response requirements. In some cases, the beam projector is mounted on one end wall and the beam receiver on the opposite wall. However, it is also permissible to suspend the projector and receiver a maximum distance from the ceiling of one quarter of the selected distance (S). (See Figure A.17.7.3.7.)

projector

receptor

¹⁄₂ S

72- 237

A.17.7.3.7.8 If the light path of a projected beam detector is abruptly interrupted or blocked, the unit shall not activate the alarm. There should be an error signal after checking the lock. A.17.7.4.1 Detectors must not be in direct airflow or closer than 36 inches apart. (910 mm) from the air supply vent or air return opening. Larger supply or return sources than are typically found in residential and small commercial establishments may require additional smoke alarm troubleshooting. Also, smoke alarms should be located away from sources of high velocity air. See B.4.10. A.17.7.4.3 No smoke shall enter the duct or plenum when the ventilation system is switched off. Even when the ventilation system is working, due to dilution with clean air, detectors may be less sensitive to fire conditions in the room where the fire started. A.17.7.5 See NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, for the definition of a smoke compartment; NFPA 90A, Standard for Installation of Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems, to define ductwork systems and NPFA 92, Standard for Smoke Control Systems, to define smoke zones. A.17.7.5.1 Smoke detectors located in one or more open areas shall be used in air ducts instead of duct detectors due to the dilution effect. Active smoke management systems installed in accordance with NFPA 92, Standard for Smoke Control Systems, must be controlled by an open area detection system at the perimeter. A.17.7.5.2 Dilution of smoke-laden air by clean air from other parts of the building, or dilution by external air intakes, may allow high smoke densities in a single space without appreciable levels of smoke in the building. Smoke must not be extracted from open areas when air conditioning or ventilation is off.

¹⁄₄ S

projector

¹⁄₄ S S

¹⁄₂ S

receptor

S = chosen detector spacing

FIGURE A.17.7.3.7 The maximum distance from the bulkhead that the ceiling projector and light receiver can be located is one quarter of the selected distance (S).

(1) Prevention of recirculation of hazardous levels of smoke within a building (2) Selective operation of equipment to extract smoke from a building (3) Selective operation of equipment to pressurize smoke compartments (4) Operation of doors and airlocks air to close openings in smoke compartments A .17.7.5.4.2 Smoke detectors are designed to detect the presence of combustion particles, but depending on sensor technology and other design factors, different detectors will respond to different types of particles. Detectors based on ionization detection technology respond best to the smallest invisible particles less than a micron in size. Detectors based on photoelectric technology, on the other hand, respond better to larger visible particles.

72FC06fA-05-7-3-4.eps 16.6 x 14.9 Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without a license from IHS

2013 edition

G72-15

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.17.7.5.3 Smoke detectors may be used to initiate smoke propagation control for the following purposes:

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

It is generally accepted that the particle size distribution varies from particles less than a micron in diameter, which prevail near the flame of a burning fire, to particles one or more orders of magnitude larger, typical of smoke. . The actual particle size distribution depends on other variables, including the fuel and its physical configuration, the availability of oxygen, including air supply and flue gas exhaust, and other environmental conditions, primarily temperature and humidity. The particle size distribution is also not constant, but as the flue gases cool, particles smaller than one micron clump together and very large particles fall out. In other words, as the smoke moves away from the fire source, the particle size distribution shows a relative decrease in smaller particles. When water vapor, which is abundant in most fires, cools enough, it condenses and forms mist particles, an effect often seen in tall chimneys. As condensation is generally light in color, it can be expected to lighten the color of the mixture when mixed with other smoke particles. In almost all fire scenarios in an HVAC system, the detection point must be some distance from the source of the fire; therefore, the smoke will be cooler and more visible due to the growth of submicron particles into larger particles through agglomeration and recombination. For these reasons, photoelectric sensing technology has advantages over ionization sensing technology in air duct system applications. A.17.7.5.4.2.2 The detectors listed for actual air velocity may be installed in the opening through which the return air enters the common return air system. Detectors must be installed no more than 12 inches apart. (300 mm) in front of or behind the opening and shall be spaced according to the following opening dimensions [see Figure A.17.7.5.4.2.2(a) to Figure A.17.7.5.4.2.2(c)]: ( 1) Width. (a) Up to 36 inches. (910 mm) - One aperture-centered detector (b) Up to 72 in. (1.83 m) - Two detectors located at points one-quarter away from the opening (c) More than 72 inches. (1.83 m) - One additional detector for every 24 in. (610 mm) Total opening (2) Depth. The number and spacing of detectors in the depth (vertical) of the opening shall be equal to the width (horizontal) in A.17.7.5.4.2.2(1). (3) Alignment. Detectors should be placed in the most favorable position for smoke entry in relation to the direction of air flow. In terms of coverage, the beam path of a beam detector projected into the return air openings is equivalent to an array of individual detectors. In the exhaust air ducts of each smoke compartment or in the duct system before the air enters the air extraction system, no additional smoke detection is required on the exhaust air of a serviced smoke compartment to ensure full detection (complete) accordingly.

Width up to 915 mm (36 in.) 1⁄2 m

Width up to 915 mm (36")

¹⁄₂ do

457 mm (18") not maximum

Width up to 915 mm (36")

Width up to 1.8 m (72 in.)

1.8 m (72 in.)

¹⁄₄ w ¹⁄₂ d

610 mm (24 strokes)

Uniformly Distributed Detectors ¹⁄₂ d

One detector for every 610 mm (24 inches) of additional aperture width

457 mm (18") not maximum

= smoke detector d = depth b = width

FIGURE A.17.7.5.4.2.2(a) Location of smoke detectors in return air system openings for selective unit operation.

Smoke detector here [see Figure A.5.16.4.2.2(a) or 5.16.5.2]

Air return system not supplied by duct

Guided air return system

Here

72FC

GRAMS

Smoke detectors anywhere in this smoke barrier area

Common return air system serving more than one smoke zone

FIGURE A.17.7.5.4.2.2(b) Arrangement of smoke detectors in return air systems for selective device operation.

72FC0

17.5.3, as the addition of smoke detection to the duct would provide essentially no significant benefit in detection. A.17.7.5.5.2 When duct detectors are used to trigger the operation of smoke locks, they shall be located so that the detector is between the last inlet or outlet of the upstream airlock and the first inlet or outlet of the downstream air chamber. Stratification and dead air spaces must be avoided to obtain a representative sample. such conditions

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

¹⁄₄ subway

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72- 238

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

GRAMS

ANHANG A

Preferred location of the detector in the duct; Location of more than one detector is not necessary

72- 239

Freestanding assembly (unless box is listed for pending assembly)

air duct

Management

Rauchabteil 1

ceiling smoke room 2

Electric box smoke compartment 3

Detector

smoke barrier

Access panel hatch

Common Return Air System Duct Smoke Detector Acceptable Location

FIGURE A.17.7.5.5.2(a) Pendant mount air duct installation.

FIGURE A.17.7.5.4.2.2(c) Location of the detector in a duct passing through smoke compartments not serviced by the duct support hole 72-02_fA-05-14-4-2-2(c) .eps only for duct. 20x11.6

For exhaust systems, the requirements of 17.7.5.4.2.2 take precedence over these considerations. [See Figure A.17.7.5.5.2(a) and Figure A.17.7.5.5.2(b).] Smoke flow management is often required in buildings. Duct smoke detectors are used to shut down HVAC systems or initiate smoke management. Filters have a serious impact on the performance of duct smoke detectors. The position of the detector in relation to the filter and smoke source must be considered during the design process. When smoke detectors are installed downstream of filters, they must serve to provide an alarm indication of the occurrence of a fire in the HVAC unit (filters, strips, heat exchangers, etc.). These detectors are typically used to protect building occupants from smoke generated by an HVAC unit fire or smoke entering the unit through the fresh air intake. They cannot be expected to comply to provide detection for the back end of the system. If detection is required on the return side, this requirement must be met by detectors separate from those that monitor the supply side. To be effective, duct smoke detectors must be positioned so that there are no filters between them and the source of smoke. Sampling tubes should be oriented to counteract thermal stratification due to smoke buoyancy in the upper half of the duct. This condition occurs when pipeline velocities are low, buoyancy exceeds flow inertia, or the detector is installed close to the fire compartment. A vertical orientation of the sampling tubes counteracts the effects of differential buoyancy. When a detector is installed in a duct used for a single fire compartment, where the buoyancy exceeds the inertia of the air flow in the duct and the sampling tube cannot be oriented vertically, the effects of thermal stratification can be minimized by placing the tube detector sampling tube inside the top half of the line is placed. Thermal stratification is not a problem when the

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

more than 0.9 m (3 ft) wide

G Airflow direction

Canalbreite G72-24

Cap this end of the inlet tube Expected airflow direction The slanted side of the return tube faces down into the airflow. Inlet tube holes face the airflow

Do not put the plug in the return tube.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

They can be caused by return duct openings, sharp turns with small angles or grooves, and long, unbroken straights.

72FC

FIGURE A.17.7.5.5.2(b) Inlet tube orientation.

72FC0

the detector is installed away from the fire enclosure or when smoke is near or at average duct temperature. A.17.7.5.6.5.1(C) When the depth of the wall section above the door is 60 inches. (1.52 m) or more, additional detectors may be required as indicated by a classification based on technical criteria. A.17.7.6.1.2 Airflow through openings in the rear of a smoke detector can affect the entry of smoke into the sensor chamber. Likewise, duct air can flow past the outer edges of the detector and interfere with smoke reaching the detection chamber. In addition, openings on the back of the detector allow in dust, dirt and insects, which can affect the detector's performance. A.17.7.6.2 For the most effective detection in high rack storage areas, detectors should be located on the ceiling above each aisle and at intermediate levels within the racks. This is necessary in order to detect smoke trapped in the shelves at the beginning of the development of the fire, when the released thermal energy is not enough to transport the smoke to the ceiling. Early smoke detection is accomplished by locating mid-level detectors close to the

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

GRAMS

72− 240

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

ELEVATION

PLANTA

ceiling detectors

Detectors on shelves (upper mezzanine) Detectors on shelves (lower mezzanine)

Detectors on upper middle shelves Detectors on lower middle shelves

FIGURE A.17.7.6.2(b) Detector position for pallet storage (open rack) 72FC07fA-05-7 or FIGURE A.17.7.6.2(a) Detector position for 72FC07fA-05-7-5-2a .eps 17.9 x 2 Storage without shelves, in which fixed storage is provided (closed shelves), in which there are transverse and longitudinal spaces for smoke circulation 16 x 29.6 transverse and longitudinal spaces for smoke circulation . Smoke is patchy or absent, such as when stored on slatted shelves or smoke detectors. This paragraph is not intended to prohibit the use of solid racks. additional, but ensures the integrity of the smoke detection mission for the human safety of these teams.

G72-221

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

staggered deck sections as shown in Figure A.17.7.6.2(a) and Figure A.17.7.6.2(b). The instructions published by the detector manufacturer and the technical specifications for specific installations must be followed. A projection beam type detector can be used in conjunction with a single row of individual spike type smoke detectors. Sampling ports for air sampling type detectors may be located above each aisle to provide coverage corresponding to the position of the bracket type detectors. The manufacturer's published instructions and technical assessment for the specific installation must be followed. A.17.7.6.3.3 The smoke detector distance depends on the air movement in the room. A.17.7.7.3 Facility owners and managers may require the use of cameras and their images for other purposes

A.17.7.7.4 Video image smoke detection controls and software shall be protected against tampering by passwords, software keys or other means that restrict access to authorized/qualified personnel. Component configuration includes any controls or programming that might affect detection coverage performance. This includes but is not limited to setting the camera's focus, setting the field of view and motion sensitivity, and changing the camera's position. Any changes in component settings or environmental conditions that affect the detector's design performance should generate an error signal. A.17.8.1 For the purposes of this Code, radiant energy includes electromagnetic radiation emitted as a by-product of a combustion reaction that obeys the laws of optics. This includes radiation in the ultraviolet, visible and infrared regions of the spectrum emitted by flames or glowing embers. They are

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

G72-2

ANHANG A

72−241 infrared

visible ultraviolet

The portions of the spectrum are differentiated by the wavelengths shown in Table A.17.8.1.

Visible Infrared Ultraviolet Radiant Energy

millimeter 0.1–0.35 0.36–0.75 0.76–220

H2O/CO2CO2

relative intensity

Table A.17.8.1 Wavelength ranges

CHCO NO, NO2, N2O

Conversion factors: 1.0 mm = 1,000 nm = 10,000 Å. A.17.8.2 Following are the operating principles for the two types of detectors:

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(1) Flame detector. Ultraviolet flame detectors typically use a vacuum tube Geiger-Muller photodiode to detect the ultraviolet radiation produced by the flame. The photodiode applies a wave of current to each ultraviolet photon that strikes the active region of the tube. When the number of current spikes per unit time reaches a predetermined value, the detector triggers an alarm. A single wavelength infrared flame detector uses one of several types of photocells to detect single wavelength band infrared emissions produced by a flame. These detectors typically incorporate devices to minimize alarms commonly caused by infrared emission sources such as incandescent lamps or sunlight. An ultraviolet/infrared (UV/IR) flame detector detects ultraviolet radiation through a vacuum tube photodiode and a selected wavelength of infrared radiation through a photocell and uses a combined signal to indicate a fire. These detectors must be exposed to both types of radiation before an alarm signal can be given. A multi-wavelength infrared (IR/IR) flame detector detects radiation in two or more narrow bands of wavelengths in the infrared spectrum. These detectors electronically compare emissions between bands and activate a signal when the ratio between the two bands indicates a fire. (2) Spark/Smoldering Detectors. A spark/ember detector typically uses a solid-state phototransistor or photodiode to detect radiant energy emitted by embers, typically between 0.5 micron and 2.0 micron in normally dark environments. These detectors can be extremely sensitive (microwatts) and their response times can be very short (microseconds). A.17.8.2.1 The radiant energy of a flame/ember consists of emissions from different bands of the ultraviolet, visible and infrared parts of the spectrum. The relative amounts of radiation emitted in each part of the spectrum are determined by fuel chemistry, temperature, and rate of burning. The detector must match the characteristics of the fire. Almost all materials involved in flaming combustion emit some level of ultraviolet radiation during flaming combustion, while only carbonaceous fuels emit significant radiation in the 4.35 micron band (carbon dioxide), which can be detected by various types of detectors used. to detect a flame. (See Figure A.17.8.2.1)

The radiant energy emitted by an ember is mainly determined by the temperature of the fuel (emissions from the

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

0,1

0,5

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 Wavelength (μm)

6.0

7,0

FIGURE A.17.8.2.1 Typical flame spectrum (free-burning gasoline).

72FC07fA-05-8 18,6x14

Planck's Law) and fuel emissions. The radiant energy of an ember is primarily infrared and, to a lesser extent, visible wavelengths. Generally, embers do not emit appreciable amounts of ultraviolet energy (0.1 percent of total emissions) until the ember reaches a temperature of 3240°F (1727°C or 2000°K). In most cases, emissions fall in the range of 0.8 micron to 2.0 micron, which corresponds to temperatures of approximately 398°C to 1000°C (750°F to 1830°F). Most radiant energy detectors have some form of qualification circuit built in that can take the time to distinguish between false transient signals and legitimate fire alarms. These circuits become very important when considering the expected fire scenario and the detector's ability to respond to the expected fire. For example, a detector that uses an integrator or timing circuit to respond to the flashing light of a fire may not respond adequately to a deflagration resulting from the ignition of accumulated combustible vapors and gases, or if the fire is a spark that follows overload. at a maximum of 100 m/s (328 ft/sec) as it passes the detector. Under these circumstances, it would be more appropriate to use a detector with high-speed response capability. On the other hand, in applications where the fire develops more slowly, it is better to use a detector that takes time to recognize repetitive signals. Therefore, when choosing the detector, one should take into account the rate of fire growth. Detector performance must be chosen to respond to anticipated fire. Radiated emissions are not the only criteria to consider. The medium between the expected fire and the detector is also very important. Materials suspended in the air or collected on the detector's optical surfaces absorb different wavelengths of radiant energy with varying degrees of efficiency. Aerosols and surface debris generally reduce the sensitivity of the detector. The detection technology used should take into account common aerosols and surface debris to minimize the reduction in system response between service intervals. It should be noted that the smoke produced by the

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Combustion of medium and heavy petroleum distillates is highly absorbent at the ultraviolet end of the spectrum. When this type of detection is used, the system must be designed to minimize the effects of smoke interference on the response of the detection system. The environment and expected environmental conditions in the area to be protected influence detector selection. All detectors are limited in the ambient temperatures they must respond to based on their tested and certified sensitivities. The designer must ensure that the detector is compatible with the expected ambient temperature range in the area in which it will be installed. In addition, rain, snow and ice attenuate infrared and ultraviolet radiation to varying degrees. When such conditions are anticipated, measures should be taken to protect the detector from the accumulation of these materials on its optical surfaces. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.17.8.2.2 Normal radiative emissions not produced by a fire may occur in a hazardous area. When selecting a detector for an area, other possible sources of radiation must be evaluated. See point A.17.8.2.1 for more information. A.17.8.3.1.1 All optical detectors respond according to the following theoretical equation:

16 15 Standardized fire measurement

72- 242

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

Distance and measurement criteria must be within the shaded area for application

4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 Standard distance between detector and fire

FIGURE A.17.8.3.1.1 Normalized vs. Spaced 72FC07fA-05-8-3-1-1.e 15 x 21

A.17.8.3.2.1 The suitable application types for flame detectors are:

G72-20

where: S = radiant energy reaching the detector k = detector proportionality constant P = radiant energy emitted by the fire e = base of the natural logarithm (2.7183) z = air extinction coefficient d = distance between the fire and the detector

Sensitivity (S) is commonly measured in nanowatts. This equation provides a series of curves similar to those shown in Figure A.17.8.3.1.1. The curve defines the maximum distance at which the detector will consistently detect a fire of the defined size and fuel. Detectors should only be used in the shaded area of the curve. Under ideal conditions, with no atmospheric absorption, the radiant energy reaching the detector is reduced by a factor of 4 when the distance between the detector and the fire is doubled. For atmospheric absorbance consumption, the exponential term zeta(z) is added to the equation. Zeta is a measure of air purity at the considered wavelength. Zeta is affected by moisture, dust, and other airborne contaminants that absorb the wavelength in question. Zeta generally has values between -1.001 and -0.1 for normal ambient air.

(1) Buildings with high ceilings and open spaces, such as warehouses and aircraft hangars. (2) Outdoor or semi-outdoor areas where wind or drafts may prevent smoke from reaching the smoke or heat detector. (3) Areas where flaming fires can develop rapidly, such as: B. Aircraft hangars, petrochemical production areas, storage and transportation areas, natural gas plants, paint shops, or areas where solvents are handled. (4) Areas requiring machinery or equipment with a high risk of fire, generally in combination with an automatic gas extinguishing system. (5) Unsuitable environments for other types of detectors. Some sources of external radiative emissions that have been identified as interfering with flame detector stability include the following: (1) Sunlight (2) Lightning (3) X-rays (4) Gamma rays (5) Cosmic rays (6) Ultraviolet radiation arc welding (7) Electromagnetic interference (EMI, RFI) (8) Hot objects (9) Artificial lighting A.17.8.3.2.3 The greater the angular displacement of the fire in relation to the optical axis of the detector, the greater must be the fire. to be before being recognized. This phenomenon defines the field of view of the detector. Figure A.17.8.3.2.3 shows an example of the

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

Normal

30° 45° 60°

1,0 0,75 0,50 0,25

15° 30°

Angle of incidence with constant radiant power

(1) Ambient light (2) Electromagnetic interference (EMI, RFI) (3) Electrostatic discharge in fuel flow

45° 60°

0.25 0.50 0.75 1.0 Normalized detector distance

(Video) Free Access to All NFPA Codes & Standards | Find All NFPA Codes for Free | Fire Protection Standards

FIGURE A.17.8.3.2.3 Normalized versus angular displacement. Effective sensitivity to the angular displacement of a flame detector. A.17.8.3.2.4 Almost all radiant energy detection sensors exhibit some form of fuel specificity. Different fuels burn at uniform rates [W (J/s)] and emit different radiant energies in the ultraviolet, visible, and infrared regions of the spectrum. Under free-burning conditions, a fire with a given area but with different fuels will burn at different rates [W (J/s)] and emit different levels of radiation in each of the major regions of the spectrum. Most radiant energy detectors designed to detect flames are designed for a defined fire under specific conditions. When these detectors are used for fuels other than those of the defined fire, the designer must ensure that adequate adjustments are made to the maximum distance between the detector and the fire according to the combustible characteristics of the detector. A.17.8.3.2.6 This requirement has been met by the following means: (1) Monitoring lens clarity and cleanliness when signs of contaminated lenses are detected. (2) Air purge lens The need to clean the detector window can be reduced by installing air purge devices. However, these devices cannot be disposed of and are not a substitute for regular inspections and tests. Radiant energy sensor detectors must not be placed in protective enclosures (eg, behind glass) to keep them clean, unless the enclosure is certified to do so. Some optical materials absorb the wavelengths used by the detector. A.17.8.3.3.1 Spark/ember detectors are installed primarily to detect sparks and embers which, if left to smolder, could cause a much larger fire or explosion. Spark/ember detectors are typically mounted in some type of conduit or conveyor and monitor the fuel as it flows. In general, it is necessary to fence off the part of the conveyor where the detectors are located, as these devices generally require a dark environment. He

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Sources of external radiated emission identified as interfering with the stability of spark/ember detectors include the following:

A.17.8.3.3.2 There is a minimum ignition power (watts) for all combustible dusts. If the spark or embers cannot deliver this amount of energy to the adjacent combustible material (dust), then a spreading dust fire should not be possible. The minimum ignition energy is determined by fuel chemistry, fuel particle size, fuel concentration in the air, and environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity. A.17.8.3.3.4 As the distance between the fire and the detector increases, the radiant energy reaching the detector decreases. See point A.17.8.3.1.1 for more information. A.17.8.3.3.5 The greater the angular deviation of the fire in relation to the optical axis of the detector, the greater the fire must be before it is detected. This phenomenon defines the field of view of the detector. Figure A.17.8.3.2.3 shows an example of the effective sensitivity of a flame detector to angular displacement. A.17.8.3.3.6 This requirement has been met by the following means: (1) Monitoring the clarity and cleanliness of the lens when a sign of contaminated lens is detected. (2) Purge the lens A.17.8.5.3 Facility owners and managers may require the use of cameras and their images for purposes other than flame detection. This paragraph is not intended to prohibit further uses, but rather to ensure the integrity of the life safety flame detection mission of this equipment. A.17.8.5.4 The video image flame detection software and controls shall be protected against tampering by passwords, software keys or other means that restrict access to authorized/qualified personnel. Component configuration includes any controls or programming that might affect detection coverage performance. This includes but is not limited to setting the camera's focus, setting the field of view and motion sensitivity, and changing the camera's position. Any changes in component settings or environmental conditions that affect the detector's design performance should generate an error signal. A.17.10.2.4 The evaluation based on technical criteria must include, among others: (1) Structural characteristics, size and shape of rooms and apartments (2) Occupation and use of areas (3) Ceilings (4) Shape of roof, surface and obstacles (5) Ventilation (6) Environment (7) Gaseous properties of gases present (8) Configuration of the content of the area to be protected (9) Response time/s

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

15°

0°

72- 243

72- 244

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.7.11.2 Examples of such combustion effects are water vapour, ionized molecules or other phenomena for which they were designed. The performance characteristics of the detector and the area in which it will be installed must be evaluated to minimize false alarms or conditions that could interfere with its operation. A.17.12.1 The piping between the sprinkler system and the pressure-actuated alarm activating device must be at least 3/8 in. galvanized or non-ferrous or other approved corrosion resistant material. (9.5 mm) nominal pipe size. A.17.12.2 The water flow device shall be field configured to alarm no later than 90 seconds after sustained flow of at least 10 gpm (40 l/min). Features that should be investigated to minimize alarm response time include the following: (1) Elimination of air entrapment in sprinkler system piping. (2) Use of a positive pressure pump (3) Use of pressure drop alarm trip devices (4) A combination of these water flow alarm trip devices must be carefully selected for hydraulically calculated closed loop systems and for systems with small orifice sprinklers. These systems may involve a single point flow of less than 10 gpm (40 L/min). In such cases, it may be necessary to use additional waterflow alarm triggering devices or pressure drop type waterflow alarm triggering devices. Water flow alarm activation devices for sprinkler systems with "open-closed" sprinklers must be carefully selected to ensure that an alarm is activated by water flow. "On-Off" sprinklers open at a predetermined temperature and close when the temperature reaches a predetermined lower temperature. In certain types of fire, water flow may occur in a series of short bursts, each lasting 10 to 30 seconds. Under these conditions, a delayed alarm device may not detect water flow. The use of a positive pressure system or a system that operates by pressure drop should be considered to facilitate the detection of water flow in sprinkler systems that use "open-closed" (cyclic) sprinklers.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Pressure relief systems can be used with or without alarm valves. The following is a description of one type of overpressure system with an alarm valve. An alarm valve pressure relief system consists of a pressure relief pump with pressure switches to control pump operation. The pump inlet is connected to the supply side of the alarm valve and the outlet is connected to the sprinkler system. The pump pressure control switch is a differential type and maintains sprinkler system pressure at a constant level above line pressure. Another switch controls sprinkler system low pressure to provide a supervisory signal in the event of a pump failure or other malfunction. An additional pressure switch can be used for braking operation

the pump in case of lack of water. Another pressure switch is connected to the alarm output of the alarm valve to activate a water flow alarm signal when water flows. This type of system also prevents false alarms due to sudden bursts of water. The sprinkler delay chamber must be removed to increase the system's ability to detect short duration flows. A.17.13 An alarm may be triggered by devices that detect: (1) systems with foam (water flow) (2) pump activation (3) differential pressure (4) pressure (eg detergent systems, carbon ( 5 ) Mechanical operation of a release mechanism A.17.14.7 Guards, also known as manual station guards, may be installed over manually operated alarm activation devices to provide mechanical protection, environmental protection and reduce the likelihood of accidental activation or malicious. Numbered to ensure that they do not impede the operation of train stations and that they meet accessibility requirements to be operated by people with physical disabilities. The code expressly allows installation in single-use or double-action devices. When installed in a double-acting device, the assembly effectively fixes a triple-acting device. Some units have battery-powered warning beeps that have been shown to prevent malicious activation. To be effective, it's important that regular residents or staff notice the noise and immediately investigate to detect anyone who might activate the device for no reason, or to ensure the device activates if it detects one by itself. a legitimate reason. . A.17.14.8.3 In locations where red paint or plastic would not be appropriate, an alternative material such as stainless steel could be used provided the station meets the requirements of 17.14.8.2. A.17.14.8.5 It is not the intent of 17.14.8.5 to require manual fire alarm calls to be installed on mobile parts or equipment, nor to require the installation of permanent structures solely for assembly purposes. A.18.1 Notification devices shall have sufficient volume, audibility, intelligibility and visibility to reliably convey the information they are intended to provide to the intended personnel during an emergency. In typical commercial and industrial applications, detectors must be installed in accordance with the specific requirements of Section 18.4 and Section 18.5. The Code recognizes that it is not possible to identify specific criteria that are sufficient to ensure effective occupant notification in all conceivable applications. If the specific criteria in Section 18.4 and Section 18.5 are found to be insufficient or inadequate to provide the recommended performance, the use of approved alternative methods or approaches is permitted.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

For example, Chapter 10 requires audible and visible error signals in specific locations. A building or fire code may require audible and visual notification of occupants in all areas of potential occupancy. On the other hand, a building or fire code may require full coverage with audible signaling, but possibly only specific areas or rooms with visible signaling. It is also possible that a referenced code or standard requires assembly and performance requirements for notification devices to be met without requiring the entire notification signaling system to be performed. An example might be the specific placement of a device to deliver information or notifications to a person at a specific table in a larger room. A.18.3.3.2 The intent is to prohibit marks that may convey a false message. Words like "emergency" would be acceptable for labeling as they are generic enough not to create confusion. Fire alarm systems are generally used as emergency alarm systems, so attention should be paid to this detail. Mixed audible and visible units can have multiple visible devices, each labeled differently, or none at all. A.18.3.4 There are situations where additional enclosures are required to protect the integrity of a notification device. Protective cases must not affect the performance characteristics of the device. If enclosure performance declines, methods that clearly identify the degradation should be included in the instructions published by the enclosure manufacturer. For example, if the device signal is attenuated, it may be necessary to adjust the device distances or the device output signal. A.18.3.6 For cabled equipment, the terminals or cables described in 18.3.6 are required to ensure that the cable run is broken and individual connections are made to the cables or other terminals for signaling and power. A common terminal can be used to connect input and output wires. However, the design and construction of the clamp must not allow an uninsulated section of a single conductor to wrap around the clamp and act as two separate connections. For example, a retention plate with notches under a single security screw is only acceptable if separate notification circuit cables are inserted into each of the notches. [See Figure A.17.4.6(a).] Another means of monitoring the integrity of a connection is to establish communication between the device and the control unit. Connection integrity is checked by the presence of

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Communication. Health monitoring in this manner may not require multiple connectors or cables as described above. It should be noted that monitoring the integrity of the installation conductors and connecting them to a device does not guarantee the integrity or operability of the device. Devices can be damaged and rendered inoperative, or a circuit can become overloaded and cause a fault when devices are turned on. Currently, only tests can determine the health of a device. A.18.4.1.1 The Code does not require that all audible alarm devices within a building be of the same type. However, mixing different types of audible notification devices in a room is not the desired method. Audible notification devices that emit a similar audible signal are preferred. For example, a room that uses mechanical horns and bells may not be desirable. A room equipped with mechanical and electronic horns with similar acoustic signal output is preferable. However, the cost of replacing all existing equipment to make it compatible with the new equipment can have a significant economic impact if other methods can be used to prevent occupants from mistaking the signals and their content. Examples of other methods used to avoid confusion include, but are not limited to, occupant training, signaling, consistent use of a temporary code signal pattern, and fire drills. Hearing protection can attenuate both the ambient noise level and the acoustic signal. Hearing protection manufacturers' specifications may allow evaluation of the effectiveness of hearing protection devices. In rooms where hearing protection is used due to high ambient noise levels, the use of visible signaling devices should be considered. In addition, acoustic signal and ambient noise measurements can be analyzed when hearing protection is worn due to high ambient noise conditions, and the acoustic signal can be adjusted to counteract the attenuation produced by hearing protection devices. A.18.4.1.2 The maximum sound pressure level allowed in a room is 110 dBA, reduced from the 120 dBA established in previous editions. The change from 120 dBA to 110 dBA was made to align with other laws, regulations, and standards. In addition to the risk of exposure to high noise levels, prolonged exposure to lower levels can also be an issue, for example when prisoners have to travel long distances to get out or when technicians test large systems over an extended period. . This Code does not require knowing how long an individual is exposed to an audible notification system. The 110 dBA threshold has been established as a reasonable upper limit for system performance. For workers who may be exposed to high levels of noise over a 40-year lifetime, OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) has established a maximum allowable dose before a program is implemented. an exposed worker

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.18.1.5 Clause 18 specifies the means, methods and performance requirements of notification devices and systems. Chapter 18 does not require installation of notification devices or identify cases where notification signage is required. Authorities with jurisdiction, other codes, other standards and chapters of this Code require the signage of the notice and may indicate the areas or audiences to which the notice is directed.

72- 245

72- 246

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE audible signal. However, as they are modulated meters in fast or slow time, the constants have a smaller dB or dBA value.

Table A.18.4.1.2 Admissible exposure to noise

A.18.4.2.1 Paragraph 10.10 requires alarm signals to be distinguished from other signals by their tone and that this tone is not used for any other purpose. Use of the three-pulse time pattern signal required in 18.4.2.1 became effective July 1, 1996 for new systems installed after that date. It is not intended to prohibit the continued use of any existing compliant evacuation signaling system pending approval by the appropriate authority.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

120 dBA for 7.5 minutes a day for over 40 years could put you at risk for hearing loss. OSHA regulation provides a formula for calculating a dose for situations where a person is exposed to different sound levels for different periods of time. The legal maximum is an 8 hour equivalent dose at 90 dBA. It is possible to calculate the dose that a person will receive when passing through an escape route where the sound pressure level varies as he approaches and moves away from sonic devices. Table A.18.4.1.2 describes the allowable noise levels established by OSHA.

Duration (in hours) 8 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 0.25 0.125 (7.5 minutes)

AL (em dBA) 90 92 95 97 100 102 105 110 115 120

Source: OSHA, 29 CFR 1910.5, Table G-16, Occupational Noise Exposure.

A.18.4.1.3 When determining maximum ambient noise levels, the following noise sources should be considered: ventilation equipment and background music in a typical office environment, office cleaning equipment (vacuum cleaners), noise from children in a school auditorium, car engines in a garage, moving walkways in a warehouse, and a shower and fan in a hotel bathroom. Temporary or abnormal noise sources that can be excluded include indoor or outdoor construction activities (ie reorganizing offices and construction crews).

A voice signal must be audible enough to result in intelligible communication. Intelligibility models/measures (subject and instrument based) include audibility and many other factors to determine whether or not a speech signal is appropriate. When a voice signal includes an audible alarm or evacuation tone, the audio portion of the signal shall meet the requirements for audible signals in 18.4.3.

The distinctive pattern is also not intended to apply to visible notification devices. Prior to the 2013 edition, the code 3 temporary evacuation signal was only intended to be used when evacuating the building was the intended response. To eliminate the need for additional signs signifying "relocation", the sign is currently permitted to be used when the intended response is resettlement or partial evacuation. The simple result is that people shouldn't be in areas where the signal sounds and it's safe to be anywhere the signal doesn't sound. active disabled

10 times (sec)

A.18.4.1.4.1 The audibility of a fire or distress signal may not be required in all enclosures and spaces. For example, a system used for general occupant notification should not require signal audibility in closets and other spaces that are not considered habitable. However, a room of the same size used as an archive room is considered habitable and must be within range of detectors. Also, signage intended only for first responders or first responders may only need to be effective in very specific locations.

FIGURE A.18.4.2.1(a) Time pattern imposed on signaling devices that emit a continuous signal while energized.

A.18.4.1.4.2 See point 3.3.177 to access the definition of employability

FIGURE A.18.4.2.1(b) Time pattern imposed on a bell or chime with a single button press.

A.18.4.1.5 As speech consists of modulated tones, it is not valid to compare the measures of intensity of tone signals with the measures of intensity of voice signals. A speech signal that is subjectively considered as strong as a tone signal is actually reported in dB below the tone signal. The modulated tones of a speech signal can have a maximum amplitude equal to or greater than that of the

active disabled

10 times (sec)

The temporal pattern can be generated by an audible notification device, as shown in Figure A.18.4.2.1(a) and Figure A.18.4.2.1(b). A.18.4.2.4 Coordination or synchronization of the sound signal within a detection zone is necessary to maintain the time pattern. It is unlikely that the acoustic signal in a zone of

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72-02_fA

ANHANG A

A.18.4.3 The typical average ambient sound level for the occupancies specified in Table A.18.4.3 is included only as a design aid. The typical average ambient noise levels provided are not to be used in place of actual sound level measurements.

Table A.18.4.3 Average Environmental Noise Levels by Location Location Commercial use Educational use Industrial use Institutional use Commercial use Machinery rooms Docks and structures surrounded by water Assembly areas Residential use Storage use High-density urban highways High-density urban highways medium density Rural and suburban roads Tower occupancies Underground structures and windowless buildings Vehicles and ships

Average ambient noise level (in dBA) 55 45 80 50 40 85 40 55 35 30 70 55 40 35 40 50

Noise levels can be significantly reduced due to distance and losses caused by building components. Each time the distance from the source is doubled, the sound level decreases by about 6 decibels (dB). Audible notification devices are generally certified by testing and manufacturing authorities to have a range of 3 m (10 ft) from the device. So, at a distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) from an 84 dBA certified audible notification appliance, the sound level was reduced to 78 dBA. With the door closed, the loss can be around 10dB to 24dB or more, depending on the project. If the opening around the port is sealed, this could result in a loss of 22dB to 34dB or more. A.18.4.3.1 Audio levels are usually measured in units of decibels or 1/10 Bells, abbreviated as dB. When measuring with a sound level meter, the operator can select an A-weighted, B-weighted, or C-weighted measurement. The C-weighted measurement is nominally flat from 70 Hz to 4000 Hz and the B-weighted measurement is nominally flat from 300 Hz to 4000 Hz. A-weighted metering filters the input signal to reduce metering sensitivity to frequencies to which the human ear is less sensitive and is relatively flat from 600 Hz to 7000 Hz. This results in a weighted measurement to simulate this.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

The segment of the audio spectrum that provides the main components of intelligibility heard by the human ear. The units used for measurement remain dB, but the abbreviation for specifying the use of the A-weighted filter is usually dBA. The difference between two sound levels measured on the same scale is always expressed in dB, not dBA. The changing nature of pressure waves perceived by the ear can be measured with electronic sound meters, and the resulting electronic waveforms can be processed and displayed in a number of meaningful ways. Most simple sound level meters have a fast and slow time constant (125ms and 1000ms respectively) to quickly average a sound signal and display a root mean square (RMS) value on the meter or display. of movement. With this type of measurement, “the maximum sound level lasting at least 60 seconds” is determined. Note that Chapter 14 requires this measurement to be made using the FAST time setting on the meter. However, this fast averaging of the transmitted sound causes rapid movements in the meter's output signal, best observed when speaking into the microphone. The meter rises and falls rapidly with speech. However, when examining ambient noise levels to determine at what high level a notification device will function properly, the sound source should be averaged over a longer period of time. See point 3.3.29, ambient sound level. Moderately expensive sound level meters have this feature, often referred to as Leq, or "equivalent sound level". For example, a voice Leq in a quiet room would cause the meter movement to gradually increase to a peak and then slowly decrease when the voice stops. Leq measurements are taken over a period of time and reported as Leq,t, where t is the period of time. For example, a measurement taken within 24 hours is reported as Leq24. Leq readings can be misapplied in situations where background ambient noise varies significantly over a 24-hour period. Leq measurements must be made during crew time. This is clear from the medium ambient sound level setting (see 3.3.29). Note that the average in this context is the integrated average at a specific measurement location, not the average of several readings taken at different locations. For example, it would be incorrect to take a reading in a quiet bathroom and average it with a reading near a noisy machine to obtain an average that is used to project alarm signals. The alarm will likely play too loudly in the quiet bathroom and not loud enough near the noisy machine. In areas where background noise is generated by machinery and is virtually constant, a frequency analysis may be warranted. Loud sound levels were found predominantly in one or two frequency bands, mostly lower frequencies. Notification devices that emit sound in one or two of the other frequency bands can adequately remove background noise and continue notification. However, the system would be designed to produce or have a sound level at the frequency or width of

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Evacuation/Notification is heard in another zone at a volume that destroys the ephemeral pattern. Therefore, it would normally not be necessary to provide coordination or synchronization for an entire system. Caution is advised in spaces such as atria, where noise occurring in a notification area may be sufficient to cause confusion as to the time pattern.

72- 247

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

specified frequency band of at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level for at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater. In high noise areas such as theaters, dance halls, nightclubs and auto repair shops, noise levels can be 100 dBA or more during peak hours. Maximum noise can be 110 dBA or higher. At other times of occupation, the noise level may be less than 50 dBA. A system designed so that its sound level is at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level for a period of at least 60 seconds can achieve a required sound pressure level that exceeds the value maximum of 115 dBA. A viable option is to reduce or eliminate background noise. Professional theaters or other entertainment venues may have mobile entertainment connection control units (see NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Section 520.50) to which businesses can connect their lighting and sound systems. These energy sources can be controlled by the system. In less formal applications, such as many nightclubs, specific circuits can be controlled. Care must be taken to ensure that regulated circuits are used. In rooms such as machine rooms or other production facilities, special care must be taken when designing that disconnecting the power supply from the noise source does not create further hazards. As with all other emergency control functions, the integrity of control circuits and relays must be monitored in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 10, Chapter 12 and Chapter 23. Adequate acoustic signaling in areas with high levels of ambient noise generally it is difficult. Areas such as car assembly areas, machine areas, painting areas, etc., where ambient noise is caused by the manufacturing process itself, need special attention. It may not be appropriate to add additional audible notification devices that simply add to an already noisy environment. Other alerting techniques, such as visible notification devices, could be used more effectively. Other codes, rules, laws or regulations and the competent authority determine the locations where a signal must be audible. This section of the Code describes the performance requirements necessary for a signal to be reliably audible. A.18.4.4.1 See A.18.4.3.1 for further information on solid measures and rating scales. A.18.4.4.2 For example, in critical patient care areas, it is generally advisable not to have an audible alarm, even with reduced levels of privacy. Each case must be analyzed by the competent authority. Another example would be noisy work areas where an audible alert needed at one time of day to combat background noise would be excessively loud and potentially dangerous at another time when ambient noise levels are lower. A sudden increase of more than 30 dB for 0.5 seconds is considered a sudden and potentially dangerous start.

A.18.4.5.1 See A.18.4.3.1 for further information on solid measures and rating scales. A.18.4.5.3 The purpose of this clause is to require the use of a low frequency signal in areas designated for sleeping and in areas that can reasonably be used for sleeping. For example, this section requires a low frequency acoustic signal in the bedroom of an apartment and also in the living room area of an apartment where occupants may be sleeping. However, it would not be necessary to use low frequency signal in lobbies, lobbies and other spaces without occupants. In hotels, guest rooms would require the use of low frequency signals, although other rooms that may require audible signals may use any of the listed audible notification devices, regardless of the frequency content of the signal being sent. This chapter of the Code refers to detectors connected to and controlled by a fire alarm or emergency communication system. This chapter does not cover residential unit protection, which includes smoke detectors and their audible signal capabilities. Requirements for single- and multi-user detectors and residential fire alarm systems are described in Chapter 29.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72- 248

It is not the intent of this section to preclude the use of devices that have been shown to be as effective in waking inmates with hearing loss in peer-reviewed studies as devices that use the frequency and width specified in this section. Non-voice notification devices (eg sirens) should be listed as low frequency alarm notification devices. Voice notification devices and systems must be capable of transmitting 520 Hz ±10% with appropriate harmonics. For additional protection in the sleeping area, a Section 18.10 tactile notification can be an effective means of waking people with normal hearing as well as the hearing impaired. A.18.4.6 This subsection allows for more rigorous analysis and design of acoustic signaling. Acoustic design practice and psychoacoustic research have long recognized that for a signal to be audible, it only needs to penetrate one-third or one-eighth of the background noise band. The average resulting from A-weighted analysis and design is an oversimplification that often leads to oversized systems. This oversizing is not dangerous, but it can be expensive and is certainly not necessary for effective system performance. A.18.4.6.2 Noise at a lower frequency can mask a signal at an adjacent higher frequency. Therefore, it is necessary to calculate the effective level of masked noise according to established methods. Figure A.18.4.6.2 shows an example of an octave band analysis of the noise along with the calculated effective masked threshold and the proposed fire alarm signal. A.18.4.7.1 The sound content of directional sirens is very different from conventional fire alarm sirens. Conventional fire alarms

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

72- 249

Sound pressure level (dB)

75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 100

Frequency (Hz)

1000

10.000

LN, Oct LT, Oct Fire alarm At the first frequency in the center of the octave band, the masked hearing threshold LT, Oct equals the sound level. For each subsequent center frequency, LT, Oct is the greater of the sound levels in that octave band, LN, Oct, or the masked limit of the previous band minus 7.5 dB.

FIGURE A.18.4.6.2 Example of threshold masking level.

directional sound = 66 dB(A)*; Fire alarm = 86 dB(A)* 110 100 90 3 kHz Fire alarm 80 70 Directional probe 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 Frequency (Hz)

* Measured at 10 feet in an anechoic chamber.

FIGURE A.18.4.7(a) Comparison of the frequency content of a traditional fire alarm siren and a directional siren. Fire alarms are clearly dominated by harmonics from 3 kHz onwards, directional siren wideband content is 20 dB to 30 dB in other bands or frequency ranges. The fire detector has a higher A-weighted overall sound level than the directional siren and is perceived as louder. However, as the directional siren has a wider spectral range, the signal penetrates the alarm signal.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Triggers in several other frequency bands as per point 18.4.6. *There are three main types of information that allow the brain to identify the location of a sound. The first two are known as binaural cues because they take advantage of the fact that we have two ears separated by the width of our heads. A sound emanating from either side of the midline reaches the nearest ear first and is loudest in that ear. At low frequencies, the brain detects differences in the arrival time of sound between the ears (interaural time differences). At higher frequencies, the output signal is the volume/intensity difference between the sounds in each ear (interaural volume differences). See Figure A.18.4.7.1(b). For individual frequencies, these signals are spatially ambiguous. The inherent ambiguity has been described as a "cone of confusion". This stems from the fact that, for any given frequency, there are multiple spatial locations that produce identical intensity/time differences. These can be represented graphically in the form of a cone, the tip of which is at the level of the auricle. The Cone of Confusion is the main reason why we cannot locate the pure tones. The final piece of sound localization information processed by the brain is the head-related transfer function (HRTF). HRTF refers to the effect the outer ear has on sound. Passing through the bulges and gyres of the auricle, the sound is modified in such a way that some frequencies are attenuated and others are amplified. See Figure A.18.4.7.1(c). While there are some generalizations about how headphones change sound, the HRTF is unique to each person. The HRTF's role is particularly important in determining whether a sound is ahead or behind us. In this case the differences

G72-229

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

They have strong tonal content, usually centered around the 3 kHz range. Directional resonators use wideband frequency content, generally covering most of the human audible frequency range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Figure A.18.4.7(a) compares the frequency content of a traditional fire alarm siren with a directional siren. This figure shows that while the resonator of the

72− 250

A.18.4.7.2 NATIONAL ALARM AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE A.18.4.7.2 ITD: A difference in arrival times of waveform characteristics (such as positive peaks and zero crossings) at the two ears is called the time difference interaural or ITD. Binaural physiology can use the phase information of ITD signals only at low frequencies below about 1500 Hz. However, the binaural system can successfully register an ITD that occurs at a high frequency, such as 4000 Hz, when it modulates the signal. Modulation, in turn, must be certified to be less than about 1000 Hz.

defective ear defective ear

One-off

Tempo

directly radiated ear

ear closer

DPI: The comparison between intensities in the left and right ear is called the interaural level difference or DPI. ILD signals physically exist only for frequencies above 500 Hz. They become bulky and reliable for frequencies above 3000 Hz, making ILD signals more effective at high frequencies.

Interaural time difference (ITD) sources directed to one side (B) reach the nearest ear first.

disturbed ear

ATF: Listeners use the anatomical transfer function (ATF), also known as the head-related transfer function (HRTF), to resolve anteroposterior confusion and determine height. Back waves tend to be amplified in the 1000 Hz frequency range, while front waves are amplified near 3000 Hz. The most noticeable effects occur above 4000 Hz.

I WENT

in the next ear

Interaural Loudness Differences Lateral sources (B) are perceived louder in the nearest ear due to interference with the head.

These location signals can be implemented simultaneously when the source signal is a wideband tone containing a low to high frequency range. For example, 72FC07fA-07-4-6-1b.eps 20 x 22.6 octave bands of 1 kHz (707-1414 Hz) for ITD, 4 kHz (2828-5856 Hz) for ILD and 8 kHz (5657- 11.314 Hz) for ATF would be within the effective frequency ranges required in paragraph 18.4.6.

FIGURE A.18.4.7.1(b) Interaural differences in time and sound intensity.

G72-230

For more information on sound localization cues and auditory localization, see the following article: http://www. aip.org/pt/nov99/locsound.html, item G.1.2.12.1. The ability to identify the location of a sound source is based on the physics of sound and the physiology of the human auditory mechanism. The brain processes a variety of signals Amplitude (dB)

Amplitude (dB)

Time and intensity are insignificant and, consequently, the central nervous system has very little information on which to base this decision. When locating the direction of a sound source, the greater the frequency content, the greater the accuracy to overcome ambiguities inherent in individual tones.

About

–10 –20

Original signal –10 –20 –30

–30 4

10 12

15 18

Give back

–10 –20 –30

10 12

15 18

Frequency (kHz)

Amplitude (dB)

Frequency (kHz)

Testa

–10 –20 –30

10 12

15 18

Frequency (kHz)

10 12

15 18

Frequency (kHz)

FIGURE A.18.4.7.1(c) Examples of frequency-dependent attenuation for sources in front of, above, and behind the listener.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72FC07fA-07-4-6-1c.eps 31 x 18

ANHANG A

The interaural time difference (ITD) and the interaural intensity difference (IID) are called binaural signals because they depend on both ears being separated by the width of the head. At lower frequencies (longer wavelength) the time delay between incoming sound signals can be seen. ITD is most noticeable at frequencies below 500 Hz with clicks or short bursts of sound. At higher frequencies (shorter wavelength), volume/intensity differences between the ears are more noticeable because the head partially shields the far ear. IID is most evident at frequencies above 3000 Hz. The head-related transfer function (HRTF) depends on the effect of the outer ear on perceived sound. The HRTF describes the transformative effect of the head, trunk and outer ear on sound as it travels from the sound source to the ear canals. The HRTF changes based on the location of the sound source and provides an additional location suggestion. The HRTF operates over a range of frequencies, although it appears to be most effective in the 5,000 to 10,000 Hz range. In combination with listener head movement, HRTF provides an independent location method to complement the ITD and IID capabilities. The Precedence Effect (PE) is important in distinguishing between the direct sound signal and the reflected sound, a common situation in buildings. The ear is able to identify and fixate on the first sound it receives (direct visual signal) and ignore subsequent signals (reflected sound). The acoustic signal that reaches the ears first suppresses the ability to hear other incoming signals (including reverb) for up to about 40 milliseconds after the original signal. All of the above signals are used simultaneously when the source signal is a broadband tone containing a range of high and low frequencies and when the tone arrives in bursts rather than a continuous tone. The combination of different signals allows the amplification and redundancy of information to improve the location of the sound source. Wideband audio tends to eliminate possible ambiguities that arise in pure tone or narrowband audio sources. Other types of sound patterns can be used such as directional resonators that can be used for audible output indication. Some scientific research has been done to develop a directional resonator that uses a different tonal sound than the example mentioned above. As with the directional sound example above, the development of this alternative signal is equally influenced by the large amount of research data that

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

They exist for sound localization and for targeted acoustic signals. An example of an alternate direction tone signal might be a sequence of two two-tone harmonic complexes. This sequence starts with a complex low fundamental frequency of 262 and 330 Hz lasting 200 ms. This tone is followed by a 200ms silence. The sequence then continues with a second tone, which is a complex of low fundamental frequencies of 330 and 392 Hz lasting 200 ms. After another 200ms of silence, this entire pattern repeats itself. The viability of the location was guaranteed by the dense harmonic structure of the signal with harmonics very close to each other up to 20 kHz. Additionally, high tones have been added to the beginning of the cue to help detect interaural time differences, increasing localization feasibility. A.18.4.7.4 If directional sounders are used, they must not be located at a single exit. They must be located at all designated building exits. This is to ensure that when evacuating or moving, residents use all exits and escape areas, not just those with nearby directional sirens. Some examples of exits would be: (1) exiting code-compliant exterior doors and exits (2) code-compliant exit hallways (3) interior stairs that include code-compliant smoke-proof enclosures. (4) Code compliant external stairs (5) Code compliant ramps (6) Code compliant fire escapes (7) Code compliant horizontal exits A.18.4.10 See Appendix D, Speech for clarity. A.18.4.10.1 See definition of acoustically distinguishable space in 3.3.6. A.18.4.10.2.1 Due to system design, intelligibility may not be required, for example in the following locations: See also Appendix D. (1) Bathrooms, showers, saunas and similar private rooms/areas (2) Machine rooms, electrical equipment rooms, elevator equipment rooms and similar Rooms/areas (3) Elevator cabins (4) Individual offices (5) Kitchens (6) Warehouses (7) Cupboards (8) Rooms/areas where intelligibility not reasonably predictable A . 18.4.10.3 ADS assignments must be part of the original design process. See description in point A.3.3.6. Layout diagrams should be used to plan and show the boundaries of each ADS when there are more than one. All areas that must provide audible notification to occupants, whether by sound or voice only, must be designated as one or more ADSs. Charts or a table listing all ADSs should be used to indicate which ADSs require communication.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Nerve cells, some of which provide information about the location of the sound source. Humans can hear sounds in the range of about 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz; unfortunately, pure sounds in this frequency range provide limited location information. Primary localization cues are provided by interaural time differences (ITD) (lower frequencies), interaural intensity differences (IID) (intermediate to higher frequencies), and head-related transfer function (HRTF) (higher frequencies) . Indoors, which can be quite reverberant, the Precedence Effect (PE) also provides directional information.

72- 251

72- 252

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

understandable voice and which is not. The same charts or tables can be used to list audibility requirements when using tones and to list any forms of visual notification or other communication methods used in ADS. A.18.5 The mounting height of the luminaire affects the distribution pattern and the level of illumination produced by a luminaire placed on adjacent surfaces. It is this pattern or effect that notifies occupants through visible devices. If mounted too high, the pattern will be larger but with a lower light level (measured in lumens per square foot or foot candles). If mounted too low, the lighting will be larger (brighter), but the pattern will be smaller and may not adequately overlap neighboring lights. A qualified designer may choose to provide calculations to an authority having jurisdiction that demonstrate that a mounting height greater than 96 inches is possible. (2.44 m) or less than 80 inches. (2.03 m), provided an equivalent lighting level is achieved in adjacent areas. This can be done using devices listed with higher intensity or lower spacing or both. Engineering calculations shall be prepared by qualified persons and submitted to the appropriate authority that demonstrate how the proposed change will achieve a level of illumination equal to or greater than that achieved by meeting the mandatory requirements of Section 18.5. Calculations require knowledge of calculation methods for high intensity lightning. Additionally, calculations require knowledge of the test standards used to evaluate and list the device. A.18.5.1 There are two methods of visible marking. These are methods in which notification of an emergency condition is conveyed by looking directly at the lamp or illuminating the surrounding area. Visible notification devices used in public mode must be in a specific location and be of a type, size, intensity, and quantity that allow intended viewers to see the device's operational effects, regardless of viewer orientation. A.18.5.1.2 Visible notification devices for fire or distress signals may not be required in all rooms or areas. For example, a system used for general occupant notification should not require visible signage in closets and other spaces that are not considered occupancy areas. However, an archive room of the same size may be considered suitable for occupancy and should be within the detection range of the detectors. Also, signage intended only for first responders or first responders may only need to be effective in very specific locations. A.18.5.2.2 NFPA 72 does not require notification of occupants by visible signage, except in high noise areas (see 18.4.1.1). As with audible occupant notification, the requirement for such signaling stems from other applicable laws, regulations or standards. These other applicable laws, codes or standards specify the areas or spaces that require notification, whether audible, visible or both.

to prisoners. NFPA 72 contains standards that govern these systems. A.18.5.3.4 Effective Intensity is the traditional way of matching the brightness of a strobe to that of steady light seen by a human observer. The units of effective current are expressed in candela (or candelabra, which is equivalent to candela). For example, a flashlight with an effective intensity of 15 cd has the same apparent brightness to an observer as a constant 15 cd light source. Effective intensity measurement is usually done in a laboratory using special photometric equipment. An exact field measurement of the effective intensity is not possible. Other units of measure for flash intensity, such as maximum candela or flash energy, do not directly correlate with effective intensity and are not used in this standard. Strobe lights can be used to signal fire or other emergencies and can be designed to initiate evacuation, resettlement and other behaviors. Lights intended to initiate a fire evacuation shall be clear or white as required by code. Colored lights such as amber/amber lights can be used in a combination system for any emergency (fire, bomb, chemical, weather, etc.) where the recipient intends to collect additional information from other sources (voice, text, screens, etc.) ).). Example Scenario 1: A building has a fire alarm system that is used for general evacuation. An autonomous mass notification system is used to provide voice instructions and information for non-fire emergencies. The fire alarm system should have white/clear strobe lights to alert residents of the need to evacuate. The mass notification system shall have amber/amber flashes intended to signal the need for additional information, whether through audible voice prompts, text or graphical displays or other sources of information controlled or operated by the system. If both systems are activated simultaneously, the strobes must be synchronized in accordance with the provisions of point 18.5.5.4.2. Example Scenario 2: A building has a mass reporting system that provides information and instructions for a variety of emergency situations, including a fire. The activation of fire alarms can be done by a standalone fire detection system or it can be an integral part of the mass notification system. In an emergency, acoustic text devices are used to provide information. A visual prompt can be given using a series of bright or colored flashes to indicate that additional information is required. Visible text information may be provided by text or graphic displays or other visible information devices. The content of the audio and visual messages varies according to the emergency. A.18.5.3.6 It is not intended to establish display and time requirements to distinguish outdoor venues. For example, floor # is not mandatory. 1 is in sync with floor 2 when there is no visible coupling, such as B. in an atrium.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX A Studies have shown that the effect of strobe lights on photosensitive epilepsy decreases with distance and angle of view.

72- 253

Due to the extended cone of vision shown in Figure A.18.5.4(a), direct transmission occurs when occupants are not looking at visible ceiling mounted detectors. The intensity and distance of the visible notification devices resulting from the prescribed design were generally sufficient for occupant notification through combined direct and indirect signaling. Tests showed that the best performance was achieved when visible reporting devices were placed directly above aisles or when visible reporting devices in adjacent aisles were not obstructed by supporting structures. The performance-based design method will, in almost all cases, result in corridors that do not have a row of visible notification appliances, as the spacing between visible notification appliances can be greater than the spacing of the corridors. Furthermore, it is recognized that aisles can be relocated after the system is installed. A good design practice is to place notification devices prominently above aisles, particularly those that are likely to remain unchanged, such as entrances and checkout areas. If corridor reorganization prevents visible notification devices from being placed in a corridor, or if this is the basic design, it is important to have a clear view of that corridor for a nearby visible notification device.

As long as the composite flash rate does not exceed that produced by two flashes listed as permitted in 18.5.5.4.2, the provisions are met. Example: In a ballroom, during an emergency, multiple synchronized flashes are operational, the ballroom exit doors are open, and the outdoor flashes in the foyer and hallway are also operational. The flashes in the hallway and lobby are in sync, but the ones outside the hallway are out of sync with the ones inside. This would be an acceptable application as the composite flicker rate does not exceed what is allowed in 18.5.5.4.2. A.18.5.4 The mandatory requirements of clause 18.5 presuppose the use of equipment with very specific characteristics in terms of light color, intensity, distribution, etc. Device and application requirements are based on extensive research. However, the research was limited to typical residential and commercial applications such as classrooms, offices, lobbies and hotel rooms. While these specific devices and apps are likely to work in other areas as well, using them may not be the most effective solution, and they may not be as reliable as other visible notification methods.

See Figure A.18.5.4(b). Some areas may be less affected (directly or indirectly) by the visible notification device. However, occupants of these large retail and storage spaces often move around and position themselves to receive notifications via visible notification devices. A complete synchronization of the notification devices visible in this room also had the desired effect.

For example, in department stores and large distribution spaces such as hypermarkets, it is possible to provide visible signage through the devices and applications described in this chapter. Mount strobe lights to a height of 80 inches. at 96 inches. (2.03 m to 2.44 m) along corridors, luminaires are often subject to mechanical damage from forklift trucks and support structures. Furthermore, the number of devices required would be very high. It is possible to use other devices and applications that are not explicitly mentioned in this chapter. Alternative applications must be carefully designed to engineering standards to ensure reliability and function and require approval from the appropriate authority. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Visible notification using the methods contained in 18.5.5.4 is achieved by indirect signaling. This means that the person doesn't actually need to see the device, just the effect of the device. This can be done with minimal lighting on surfaces close to the device, such as B. floors, walls, and tables. There should be enough change in lighting to be noticeable. The tables and diagrams in Section 18.5 give specific effective luminous intensity on floor candles for rooms of a specific size. Data is based on extensive research and testing. Characteristically, luminaires do not produce the same light intensity when measured off-axis. To ensure that the luminaire produces the desired lighting (effect), it must have some form of light intensity distribution to the surrounding areas. ANSI/UL 1971, Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired, specifies the above light distribution

Testing of a system in department stores/hypermarkets designed using the prescribed approach described in 18.5.5.4 showed that high levels of ambient light resulted in both direct and indirect signaling effects. The signal-to-noise ratio generated by visible notification appliances in operation was low in many of the locations. However, indirect and in certain cases direct reporting has been achieved with visible reporting devices located on walkways or unobstructed by support structures. the notification

peripheral vision

Clear viewing angle - 15 degrees

FIGURE A.18.5.4(a) Cone of vision extended. (Courtesy of R.P. Schifiliti Associates, Inc.) 72FC07fA07-5-3a.eps 31 x 7.6 Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without a license from IHS

G72-232

2013 edition

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 254

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Mandatory or power-based strobe spacing

Coverage depends on space, shelf/rack dimensions, and relative heights of strobes and profiles

direct signaling

indirect signaling

shelves or shelves

FIGURE A.18.5.4(b) Notification devices visible in stores. (Courtesy of R. P. Schifiliti Associates, Inc.) 72FC07fA07-5-3b.eps because the flash is close to the ceiling. 42 x 15.6 This means that there is little or no wall surface above the plane of the flash that does not light up when the flash is mounted close to the ceiling. Therefore, if a bolt is below the minimum height [80 in. (2.03 m)], but still close to the ceiling, the only signal loss is the smaller pattern created in the horizontal plane (floor).

provide effective notification through indirectly visible signage.

G72-233

A.18.5.5.1 The requirements for placement of apparatus within a building or structure shall apply to strobe lights used in accordance with 18.5.5.4, 18.5.5.5 and 18.55.7. The mounting and location of equipment installed using the performance-dependent alternative described in 18.5.5.6 may be arranged differently, provided it meets the expected performance requirements. Other devices such as equipment such as graphics screens, video screens, etc. they must be put to work as intended.

If the only change is a lower mounting height due to a lower ceiling height, the size of the space covered by a flash of a given value must be reduced to twice the difference between the minimum mounting height of 80 inches. (2.03 m) and the lowest actual mounting height. For example, using a 15 cd effective intensity strobe would typically cover a 20-foot (6.1 m) square room and the height of the room is 63 inches. (1.6 m) and the flash mounts to a 59-in. (1.5 m), the flash can only cover a square space of 16.5 feet (5.03 m): 20 feet - 2 (80" - 59") (1 foot / 12") = 16.5 feet (5.03 m).

When low ceiling heights or other conditions do not permit mounting at a minimum height of 80 inches. (2.03 m), visible luminaires can be mounted lower. However, lowering the mounting height will reduce the coverage area of this flash. The performance-based methods described in 18.5.5.6 may be used to determine coverage area. The mounting height of the flashes must not be below the level of normal human vision [approx. 1.5 m (5 ft)] can be shortened unless the ceiling height restricts the mounting position.

Reducing the room size means that the horizontal pattern on either side of the flash is reduced by the same amount as the height of the flash is reduced.

The required mounting height of 80 inches. at 96 inches. (2.03 m to 2.44 m) does not permit conditions where the ceiling height is less than 80 inches. (2.03m). The allowable range [80 in. at 96 inches. (2.03m to 2.44m)] ensures the strobes are not installed too high, which would result in less lighting on the surrounding walls and floor. The lower end of the strip ensures that a minimum percentage of surrounding surfaces are illuminated and that the top of the illuminated pattern is at or above normal human vision level [approximately 5 ft (1.5 m)]. Wall-mounted flashes, if listed for wall-mount only, may generate little or no illumination above the plane of the flashes. With lower ceiling heights and close-to-ceiling mounting, the light level on the floor and surrounding walls is not reduced, but the walls have approximately 100% illuminated or "painted" area.

A.18.5.5.3 Visible detectors shall be listed for wall or ceiling mounting. The effectiveness of ceiling lights does not depend on their attachment to a surface. Therefore, code allows them to be suspended from the ceiling using proper electrical installation methods. Mounting parallel to the ground, either ceiling or suspended, can in some cases significantly reduce installation costs and provide better coverage. In rooms and meeting areas with bookshelves and racks, wall-mounted devices are often recessed or exposed to mechanical damage. Mounting luminaires on the ceiling (or pendant) can avoid problems and increase the surface coverage of the luminaire with direct and indirect signaling. See point A.18.5.4. A.18.5.5.4

Las

intensities

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

Von

las

Calling

writer

ANHANG A

72- 255

3.1 m (10 twists)

12.2 m (40 twists)

LRH corner strobe correct coverage

Visible device (usually) placed correctly

6.7 m (22 twists)

30 cd 15.2m (50 cakes)

3.1 m (10 twists)

FIGURE A.18.5.5.4(c) Spatial Distance Distribution – Correct.

72-02_fA-07-5-415.5 x 12

Visible device positioned incorrectly Incorrect

12.2 m (40 twists)

30 compact discs

6.7 m (22 twists)

30 compact discs

visible devices

visible device

9.1 m (30 twists)

9.1 m 15.2 m (30 volts) (50 volts)

9.1 m (30 ft) Note: Dotted lines indicate imaginary walls.

30 compact discs

FIGURE A.18.5.5.4(a) Spacing in irregular areas.

visible device

12.2 m (40 twists)

30 pes (9.1 m) 50 pes (15.2 m)

FIGURE A.18.5.5.4(d) Spatial Distance Distribution - Incorrect.

G72-34

60 compact discs

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

12.2 m (40 twists)

72-02_fA-07-5-4-1(a).eps 16 x 27.9

The minimum currents listed in Table 18.5.5.4.1(a) or Table 18.5.5.4.1(b), in 18.5.5.5, in Table 18.5.5.7.2 or determined according to the performance requirements are required from point 18.5.5.6. It is acceptable to use a higher intensity flash instead of the minimum required intensity.

60 compact discs

15 compact discs

6.1 m (20 twists)

15 cd 6.1 m (20 twists) 22.6 m (74 twists)

12.2 m (40 twists)

80 ft (24.4 m) Note: Dotted lines indicate imaginary walls.

FIGURE A.18.5.5.4(b) Distance of visible wall-mounted devices in rooms.

Areas large enough to exceed the rectangular dimensions shown in Figure A.18.5.5.4(a) through Figure A.18.5.5.4(c) require additional equipment. Proper attachment placement can usually be facilitated by dividing the area into several squares and dimensions that best fit [see Figure A.18.5.5.4(a) to Figure A.18.5.5.4(d)]. An area 40 feet (12.2 m) wide and 80 feet (24.4 m) long can be covered with two 60 cd floodlights. Uneven areas and areas with dividers or partitions require more careful planning to ensure that at least one 15 cd light is installed per 20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m x 6.1 m) area and that the fixture light does not be blocked. A.18.5.5.4.2(2) The field of view is based on the focusing ability of the human eye, which is specified as 120 degrees in the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Lighting Reference and Applications Manual. 72-02_fA-07-5-4-1(b).eps 20x22

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

G72-35

72-02_fA-0 1

72- 256

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

The vertex of this angle is the eye of the beholder. To ensure compliance with the requirements of 18.5.5.4.2, this angle should be increased to approximately 135 degrees. Tests have shown that high flash rates from high-intensity flash lamps can pose a potential seizure risk for people with photosensitive epilepsy. To reduce this risk, no more than two devices are seen in a field of view unless their flashes are synchronized. This does not prevent pairing devices that are not in the same field of view. A.18.5.5.4.6 This sub-clause is also intended to allow ceiling-mounted flash units to be suspended below the ceiling, provided the height of the flash unit is not below the plane of view at any ceiling height. A.18.5.5.5 As occupants are generally alert and mobile, and their vision is focused due to space confinement, aisle signage with lower intensity (15 cd) line-of-sight devices is permitted. In other words, the alert is expected to be provided by the flashlight's direct view, not necessarily its projected reflection from surfaces (indirect view) as required for spaces in 18.5.5.4. It should be noted that it is acceptable to apply the provisions of clause 18.5.5.4 (distances in rooms) to determine the number and location of strobe lights in corridors. When 18.5.5.4 applies, a strobe light is not required in aisles within 15 feet (4.5 m) of the end of the aisle. See Figure A.18.5.5.5 for corridor distances for visible devices. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

6.1 m (20 twists) 30.5 m (100 twists) 6.1 m (20 twists)

FIGURE A.18.5.5.5 Aisle distance for visible devices. 15 feet (4.6m)

Light fixture visible 6.1 m (20 ft)

A.18.5.5.5.5 Installations visible from corridors may be mounted on walls or ceilings in accordance with paragraph 18.5.5.5. If there are more than two devices in a field of view, they must be synchronized. It should be noted that it is acceptable to apply the provisions of clause 18.5.5.4 (distances in rooms) to determine the number and location of strobe lights in corridors. When 18.5.5.4 applies, a strobe light is not required in aisles within 15 feet (4.5 m) of the end of the aisle. It is not the intent of this section to require strobe lights at or near every exit or exit entrance to a corridor. A.18.5.5.6 A design that provides a minimum illumination of 0.0375 lumens/ft2 (candle feet) [0.4037 lumens/m2 (lux)] is considered for all spaces of potential occupancy where notification is required. visible complies with light intensity requirements 18.5 .5.4.2(1). This level of illuminance has been shown to alert people through indirect vision (reflected light) in a variety of spaces with a variety of ambient lighting conditions. The illumination of a detector visible at a given distance is equal to the effective intensity of the device divided by the square of the distance (inverse square law). Table 18.5.5.4.1(a) and Table 18.5.5.4.1(b) are based on applying the inverse square law to achieve full scale illumination of at least 0.0375 lumens/ft2 (0. 4037 lumens/m2). living room. For example, in a 40 ft × 40 ft (12.2 m × 12.2 m) room, a light fixture with an effective intensity of 60 cd produces 0.0375 lumens/ft2 (0.4037 lumens/m2) on the wall opposite 12.2 m (40 ft) distance [60 ÷ (40 ft)2 or (60 ÷ (12.2 m)2)]. The same fixture with an effective intensity of 60 cd produces 0.0375 lumens/ft2 (0.4037 lumens/m2) on the adjacent wall 20 feet (6.1 m) away [60 × 25% ÷ (20 feet) 2 or (60 × 25% ÷ ( 12.2 m. )2)], where the minimum light output of the luminaire 90 degrees off axis is 25 percent of the rated output as specified in ANSI/UL 1971, Standard for Personal Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. Likewise, a 110 cd flash produces at least 0.0375 lumens/ft2 (0.4037 lumens/m2) in a 54 ft × 54 ft (16.5 m × 16.5 m) room. The calculated intensities in Table 18.5.5.4.1(a) and Table 18.5.5.4.1(b) have been adjusted to normalize the currently available product intensity options to account for additional reflections in the corners of the room and the increased likelihood direct view. they are more than one device in a room. The use of outdoor visible information devices has not been tested and is not covered by this standard. Visible devices mounted outdoors must be listed for outdoor use (e.g. per ANSI/UL 1638, Standard for Visual Signaling Devices: Private Mode Emergency Signaling and General Service Signaling) and must be positioned for direct viewing , as the overall reflective light is greatly reduced. A.18.5.5.7.2 In sleeping areas, the use of lamps of other intensities at distances less than 16 feet (4.9 m) has not been studied and is not addressed in the

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANNEX TO this Code. This section on strobes that warn people sleeping is for autonomous strobes that must be located in accordance with 18.5.5. If the strobe light is part of a smoke alarm or smoke detector, the unit must be mounted in accordance with the requirements of the smoke detector or smoke detector. In each case (individual or combined) Table 18.5.5.7.2 is then consulted to determine the required minimum intensity. If the device is mounted less than 24 in. (610 mm) from the ceiling, must have a minimum effective power of 177 cd, as it may be in a blanket of smoke at the time of its operation. If the device is 24 inches tall. (610 mm) or more from the ceiling, an effective power rating of 110 cd or more is allowed. Note that the requirement to increase the intensity when mounted close to the ceiling only applies to strobes used in sleeping areas to wake sleeping people. It is believed that in situations where people are not sleeping, a strobe light is not needed to alert someone when a layer of smoke is forming. A.18.6 While the number of visible notification devices may be reduced in private mode settings, it may still be necessary to consider placing visible notification devices in spaces used by the public or by persons who are hearing impaired or subject to the Regulations. established in other laws or codes. A.18.8.1.2 The audio signal is used to evaluate the sound pressure level produced by the loudspeakers due to sound pressure level fluctuation of speech or recorded messages. A.18.9 Visible text and graphical notification devices are selected and installed to generate temporary text, permanent text or icons. Text and graphically visible notification devices are most commonly used in private mode for fire alarm systems. The use of microprocessors with computer monitors and printers means that detailed information in the form of text and graphics can be provided to those responsible for directing emergency response and evacuations. Graphic and visible text notification appliances are also used in public mode to communicate emergency and evacuation information directly to occupants or residents of the area protected by the system. For both public and private mode signaling, text and graphic displays can provide information about pre-alarm, alarm, fault and monitoring conditions. Since textual and graphic visual notification devices do not necessarily have alarm capabilities, they should only be used as a supplement to visual or audible notification devices. Visible text and graphical information must be of an easy-to-read size and visual quality. Several factors affect the readability of visible text devices, including: (1) the size and color of the text or graphics (2) the distance from the observation point (3) the observation time (4) the contrast (5) the background glow

72- 257

(6) Illumination (7) Diffuse light (reflection) (8) Shading (9) Physiological factors While many of these factors can be influenced by the equipment manufacturer and building designer, there is no readily available method for measurement readability. A.18.9.4 The portions of this section relating to text features are based on Section 703.5 of the updated US ADA-ABA-AG Access Board accessibility guidelines published in 2004. A.18.9.4.2 Signs are more readable to the visually undermined when characters stand out from the background as much as possible. Additional factors that affect how easily text can be distinguished from its background include shadows cast by light sources, surface brightness, and uniformity of colors and textures of text and its background. Bar width-to-height ratios are an important part of character readability and are affected by contrast. The relationships between light characters on a dark background and dark characters on a light background differ because light characters or symbols tend to bleed or fade into the adjacent dark background. To compensate for these differences, it is recommended that the character width-to-height ratios for symbol strokes be as follows: (1) Positive image: dark characters on light background, ratio 1:6 to 1:8 (2) Image negative - clear characters dark background, ratio 1:8 to 1:10 Source: Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), Human Factors Awareness Course available at http://www. hf.faa.gov/webtraining/Intro/Intro1.htm. A.18.9.4.4 Capitalization of all characters in messages shall be avoided as this affects readability. Exceptions are one- or two-word instructions or captions, such as B. Stop, Go, or Exit Stair. A.18.9.4.7 Paragraph 18.9.4.7 and its associated table do not apply to text and graphics displayed on desktop computer monitors. The code does not list specific size requirements for desktop monitors. However, paragraph 18.9.3 requires them to be clear and legible at the specified viewing distance. Other requirements described in 18.9.4 such as contrast, sans serif fonts and others shall apply to desktop screens. The specific requirements in Table 18.9.4.7 are taken directly from Section 703.5 of the updated accessibility guidelines outlined in the US ADAABA-AG Access Board published in 2004. The table has been modified to be consistent with other sections of NFPA 72. A.18.9 .4.8 The minimum height for visible text and graphical notification devices is 40 inches. (1.02 m) above ground or finished floor. However, the character or symbol size should be based on the height of the tallest character or symbol displayed by the device. A.18.10.2 Are notification devices available for deaf people?

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

and hearing impaired. These devices include, but are not limited to, additional touch notification devices. These haptic notification devices can wake people up. Ringing devices can be activated in response to the activation of an audible smoke alarm, either through wired connections to the fire alarm system or through wireless methods. Some tests show that flashing lights may not be effective in waking certain people in an emergency. Some ringing devices can wake people up more effectively, regardless of their hearing level. A.18.11 Standard interface for emergency services. Detectors, information display systems, and controls for specific parts of a system intended for use by emergency medical personnel must be designed and arranged according to the needs of the organizations that will use the equipment. When detectors, information display systems, and controls for specific parts of the system are provided for use by emergency services, they should be of common design and function to avoid user confusion. A.21.2.1 The execution of the automatic emergency control functions is related to its normal operation. For example, it is okay to turn off power to the riser main feeder if the system is designed to do so. A.21.2.4 The interface devices for the emergency control function must not be far from the device to be triggered, eg. B. Ceiling mounted air handling units and exhaust fans. The requirement to monitor plant wiring integrity only applies to the wiring between the fire control panel and the interface device for emergency control functions. For example, it does not apply to wiring between the interface device for fire alarm control functions and a control relay for engine stop/start, or between the interface device for emergency control functions and the devices to be controlled. (eg air handling units and exhaust fans). . The location of the interface device for emergency control functions within 0.9 m (3 ft) is for the interface point and not for devices located in a remote location. A.21.3 The terms engine room, control room, engine room and control room are defined in NFPA 70, National Electrical Code and ANSI/ASME A17.a/CSA B44. A.21.3.2 In installations without a building alarm system, 21.3.2 requires fire alarm panels with a specific elevator call function to monitor the integrity of the call systems for elevators with primary and secondary power that meet the requirements of this Code. The fire alarm control unit used for this purpose must be located in a normally occupied area and must be equipped with audible and visual indicators to display the monitor (elevator recovery) and fault conditions; however, 21.3.2 does not require or provide for any general notice to Residents, or a

evacuation sign. A.21.3.5 Smoke detectors shall not be installed outdoors or in locations exposed to the weather (e.g., uncovered lift lobbies in open car parks) as such environments may exceed the detector's listing parameters and may trigger alarms. unwanted. (See 21.3.9.) A.21.3.7 This requirement applies to smoke and heat detectors installed in the pit. It is important to note that the well contains the well. The placement of smoke or heat detectors will likely require special consideration to provide the expected early detection response to an elevator shaft fire. These detectors may need to be tuned below the lowest recovery level to provide adequate response. As there is no actual ceiling in this location to allow installation within the space requirements of Chapter 17, the provisions of 17.7.3.1.3 and 17.4.10 that allow detectors to be placed closer together should be considered. in a position where the detector can intercept smoke or heat. See also point A.21.3.14.2(3). A.21.3.8 It should be noted that smoke detectors installed in pits can be a source of false activation. Therefore, smoke detectors intended for these types of rooms (environments) are needed in wells. A.21.3.9 The purpose of the Phase 1 emergency call is to automatically return the car to the call level before a fire can affect the safe operation of the car. This includes the safe mechanical operation of the elevator and the transfer of passengers to a safe location in the lobby. When ANSI/ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators requires the use of smoke detectors, these devices are expected to provide the quickest response to situations that may require emergency recovery actions. of phase I. The use of other automatic fire detection devices is only envisaged if smoke detection is not sufficient due to the environment. When environmental conditions prohibit the installation of smoke detectors, the selection and placement of other automatic fire detection devices should be evaluated to ensure the best response is achieved. When using heat detectors, the temperature and delay characteristics of the detector must be considered. Considering just a cryogenic certification might not be the first answer. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72- 258

A.21.3.14 It is recommended to install as shown in Figure A.21.3.14(a) and Figure A.21.3.14(b). Figure A.21.3.14(a) shall be applied when the elevator is installed at the same time as the building's fire detection system. Figure A.21.3.14(b) shall apply when the elevator is installed behind the building's fire detection system. A.21.3.14.2(3) When switching devices are located in the elevator shaft at or below the lowest recovery level, ANSI/ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, requires that the elevator is sent to the upper level recovery level. It should be noted that the lowest level of recall

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

to the machine room(s) of the elevator group via the fire alarm data collection point One fire alarm zone Two fire alarm zones

elevator cubes

72- 259

the temperature and delay time characteristics of the sprinkler and heat detector to ensure, as far as possible, that the heat detector operates before the sprinkler, as the lowest temperature certification alone may not provide a more reliable answer early. The declared nominal distance from the heat detector must be at least 7.6 m (25 ft).

Alarm data collection point

A.21.4.2 There may be a typical system delay in activating the power bypass trigger on activation of the heat detector used to de-energize the elevator. Typical Smoke Detector If such a delay is applied, it is recommended that it be approximately equal to the time required for the elevator car to travel from the top of the shaft to the lowest level called by the AI system controller. The purpose of delaying the fire alarm bypass device is to increase the likelihood that the elevators will complete their trip to the recovery level. It is important to note that the requirements set out in A17.1/FIGURE A.21.3.14(a) Elevator Zone – Elevators and B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, Simultaneously Installed Fire Alarm System will continue to apply. . . 72-02_fA-06-16-3-12(a).eps 20 x 13.6 with adequate sprinkler water supply and power failure. Hall

to the machine rooms of the elevator group through new automatic starting devices for the fire department elevator service

To existing collection points for fire alarm data

New smoke detector that is similar and replaces the existing detector, with additional auxiliary contacts. Existing data collection points for fire alarms

typical plant

lobby elevator shaft

Existing typical smoke detector to control existing fire alarm system

A new automatic starting device for elevator fire brigade

A.21.4.3 Precautions shall be taken to ensure that elevator operation is not interrupted due to a sudden increase in water pressure in the sprinkler system. The intent of the code is to ensure that the switch and the system as a whole cannot introduce a time delay in the sequence. The use of a switch with a timing mechanism set to zero is not within the intent of the Code as it is possible to introduce a time delay after the system has been accepted. This can be in response to nuisance alarms caused by surges or water movement rather than the underlying cause of the surges or water movement (usually due to air in the pipes). ). Permanently disabling the delay in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions should be considered acceptable. Systems with software that allows the introduction of a sequence delay must be programmed to require a security password to make such a change.

G72-31

A.21.4.4 Figure A.21.4.4 illustrates a method for monitoring the integrity of elevator maneuvering control performance.

A.21.5.1(2) The signals directed to the standardized emergency services interface that report the status of the lift(s), FIGURE A.21.3.14(b) Lift zone - lift installed72-02_fA-06 -16 -3 - 12(b).eps, including position within the pit, direction of travel, and whether it is behind the fire alarm system. if 20 x o20 are not occupied, the elevator management system should indicate this. it can be the 'designated level' or the 'alternate level' as determined by the local authority for the specific installation. It is also important to note that the elevator shaft as defined in ASME A.17.1 includes the elevator shaft. A.21.3.14.3 The ANSI/ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators requires a distinction between separate pits that share a common elevator machine room. For example, in a situation where there are more than one shaft sharing the same elevator machine room, a separate signal must be derived from each shaft. A.21.4.1 When determining the desired performance, consideration should be given to

A.21.6.2.1.1(2) The provisions of Clause 21.6 contemplate the use of manual means in place of damaged or inoperative automatic release devices that would otherwise have been activated to execute an automatic release. 2.1.1(2). Building-wide fire alarm trigger locations are not included as they are typically activated at locations remote from the fire scene and may result in erroneous information being transmitted about the fire scene.

G72-32

A.21.6.2.1.2 The fire detection system uses floor identification to automatically create a contiguous block of apartments to be evacuated in accordance with the provisions of

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 260

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Skip the travel train

fin

warm

Neutral

120 volt AC circuit

*Relay contacts are shown de-energized

(Authority to operate funds

maneuvers)

Supervised circuit for elevator fire alarm system.

Monitoring signal for fire alarm control panel

To trigger the circuit

R1 = relay 1 R2 = relay 2 EOL = end of line device

Closed for various security reasons. Although doors can be locked to prevent entry, they generally cannot be locked to restrict exit unless expressly permitted by applicable laws, rules and regulations. Examples of special locking means arrangements are delayed exit locking and controlled access locking. Closure requirements enacted by applicable laws, rules and regulations can vary widely. For example, some may require all fire alarm activation devices to immediately unlock electrically locked exit doors, while others may allow these doors to remain locked when a single fire alarm activation station is activated. Some codes may also allow the electric doors to remain locked when a single smoke alarm has been activated. These tolerances are normally only allowed in buildings equipped with sprinklers and are often used as additional safeguards against actions that violate the safeguards without compromising occupant safety. A.21.9.3 There may be a problem using batteries as a secondary power source if a fire panel with 24 hour standby power loses primary power and runs on the secondary power source (batteries) for more than 24 hours. There may be enough voltage to keep the doors locked, but not enough to operate the control panel and release the latches.

A.21.10 When a fire alarm evacuation signal is triggered, the exit indication system shall be triggered. In some cases, method 72FC07fA-06-16-4-4.eps x 25 for a typical trip signal can be sequenced to match the shunt trip supervisory plan. Fire protection of objects.

A.21.6.2.1.4 Messages should be coordinated with elevator operations so that occupants know what to expect and how to respond. The elevator management system provides additional visual information in each of the elevator lobbies to provide occupants with more information about the status of the elevators. A.21.6.2.1.4(C) This new message requires the lift management system to issue a signal which is transmitted to the fire detection system. A.21.7.2 See point A.21.7.3. A.21.7.3 This standard does not specifically require that sensing devices used to trigger the operation of HVAC fire and smoke doors, smoke control fan controls, and fire doors be connected to the fire detection system . A.21.9.1 Are doors normally locked in some way

G72-228 A.23.1.1 Fire detection systems and their components used for mass notification applications shall be covered by Chapter 23. A.23.2.1 Systems may be installed for safety of life, protection of property or both. Evacuation or relocation is not a required follow-up action for all installed Chapter 23 systems. A.23.2.2.1.1 Compatibility between software systems is required to ensure that the system can communicate correctly and that the system as a whole can work as expected. Unfortunately, compatible software may become incompatible when updated. Newer software modifications may not maintain compatibility with earlier modifications. This paragraph requires that fire detection system software or firmware that interacts with another system's software or firmware be compatible. An example might be a smoke control system receiving information from the fire alarm system. The term "required" indicates that this compliance requirement is for required functionality (eg, smoke control) and not for additional functionality that is not part of the required operation of the fire detection system. An example of a plug-in feature might be an RS-232 port that connects to a terminal emulator program used for maintenance purposes. The term "functionality" is intended to ensure that intended functionality is maintained

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

21.6.2.1.2(B). The established skyscraper will update to reflect changes in conditions indicated by the exit signs. This information is sent to the elevator system and is also used to notify occupants. The output signals from the fire detection system can be in the form of contact closure or serial communication. Coordination is required between the fire alarm system installer and the elevator system installer.

APPENDIX A to the Software. This avoids a situation where a software patch change is still supported, but changes the available functionality such that the two systems no longer perform their intended functions, even though the software communicates correctly. A.23.2.2.1.2 System compatibility shall be documented in one or the other (or both) of the manufacturer's installation documents for compatible products and controlled by approval bodies. This documentation is mentioned in the marking attached to the product. Documentation can be on paper or electronically (diskette, website, etc.). When making changes to a software patch, you can consult the documentation to ensure it's still compatible with the software or firmware on the other side of the interface. A.23.2.2.2 A commonly used method of protecting against unauthorized changes can be described as follows (in increasing access levels): (1) Access Level 1. Access by persons who have overall responsibility for surveillance security, who can investigate and provide a first response to a fire alarm or jamming. (2) Access Level 2. Access by persons with special responsibility for safety and trained in the operation of the control unit. (3) Access Level 3. Access by trained and authorized persons to: (a) reconfigure site-specific data stored or controlled by the Control Unit (b) maintain the Control Unit in accordance with published data and manufacturer's instructions ( 4) Access level 4. Access by trained and authorized persons to repair the control unit or change site-specific data or operating system program by changing its basic operation --`,,`,``,` `` `` , `` ` ,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.23.3.2 Non-required fire detection properties are defined in 3.3.171. These are fire detection systems or components that are not required by fire or building codes and are voluntarily installed by the building owner to meet site-specific fire safety objectives. The system and unnecessary components must be properly registered. Non-required components must be operationally compatible with other required components and must not affect overall system performance. For this reason, 23.3.2.1 requires non-mandatory (voluntary) systems and components to comply with the applicable installation, testing and maintenance requirements of this Code. The Code is not intended to result in the installation of non-essential (optional) systems or components that create a requirement to install additional fire detection components or functions in the building. For example, if a building owner voluntarily installs a fire alarm controller to transmit sprinkler water flow signals to the central station, this does not require the installation of other fire alarm system components or functions, such as: B • Trigger stations for fire alarm, resident notification, or electronic monitoring of sprinkler control valves. See also A.17.5.3.3 and A.18.1.5. Alternatively, the requirements

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 261

Monitoring and power supply for components/systems not required in required fire detection systems. A.23.3.3.1 The following resources are included in Appendix A to provide guidance on the use of building systems and equipment in addition to facility fire detection systems to ensure life and safety. Building functions that must be initiated or controlled during a fire alarm condition include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) Elevator operation in accordance with ANSI/ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (2) Unlocking Stairs and Exit Doors (see NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Openings and NFPA 101, Life Safety Code) (3) Clearing Fire and Smoke Arresters (see NFPA 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and NFPA 90B, Standard for Installation of Heated Air and Air Conditioning Systems) (4) Low, Medium, and High Expansion Foam Extinguishing Systems; NFPA 12, Standard for Fire Extinguishing Systems). carbon dioxide; NFPA 12A, Standard for Halon 1301 Fire Protection Systems; NFPA 13, Standard for Installation of Fire Sprinkler Systems; NFPA 14, Standard for Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; NFPA 15, Standard for Fixed Water Mist Systems for Fire Protection; NFPA 17, Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems; NFPA 17A, Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems; and NFPA 750, Water Mist Fire Protection Systems Standard) A.23.3.3.2 Examples of specially designed fire detection systems would be an elevator call controller and a supervisory control unit as described in 21.3.2 , or a system used specifically to monitor the sprinkler . Monitoring functions and water flow. A.23.4.2.2 The intent of this paragraph is to avoid situations where the signal line circuit for a device must be of one class of service, while power circuits, which use the same channels and are exposed to the same threats, are connected to a lower class of service. This means that the power wiring may be connected to a device that is of a different class than the signal wiring circuits or trigger devices. An example where meeting the same minimum performance requirements would still allow for different classes of cabling is when the performance requirements are based on distance or the number of devices connected to the cables. For example, if the signal wire loop powers 200 devices and the performance requirement is that no more than 10 devices are lost due to incorrect wiring, then the wiring class in the signal wire loop would be Class A with isolators that protect against short circuits. If the power cords never power more than 10 devices, the power cords may be connected as Class B. Paragraph A.23.6 was removed by an Interim Amendment (TIA). see page 1

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 262

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.23.6.1 This is to clarify that this requirement only applies to SLCs connected to addressable equipment and not to SLCs connected to Fire Alarm Control Units (FACUs). There have been fire incidents where there were significant losses due to the short circuit and failure of a fire damaged SLC prior to alarm activation. In addition, an inadvertent short circuit of an SLC during work and construction activities can cause catastrophic failure of the fire safety and life protection system if a fire occurs after starting. A single short to an SLC of a system described in NFPA 72 2013 and fully compliant with the specified codes can do more than disable the system's ability to activate an alarm. In addition, alarm notification devices and emergency control functions critical to life safety, including atrium smoke control, stairwell pressurization, door unlocking, and HVAC system shutdown, can also be disabled. In some configurations, the monitor's external alarm, fault, and notification functions can even be disabled. In the event of a short circuit in an SLC, the consequences in terms of loss of life and property can be catastrophic if a fire occurs. A.23.8.1.1 Activation of an initiating device is usually the time when a full digital signal is obtained from the device, eg. B. a contact closure. For smoke detectors or other self-triggering devices, which may include signal processing and analysis to identify fire phenomena, activation refers to when the fire panel device or software meets the signal analysis requirements. A stand-alone fire alarm control unit comprises a network of fire alarm control units forming a single, larger system as defined in Section 23.8. For some analog triggering devices, triggering is the time when the fire control panel interprets the signal from a triggering device as exceeding the alarm limit programmed into the control panel. For smoke detectors operating in an alarm verification system, where the verification function is performed in the alarm control panel, the activation time of smoke detectors is sometimes determined by the fire alarm control panel. It is not the intention of this paragraph to specify the period within which local fire protection devices must perform their function, e.g. B. the time to turn off a fan, close doors, or travel time for an elevator. A.23.8.1.2 A system equipped with an alarm verification function as permitted in 6.8.5.4.1 is not considered a pre-signalling system because the delay in the generated signal is 60 seconds or less and does not require human intervention. A.23.8.1.3.1.1(6) "Activated immediately" means nothing other than appropriate systemic delays

for signal processing in accordance with the provisions of point 23.8.1.1. A.23.8.1.3.1.2 Bypass devices shall allow automatic or manual operation day, night and weekends. A.23.8.2 This code applies to field installations that interconnect two or more certified control units, possibly from different manufacturers, that together meet the requirements specified in this document. Such an arrangement must preserve the reliability, sufficiency and integrity of all alarm, monitoring and fault signals and interconnected circuits necessary to comply with the provisions of this Code. In cases where the connected control units are located in separate buildings, consideration must be given to protecting the connecting cables from electrical or radio frequency interference. A.23.8.4.1 The provisions of 23.8.4.1 apply to types of equipment commonly used for fire alarm systems, such as B. fire alarm services, sprinkler monitoring or patrols, and to other similar systems. and circuit wiring methods common to both types of systems. The purpose of connecting fire suppression systems to the fire alarm system is generally that the fire suppression systems respond properly upon receiving the signal from the fire alarm system. A.23.8.4.3 For systems such as carbon monoxide detection, electronic fire extinguisher displays, emergency communications (mass notification) or intrusion detection, much of the benefit of a combined system comes from the ability to use common wiring. If the combined system equipment is of equivalent quality to the fire alarm equipment and the system controls the wiring and equipment in the same way as the fire alarm equipment, sharing of wiring is permitted. If the equipment is not of the same quality, isolation between systems is required. A.23.8.4.6 Examples of signal classification are given in Table A.23.8.4.6. It is not fully contained or prescriptive, but is intended to illustrate a possible classification scheme. Actual timelines may vary based on response plan and/or regulatory requirements. Mass notification systems can take precedence over the audible notification tone or fire alarm message. The goal is to allow the mass notification system to prioritize emergency signals based on risk to building occupants. The designer must specify the desired operation, particularly in terms of what should happen immediately after the bulk notification message completes. A.23.8.4.8 For more information, see NFPA 720, Standard for Installing Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning Equipment. A.23.8.4.8.2 Responses to carbon monoxide alarm signals may include, but are not limited to: immediate evacuation of occupants,

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX A Table A.23.8.4.6 Signal Classification Examples|

fire alarm signs

Security sign for property protection

Carbon Monoxide Warning Sign Extreme Medical Emergency Sign (Code Blue)

human security

of failure

Transients It's not your job to compensate for design flaws or lack of maintenance. other

battery failure

air conditioning sign

surveillance signs

energy failure

Profession

access control

Initialization Device Circuit (IDC) error.

alarm

Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC)-Fehler

Hazardous materials signs

Signal line circuit (SLC) error.

Severe weather warnings Flood warnings Bulk warning signs

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Call the fire department or other authorities responsible for emergency response, move occupants to another area of the building, investigate the identified area, and/or open all doors and windows to the outside of the identified area. A.23.8.4.9 See NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers for more information on portable fire extinguishers. A.23.8.5.1.2 The manual means prescribed in 23.8.5.1.2 are intended to serve as a backup means for activating the fire alarm system manually when the automatic fire detection system or water flow devices are out of service for maintenance or testing reasons, or when human detection of fire occurs prior to activation of sprinkler systems or automatic detection systems. The manual fire alarm station required in 23.8.5.1.2 shall be connected to a separate circuit that is not "under test" when the detection or sprinkler system is "under test". The manual configuration is for the sole use of the system engineer or building owner and must be located adjacent to the base of the sprinkler or fire alarm control unit. A.23.8.5.3.2 When separate power is supplied to individual tripping devices, a single power supply monitoring device is not prohibited from monitoring the integrity of multiple tripping circuits. A.23.8.5.4.1 The alarm verification function must not be used as a substitute for proper detector applications/locations or regular system maintenance. Alarm verification functions attempt to reduce the frequency of false alarms caused by alarm conditions.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 263

A.23.8.5.4.6.3 When providing a separate power supply for a duct smoke detector, consideration should be given to providing a secondary power supply for the duct detector power supply, as a failure of Feeding power to the duct detector (or should) result in a fire control panel fail to call condition. If the system is connected to an external monitoring station, a trouble signal will be sent immediately in the event of a power failure. This is in contrast to the intent and requirements for external delayed notification of primary power failures. A.23.8.5.5 This Code does not specifically require that a device to activate a water flow alarm be connected to the building's fire detection system. The connection to the building's fire alarm system shall be determined by the requirements established by the competent authority. See point A.1.2.4. A.23.8.5.5.2 Circuits connected to a signal line circuit interface are initiating device circuits and are subject to these restrictions. A.23.8.5.6 This Code does not specifically require triggering devices for supervisory signals to be connected to the building's fire detection system. Connections to the building's fire alarm system must be made in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority. See point A.1.2.4. Some systems use non-electrical methods to monitor system conditions, such as B. Currents in sprinkler control valves. Monitoring signals are not intended to provide any indication of design, installation or functional defects of monitored systems or system components and are not a substitute for periodic testing of such systems in accordance with the applicable standard. Conditions monitored shall include, but are not limited to: (1) 1½ inches. (38.1 mm) or greater (2) Pressure, including dry pipe system air, pressure vessel air, preaction system monitor air, deluge steam, and service water (3) Water from tanks sump, including water level and temperature (4) Building temperature, including areas such as valve cabinets and fire pump houses (5) Electric fire pumps, including their operation (alarm or monitor), power failure, and reversal of phase (6) Engine-driven fire pumps, including operation (alarm or monitor), failing start, control not in "Auto" and faults (eg low oil level, high temperature, overspeed) (7) Pumps steam turbine fire hazards, including operation (alarm or monitoring), steam pressure and steam control valves A. 23.8.5.6. 2 Circuits connected to an interface signal line circuit are initiating equipment circuits and are subject to these limitations. s.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 264

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.23.8.5.8 See point A.23.8.5.6. A.23.8.6.2 The general purpose of audible and visual fire alarm devices is to alert occupants to the existence of a fire condition and to evacuate the building. Once residents are in exit areas, the high levels of noise and light from notification appliances can create confusion and prevent exit. Conditions may exist that justify the installation of notification devices in exit corridors, but careful consideration is needed to not impede exit from the building. A.23.10.2 One or more of the following means may be considered acceptable to provide a level of survivability consistent with the intent of this requirement: (1) Install a building fire detection system with full sprinklers in accordance with A.23.10.2 NFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems (2) Separate Routing of Detection Device Circuits (3) Use of Short-Circuit-Proof Signal Wiring Circuits to Control Evacuation Detection Signals The Requirement that detection devices must function in non-fire evacuation signal zones also requires that circuits and equipment that carry more than normal into an evacuation signal zone be designed and installed so that they are not disabled by fire. fire. For example, a signal line circuit used to control notification devices in various signal areas must be properly designed and installed so that a fire will not affect the signal line circuit and render the notification devices inoperative. The power supply requirements described in Chapter 10 apply to these systems. The secondary power supply requirements set forth in this chapter meet the intent of these survivability requirements. A.23.11.7 Automatic fire suppression systems referred to in 23.11.7 include, but are not limited to, deluge and preaction sprinkler systems, carbon dioxide systems, halon systems, and chemical systems. A.23.12.4 External logging of fire alarm data can be useful to preserve information in the event of fire or building damage to allow accurate reconstruction of the event. It can also be beneficial to send data externally to first responders to improve situational awareness and response decisions to keep operations safe and efficient. A.23.16 The term wireless has been replaced by the term low power radio to avoid possible confusion with other transmission media such as fiber optic cables. Low power radios must meet the applicable low power requirements of Title 17, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 15.

A.23.16.1 Appliances listed for residential use only would not meet this requirement. A.23.16.3.1 It is not the intent of this requirement to preclude local verification and test intervals prior to alarm transmission. A.23.16.3.5 The fault and supervisory signals need not be closely related. Error heartbeats and self-restoration are acceptable. A.24.1.2 An emergency communication system can target the general building, an area, a room, a campus or a region. A.24.3.1 In certain situations, it is important to provide a distributed sound level with minimal variations in sound intensity to obtain an intelligible voice message. This differs from previous fire alarm design practices, which used fewer notification devices, but each had higher output sound pressure levels. The design practice of non-emergency systems is to use more speakers and less volume from each speaker. In addition to improving message intelligibility, this approach minimizes system disruption to building occupants and reduces the likelihood that occupants will tamper with the system due to excessive speaker volume. For other applications, such as B. Outdoor Signage, where glare is not an issue, intelligibility can be achieved using fewer devices or groups of devices covering larger areas. Intelligibility is a complex function of the audio source, the acoustic response of nearby architectural features and materials, and the dynamics created by the occupants of the space. See Appendix D for more information on speech intelligibility and how it is predicted. Spacing speakers over short distances can be a technique to improve intelligibility, but can sometimes give mixed results if not designed correctly. There are several techniques that use polar patterns that don't use speakers too close together, but take advantage of the acoustic response of the room/room. Depending on a detailed risk analysis and emergency plan, certain pre-recorded voice messages or live mass notifications may take precedence over fire alarm messages and signals. If the fire alarm system is in alarm mode when the recorded voice message or sound signals are sounding and the mass notification system is activated with a higher priority signal, you must temporarily disable all fire alarms through the fire alarm for the period of time necessary to transmit the emergency mass notification message. A.24.3.2.1 Users who speak too softly, too loudly or hold the microphone too close, too far or at the wrong angle may distort the spoken message or result in reduced intelligibility. The properties of the system's microphones are important ergonomic factors that affect speech intelligibility. Some microphones need to be held close to the mouth, perhaps an inch or less. others must be

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX Three or four inches away. How does the user know which one is ideal? A simple diagram next to the microphone can help. Some microphones are very directional and should be held horizontally, facing the speaker's mouth. These microphones are useful in small command centers where the wings are less likely to pick up conversations. On the other hand, microphones with higher pole sensitivity are more forgiving for the user to be comfortable while traveling and doing other tasks. The downside is that in poorly designed command centers they pick up extraneous noise which is transmitted to the microphone. A.24.3.3 The requirements established in NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 708 for emergency communication systems located in critical infrastructure facilities classified as Critical Designated Operating Area (DCOA) shall be considered. This includes facilities that, if destroyed or disabled, would affect national security, the economy, public health or safety and where optimization of electrical infrastructure for business continuity has been considered. A.24.3.4 The system designer shall determine the characteristics of non-essential systems based on the system owner's anticipated goals and objectives. A.24.3.5.2 Dedicated voice/alarm communication systems for building fire emergencies are not required to monitor the integrity of detector circuits while they are active for emergency purposes. However, the integrity of such circuits must be monitored while they are active for non-emergency purposes. The building operator, the system designer and the responsible authority must be aware that, in some situations, this system can be deliberately tampered with. Tampers are generally intended to reduce the performance of a sound system that is used constantly, for example. a functioning music system or a pager, and this can be a source of annoyance for employees. The likelihood of tampering can be reduced by paying due attention to speaker accessibility and system performance.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Access can be restricted through the use of hidden or non-adjustable transformer taps (which can reduce playback levels), use of vandal-resistant speakers, and placement in hard-to-reach areas such as high ceilings (any low ceiling). . . higher than you could reach while standing on a table or chair). When operating systems outside of an emergency, it should always be borne in mind that an audio system that disturbs an employee can potentially reduce employee productivity and can also be disruptive to the public in a business environment. Most reasons for tampering can be eliminated through proper use of the system and employee discipline. Access to amplification devices and controls must be restricted to persons authorized to make adjustments to such devices. It is common to install such devices to allow adjustment of audio signal levels that are not needed for emergencies, while returning to a fixed playback level.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 265

previously configured when the operation is in emergency mode. In extreme circumstances, certain zones within a protected area may require a dedicated zone for emergency fire/building alarm communications. A.24.3.6.3 This section is not intended to preclude a performance-based path survivability approach. As with most performance-based approaches, documentation should be provided by the designer and maintained with the system documentation for its lifetime. Written documentation of approval from the competent authority must also be maintained. A performance-based approach to transmission path survivability may be equivalent, less stringent or more stringent than the approach prescribed in 24.3.6. A performance-based approach is usually derived from a risk analysis. This section is also intended to exclude no less stringent road survivability requirements, supported by a risk analysis, for ad hoc uses that use emergency alarm/voice communication systems for relocation or partial evacuation as part of their contingency plan that facilitates evacuation through a could replace total evacuation and where the buildings are not Type I or Type II (222) where the road survivability requirement need not be two hours. Examples include low occupancy in childcare and daycare centers, intermediate care homes, outpatient medical care, hotel and residential home occupancy, and nursing home occupancy. A.24.3.6.8.1 Extensive research and discussions with cable manufacturers have not found a source of listed coaxial or fiber cables with a 2 hour certification. 75 ohm flame retardant coaxial cables are available for security cameras but are not suitable for distributed antenna systems operating at much higher radio frequencies. Coaxial cable with characteristics similar to 50 ohms, ½ inch. (13 mm) low-loss diameter are available in both plenum and bolt-on certifications. In previous installations, prior to the provisions of this code, these certified coaxial cables were used for plenums and risers. The fiber component of fiber optic cables melts at temperatures well below the test specification of 1825°F (996°C) for 2 hour certification cables. The use of 2-hour certified cable jackets on all floors of most structures is impractical, especially when added to existing structures. A.24.3.6.8.3 Examples of bays with 2 hour certifications could be stairs and lifts for lifeguard use. A.24.3.6.9 Although, in some cases, safe (rescue) areas may be established in buildings where a general evacuation is taking place, rather than relocation/partial evacuation, it remains essential that those awaiting assistance contact first responders .

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 266

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.24.3.7 One-way emergency communication systems are intended to communicate information to persons located at a designated indoor or outdoor location or locations in the event of an emergency. Emergency notifications are expected to be communicated via audible or visual text, or both. This section does not apply to bells, horns or other sirens or lights, except when used in connection with the intended operation of distress signals and messages. Two-way emergency communication systems fall into two categories, systems likely to be used by building occupants and systems intended for use by firefighters, police, and other service personnel. Two-way emergency communication systems are used for both the exchange of information and the transmission of information such as but not limited to addresses, message recognition, local environmental and human conditions, and to ensure that help arrives. The NFPA 72 code contains requirements that may affect the application of emergency communication systems. For example, coordinating the functions of an emergency communication system with other systems that transmit audible and/or visual messages [such as fire detection systems, security systems, public announcement (PA) systems] is essential to provide effective in an emergency situation. Conflicting or conflicting signals or messages from different systems can be very confusing for occupants and negatively affect the expected occupant response. Where there are autonomous systems with audible and/or visual notification, the emergency communication system will connect to these systems to carry out associated control measures, eg B. disable audible and audible notification devices.

as visible. The use of a single integrated combined system can offer economic and technical advantages. In all cases, coordination between the functions of the systems is essential. Coordination of emergency communication systems with other systems should be considered as part of the risk analysis for the emergency communication system. (See Figure A.24.3.7.) Additional documents, such as NEMA SB 40, School Life Safety Communication Systems, can also be used as supplemental resources to assist with risk assessment and compliance considerations. A.24.3.8 Layers may be used in combination. In all cases, the system design must comply with the risk analysis and be integrated into the emergency plan. Research has shown that more than one level was used to be effective. Multiple levels provide an additional layer of notification (a safety net). The overall application of the MNS system will likely use multiple public and individual systems or components that combine to provide a robust and reliable solution to achieve emergency notification objectives. Level 1 may consist of items such as: (1) Emergency Alarm/Voice Communication Systems (EVACS) (2) One-Way Voice Communication (PA) Systems (3) Two-Way Voice Communication Systems (4) Devices System visible notification systems ( 5 ) Digital Text/Layer 2 signage/displays can consist of items such as: (1) Mass Notification Systems (MNS) for Large Outdoor Area (2) High Power Loudspeaker Arrays (HPSA) . Layer 3 can consist of elements such as: (1) Short Message Service (SMS) (2) Email (3) Pop-up windows on computers (4) Smartphone applications (apps)

Emergency Communication Systems (ECS) Chapter 24

Unidirectional ECS Section 24.4

Bidirectional ECS in Buildings Section 24.5

Fire in building EVACS 24.4.1

Wired ECS for two-way emergency services 24.5.1

MNS in buildings 24.4.2

Two-Way Radio Expansion Systems 24.5.2

Large Area MNS 24.4.3 Distributed Receiver MNS 24.4.4

Interfaz combined systems with MNS Public address systems used for MNS

Command and Control Information Section 24.6

Performance Based Design Section 24.7

ECS for escape areas 24.5.3 ECS for lifts 24.5.4

FIGURE A.24.3.7 Emergency communication systems.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

facilitate your evacuation. Therefore, your evacuation time can be extended and therefore emergency communication systems must work reliably during a fire event.

APPENDIX A (5) The Reverse Auto-Dial Layer 4 Public Safety Communications System may consist of such items as: (1) Broadcast systems (satellite, AM/FM) (2) Television broadcast systems (satellite, digital ) (3) Location -specific messages/notifications (4) Weather (5) Social media

Certainly

See also the research project Optimizing Fire Alarm Notifications for Risk Groups. A.24.3.9 Design documents may include, but are not limited to, fabrication drawings, input/output matrix, battery calculation, notification device voltage drop calculation for flashes and speakers, and product specifications. A.24.3.11 There are a number of plausible risk assessment methods that can be used and/or consulted to carry out the risk assessment required in 3.24.11, some of which are listed below:

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(1) CARVER – Vulnerability Assessment and Target Analysis Methodology, Washington, DC: US-Verteidigungsministerium (see Field Manual 34-36, Special Operations Forces Intelligence and Electronic Warfare Operations), December 30, 1991), www.defense.gov (2) Allgemeine Richtlinien zur Bewertung von Sicherheitsrisiken. Alexandria, VA: American Society for International Industrial Safety, www.asisonline.org (3) NFPA 1600, Disaster/Emergency Management and Business Continuity Programs, Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, www.nfpa.org (4 ) NFPA 730 , Guide to the Physical Security of Facilities, Quincy, MA: National Fire Protection Association, www.nfpa.org (5) Code of Responsible Care, Washington, DC: American Chemical Council, www. americanchemistry.com (6) Risk Management and Resilience of Water and Sewage Systems, Denver, CO: American Water Works Association, www.awwa.org (7) VAMCAP® Vulnerability Assessment Methodology for Protecting Critical Assets, Wilmington, DE: SafePlace Corporation, www.safeplace.com (8) Vulnerability Assessment Methodologies, Albuquerque, NM: Sandia National Laboratories, www.sandia.gov Siehe A.7.8.2 and Abbildung A.7.8.2(g) für eine Checklist of Risikoanalyse.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 267

A.24.3.11.1 While this chapter describes some specific criteria and/or limitations, each application should be based on accepted performance-based design practices and the contingency plan developed for the specific installation. These are general categories of questions that can be asked of the primary manager responsible for mass notification decisions. The actual questions for each project should be tailored to the user's area, building, campus, and organization culture. The following is a brief description of the potential content of questions on mass notification incidents: (1) What is the nature of an emergency incident, ie. h Is it a fire, safety, health, environmental incident, geological meteorological event, utility disruption or some other event? (2) What is the urgency of the emergency, ie. h Is it an immediate threat, has it happened before, is it expected soon, is it likely to happen in the future, or is it unknown when it will happen? will this happen? (3) What is the expected or anticipated severity of the emergency, ie how will it affect our facility and its functions, is it likely to be extreme, severe, etc.? (4) What is the certainty of the emergency, i.e. it happens now, it is very likely to happen, it is likely to happen, it could happen in the future, it is unlikely or it is not known when it will happen? (5) What is the location of the incident or from what direction is the emergency approaching, i.e. has it approached or will it approach from the north, south, east or west? (6) Which zones should receive the emergency message(s), i.e. one floor of a building, multiple floors of a building, entire building, multiple buildings, a campus of buildings, an entire city, a state entire region, an entire region of states, or an entire country? (7) What is the relevance of the emergency, ie, has the emergency been investigated and/or confirmed? (8) What instructions should we give our personnel, ie, should they evacuate the premises, should they protect themselves on site, should they stay in a special location, should they go to a safe haven area and other related issues? implement measures? (9) Are there special instructions, procedures or tasks that we must remember or perform for our employees, for example, B. Close your office door, open your office door, stay away from windows, do not use elevators, etc., other information related to team actions? The questions suggested in items (1) through (9) have been included for your consideration and may not all be appropriate for all mass reporting system installations. It is important to remember that when an emergency occurs, the response must be immediate and thoughtful. So there is no time for indecision. Thus, the questions selected to be included in the decision tree for sending emergency messages presented in points (1) to (9) must be direct and as simple as possible. They must also be adapted to the organization, culture, location and specific needs of each local environment.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 268

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.24.3.12 The emergency plan shall include, among others, the following elements: (1) Emergency response team structure (2) Emergency response procedures applicable to: (a) Emergencies involving building systems ( b) People-related emergencies (c) Terrorist-related emergencies (d) Weather-related emergencies (3) Emergency response and response teams (4) Response notification including: (a) Message content (b) Process approval notification process (c) Initiating the emergency notification process (5) Emergency training and exercises, including: (a) Face-to-face training (b) Training through hands-on simulation exercises (c) Live simulations A.24.4 .1.1 The basic structure of live messages is essential to provide understandable information and instructions. Recorded messages created in a controlled environment are much more understandable than live messages and must be developed and delivered to address the most likely emergencies a given facility will face. Voice instructions (live or pre-recorded) should be preceded by a tone to engage and prepare the target audience. This tone should be differentiated for specific emergencies based on the standards of those facilities. The actual voice message (live or recorded) must be delivered in a well-spoken, clear, calm and deliberate manner, using respectful language. Focus the message on actions to be taken and minimize the use of unnecessary words about the cause. Regarding the voice itself, the best results vary according to the location; for example, in outdoor applications, a male voice has been shown to provide better intelligibility, as the natural lower frequency of the male voice is better conveyed. On the other hand, in an indoor application, when background ambient noise is usually in the same lower frequencies, a female voice is more diffused because it is more distinguishable from ambient noise. Messages should consist of rapid, continuous bursts of information 2-3 seconds in length and brief periods of silence between bursts of information. This methodology facilitates the best possible information processing by the brain and minimizes the negative effects of reverberation and echo. In general, the emergency message should consist of a 1-3 second alert tone followed by a voice message repeated at least three times. The warning tone can be used between repetitions of the voice message. With live teaching, it is important that the message is conveyed clearly and calmly. If possible, the following approach is recommended: (1) Decide what information to convey in the live ad, keep it short and write the message (2) For a practice run, read the message aloud clearly and with correct voice modulation ( 3 ) When ready to announce the message, press and hold

microphone and read the message at least three times. (4) Use a warning sound whenever possible, e.g. For example, use a 1000 Hz Code 3 signal to drive the message and announce it into the microphone during live broadcasts. (5) Repeat the message a few more times depending on the emergency. A.24.4.1.2 A well-crafted, evidence-based message (stimulating response) with content that includes: (1) What: guidelines on what people should do (2) When: ideas on when action is needed (3 ) Where: Description of the location of the hazard (who should act and who should not) (4) Why: Information about the risk and danger/consequences (5) Who: Name of the source of the warning (who issues it) ) The style of the Warning it is also crucial and must be specific, coherent, truthful, clear and concise, taking into account the frequency: the more frequent, the better. A.24.4.2 If used, recorded voice messages for fire alarm systems shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of this Code by persons qualified to operate fire alarm systems in buildings and with knowledge of building design. Fire safety design and plan, including evacuation procedures. Proposed voice messages must be approved by the competent authority prior to implementation. Persons recording messages for fire alarm systems must be able to read and speak the language used for the message clearly and concisely, without any accents that could affect intelligibility. The building alarm/fire emergency communication service is not intended to be limited to English speaking populations. Emergency announcements must be in the language of the majority of the building's population. Whenever there is a possibility that there are isolated groups of people who do not speak the dominant language, multilingual communications should be issued. Small groups of people who are temporary and who do not understand the prevailing language must interfere with the flow of traffic in an emergency and are unlikely to remain isolated. A.24.4.2.2.2.2 In general terms, in a standard building configuration with normal headroom [8 ft to 12 ft (2.4 m to 3.7 m)], normal ceiling construction (e.g. ceiling panels suspended acoustic), standard wall configurations, carpeted surfaces and floors, ceiling-mounted speakers should be installed in all rooms that can normally be occupied and in corridors at a maximum distance of twice the height of the ceiling or otherwise Determine a commercially available computer/speaker acoustic model program. When using built-in speakers, the manufacturer's recommendations should be modified and/or computer models used. One of the goals in loudspeaker placement is to have the shortest possible distance from the source (speakers) to the receiver (person listening to the signal). In many applications, a combination of wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted speakers may be required. audibility

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

In an ADS, which is an acoustically undemanding environment, designing for audibility will generally result in a comprehensible system, provided the minimum speaker guidelines are met. Areas generally considered acoustically safe include traditional office environments, hotel rooms, residential units, and carpeted and furnished spaces. Special attention should be paid to ADSs, which present an acoustic challenge. These areas can include essentially hard surfaces (eg glass, marble, tile, metal, etc.) or significantly high ceilings (eg atriums, multiple ceiling heights). Such conditions call for stricter design guidelines to ensure intelligibility (for example, the spacing between speakers is smaller than normal, with lower ringtones). This can help reduce the effect of excessive reverberation and lead to better intelligibility. In extreme cases, there may be areas where intelligibility cannot be achieved, although this may be acceptable if an ADS is within 30 feet (9.1 m) of where system intelligibility is considered adequate. For ADS where the ambient noise level exceeds 85 dB, it is recognized that intelligibility may not be achieved and an alternative means of notification is required. Design guidance is described in NEMA Standard Publication SB 50-2008, Guide to Applications of Audio intelligibility for Emergency Communications. A.24.4.2.4.2 This low-pitched tone is intended for people with mild to severe hearing loss. See also points 18.4.5, A.18.4.5.1 and A.29.3.8.2. The effective date mentioned in 18 for low frequency signal use was not allowed in 24.4.2.4 as voice systems can be easily adapted, also applying the requirements of 18.4.5, applicable to the device independent sound signaling. . A.24.4.2.4.3 Sleeping facilities are provided in uses such as health, detention and penitentiary facilities, and others where it is not necessary to use low frequency sound to awaken sleepers. For example, in a hospital, voice messages are used to inform staff that you are awake. Staff will then refer to the appropriate department within the hospital to carry out their tasks, which may include awakening and repositioning patients who may be at risk. In addition, regular fire drills are required, and low-frequency sound emission can unnecessarily awaken patients, negatively affecting their care. A.24.4.2.5.1 When selecting the building site(s) for voice alarm control/emergency fire communication devices, the ability of the fire alarm system to operate and function during a single event likely. Although NPFA code 72 does not regulate construction

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

or building contents, system designers must consider the possibility of an event that could damage equipment, including remote control equipment, to disable the system or any part of the system. Wherever possible, it is recommended that unnecessary fires from fire detection systems be minimized by using certified fire resistant buildings or enclosures, limiting nearby combustibles and ignition sources, or using other appropriate means. A.24.4.2.6.1 Loudspeakers located close to fire alarm/voice communication control equipment shall be located so that they do not cause audio feedback when the system microphone is used. Loudspeakers installed in the intercom area must be positioned so that the sound pressure level emitted does not impede effective use of the intercom. Speaker and telephone circuits must be separate, shielded, or otherwise located to prevent audio crosstalk between circuits. A.24.4.2.7.1 Specific suppression systems that operate through the application of total or localized flooding include, but are not limited to, carbon dioxide, detergents, halons and other extinguishing agents. Special suppression systems require visual and audible warning signals to give personnel the opportunity to evacuate or warn personnel not to enter the unloading area, which could be life-threatening. Discharge from a special suppression system can be fatal to personnel who are not notified and therefore do not respond to the pre-discharge alarm. In these cases, the pre-discharge and discharge alarms must be independent of the fire alarm system loudspeakers used as part of the mass notification system. A discharge from a dedicated suppression system could pose a greater threat to personnel in the protected area or to individuals who might enter the protected area if local signs need to be circumvented and they have not been properly warned. A.24.4.2.8 In the event of a fire or other emergency in a building, the aim is normally to evacuate or relocate occupants so that they are not exposed to hazardous conditions. The exception applies to occupations that use stay-in-place/advocacy-in-place (SIP/DIP) strategies [1]. It may also be necessary to alert and provide information to trained personnel responsible for assisting with the evacuation or resettlement. Figure A.24.4.2.8 shows several important steps in a person's reaction and decision-making process [2]. Residents rarely panic in fire situations [3, 4]. The behavior they adopt is based on the information they receive, the perceived threat and the decisions they make. The entire decision-making process is filled with thoughts and decisions on the part of the occupant, which take time before resulting in the development of adaptive behavior. In hindsight, the actions of many occupants in real fires are sometimes suboptimal. However, their decisions may have been the best choices given the information they had. Fire alarm systems that use only audible tones and/or flashes reveal only part of the information: fire alarm. while long

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

and speaker intelligibility can be affected by the socket/configuration the speaker is connected to and must meet code audibility requirements while maintaining message intelligibility. Connecting to a high setting to meet code audibility requirements can distort signal intelligibility.

72- 269

claim certificate

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

time to gather information

Perceived Alert Detection Time Looking for additional information?

Decision to evacuate or relocate

Evacuation behavior (escape route)

Response time for evacuation Decision time for response Selection of type of evacuation

FIGURE A.24.4.2.8 Key steps in a person's response. It has long been known that environments with complex or potentially high-risk exit situations require occupant detection systems that provide more than just part of the information [5]. To reduce the occupant's reaction time and achieve the desired behavior, the message must contain several key elements [3, 6]. Key elements include: (1) Informing prisoners of what happened and where. (2) Tell prisoners what to do. (3) Inform residents why they should do this. In that sense, there doesn't seem to be any research that has tested actual message content to determine how best to inform inmates. The problem is that every building and every fire is unique. The transmission of messages is further complicated by the need to provide different information to different people, depending on their location in relation to the fire, their training, and their physical and mental capabilities. Messages should use positive language and avoid negative addresses that could be misinterpreted due to incomprehensible communications. For example, if you want people to vacate an area, say the following: “A fire has been reported in the area. For your safety, use the stairs to exit the area immediately." A bad example is: "The alarm sound you just heard indicates that an emergency has been declared. If this alarm is followed by your floor's evacuation alarm, do not use the elevator, but go to the nearest staircase and exit the floor. While the information received is verified, residents of other floors must wait for further instructions. This message is very long, ambiguous and could be misunderstood if not heard clearly. The word "no" may not be heard clearly, or it may be heard applied to the rest of the utterance. Care must also be taken to select and clearly pronounce words with similar phonetics that may sound alike when the system and environment result in poor intelligibility.

See point A.24.4.1.1 for more information on the methodology for improving the content, structure and intelligibility of messages. See Appendix D for more information on speech intelligibility and how it is predicted. The content of the message should be based on the building's fire safety plan, the nature of the building and its occupants, the construction of the fire detection system, and evidence of occupant response to the message. It is advisable to take precautions so that the operation of the fire alarm system and the triggering of the alarm can be triggered by a portable station or a detector located at a distance from the fire. [1] Schifiliti, R.P., "To go or not to go, that is the question!" ("To Go or Not to Go, That Is the Question!"), National Fire Protection Association, World Fire Safety Congress & Expo, May 16, 2000, Denver, CO. [2] Ramachandran, G., "Fire Alert Information Systems", Fire Technology, vol. 47, No. 1, February 1991, National Fire Protection Association, 66-81. [3] J. Bryan, "Psychological Variables That Can Affect Fire Alarm Design," Fire Protection Engineering, Society of Fire Protection Engineers (Society of Fire Protection Engineers), Issue 11, Fall 2001. [4] Proulx, G., "Cool Under Fire", Fire Protection Engineering, Society of Fire Protection Engineers, Issue 16, Fall 2002. [5] General Services Administration, Proceedings of the Convened International Conference on Fire Safety in High Rise Buildings, supra), Washington, D.C. , October 1971. [6] Proulx, G., "Strategies for Ensuring Adequate Occupant Response to Fire Alarm Signals" Occupants to Signals Alarm System"), National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario, Building Technology Update, No. 43, 1-6, Dec 2000. A.24.4.2.8.5.1 With respect to requirements for fire capability of path survivability, one or more of the following means may be considered acceptable to ensure a level of survivability c Consistent with the intent of this requirement: (1) Control by means of separate signaling device circuits. (2) Use of short-circuit fault tolerant signal line circuits to control evacuation signals. Signaling zones also require that circuits and devices, common to more than one evacuation signaling zone, be designed and installed to fail the fire diode and not disable it. For example, a signaling line circuit used to control notification devices in multiple signaling zones.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72− 270

ANNEX They must be constructed and installed in such a way that a fire does not affect the signaling line circuit and render inoperative the detectors used for more than one evacuation signaling area. A.24.4.2.8.5.3 Paragraph 24.4.2.8.5.3 requires protection of circuits passing through fire areas other than the area for which they are used. This is to delay potential damage to circuits from fires in areas other than the area they are being used for, and to increase the likelihood that circuits used in areas distant from the original fire will have a chance, be activated and used for the fire. intended purpose. It should be noted that the protection requirement also applies to a signal cable loop that extends from a main fire alarm control unit to another remote fire alarm control unit where equipment circuits may originate. . A.24.4.2.9.1 Paragraph 24.4.2.9.1 does not prohibit the provision of multiple circuits for notification devices within an evacuation signal zone.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.24.4.3 This section covers the application, installation, location, performance and maintenance of mass notification systems used for emergencies. A building mass notification system is a system used to provide information and instructions to persons located in one or more buildings or other spaces, through the use of intelligible voice communication and including methods of communication with visible signs, text, graphics , tactile or other means . . Bulk notification systems can include completely autonomous systems with little or no interface to the building's fire detection system, systems that transmit trouble and supervisory signals through the fire detection system, systems that share devices and notification circuits . audible and visible with fire detection or a combination of mass notification and fire detection systems. A.24.4.3.1 Although some minimum criteria are described for a given role, the role may not be applicable to all projects. The information and instructions transmitted by a massive notification system can be initiated manually by an operator or automatically by sensors or other systems and transmitted to the intended audience through prerecorded messages or live messages or both, adapted to the situation and the situation of the audience. Each mass notification system can be different depending on the expected threat and the level of protection provided. For example, a particular project may not require encrypted radio transmissions. Therefore, the criteria for such a project would not apply. However, if the authority having jurisdiction or planning professional has specified encrypted radio transmissions, the applicable minimum criteria listed in this document are mandatory. Deviations from these minimum criteria require the consent of interested parties. Mass notification systems can be completely autonomous systems with little or no interface to build fire detection systems.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 271

that transmit fault and supervisory signals through the fire detection system, systems that share audible and visual notification circuits and devices with the fire detection system, or a combination of mass notification and fire detection systems. A.24.4.3.1.2(6) Other systems may include mass notifications for wide areas, mass notifications for distributed recipients, and regional and national alerts. A.24.4.3.2.1 Authorized personnel may include building occupants who can easily access and send messages in emergency situations. Depending on individual installations, use of the mass notification system for non-emergency messages may also be permitted. Selection of authorized personnel should be based on a risk assessment and the building's emergency response plan. A.24.4.3.2.2 Authorized personnel may initiate the message into the mass notification system from an emergency command center or from one or more secondary (backup) control stations. In cases where there are groups of facilities within the same geographic region, one or more regional control stations may initiate messages. The mass notification system may allow activation of messages from mobile sentries and roving patrols through the use of wireless activation devices. Since it is common practice to allow the use of mass notification systems for "non-emergency" messages, the emergency command center should include a clearly labeled means that is easy to distinguish between emergency and non-emergency use. Extensive training and a standard fail-safe emergency mode of operation must be applied to ensure that no genuine emergency messages are sent as a non-emergency transmission. A.24.4.3.2.3 As a general practice, the number of message selection switches included as part of the operational controls should be limited to allow authorized personnel to use the system even if they have minimal knowledge of its use. Obviously, this might be different on a university or industrial campus, where the people trained are likely to be very familiar with the operation and use of the system. In this case it may be advantageous to have a larger number of selectors. A.24.4.3.2.5 It is recognized that it may be beneficial for users located at the ACU to identify which specific location is currently under control. This can be indicated by visual means or by an audible location code. This can be particularly useful for first responders using ACU to know which remote location is under control. When such features are incorporated into a system, they can be enabled or disabled by authorized personnel or as directed by a risk analysis. A.24.4.3.2.10 During an emergency, building occupants shall receive periodic audible indication that the emergency notification sent by the mass notification system is still in effect. This can also help building occupants and rescue workers to recognize this.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 272

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

the mass reporting system replaces fire alarm devices. The audible signal can be a simple signal such as B. a squeak of sufficient duration to be recognized by normal building occupants and generally by occupants who cannot hear. A.24.4.3.3.1 The mass notification system may allow the triggering of messages from mobile sentries and roving patrols through the use of wireless triggering devices. A.24.4.3.3.4 In general, each separate building shall be equipped with a separate building mass detection system; However, some facilities (such as a college campus with multiple stand-alone buildings) may be more efficiently served by a single building mass reporting system. Alternatively, a risk analysis may determine that a large-scale bulk messaging system provides optimal bulk messaging capability. A.24.4.3.4.1 Alternative methods that achieve the desired statistical availability instead of monitoring the integrity of circuits, signaling channels or communication paths may be considered acceptable if there is compatibility with what is used in the risk analysis and an emergency response plan has been established. . A.24.4.3.5.1 It is recognized that there are circumstances where the physical security and protection of some system documents may require the implementation of measures in addition to those required in 24.4.3.5. When such conditions are identified, interested parties should clearly indicate which system documents are to be retained and how to ensure the integrity of this section. A.24.4.3.5.2.1 A custom form, built around the specific system and containing the applicable information, may be used. The form must not contain information or elements that are not applicable to the system in question. A.24.4.3.8 The risk analysis shall identify which emergency situations take precedence over the fire alarm evacuation signal. Should seeing a tornado in the area take precedence over an active fire in a building? Should a campus gate breach take precedence over an active fire in a building? If a manual fire alarm panel was activated, this could be an act of terrorism to get people out of the building and into where they are facing an outside threat. In this case, the mass notification input signal is intended to override fire alarm evacuation signals to redirect occupants based on existing conditions. A.24.4.3.10.2 It may be desirable for devices such as gas or chemical sensors and detectors, weather warning signs or other similar signals to be connected to the mass notification system to allow for a more rapid response to emergency conditions. A.24.4.3.11 See point 24.4.3.2 for the requirements concerning the operation of the system by authorized personnel. It is accepted that, based on the risk analysis, the

Control circuits and devices may require different levels of protection for different installations. Access to the mass notification/fire alarm interface must be compatible with the measures described in the emergency plan. It may have been past practice in some jurisdictions to locate the fire alarm control unit in the main hall of the facility. However, it may not be appropriate to locate the separate PMS Control Unit in the lobby where the general public may have access to disable PMS components. Based on the risk analysis, it may be appropriate to place the standalone control unit in a protected space while providing local control consoles for use by authorized personnel. A.24.4.3.13.1 Mass notification systems may include one or more local system control panels to allow authorized occupants to easily access and create messages in emergency and other situations. The number and location(s) of one or more Local Control Panels (LOCs) shall be determined by the facility's risk assessment and contingency plan. A.24.4.3.14.1 An example message prioritization scheme, from highest priority (1) to lowest priority (5), is provided below for consideration during message analysis: Risks: (1) Messages from Live voice from building staff should be given high priority. Where systems contain controls that could be used by unauthorized personnel, these controls must be disabled or bypassed during emergency operations. (2) Automatic fire alarm/other high priority messages as determined by risk analysis criteria. (3) External messages coming from a large area mass notification system. (4) The priority of emergency reports, such as severe weather warnings, gas leaks, chemical spills and other hazardous conditions, should be determined by risk analysis criteria and specified in the emergency plan. (5) Non-emergency communications such as general announcements and time signals (breaks, class changes, etc.) should be given the lowest priority. A.24.4.3.14.6(2) Unless the risk analysis determines otherwise, the fire detection system shall always automatically restore normal operation. If the fire alarm system automatically restores normal operation, the building emergency plan must state that user intervention is not required. If manual intervention is required to restore normal operation of the fire alarm system, specific instructions should be included in the emergency plan explaining how the fire alarm system notification devices are to be reactivated. These instructions shall be affixed to fire alarm and mass notification control units. Persons responsible for manually restoring the fire alarm system to its normal state must be adequately trained in this procedure.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

A.24.4.3.20 The video screen may be a video device used to facilitate mass notification. The displayed information can be video, graphics, text or audio. The information can be transmitted through a video distribution network, MATV or CATV system. These messages can be standardized or adapted to specific applications or situations. Dynamic text elements can be derived from secure data or updated in real time, locally or remotely. Government agencies can monitor messages to update and change content with manual overrides by authorized security personnel, law enforcement and others to ensure information is current and in real time. The same can be done with remote control from an emergency command center. Examples of interfaces used for real-time control are USB, Ethernet, RS-232 and GPI. A.24.4.3.22.1.3 When automatic transmission to a monitoring station is required, this shall be done in accordance with the provisions of the Emergency Response Plan. The purpose of disabling or bypassing fire detection system notification devices during simultaneous fire and mass notification events is so that occupants do not receive mixed messages and can respond appropriately. A fire alarm notification that must be canceled during the activation of a mass notification system can include audible notification devices, visual notification devices, text notification devices, and video notification devices. A.24.4.3.22.3.1 As part of the risk analysis and contingency plan, a future interface between mass detection systems in buildings and a full-scale mass detection system should be considered, if it does not already exist. The structure of mass reporting systems should be designed in such a way that a future interface with a large-scale mass reporting system is possible. A.24.4.3.23.1 A combined system may include a stand-alone control unit and a fire alarm control unit supplied by different manufacturers or located in separate equipment enclosures; However, the standalone control unit and fire alarm control unit must be integrated with their controls and performance to meet the requirements of this code. A.24.4.4 Large-scale mass notification systems are generally installed to provide real-time information to external areas. These systems are usually provided with two or more emergency call centers from which they are put into operation. This includes communication between emergency control centers and mass notification systems installed in the building. Communications between emergency command centers and regional or national command systems can also be included. Large area mass notification systems are generally large campus voice systems, military base public address systems, civil defense warning systems, large screens

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

for outdoors and others. A.24.4.4.2 A commonly used method of protecting against unauthorized changes using various levels of password protection can be described as follows (in increasing access levels): (1) Access Level 1. Access by persons with overall responsibility for the security control and it could investigate an alarm signal or problem and respond first. (2) Access Level 2. Access for persons specifically responsible for safety and trained in the operation of the control unit. (3) Level of Access 3. Access by persons trained and authorized to occupy a specific area of a site to allow for a location on the site that may be different from another area. Note: This may require an advanced form of local control access. (4) Access Level 4. Access by persons acting as system administrators who are authorized to make changes to the system and associated software. A.24.4.4.3 A large-scale mass reporting system can communicate with other reporting systems on site, eg. Bulk email, message scrolling, Reverse 911 public safety communication system, fax transmission, and radio alert system and traffic signal control (used for dynamic control of radio information and traffic signals for traffic information) emergency and traffic management). A.24.4.4.4.2 High-performance loudspeaker arrays shall be designed with directivity standards that minimize distortion of voice signals transmitted from other areas and that minimize the transmission of voice or audio signals into environmentally sensitive areas or off site. A.24.4.4.4.2.1(B) See Appendix D for more information on speech intelligibility and how it is predicted. Normal weather conditions should be indicated based on geographic location. In outdoor areas such as B. In industrial areas with many multi-story buildings, the maximum distance between personnel and an outdoor speaker often needs to be reduced significantly to achieve acceptable speech intelligibility. Directional speakers must be used. They can be mounted outside of buildings if the speakers do not emit unacceptable sound levels in the building in which they are mounted. In some locations it may be necessary to control the volume of sound that is being transmitted in unwanted directions, e.g. B. in civilian communities adjacent to site boundaries or in wildlife areas with protected or endangered animal species. Additionally, in some areas, it may be necessary to mount large area mass notification loudspeakers to the side of a building, preventing an unacceptable increase in noise levels within that building.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.24.4.3.18 Attention to location and localization is critical to the survival of the visible text device and to maximize its effectiveness. Place the visible text device away from direct sunlight or direct local area lighting. Avoid placing the visible text device near heating and air conditioning ducts.

72- 273

72- 274

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.24.4.4.4.2.4 At a minimum, the loudspeaker array driver must be above the known flood level seen during previous floods. In the northern states of the United States, the high power speaker array must be placed above known snow levels. When selecting high-performance loudspeaker arrays, care should be taken to ensure that the device is certified to operate within the high and low temperature range and other environmental conditions anticipated for the geographic location of the installation. The system designer should review this information as part of the risk analysis. A.24.4.4.4.4.2 High power loudspeaker arrays shall be mounted so that they do not exceed OSHA and FEMA publication occupational noise exposure limits CPG-17 or an absolute limit of 123 decibels C (dBC), as prescribed. specified by FEMA for persons standing near the speakers. A.24.4.4.4.6 High power loudspeaker arrays and their supporting structures shall withstand wind speeds of at least 100 miles/h [161 km/h (86.8 knots)]. The support structure must be dimensioned to withstand the static and dynamic loads generated by the equipment and all accessories. Seismic loads are generally site-specific. A.24.4.5 Distributed recipient mass notification systems are very good quality systems used for the management and mass distribution of emergency notifications within a building, between facilities, between regions, geographic locations or a command global military. Using distributed recipient mass notification systems, designated system operators can quickly and reliably notify appropriate personnel of national security levels (including chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear threats, dangerous weather conditions, and many other critical events ), potentially with almost the real world. timely response capability. A distributed recipient mass messaging system is used to communicate with a wide range of people and target groups. These systems may use mass voting systems, including reverse 911, email, short message service (SMS), or other specific communication methods to disseminate information. They may also use wired or wireless networks for one-way or two-way communication and/or control between a building or area and an emergency services organization (information, command and control). Distributed recipient mass notification systems can centrally track all alert activity for each individual recipient in real time, including sending, receiving, and responding to alerts, and can generate reports based on the tracked information. Distributed recipient mass notification systems may include predefined signals and messages appropriate for, but not limited to: (1) Presidential Alert Message (2) National Security Levels (3) Terrorism Alerts, Notifications or Threats

(4) Evacuation Routes (5) Emergency Orders (6) Personnel Call Requirements (7) Federal, Department of Defense (DOD), Police, Fire, or Site/Facility Specific Notification and Notice Requirements (8) Notification Amber Alerts Distributed Receiver Mass System can potentially monitor emergency alerts from multiple data sources [Commercial Mobile Alert System (CMAS) Mobile), National Weather Service, Emergency Managers Weather Information Network (EMWIN)), Naval Meteorology and Oceanography (METOC) and others as determined by the website] and automatically send notifications to specific facilities and employees according to predefined rules. A mass notification system can also communicate with all employees online, taking full advantage of a highly secure and redundant IP web-based network architecture to handle the entire mass notification process. Authorities and organizations can create role-based uses such as operators, administrators, and recipients based on their access rights across multiple locations, campuses, and facilities. System rules can be configured to determine operator permissions and actions, such as: B. Scenario creation and activation, scope and geography of alerts, and the devices and transmission systems to be used. Such a web-based mass notification system would use an open, standards-based architecture. The system can be integrated with existing user directories to support organizational hierarchy and emergency response groups. Its structure can be such that the objectives of the emergency alerts are based on the emergency criteria. In addition, material in this appendix provides information on the ongoing development of system requirements for Network Centric Alert Systems (NCAS) that will be based on IP technologies. This annex is not mandatory but has been included to encourage the development of appropriate standards and requirements. As such, user comments and suggestions regarding this Addendum are strongly encouraged and solicited. Of particular interest are methods that ensure reliability and robustness in emergencies or exceptional conditions. It is necessary to develop the number and method necessary to isolate the alarm functions from the normal, non-alarming functions of the system. NCAS systems take full advantage of the IP network infrastructure to instantly communicate with personnel who have access to virtually any device connected to the IP network [for example, PDAs and cell phones, email to IP-enabled cell phones and Voice messages for Voice over IP (VoIP) phones and PCs. Additionally, NCAS systems can be used to trigger other alert systems (IP and non-IP based) through a single interface, such as:

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

72- 275

NCAS systems can be installed standalone or in a central location. In a centrally managed NCAS configuration, personnel and facilities located within the respective coverage area of the regional operations center can receive immediate alerts on events, either from a single facility or centrally from the regional operations center. Using the management tools, designated operators at each of the facilities located in the region can register via a web browser and have full access to their own section of the NCAS system. The regional operations center must maintain the ability to centrally monitor and manage all sections of the system, including monitoring and fault conditions of various system components and integrated components.

A.24.4.5.2.1 Distributed recipient mass notification systems shall provide mechanisms for updating user and segmentation data; B. User data import, integration with employee directories and user self-registration.

The NCAS system shall include a web-based alarm and management application that allows all operators and administrators to access system functions based on user permissions and defined access policies. This management application shall include management of the alarm activation flow through all transmission methods, as well as end-user management, operator access and authorization, tracking and reporting, and all administrative aspects of the system.

A.24.4.5.5 Distributed recipient mass notification systems shall be capable of sending alerts to end users (recipients) via a variety of transmission methods, including:

Bulk messaging for distributed receivers can interconnect and interact with other types of bulk messaging facilities, including large-scale and in-building bulk messaging. During an emergency, system operators do not need to send notifications using various alert systems. The distributed recipient mass notification system, particularly the NCAS system, could potentially include the ability to integrate user interfaces and consolidate access to multiple mass alerting and notification systems. A.24.4.5.1 Distributed recipient mass notification systems may allow notification flow management, including user management, group focus, operator permissions, access policies, predefined emergency scenarios, and tracking and response notification . A.24.4.5.2 Distributed recipient mass notification systems may have the capability to send alerts using a prioritization method to targeted recipients as follows:

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(1) Hierarchical organization structure (as if imported from an Active Directory) (2) Organization roles (3) Specific distribution lists [p. B. Hazardous Materials Incident Response Teams (HAZMAT) (4) Targeted distribution (eg, hearing-impaired individuals or other individuals with disabilities for whom prioritization in reporting is assured) (5) Dynamic groups created by concurrent queries are spontaneously created in the user's directory (6) geographic locations (e.g. entire bases, zones within bases) (7) IP addresses (required for target devices located in specific physical locations)

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

A.24.4.5.3 Distributed recipient mass notification systems may use a web-based user interface, support locally assigned standard network ports and protocols, and provide open interfaces to support interoperability, such as ) and a protocol alert system (CHAP). (See OASIS Policy, CAP-VI.2, OASIS Common Alerting Protocol, Version 1.2.).

(1) Audio-visual network notifications to desktops and laptops via desktop pop-ups (2) Text notifications to cell phones and pagers (3) Text notifications to customers via email (4) Audio notifications to phones (5) Audio notifications for existing voice notification systems and Mass Notification for large areas and buildings (6) Network alerts for any other device connected to the IP network using standard XML and CAP protocols. The system may be expanded to support additional transmission methods in the future as this technology evolves. A.24.4.5.6 A mass notification system for distributed recipients may support multi-server and multi-site configurations to achieve a "hot standby" configuration (ie no downtime on failure) in the event of a failure. A single server fails) and to support higher load scenarios (e.g. more users). This can be achieved with site-based systems or with server configurations. The backup configuration can be a network-centric system architecture located behind Internet firewalls or hosted externally outside the owner's Internet firewall using software and hardware configuration provided by the owner(s)/provider(s) ) services. DRMNS, hosted, operated and maintained or you can integrate features from both configurations. A.24.5.1 Fire, police and other emergency services use two-way communication systems for building emergency services. This does not exclude devices located outside protected premises. A.24.5.1.6 Consideration should be given to the type of telephone equipment used by firefighters in areas with high levels of ambient noise or in areas where high levels of ambient noise may occur during a fire. Push-to-talk telephone sets, telephone sets with directional microphones, or telephone sets with other suitable noise reduction features may be used.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 276

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.24.5.1.19 Building emergency services Wired two-way communication systems are used to provide emergency service personnel and certain building occupants with a reliable, monitored communication system that is completely independent of other communication systems installed in the building. Two-way wired communication systems for internal emergency services are survivable as they are installed for use during a fire or other emergency event. This type of functionality requires steps to be taken to ensure the system is designed, installed and maintained to survive and function in extreme conditions.

Project 25 is a standard for manufacturing interpretable two-way digital wireless communication devices and systems. A P25 radio system offers interoperability because it includes a common air interface and a multiband excitation vocoder that converts voice signals into a digital bitstream. P25 defines standard modes for radio operation to allow interoperability between devices from different manufacturers, for example B. trunking, encryption, changing encryption keys on the radio channel and others. Formally, the P25 specifications are defined in the ANSI/TIA/EIA 102 standards. All Homeland Security funds promote interoperable communications and recommend compliance with open architecture technologies and the P25 standards.

A.24.5.2 The use of enhanced radio communication systems is widespread in the United States.

A.24.5.2.4.2 A national measure is underway to eliminate current interference between mobile operators and the public safety bands of the 800 MHz band. Such a measure may change the current frequencies for public bodies in this band. The upgrade system for public safety radio communications must be capable of being modified to accommodate upgraded frequencies to allow the minimum system design criteria to be maintained.

Flexibility and security features of radio systems include: (1) Allowing complete building coverage to facilitate communication from any point within the building if access to the telephone file is compromised. (2) Enable communication between first responders in the field to allow for faster dissemination of emergency and safety information. (3) Typically, each rescuer carries an individual radio that allows each person to provide information or request assistance individually, which can be important when crew members are separated during an incident. (4) Radio systems allow for emergency calls by "off-duty firefighters" in the event of injury, where the push of a single button sends a call to a central appeals office to determine who the victim is. (5) Radio systems can use an emergency call when, at the press of a single button, a rescuer's emergency call jumps to the next designated port of the radio system to provide long-range communication of a backup emergency, such as a structural failure, failure of a fire pump or standpipe system, or other emergencies that may result in a change in operating strategies.

A.24.5.2.5.4(1) All signal repeaters, transmitters, receivers and repeaters shall be installed and operated in accordance with 47 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). These regulations include a mandatory requirement that signal amplifiers, transmitters and repeaters must be "certified" by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). The FCC certification requirement generally does not apply to receivers, although they must comply with other applicable Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations. FCC certification is a formal process that verifies that your device meets certain minimum technical specifications set forth by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). A separate FCC certification number is assigned to each make and model type. Use of any signal booster, transmitter or amplifier that does not have an existing FCC certification is a violation of federal law and users may be subject to fines and/or imprisonment. A label with the exact FCC certification number must be affixed in a prominent location on the device. Verification of FCC certification can be obtained at any FCC office or online (https://fjallfoss.fcc.gov/oetcf/eas/reports/genericsearch.cfm).

It is important that interoperability is developed and maintained when implementing analog and digital two-way radio systems. The simplest means of exploiting some degree of interoperability with analog two-way radio systems is to program on existing corporate radio channels from geographically adjacent agencies that operate on the same public safety frequency band. Systems and devices that comply with Project 25 (P25) (APCO-Association of Public Safety Communications Officials - International) can be used to take advantage of interoperability with digital radio systems. Public – International).

A.24.5.2.5.5.2 The 12-hour battery requirement for the Enhanced Public Safety Radio Communication System is intentionally greater than the 5-minute power requirement for a general evacuation and the 5-minute power requirement for a general evacuation. general evacuation emergency power - voice/alarm communication systems. This is due to the main function of these systems, where the main function of the fire alarm system is to assist in the detection of a fire and the evacuation of occupants, and the main function of the system is to improve communication through the public safety radio to assist in the firefighting operations, which may take longer than evacuating the occupants.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.24.5.2.4 Modulation technologies include analogue and digital modulation.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX A A.24.5.2.6.2 Due to the need for longer backup batteries for the enhanced public safety radio communication system, it is recognized that the fire detection system may not be available to monitor system signals fire detection. radio, including low battery signals. Therefore, a redundant status report is required to provide local signals to the incident commander or his designated deputy in the fire control room. A.24.5.3 "Refuge areas" or "rescue areas" are areas with direct access to an exit where persons unable to use stairs can remain temporarily safe and await further instructions or assistance during an emergency evacuation or other emergency situation . Therefore, it is important that there is a method available for communication between the remote site and a central control point when appropriate backup measures can be taken.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.24.5.3.1 Usually building codes or engineer's specifications contain specific details on the locations required for the remote area of refuge stations (rescue support area) as well as the central control point. The requirements outlined in 24.5.3 shall be in line with current Building Code requirements. A.24.5.3.4 To ensure a timely response to an emergency call, the call shall be routed to an approved location that is staffed at all times, such as a B. monitoring station, 911 communication center or other monitoring location . A.24.6 The information, command and control of an emergency communications system shall include wired or wireless networks for unidirectional and bidirectional communication and/or for control between a building or area and an emergency response center and may include emergency response services. emergency. organization system or a public alarm notification system. In a very simple configuration, a system and receiving equipment can form a monitoring station system. However, there may be more complex systems that allow building systems to be controlled and communicate with building occupants from a remote location, including a municipal or other public alarm panel, or possibly even from a mobile command vehicle using secure communications. A.24.6.1 For the purposes of this Chapter, an emergency command center is considered to be one composed of one or more installations of a mass notification system, equipped with communication and control equipment, used for more than one building, installations, sources or systems, or from regional or national sources or systems (above), and then distribute the appropriate information to a building, multiple buildings, campus perimeter, communities, or a combination thereof, as required by the established emergency response plan for installation. . A mass notification system may include at least one emergency command center with optional secondary/alternate emergency command centers. A.24.6.1.1 The location of the emergency command center should be coordinated with first responders. half of

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 277

The primary emergency command must be at the command post, emergency center or similar location. If necessary, a redundant emergency command center should be located in a separate location, e.g. B. at a police station, fire station or similar facility. Typically, the primary emergency command center should be located in a building or part of a building that is separate from the rest of the facility and separated by a 2-hour fire rating. The mass notification system may require triggering messages from mobile sentries and roving patrols through the use of wireless triggering devices. In cases where there are groups of facilities within the same geographic region, one or more regional control bodies may also exercise control. A.24.6.1.4 The emergency command center shall be staffed with qualified personnel to monitor the system and implement appropriate responses in accordance with the emergency response plan established for the facility. A.24.6.1.4.2 Persons who must initiate or transmit emergency reports shall be adequately trained for the intended activities. Personnel must be familiar with the equipment, its location and functions if they are to be expected to respond adequately in an emergency. People react in an emergency situation only by instinct or habit. If they have not received adequate and repeated training in what to do in an emergency, they may not have the right instincts or habits. Reading the employee handbook is generally not an effective means of emergency training. To be effective, training must be reinforced with various media such as text, audio, visual media and, most importantly, hands-on experience. It is important to carry out regular drills that allow the transmission of live messages indicating an emergency. Many people find it difficult to communicate clearly and effectively in an emergency situation when they are excited or anxious. For live news to be effective, it needs to be short, to the point and delivered in a calm tone to convey exactly what the expected action is. For example, it would not be appropriate to shout into the microphone. The actual content of the messages will depend on what is specified in the contingency plan prepared for the given business and the response to the current event. Situations such as the presence of an intruder in a building have become more common these days and, therefore, the measures to be taken must be considered and planned. A.24.6.3 Various messages or signals or live voices, sounds, etc. can be pre-recorded. A.24.6.6 Text notifications via wireless devices and notifications to desktop computers can be an effective means of sending bulk notifications to groups with multiple recipients. Complementary text messaging via wireless devices can be effective for communicating with remote workers. Desktop notifications are particularly effective when more information needs to be conveyed.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

complex and can be an economical, but non-existent, stop-gap for installing a massive building alarm system.

(7) Access to system components (8) System survivability (9) Redundancy and security of communication links

A.24.7 The risk analysis forms the basis of the emergency response plan. (10) Emergency dispatcher redundancy and security.

(10) Emergency dispatcher redundancy and security

Ensuring the dissemination of accurate information to the right people, in the right place and at the right time is essential to mitigating the actions and consequences of a threat. Trained personnel are responsible for making these decisions in real time. Instructions for personnel in affected areas generally provide information on how to behave defensively to avoid exposing themselves to danger. An example of this is the case of an attack with chemical or biological warfare agents, where the correct response would be to go to secure areas inside the building, seal the doors and windows and close the air vents, instead of leaving the building and expose. to the attacking agent. In case of a bomb threat, if specific information is available, evacuation instructions should be issued; Such orders require more specificity than an order that simply says "Evacuate building". In most cases, the evacuation route may depend on threat intelligence and will likely differ from that specified in an emergency plan. Most people know where a fire comes from, but they don't always know where a bomb is. Automatic building evacuation, common practice in the event of a fire, should be avoided as it may put employees at even greater risk. One of the reasons for implementing a mass information system is the threat of a terrorist act. Terrorist attacks are usually well organized and often planned in detail to cause as much damage as possible. The mass notification system must be designed to withstand various attack scenarios and continue to exist after some damage has been done. Any mass information system design must be specific to the nature and anticipated risks of each of the facilities for which it is designed. While this chapter outlines some specific criteria and/or limitations, any design must be based on accepted performance-based design practices. The mass notification system must take into account several considerations, as described in this chapter. The specific project may or may not include these provisions. Considerations for developing a mass notification system are as follows: (1) Facility-specific design (2) Consideration of expected risks (3) Use of live and/or recorded messaging (4) Interfaces with other notification systems building emergency communication (5) Interfaces with wide area notification systems (6) Ability to review HVAC and access control systems

(11) Ability to customize and add messages to the recorded message library (12) Messages must be tailored to the situation and audience (13) Carefully worded texts for live voice messages (14) Appropriate training of people A. 24.7. 2 The project specialist(s) that integrate(s) the project team must have experience in several areas considered essential to carry out the risk analysis and performance project based on the system, scope and dimensions from the project. Areas of expertise may include, but are not limited to: (1) Application of recognized performance-based design concepts (2) Conducting risk and operability studies (3) Technical aspects of fire alarm design for power systems (4) Technical Aspects of Emergency Communication (5) Security Hazards and/or Terrorist Threats (6) Building Code Requirements and Egress Restrictions (7) People's Response to Conditions (8) Development of Emergency Plans (9) ) Other qualifications related to user requirements/risks The designer(s) is/is usually part of the design team that creates the design documents and specifications. However, the design professional may work with or be hired by a qualified installation company. The design professional must commit to professional licensing policies to ensure that the risk analysis is performed objectively, based on the needs of the user and not on a product or work. A.24.7.6.3 Communication and coordination between the various members of the project team is an important element in achieving the established objectives for system performance. A.24.6.6 The Guide to Performance-Based Design, published by the Society of Fire Protection Engineers, provides guidance on the elements that make up the design project report. A.24.8.2 The minimum documentation requirements described in 24.8.1 are to be used as a guide to include sufficient documentation based on the size and complexity of the additions or changes. A.26.1 Table A.26.1 contains a tool for these users, the code queries in a simple and systematic way the requirements established for the protected installations, for the call center, for the remote monitoring center and for the security systems. station alarm.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72- 278

ANHANG A

72- 279

Table A.26.1 Alarm system performance criteria Attribute

applicability

List

Project

compatibility

performance and limitations

documentation

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

plant monitoring station

test and maintenance

Central Station Protected Service Facility Fire Alarm System Fire Alarm System All Alarm Systems Supervision of fire service by a general contractor. There is a subscriber (26.3.2, 26.3.3 and 26.3.4).

List of devices for list of devices for intended use (10.3) for intended use (10.3) documentation in accordance with (26.3.4). Meets code Meets code Experienced persons (10.4.1) (10.4.1) Detection devices Detection devices that draw power from listed triggering circuits or triggering or signaling circuits intended for the control unit (10.3 .3) Control unit control (10.3 .3) ) 85% and 110% of voltage 85% and 110% of nameplate rated supply voltage of rated supply, 32°F (0°C) and nameplate identification, 32°F (0°C) and 49°C (120°F ) Temperature 49°C (120°F) ambient temperature, 85% ambient humidity, 85% relative humidity at 29.4°C (85°F) relative humidity at 29.4°C (85°F) (10.14.1) ( 10.14.1) Notice for notification to Jurisdictional Authority Jurisdictional Authority for specifications, for specifications, flowcharts, wiring, circuit diagrams, battery calculations and plans, plans new or modified architectural and battery calculations. amended statement. Contractor's declaration of compliance of the system with the manufacturer's published instructions and the requirements of the manufacturer's published instructions and the requirements of NFPA (10.18.1). NFPA Registration (10.18.1). Final Protocol (10.18.2). Conclusion (10.18.2). Results of the assessment Results of the assessment required in 23.4.3.3. required in 23.4.3.3. None Per UL 827 for Monitoring Stations and Substations (26.3.5.1 and 26.3.5.2), Chapter 14

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Remote monitoring station alarm system If a central station service is not required or selected, different owners' properties will be monitored by a remote monitoring station (26.5.1.1 and 26.5.1.2) Listed equipment for intended use (10.3)

Own surveillance station Surveillance station of the alarm system with surveillance of adjacent or non-contiguous properties in a property and responsible to the owner of the property protected (26.4.2.1 and 26.4.2.2)

By code by trained persons (10.4.1) Sensing equipment, drawing power from listed tripping or signaling circuits for control unit (10.3.3), 85% and 110% of nameplate supply voltage Identification, 32° F (0°C) and 120°F (49°C) Ambient temperature, 85% relative humidity at 85°F (29.4°C) (10.14.1) Notice to authority having jurisdiction New or revised specifications, drawings , wiring, battery calculations, and structural drawings Contracted declaration of conformity of the system with the manufacturer's published instructions and the requirements of NFPA (10.18.1). Final Protocol (10.18.2). Results of the assessment required in 23.4.3.3. Communication centers or other locations acceptable to the competent authority (26.5.3)

Chapter 14. To operate the system in test mode (26.3.7.5.6), Chapter 14, a key code must be provided.

Equipment listed for intended use (10.3)

Independent, fire-resistant building or compartment not close to or exposed to hazards. Restricted access, NFPA 10, 26-hour emergency lighting (26.4.3). chapter 14

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 280

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table A.26.1 Continuation Attribute

Fire alarm system for protected premises

messaging service

Operational and management requirements

none

guys

none

surveillance signal monitoring

Control Unit and Command Center (10.11.3 and 10.11.4)

no signal forwarding

time to

none

Redirect --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

records

Current year and 1 year later (10.18.3)

Central Station Service Alert System Yes Alert –– Arrived at protected location within two hours of requesting equipment reset. Guard walk –– 30 minutes. Supervision –– 2 hours. Suspension — 4 hours. (26.3.7) Prime contractor provides all service elements of the central station under various contractual agreements (26.3.2) Minimum of two persons on duty at the monitoring station. Primary operation and monitoring task (26.3.6.2).

Remote monitoring station Alarm system No

none

Yes Alert: Access the protected site within two hours of restarting your computer. Guard walk –– 30 minutes. Supervision –– 2 hours. Suspension — 4 hours. (26.4.5.6)

The monitoring station has the same ownership and management responsibilities as the monitored facility. At least two people from two operators, one of whom may be the courier. Station guard If mail is not constantly supervised. Other functions identified to provide service at the station within the time allowed by the competent authority (26.5.4.5). between each contact should not exceed 15 minutes. Primary duties of monitoring alarms and station operations (26.4.4.6). Control unit, central control unit, central control unit, command center and central command station and command station and remote monitoring station (10.11.3 and 10.11.4) (10.11.3 proprietary monitoring and 10.11.4 ) (10.11.3 and 10.11 .4) alarm to the alarm control panel to the alarm control panel to the public service communication service communication center and to the subscriber. public in public service of surveillance and supervision of establishments, private. fire brigade sign. Calls to Supervisory, Interrupting, and Designated Personnel Answering and Interrupting Personnel Failures (26.3.7). The owner's representative supervises the designated personnel (26.4.5.6). mentioned (26.5.5). Alarm - immediately. Alarm - immediately. Alarm - immediately. Supervision - immediately. Supervision - immediately. Supervision - immediately. Supervision of lost turns, immediately. (26.5.5) Patrolling - no lookout delay - unacceptable. immediately. Failure - immediately. (26.3.7) Error — immediately. (26.4.5.6) Complete Records of Complete Records of at least 1 year (26.5.6.1). All received signals All received signals must be kept for at least 1 year. Reports for at least 1 year. Signal reports sent to the Competent Authority must be received by the Competent Authority in a format acceptable to the Competent Authority (10.3.8). (26.4.6).

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Patented monitoring station alarm system

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX A A.26.1.1 Monitoring station alarm systems include the equipment of the protected premises as well as the equipment of the monitoring station itself. Chapter 23. For example, for fire detection systems in protected buildings, see Figure A. 26.1.1. A.26.2.1 In this context, the term "without delay" is used to mean "without undue delay". Routine treatment should not last more than 90 seconds after receiving an alarm signal. A.26.2.3.1(1) It is recognized that firefighters prefer certain manpower to be assessed based on a number of variables, such as: B. Specific fire department manning or operational protocols, manned workforce, and crew risk. In this section, the fire protection authority can specifically select the professions in which verification is allowed. A.26.2.3.1(4) The 90 second tolerance allowed for a dispatcher to call the protected premises to verify the validity of the received alarm signal is independent of the time given to the dispatcher to respond and initiate escalation to the communications centre. A.26.2.3.1(6) It is important to notify the communications center that an alarm signal has been verified and that fire conditions exist in the protected area or some other type of emergency. Fire departments generally have a much broader response to confirmed building fires. A.26.2.3.1(7) If an alarm signal cannot be reliably confirmed as a false alarm, it shall be retransmitted immediately. This can include situations where no contact is made within the facility or when individuals within the facility are unable to verify the source of the alert within the 90 second tolerance, or other related scenarios. A.26.2.3.2 When verification of an alarm signal results in the signal not being reported to the communications centre, it is important that firefighters are informed of the alarm and why it is not being sent so that troubled systems can be identified. . --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.26.2.5.2 Planned outage conditions include outages caused by damage to buildings or structures. Also, natural disasters can cause long-term system outages that don't require a 24-hour reminder. A.26.2.7 Switching when signals move from an existing monitoring station installation to a new or different one is accomplished simply by changing a call forwarding telephone number. Or inside the monitoring station, new reception software and computers can be built and lines can be changed. Usually account details

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 281

they are manually entered into the new system. Some data is transmitted electronically. Mistakes can be made that result in the monitoring station receiving undefined alarms or incorrect account information, resulting in an incorrect response from the monitoring station. When these changes are made, the only viable way to ensure correct operation is through extensive testing. A.26.3.2 There are related types of contracted services that are normally provided or controlled by a central station but are not provided or compliant with the provisions of 26.3.2. While clause 26.3.2 does not preclude such arrangements, a central station company is expected to recognize, provide and maintain the reliability, adequacy and integrity of alarm and surveillance services that must comply with the provisions of clause 26.3.2. A.26.3.4 Certified and labeled terms that appeared in previous editions of NFPA 72 were found to be too specific for two certification bodies and have been replaced by more general terms. The concept of providing documentation to demonstrate the ongoing compliance of an installed system is still reflected in current language. A.26.3.4.2(2) Termination protocol (see Chapter 10) may be used to meet this requirement. A.26.3.4.5 It is the responsibility of the main contractor to remove any marks of conformity (tags or certification marks) when an actual service contract is inconsistent with any of the requirements of 26.3.4. A.26.3.4.6 The General Contractor shall be aware of any laws, regulations or certifications relating to alarm systems that may be required of the Subscriber. The prime contractor shall identify to the subscriber the authorities that may constitute the competent authority and, if possible, inform the subscriber of any requirements or approvals required by those authorities. Subscriber is responsible for informing the prime contractor about private organizations designated as Competent Authority. Subscriber is also responsible for notifying the Main Contractor of any changes in the Governing Authority, such as B. Changes in insurance companies. While primary responsibility rests with the Subscriber, the prime contractor must also assume responsibility for locating the Subscriber's competent Private Authority(ies). The prime contractor is responsible for maintaining up-to-date records from the authority(ies) having jurisdiction for each protected facility. The public body that most often plays the role of competent authority in relation to alarm systems is the local fire department or fire protection board. These are usually city or regional authorities with legal authority and their approval may be required for the installation of alarm systems. At the state level, the fire protection officer's office should probably be the regulatory authority.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 282

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

FIGURE A.26.1.1. Monitoring station fire alarm system.

Initiator line signaling device circuit board

signal line circuit interface

Fire detection systems where the main control unit is not integrated or located close to the monitoring station.

control unit

master controller

Sender

signal line circuit

Note: The transmitter can be integrated into the controller.

transmission channel

Substation (if used) Ca un ald na e ica ld eT cio ran ne sm isio n Chapter 8

Chapter 6

monitoring station

Supervision of the station's fire alarm system.

Circuits of initiating devices.

Signaling signal line circuit line interface circuit control unit

signal line circuit

Fire detection systems in which the main control unit is integrated or located adjacent to the monitoring station in protected premises

master controller

Chapter 6

monitoring station

Chapter 8

72FC07fA-08-1-1.eps 42 x 49

G72-234

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

A.26.3.6.6 Two telephone lines (numbers) on the exchange connected to the PSTN, each with its own telephone connected, and two telephone lines (numbers) available on the communication exchange to which the call station operator is connected. central, an alarm can forward satisfies the intent of this requirement. A.26.3.8.1.2(1) The term immediately in this context means "without undue delay". Routine operation should not take more than 90 seconds from receipt of an alarm signal at the central station to initiation of transmission to the communications center. A.26.3.8.3 The central station is expected to first attempt to notify specific personnel at the protected premises. If such notification is not possible, it may be appropriate to notify the police or fire department. For example, if a valve monitoring signal is received while the protected premises are unoccupied, it is appropriate to notify the police. A.26.3.8.3(1) The term immediately in this context means "without undue delay". The routine operation must last a maximum of 4 minutes from the reception of the monitoring signal by the control panel until the start of communication with a person designated by the participant. A.26.3.38.4(1) The term immediately in this context means "without undue delay". From the time the control panel receives the trouble signal until the telephone investigation begins, routine operation should take no more than 4 minutes. A.26.3.8.5.3 The term immediately in this context means "without undue delay". From the time the control panel receives the trouble signal until the telephone investigation begins, routine operation should take no more than 4 minutes. A.26.4.3.1 Consideration should be given to providing the following features for the location of an object monitoring station: (1) Fire resistant constructions that meet the requirements of adopted building codes (2) Insulated fire protection systems building systems air A.26.4.4.3 Owning station procedures shall include periodic review of signals that have not been restored. One method for such a procedure could be the use of devices that automatically display the information again. A.26.4.6.4 The intent of this code is to provide the operator within the proprietary monitoring station with a secure means of immediately transmitting signals indicating a fire to the public agency's communications centre.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

fire relay Automatic relay using an approved method installed in accordance with Sections 26.3 to 26.5 and Chapter 27 is the best method for a suitable relay. The use of manual means consisting of a manual connection in accordance with the requirements of Section 26.3, Section 26.5 and Chapter 27 or for dedicated monitoring stations serving only contiguous properties in the form of a municipal monitoring station is permitted. fire alarm operating within 50 ft (50 ft) 15 m) of its own monitoring station in accordance with Chapter 27. The operator's control center and fire brigade must be accessible at all times and must not be dependent on the point. A.26.5.2(1) Chapter 14 permits the building owner or his designated representative to perform these services, if qualified. In this case, the documentation could be a declaration of eligibility signed by the owner of the building. Multiple service providers are allowed. A.26.5.3 The room or rooms containing the remote monitoring station equipment shall have a minimum fire resistance rating of 1 hour and the entire structure shall be protected by an alarm system that meets the requirements specified in Chapter 23. A.26.5.3.1 .3 A listed central station may be considered an acceptable alternative location for receiving fire alarm, surveillance and jamming signals. A.26.5.3.2 A listed central station may be considered an acceptable alternate location for receiving jamming signals. A.26.6.1 Consultation of communications.

To die

Table A.26.6.1

one

methods

Von

Table A.26.6.1 has been revised with a TIA. See page 1. A.26.6.2.2 It is not the intent of Section 26.6 to restrict the use of the listed devices that use alternative methods of communication, provided those methods perform similarly or better than the technologies described in Section 26.6. Devices using alternative methods of communication must demonstrate their equivalence by meeting all Chapter 10 requirements, including those affecting factors such as reliability, integrity control, and listing. Appropriate proposals setting out the requirements for such technologies should be included in subsequent editions of this Code. A.26.6.2.3 The communication cloud is created by multiple phone lines and multiple Internet paths. In these circumstances, the requirements of Chapters 10 and 14, as provided in 26.1.2, do not apply to the equipment that makes up the communication cloud.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Since public and private interests must be considered, it is not uncommon for several competent authorities to be involved in a given protected facility. It is necessary to identify all relevant authorities in order to obtain all necessary permits to install a central station alarm system.

72- 283

72- 284

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

criteria

General 26.6.3.1

Digital alarm notification systems 26.6.3.2

Two-way multiplexed radio frequency (RF) systems 26.6.3.3.1

Private one-way wireless alarm systems 26.6.3.3.2

FCC approval, where applicable

Enspricht NFPA 70, National Electrical Code

Integrity supervision of transmission and communication channels

Monitor health or provide a backup channel to be tested as described below

Monitor installation drive and system drive health in a manner approved for the transmission media used. A single signal received once every 24 hours on each incoming DACR line

Systems are regularly polled in a sequential manner to verify the integrity of end-to-end communications

Test the signal coming from each station once every 24 hours

Announce at the monitoring station the deterioration and restoration of the transmission or communication channel

Within 5 minutes (you can report the bug in a second separate form)

Report error to another phone line within 4 minutes

Do not exceed 90 seconds from the time of actual failure

Monitors only the received signal quality and indicates if the signal is below the minimum signal quality specified in the code

Redundant communication path when the integrity of any part of the transmission or communication channel cannot be monitored

Provide redundant path if communication failure is not reported to control center

Use a combination of two separate transmission channels, tested at intervals of no more than 24 hours

No redundant paths needed: monitoring station always reports a communication error

At least two independent RF paths must be used simultaneously

Backup path(s) range test

If a backup path is needed, test the path on alternate channels once every 24 hours and test each channel every 48 hours

If two phone lines are used, they should be tested alternately every 24 hours. Discussion of other backup technologies, see 26.6.3.2.1.4(B).

Backup path not required

No requirements as signal quality is continuously monitored

Report loss of communication or ability to communicate on the protected site

Systems where the transmitter located in the building site unit detects a communication failure before the monitoring station, the building device will announce the failure within 5 minutes of detection

Site failure indication due to line failure or communication failure after 5 to 10 dialing attempts

Not required - always announced at monitoring station initiating corrective action

Monitor the transmission equipment connection of the installation unit and indicate the failure of the installation or transmit the failure signal to the monitoring station

It's time to restore signal reception, processing, display and recording equipment

If duplicate equipment is not provided, hardware replacement will be required to complete the repair within 30 minutes. Complete set of essential spare parts in a ratio of 1 to 5 parts to system units or one equivalent dual function system unit for every five system units.

Backup receivers for digital alarm communicators to switch to backup receiver in 30 seconds. One system backup drive for every five system drives.

If duplicate equipment is not provided, hardware replacement will be required to complete the repair within 30 minutes.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Table A.26.6.1 Communication Methods for Monitoring Stations.

ANHANG A

72- 285

Table A.26.6.1 Continuation Criteria

General 26.6.3.1

Digital alarm notification systems 26.6.3.2

Two-way multiplexed radio frequency (RF) systems 26.6.3.3.1

Private one-way wireless alarm systems 26.6.3.3.2

512 independent alarm systems in one system unit without backup. Unlimited if you can switch to a backup drive within 30 seconds. The system must be designed so that failure of a transmission channel used by one unit of the system does not cause loss of monitoring capability for more than 3,000 transmitters.

See Table 26.6.3.2.2.2(C) for the maximum number of transmitters in a system unit hunt group.

512 buildings and facilities in an unsecured system unit. Unlimited if you can switch to a backup drive within 30 seconds.

End-to-end communication time for an alarm

90 seconds from alarm activation until operator displays and records on a medium from which information can be retrieved

The transition from off-hook to on-hook signal shall not exceed 90 seconds per attempt. Maximum 10 attempts. Maximum 900 seconds for all attempts.

90 seconds from start to recording.

90% chance to receive an alert within 90 seconds, 99% chance within 180 seconds, 99.999% chance within 450 seconds

Speed recording and display of subsequent alarms at the monitoring station

Speed not less than one every additional 10 seconds

without reference

When entering any number of subsequent alarms, logging must occur at a rate of at least one every additional 10 seconds

Signal error detection and correction

Sign repetition, parity checking, or equivalent means of error detection and correction shall be employed.

Token replay, parity checking, or an equivalent means of token verification must be used.

without reference

route sequence priority

There is no need to prioritize routes. The prerequisite is that both forms are equivalent.

The first transmission attempt uses the main channel.

without reference

diversity of operators

If a redundant path is required, the alternate path must be obtained from a public communications service provider other than the primary path, if available.

When using long distance [including Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS)], the second phone number must be obtained from another long distance provider if there are multiple providers.

without reference

probability of winning

If the monitoring station does not regularly communicate with the transmitter at least every 200 seconds, the alarm transmission probability must be at least 90% in 90 seconds, 99% in 180 seconds, 99.999% in 450 seconds.

Demonstrate a 90% probability that a system entity will answer a call immediately or satisfy the load specified in Table 8.6.3.2.2.2(c). Placing a one-way radio has a 90% chance of transmission.

without reference

90% chance to receive an alert within 90 seconds, 99% chance within 180 seconds, 99.999% chance within 450 seconds

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Resilience of system units and transmission and communication channels

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 286

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table A.26.6.1 Continuation Criteria

General 26.6.3.1

Digital alarm notification systems 26.6.3.2

Two-way multiplexed radio frequency (RF) systems 26.6.3.3.1

Private one-way wireless alarm systems 26.6.3.3.2

Installation unique identifier

If a transmitter shares a transmission or communication channel with other transmitters, it must have a unique transmitter identifier.

extraordinary failures

From time to time, extraordinary defects may be observed in a communication system. Exceptional requirements should be written for these exceptional defects.

If call forwarding is used to communicate with the dispatcher, the integrity of this feature should be checked every 4 hours.

No indication of any

signal priority

If the communication method is shared with another application in use, all alarm transmissions must have priority over any other application in use. Alarm signals have priority over supervisory signals.

Chapter 1 Getting Started requires alarm signals to take precedence over supervisory signals unless there is enough repetition of the alarm signal to prevent loss of the alarm signal.

Communication devices common in the premises.

If the transmitter shares communication devices on the premises, the shared devices must be listed for this purpose (otherwise the transmitter must be installed before the unlisted devices).

Disconnect outgoing or incoming phone calls and prevent them from being used for outgoing calls until signal transmission is complete.

without reference

A.26.6.3.1 Certain legacy technologies (active multiplexing, McCulloh, unencrypted direct connect and private microwave systems) have been removed from the text of the document. Existing systems using these technologies are acceptable as all these technologies also meet the general provisions of 26.6.3.1. The purpose of 26.6.3.1 is not to provide the details of specific technologies, but rather to describe the basic operating parameters of the technologies' transmission monitoring rates. The following list shows examples of current technologies that can be configured to meet the requirements and objectives of 26.6.3.1: (1) Transmitters using Internet Protocol (IP) (2) Broadcast IP over the open public Internet or in private IP facilities maintained by an organization for its own use (3) Transmitters using various digital cellular technologies [no dial-up] IP cable transmission. There are two types of streaming devices.

Wired IP. One where the IP network is connected directly to the fire panel (IP), but the data that is transmitted via GPRS or CDMA are not encrypted tones, as in two-tone multifrequency (DTMF) (Contact ID), but are IT messaging, similar to embedded IP or native IP). The second uses an intermediate module that may contain: (1) IP Dialer Capture Module (2) IP Data Capture Module [such as RS-232, Keyboard Bus, RS-485] (3) Contact Monitoring Module Relay devices labeled "IP Dialer Capture Modules" (an IP communicator used with a DACT) are transmitting devices that connect to the control unit's fire alarm DACT output and convert the output data stream to IP ( Internet Protocol). Thus, it is assumed that they use IP technology in their connection to the IP network, so they must be dealt with in this Code in accordance with the requirements of point

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX A 26.6.3.1, performance-based technologies, not, as specified in the requirements of clause 26.6.3.2, digital alarm notification systems. digital cell phone To meet the growing demand for mobile wireless communications, as well as the introduction of new services on the same network, wireless voice communications no longer use dedicated links to carry voice band frequencies. Today's ubiquitous methods such as 2G and 3G have created a new and different environment in which to operate. Instead of the voiceband, the voice conversation is converted into a stream of bits and inserted into data packets conforming to messaging protocols. Packets are sent to a destination, transmitted to the network, received by the destination, and converted back into an understandable voice quality message. Messages are exchanged over this wireless data network using well-known and defined protocols, for example. B. Global System for Mobile (GSM) communications services, both voice and data, and General Packet Radio Services (GPRS). ) Mobile data network. These protocols are designed to work optimally for the intended application. For example, GSM is used to efficiently establish telephone quality connections that have a reasonable level of intelligible voice quality but may not be good enough for transmitting tones representing data. Data transfer is best handled by GPRS and CDMA when there is an always-on wireless network connection without "dial-up" and large amounts of data can be transferred efficiently. If a digital cellular system is used, a DACT may or may not be used. For example, the digital cellular device can be used as a backup to the DACT or, if properly monitored, as a standalone device. If used, the DACT connects to a digital cellular radio that connects to the cellular network via an antenna. The digital cellular radio is constantly connected to the wireless network and is always ready to try to transmit to a destination address without having to "dial" a number. The radio detects that the panel is trying to place a call by signaling off-hook from the DACT. The radio accepts the audio signaling from the DACT, converts it into a packetized data stream, and sends the packets over the wireless network for transmission to a pre-assigned destination address.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.26.6.3.1.7 In the case of a fire detection system using a single communication path to the monitoring station, consideration shall be given to the exposure to risk resulting from the failure of that path over any period of time. any circumstances. . Some of these outages may be regular and predictable, and some may be temporary. A.26.6.3.1.14 Most communication devices are not listed specifically for fire alarm applications, although they are listed and acceptable under the product standard for general communication devices. A.26.6.3.1.15 This requirement aims to ensure that the communication devices operate on secondary supply for the same period of time as the alarm control unit.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 287

A.26.6.3.2.1.1 Special care must be taken when connecting a DACT to a digital service such as DSL or ADSL. Filters or other special equipment may be required to allow reliable communication. A.26.6.3.2.1.3 To allow the DACT to disconnect an incoming call on the protected premises, the telephone service must be of the type that allows scheduled disconnection. Some centers (step by step offices) do not have scheduled shutdown. A.26.6.3.2.1.3(C) A DACT may be programmed to initiate calls to DACR telephone lines (numbers) in any alternating order. The sequence may consist of a single call or multiple calls to a DACR telephone line (number) followed by transmissions on the alternate route or any combination thereof in accordance with the minimum/maximum retry requirements in 26.6.3.2. 1.3(C). A.26.6.3.2.1.4(B)(6) When two telephone lines (numbers) are used, care shall be taken to assign the primary DACT telephone line (number) to a non-essential telephone line (number) in the protected area area . of the premises so that the primary line used in the premises is not interrupted unnecessarily. A.26.6.3.2.1.5(4) When two telephone lines (numbers) are used, care shall be taken to assign the primary DACT telephone line (number) to a non-essential telephone line (number) in the protected building, i.e. , , that the primary line used in the Facilities is not interrupted unnecessarily. A.26.6.3.2.1.5(7) As call routing requires equipment in a telephone company's switchboard that may occasionally interfere with call routing, a signal shall be initiated to verify the integrity of the telephone line. the DACT call. received, confirmed, checked every 4 hours. This can be done by a single DACT, operational or used only for verification, which automatically initiates and completes a transmission sequence to its associated DACR every 4 hours. Another successful signaling sequence within the same 4 hour period is considered sufficient to meet this requirement. Call forwarding should not be confused with WATS (Wide Range Telecommunications Service) or 800. The latter, distinguished from the former by the area code 800, is a specialized service used primarily because it is free; All calls are pre-programmed to terminate on a landline (number) or leased line. A.26.6.3.2.2.2(A) The scheduled disconnection considerations discussed in A.26.5.3.2.1.3 apply to telephone lines (numbers) connected to a DACR at the monitoring station. It may be necessary to check with the responsible telephone service whether the telephone numbers assigned to the DACR can be reached individually even in the case of a rotating circuit (hunt group). Paragraph A.26.6.3.2.2.2(C)(1)(d) was amended and paragraph A.26.6.3.2.2.2(F) of the TIA was deleted. See page 1.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 288

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.26.6.3.2.2.2(C) Table 26.6.3.2.2.2(C) may be used to determine system load or 90% availability of incoming lines must be demonstrated. Table 26.6.3.2.2.2(C) is based on an average call distribution and an average connection time of 30 seconds per message. Therefore, when it is proposed to use Table 26.6.3.2.2.2(C) to determine the system load when a factor occurs that could increase the DACR connection time to increase the average connection time, the method should be used Alternative load of the determination system. . For some applications, higher (or possibly lower) loads may be appropriate. (1) The following factors can increase (or decrease) the capacity of a hunt group: (a) A shorter (or longer) average message transmission time can affect the paging capacity of a hunt group. (b) The use of slow-scan video with audio monitoring (buzzing) or other similar devices can significantly increase the connection time of a signal and reduce the effective capacity of the hunt group. (c) At certain times, the concentration of active intrusion alarm signals can generate high peak loads. (d) Incorrect programming of the test signals every 6 hours can generate high peak loads. (2) Evidence of 90% availability of incoming trunks can be obtained by the following operational monitoring of trunk activity: (a) Incoming trunks are assigned to hunt groups. When a DACT communicates with the main number of a hunt group, it can connect to any available line in that group. (b) The receiver continuously monitors the "available" status of each line. A line is available when you are waiting for an incoming call. A line may not be available for the following reasons: i. A call is being processed ii. The line has problems iii. Audio monitoring (hearing) is performed iv. Another condition that makes the incoming line unable to answer calls (c) The callee monitors the 'available' status of the hunt group. A hunt group is available when any line within it is available. (d) The recipient issues a message if a hunt group is unavailable for more than 1 minute in 10 minutes. This message is related to the hunt group and congestion level. A.26.6.3.3.1.4 Multiple control points are designed to protect against lightning damage and reduce interference with received signals. Checkpoints are located in two different locations. A.26.6.3.3.2 Originally, the one-way private radio concept was codified for a one-way system that required at least two receiving towers or repeaters. Other similar systems have been developed using this basic principle. This includes the concept of a "mesh network" where one on-site transmitter can have access to multiple nearby transmitters. It is difficult to reliably test

Utility distribution system or engine-driven generator

generator or rectifier motor

California

24 hour battery

inverter or converter

For boxing class 1

inverter or converter

For boxing class 2

inverter or converter

For alarm circuit 1

FIGURE A.27.5.2.5.1(1) Form 4A. Electric company distribution system.

California

generator or rectifier motor

Manual or automatic transmission

engine driven generator

+ -

4 hour battery

inverter or converter

For boxing class 1

For boxing class 2

+ -

For alarm circuit 1

FIGURE A.27.5.2.5.1(2) Form 4B. redundant paths of a mesh radio network without significant system degradation and considerable expenditure of time and personnel. One way to remedy this is to have the mesh networking equipment generate a report on the protected premises or monitoring station showing redundant paths. In addition, mesh system equipment located at the protected site and monitoring station periodically determines the number of operational redundant paths and generates an error signal when the number drops below two paths, as required by clause 26.6.3.3.2. A.26.6.3.3.2.2 It is desirable that each RAT communicate with two or more independently located RARSRs. Previous RARSRs must not share the same facilities. NOTE: All probability calculations required by Chapter 17 must be performed in accordance with the procedures for

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

Utility distribution system or engine-driven generator

auto transfer ac

generator or rectifier motor

engine driven generator

automatic transmission

generator or rectifier motor

72- 289

Antenna

For boxing class 1

− +

For boxing class 2

receptor

For alarm circuit 1

Sender

processor

power supply

Power supply (primary) Power supply (secondary)

− + −

Antenna

FIGURE A.27.5.2.5.1(3) Form 4C. For transponder (two-way) systems, only Polar devices are required. polar devices

polar device

System No. 1

system no. 2 Antenna

receiver the transceiver

signal processing equipment

graphic records

power supply

for power supply

FIGURE A.27.5.5.1.1.1 Type A system receiving networks. Existing communications must take into account the maximum load parameters of specified channels and must take into account that 25 RATs have enabled alarms and that each RARSR receives them. A.26.6.4.1 Signaling information may be sent in encrypted form. The use of logs to interpret these codes is allowed. A.26.6.4.1(4) Any signal that might trigger a different response, e.g. B. Carbon monoxide alarms or mass notification alarms must be individually identifiable so that appropriate response to the event can be initiated. There are more types of alarms and other signals received at dispatchers, which require different responses from dispatchers. These signals may differ from fire signals, but their nature is still related to human safety and must be clearly identified as they indicate a different response.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

FIGURE A.27.5.5.1.4 Wireless repeater system/network

A.26.6.4.2 To expedite the repair process, we recommend storing spare modules such as circuit boards, monitors or printers at the monitoring station. A.26.6.4.3 For all forms of transmission, the maximum time to process an alarm signal shall be 90 seconds. The maximum time to process a heartbeat should be 4 minutes. The time to process an alarm or surveillance signal is defined as the time from when a signal is received until retransmission is initiated or the subscriber is contacted. When traffic levels within a monitoring station system are of such magnitude that responses may be delayed even if they do not exceed the load tables or load formulas in this Code, the use of a method is considered necessary. For example, in a system where a single DACR instrument has a burglar and fire alarm service connected to multiple telephone lines, it is possible that at certain times of the day the fire alarm signals are delayed due to security signals. . opening and closing signs. Once the signal is received, an improved system should work as follows: (1) Process signals automatically, distinguishing between those that require an immediate response from monitoring station personnel and those that only need to be connected to the system. (2) Automatically provide relevant information about subscribers to facilitate team response

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Antenna

72− 290

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

FIGURE A.27.6.3.1.3 Connection cables of the Auxiliary Alarm System and the Auxiliary or Main Station.

Manual fault relay fault circuit

− Coil + Activate Local Energy

FIGURE A.27.6.3.2.2.1(1)(a) Auxiliary fire detection system with local power source: radio or wired. Municipal alarm or radio circuit power relay

termination resistor

Manual

automatically

alarm signal circuit

fault relay

Residual circuit contacts Trigger signal coil − + Residual circuit Local power supply

FIGURE A.27.6.3.2.2.1(1)(b) Local Power Type Supplementary Fire Detection System with Power Relay and Alarm: Radio or Wired.

30 ohms máx. #14

Automatic (water flow only) Manual

signal contacts

Local trigger − + power coil

trip coil

FIGURE A.27.6.3.2.2.1(2)(a) Supplemental branch-type fire detection system (allowed).

A.27.1.8 Auxiliary alarm systems include equipment located within protected premises and equipment that connects them to the public emergency notification system. While the operational requirements relating to external signage are within the scope of Chapter 27, the requirements of Chapter 23 also apply to the operational authority. Consider which options would allow for the greatest system reliability, provided the cost of such an option is not prohibitive. A.27.2.3 It should be recognized that the equipment may be installed in areas subject to higher or lower temperatures, humidity or other environmental conditions that may be more severe than the environmental conditions existing in a typical building. For example, equipment can be installed inside a building in a boiler room, basement, attic and other similar locations where temperatures exceed ambient conditions outside the building. It is recommended that the competent authority consider all possible installation locations and environmental conditions and that the selected equipment be designed to operate under the most extreme conditions to which it may be subjected. A.27.3.7.4.1(2) An example of an organization that certifies a public emergency signaling system is the International Association of Municipal Signs. It should be noted that this reference is for informational purposes only. The product or service information was provided by the manufacturer or other external sources, and the product or service information has not been independently verified and has not been endorsed or certified by the NFPA or any of its technical or service committees. A.27.4.3.3 Non-federal radio spectrum licenses are issued by the Federal Communications Commission. Federal radio frequencies are assigned by NTIA (National Telecommunications and Information Administration). Most frequencies available for licensing

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

(Not allowed)

monitoring station (3) Keep a timed and unalterable record of signals received and responses to those signals by monitoring station personnel.

automatically

Kabelbundener Alarmkreis

breakout circuit

FIGURE A.27.6.3.2.2.1(2)(b) Supplemental secondary fire detection system (not permitted).

Wireless or wireless alarm circuit

signal contacts

termination resistor

fault relay

branch or headquarters

Manual

Additional alarm control unit

Automatic alarm signal switching

Wireless or wireless alarm circuit alarm relay

Patch cord (survivability of at least level 2)

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX A The FCC requires frequency coordination to limit interference from other users. Authorities having jurisdiction must use authorized and coordinated radio frequencies for wireless networks to minimize interference. Outside the United States, similar regulatory bodies provide coordination and licensing, e.g. B. Industry Canada. A.27.5.2.5.1(1) Figure A.27.5.2.5.1(1) shows a Form 4A array. A.27.5.2.5.1(2) Figure A.27.5.2.5.1(2) shows a Form 4B array. A.27.5.2.5.1(3) Figure A.27.5.2.5.1(3) illustrates a Form 4C array. See NFPA 1221, Standard for Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Communication Systems for Emergency Services. A.27.5.5.1.1.1 Figure A.27.5.5.1.1.1 illustrates a Type A receiver network. A.27.5.5.1.4 Figure A.27.5.5.1.4 illustrates the separate functional requirements and power supply requirements for a wireless operation Network system repeater systems, in accordance with the provisions of 27.5.5.1.4. A.27.5.5.3.3 See point A.27.6.6.2. A.27.6.1 There are three types of alarm stations, described in Chapter 27. These are public access station, substation and main station. (1) The station open to the public has manual controls that can be operated by the public. This type of alarm station is usually located outdoors on a pole or building and was formerly known as a street station. This type of station has been renamed as it does not need to be on or near a public road. (2) An auxiliary station forms part of an auxiliary alarm system and can be activated automatically by activating devices in some applications or by a protected location alarm system (Chapter 23). An extension can be inside or outside a building. (3) The master station is a combined station that can be activated manually (public access) and automatically by the secondary alarm system (slave station). The main station is usually located outdoors on a pole or in a building. A.27.6.1.4 If the operating mechanism of a box makes enough noise for the user to hear, then the requirements are met. A.27.6.2 Public access alarm stations were commonly referred to as "roadside stations" in previous editions of the Code. The use of these stations is no longer limited to street locations. A.27.6.2.1.6 When attempting full coverage, it should not be necessary to travel more than one block or 500 feet (150 meters) to reach a box. In residential areas, it should not be necessary to drive more than two blocks or 800 feet (240 meters) to reach a box. A.27.6.2.1.10 The power supply for station identifiers shall be ensured at station lighting locations.

72- 291

the local public electricity company. AC power may be superimposed on metallic fire alarm circuits to light indicator lights or to control or operate fire alarm or other emergency signaling equipment, provided the following conditions are met: (1) Voltage between wire and ground or between a wire and any other wire in the system must not exceed 150 volts and the resulting total current in each circuit must not exceed 1/4 amp. (2) Components such as coupling capacitors, transformers, inductors or coils must have a rated operating voltage of 600 volts and a breakdown voltage of at least twice the operating voltage plus 1000 volts. (3) Fire alarm service must not be affected under any circumstances. A.27.6.3.1.3 Figure A.27.6.3.1.3 shows the interconnecting cabling to support Tier 2 survivability. A.27.6.3.2.2.1(1) The local power grid (see Figure A 27.6.3.2.1) ( a) and Figure A.27.6.3.2.2.1(1)(b)] is galvanically separated from the public emergency notification system and has its own power supply Switching off of the transmitting device is independent of the system Power With a loop cable, whether alarm reception is dropped by the communications center in the event of an accidental break in the circuit depends on the design of the transmitter and the associated communications center equipment (in other words, whether the system is designed to receive alarms via manual or automatic ground controls) In a box-type radio system, receiving alarms distracts the communication center from the proper operation of radio transmitting and receiving equipment. A.27.6.3.2.2.1(2) The branch system [see Figure A.27.6.3.2.2.1(2)(a) and Figure A.27.6.3.2.2.1(2)(b)] is electrically connected to the public emergency notification system and forms an integral part thereof. A ground fault in the auxiliary circuit represents a fault in the public alarm system circuit and an accidental interruption in the auxiliary circuit sends an unnecessary (or false) alarm to the central communication unit. An interruption in the transmitter activation coil is not registered either in the protected object or in the communication center. Even if an initiating device is activated, the alarm is not transmitted, but a disconnection indication is sent to the communication center. If the public alarm system circuit is open while a system connected to the feeder is in operation, the device will not trip until the public alarm system circuit returns to normal, at which time the alarm will be transmitted, unless the circuit auxiliary is first restored to a normal state. Normal state. Certain laws or regulations place additional design restrictions on derived type systems. A.27.6.3.2.2.1(2)(g) See diagram A.27.6.3.2.2.1(2)(b). A.27.6.6.2 The transmission of a message relating to an actual emergency initiated at the same time as the preselection of a test message, which in turn overrides this test message, shall meet the requirements of 27.6.6.2 .

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 292

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

A.27.6.6.7 Examples of priority levels: (1) Priority 1 - Fire (2) Priority 2 - ECS (3) Priority 3 - Medical Services (4) Priority 4 - Monitoring (5) Priority 5 - monitored signals for verification ( 6) Priority 6 - Tamper (7) Priority 7 - Test In addition, within each signal category, additional priorities may be required, such as Fire 1, Fire 2, Fire 3, etc. A.27.7.1.6.2 There may be environmental conditions that require the use of rigid non-metallic lines. A.27.7.3 Not all circuit protection requirements apply to coded radio alarm systems. These systems do not use metallic circuitry. A.27.8.1 The public distress notification infrastructure can be used to facilitate the signaling operation of large areas, as is currently the case for public distress notification in some communities and as has been the case in the past for Public Notices of Socorro. protection. A.29.1.1 It is not the intention of Chapter 29 to cover all equipment, methods and requirements that may be necessary or beneficial for the protection of persons and property against fire. NFPA 72 is a code that includes "minimum requirements". This chapter outlines a set of requirements relating to single and multi-station alarm systems and home fire alarm systems that are considered the minimum feasible and necessary for state-of-the-art average conditions. Smoke detection technology currently available. Smoke detection technologies currently available include ionization smoke detection and photoelectric detection. These detection types are defined in 3.3.269.2 and 3.3.269.4 and explained in more detail in A.3.3.269.2 and A.3.3.269.4. Ionization smoke detection provides a better response to the presence of invisible particles produced by most smoldering fires. Photoelectric smoke detection responds best to visible particles produced by most smoldering fires. Residential and commercial smoke detectors available today use ionization or photoelectric technology, or a combination of both. The use of both technologies generally offers the benefit of a faster response to smoldering and smoldering fires and is recommended for those who desire a higher level of protection than the minimum requirements of this code. Smoldering and lethal fires occur at night and during the day. It is not possible to reliably predict what type of fire will occur or what time of day it will occur. Therefore, preferring one technology over another based on expectations for a particular fire type (predominantly burning or flame) is not a strong basis for selection. While the current expert consensus suggests that neither technology offers an advantage when the nature of the fire is unknown, there is consensus that both technologies can be advantageous as the nature of the fire cannot be predicted.

Based on a recent analysis of extensive fire testing documented by the National Institute of Standards and Technology in its report TN 1455-1_2008, Performance of Residential Smoke Detectors, Response Analysis of Various Technologies Available in Residential Fire Environments, minimum Code, applying any of the technologies is considered to provide an adequate level of protection for the majority of people who are not in direct contact with the fire and are able to save themselves, including the occupants of the space where the fire originated. smoldering fires escaping through the normal route of exhaustion. In situations where individuals cannot save themselves or require a longer period of time to free themselves, greater protection than specified in the minimum provisions of the Code should be considered through the use of both technologies. Such situations might include families when extra time is needed to wake up or help others. While it is true that ionization sensor technology is more prone to false alarms caused by cooking activities, the application of this technology should not be ruled out, especially when proposing the additional protection offered by both technologies. Furthermore, there is no significant evidence that either technology is more susceptible to false alarms from bathroom steam. Rules and guidelines were added in 29.8.3.4 to help minimize false alarms caused by both sources. This is important because smoke alarms that go off due to the frequency of false alarms do not provide protection. A higher level of protection would be achieved if both technologies were applied to all locations required by this Code, including additional locations in other rooms in the home. With that in mind, until smoke alarms specifically designed to prevent false alarms are available, additional locations within 20 feet of a cooking appliance should be minimized, especially for smoke alarms that use ionization technology. While these considerations reflect expert consensus based on currently available test data that allows for sustained feasibility analysis associated with alarm response, extensive fire and false alarm testing of current technologies and analysis of this data also continues. In addition, new technologies are being considered that will allow for better detection response along with greater immunity to false alarm triggers. The work of industry and NFPA Technical Committee leaders to establish regulations for smoke detectors continues. A.29.1.2 An example of an applicable code within the NFPA series of codes and standards is NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. Other regulations, such as local building codes, are other examples to consider. Chapter 29 requirements are intended to apply to installations in the following new and existing locations: (1) Single or two-family residential units. (2) Rooms for hostels and boarding houses. (3) Individual residential units of apartment buildings. (4) Bedrooms, bedrooms and interior rooms

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANNEX A Hotel rooms and suites. (5) kindergartens. (6) Residential occupations for nursing homes and day care centers. (7) Other locations where applicable law, rule or regulation imposes a requirement for the installation of smoke detectors. A.29.1.4 Completed housing projects are the responsibility of the Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD). Installation rules are outlined in the Federal Safety Standards for Construction of Manufactured Homes (available at http://www.hud.gov/offices/hsg/sfh/mhs/mhshome.cfm).

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.29.2 Home fire hazard. In 2005, fire was the third leading cause of accidental death in homes and the sixth leading cause of accidental death overall [Injury Facts, 2007 Edition, National Safety Council]. Eighty-four (84.4) percent of fire deaths in 2007 occurred in residential fires: 68.5 percent in fires in single- and two-family homes, including prefabricated homes; Residential fires accounted for 15.0 percent and other residential fires 0.9 percent [2007 Fire Loss in the United States, Michael J. Karter, NFPA Fire Analysis and Investigation Division]. Approximately half (53 percent) of residential fire deaths (houses and apartments) occurred in fires reported between 11:00 and 11:00 pm. (NFPA Division of Fire Analysis and Investigation, February 2007). More than three-quarters (76.9 percent) of all reported burns occurred indoors; more than half (54.6 percent) in single-family and two-family homes (including prefabricated homes) and more than one-fifth (22.3 percent) in apartments (“2007 Fire Loss in the United States” United States during 2007 ”), Michael J. Karter, Division of Fire Investigation and Analysis, NFPA). It is estimated that, over its lifetime, each home will experience three (often unreported) fires per decade and two fires serious enough to report to the fire department [“Some House Fire Facts About Home Fires”), NFPA - Brandanalyse Division, Fire Journal (Fire Publication), May 1986]. the following three-point program: (1) Minimize Indian fire hazards (2) Provide fire warning equipment (3) Have an escape plan and practice minimizing fire hazards. This Code cannot protect everyone at all times. For example, application of this code may not provide protection against the following three typical deadly fire scenarios:

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 293

(1) Smoking in bed (2) Leaving children home alone (3) Cleaning with flammable liquids such as gasoline However, Chapter 29 can provide adequate fire safety if the Chapter 29 schedule is followed. There are two types of fires that fire detection equipment must respond to. It is a fire with high temperatures and rapid development. The other is a slow fire. Each of them can produce smoke and toxic gases. Family evacuation plan. Very little time usually elapses between the discovery of a fire and the moment when it becomes fatal. This interval can be as little as 1 or 2 minutes. Therefore, this Code requires screening tools that give the family early warning of the development of life-threatening conditions within a short period of time. However, such a warning could be wasted if the family did not plan to leave the house quickly. Therefore, in addition to fire alarm devices, this Code assumes that occupants of the dwelling have developed and practiced an escape plan. Planning and practicing fire situations to get out of the house quickly is extremely important. The exercises must be carried out in such a way that all family members are aware of the actions that must be implemented. Everyone should expect to have to climb out of their bedroom window. It is important to leave the house without opening the bedroom door. House fires are particularly dangerous at night when residents are sleeping. Fires produce deadly smoke and gases that can penetrate sleeping occupants. In addition, the density of the smoke reduces visibility. Most fire victims die from smoke and gas inhalation rather than burns. To warn of a fire, Chapter 29 provides the requirements for smoke detectors (detectors) in accordance with 29.5.1 and the associated Appendix recommends the provision of heat or smoke detectors (detectors) in all remaining major areas. A.29.3.3 This Code establishes minimum standards for the use of fire alert devices. The use of additional alarms or detectors beyond what is specified in the minimum standard is strongly recommended. The use of additional devices may result in a combination of devices (for example, a combination of single or multi-station alarms or a combination of smoke detectors or smoke detectors that form part of a fire/security system and multi-station alarms). existing stations). . While a combination is permitted, each device type must independently meet the code requirements. Compliance with Code requirements cannot be depended on the combination of the following fire detection devices: (1) Single station alarm systems (2) Multi station alarm systems (3) Residential fire alarm system (includes a security/fire system with smoke detectors or smoke detectors) Whenever possible, it is recommended to specify the level of

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 294

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

greater protection. if for example B. Multi-station alarms are added to a population of good single-station alarms, multi-station alarms must be installed to replace all single-station alarms. If a supervised residential fire alarm system is added to a home that has robust multi-station alarm systems, supervised smoke detectors or smoke detectors should be installed to replace the multi-station alarm systems or installed to provide the same required coverage. The responsiveness of photoelectric and ionizing smoke detectors depends on many factors, including the type of fire (smoldering, flaming), the chemistry of the materials involved in the fire, and the properties of the resulting smoke. Many fire safety organizations recommend that consumers use photoelectric and ionization technologies in their home smoke detection systems to allow as much time as possible for potential evacuation in non-specific fire situations. This will not prevent the development of new technologies with equivalent benefits. A.29.3.5 This Code has recommended since 1979 the use of fire alarm evacuation signal with three different time pulse patterns. It has since been adopted as an American (ANSI S3.41, US national standard for emergency evacuation sound signals) and international (ISO 8201, emergency evacuation sound signal) standard. Copies of the above two standards can be ordered from: (1) Website: asastore.aip.org (2) Standards Publication Fulfillment, P.O. Box 1020, Sewickley, PA 15143-9998. Tel: 412-741-1979 For more information about the Acoustic Society of the USA or to learn how and why the three-pulse time pattern signal was chosen as the international standard evacuation signal, contact the Secretary of Standards, Acoustical Society of America, 35 Pinelawn Road, Suite 114E, Melville, NY 11747, Tel. 531-4900215, email:[Email protected]The default fire alarm evacuation signal is a timed pattern of three pulses using any suitable tone type. The pattern works as follows: (1) An "on" period lasting 0.5 seconds ±10%. (2) An "off" period of 0.5 seconds ± 10% for three consecutive "on" periods. (3) A "rest" period of 1.5 seconds ±10% [see Figure A.29.3.4(a) and Figure A.29.3.4(b)]. The signal must be repeated for a time suitable for the evacuation of the building, but not less than 180 seconds. A single tone is allowed at 1 ±10% second “on” intervals, with a 2 ±10% second “off” interval after every third “on” tone [see Figure A.29.3.4(c )]. Minimum repeat time can be stopped manually.

A.29.3.5.2 It is recommended that voice notification be comprehensible, audible and appropriate to the risk. Care must be taken to avoid prolonged silence during the message. Figure A.29.3.5.2(a) to Figure A.29.3.5.2(c) show examples of acceptable combinations of voice commands and an emergency evacuation signal. A.29.3.7 Tactile or low-frequency notification devices, such as B. bed shakers, have been shown to be effective in waking people with moderate to profound hearing loss [NIH CSE Report, 2005; Bruck and Thomas, 2009; Bruck, Thomas and Ball, NFPA RF Report, 2007]. A.29.3.8.1 For example, applicable law, code or regulation may require that a certain number of places where people stay be accessible to people with hearing impairments or other disabilities. A.29.3.8.1(2) It is not the intent of this section to preclude the use of devices that have been shown, through peer-reviewed research, to be safe to wake prisoners with hearing loss as effectively as the devices they use. frequency and amplitude. in this section. A.29.3.8.2 Haptic notification devices such as Devices such as bed shakers have been shown to be effective in awakening individuals with normal to profound hearing loss [Ashley et al., 2005, UL 1971, 1991]. Tactile signaling has been studied and found to be an effective way to alert and notify sleeping people. However, there are many untested variables that can affect the reliability of its performance. Some of the device variables include the size of the device, the frequency of vibration, and the movement or displacement of the vibrating mass. Occupant variables that can affect the reporting of test results and device effectiveness include the person's age, how long they have lived with the hearing loss, and what sleep stage the person is in when the device is activated. Mattress type can also affect the performance of certain touch devices. Mattress variables can include thickness, firmness, memory foam, padded layers, water mattresses, air mattresses, and motionless transfer mattresses. It is recommended that users of touch devices test their perception of device effects. The code requires flashlights and touch devices. Strobe lights can wake sleeping people, check for a fire alarm condition, and serve to warn people when they are not in contact with a touch device. A.29.3.8.2(1) For example, applicable law, code or regulation may require that a certain number of places where people stay be equipped for people with hearing or other impairments. A.29.4.1 Functioning smoke alarms halve the risk of death from reported house fires. Victims who are in direct contact with fire or unable to take measures to escape may not benefit from early warning. For these people, other strategies should be used, such as B. In situ protection

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANHANG A

72- 295

Active Inactive

(B)

(A)

(B)

(A)

fourth hall fourth

(A)

(C)

cycle

time (sec)

Life

References: Phase (a) signal is inactive for 0.5 s ±10% in phase (b) signal is inactive for 0.5 s ±10% Phase (c) signal is inactive for 1.5 s ±10% [(c) = (a) + 2(b)] Total cycle lasts 4 seconds ±10%

FIGURE A.29.3.5(a) Time pattern parameters.

Recreation room in the basement.

Indicates that a smoke alarm is required

FIGURE A.29..5.1(a) Active two-level arrangement

72FC07fA-11-5-1a 17x10,9

idle dining room 0

kitchen

fourth bedroom

G72-24

10 times (sec)

FIGURE A.29.3.5(b) Time pattern imposed on signaling devices that emit a continuous signal while activated.

Life

quarto

FIGURE A.29..5.1(b) A smoke alarm must be located between the sleeping area and the rest of the housing unit and 72-02_fA-11-8-3(a).eps 15 x 8 in each bedroom.

active disabled

10 times (sec)

FIGURE A.29.3.5(c) Time pattern imposed on a single gong strike.

TV room

Comedor Living

kitchen

quarto

G72-88

or an escape or assisted rescue.

Planning and practicing fire situations with an emphasis on rapid house evacuation is extremely important. Firefighting drills should be conducted so that all family members are aware of the steps to follow. All members should consider escaping through a bedroom window in an emergency. It's important to be able to leave the house without having to go into a room. Special rules for the disabled. In situations where the lives of apartment dwellers depend on quick rescue, the fire alarm system should include automatic notification devices directed at people who might come to the rescue.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

quarto

FIGURE A.29..5.1(c) In dwellings with more than one sleeping area, a smoke alarm must be provided in addition to the necessary smoke detectors in the bedrooms to protect each sleeping area. A.29.4.2.3 The normal escape route does not include windows or other means of escape. A.29.4.3 Assumption: The equipment is as follows: (1) maintenance. Good fire protection requires regular equipment maintenance. If the plant owner or person in charge is unable to carry out the required maintenance, a maintenance contract should be considered. (2) The reliability of fire alarm systems. Fire alarm systems in residential units with the following characteristics are considered 95% reliable: (a) Use of control unit (panel). (b) It has at least two independent sources of energy. (c) Supervises the integrity of all initiation and notification circuits.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.29.4.2 Family evacuation plan. Very little time usually elapses between the discovery of a fire and the moment when it becomes fatal. This break can only last 1 or 2 minutes. Thus, this code requires the installation of detection means that alert a family to the development of conditions that could endanger the lives of its residents in a short period of time. However, these warnings are useless if the family has not planned in advance for the rapid evacuation of their home. Therefore, in addition to fire warning equipment, this Code requires the creation of an adequate evacuation plan.

72FC06fA-1 17,3

G72-

72- 296

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Alarm activation: at least eight T3 cycles.

At least two cycles of T3 - repeat as desired.

Ciclo T3

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Voice - maximum 10 seconds

Ciclo T3

(1)

(2)

FIGURE A.29.3.5.2(a) Temporal pattern parameters mapped to 10-second speech.

72FC06fA-11-3-5-2a.eps of typical homes show that detectable levels of smoke 42 x 4.6 precede detectable levels of heat in almost all cases (NBS GCR 75-51, Sensitivity of Detectors and Residential Situation Requirements, 1975; BS GCR 77-82, Detector Sensitivity and Location Requirements for Residential Use, Phase 2, 1977 and NIST Technical Notice 1455-1, Performance of Residential Smoke Detectors, Response Analysis of Different Technologies Available in a residential setting, 2007). In addition, smoldering fires can produce smoke and toxic gases without significantly raising the ambient temperature. Here, too, the results of experiments show that detectable amounts of smoke precede the formation of dangerous thermal atmospheres in almost all cases.

active disabled

G72-241

(A)

(B)

(A)

(B)

(C)

(A)

Ciclo T3

time (sec)

References: Phase (a) signal is inactive for 0.5 s ±10% in phase (b) signal is inactive for 0.5 s ±10% Phase (c) signal is inactive for 1.5 s ±10% [(c) = (a) + 2(b)] Phase (c) the signal may include a voice message. The total cycle time is 4s ±10%

For the above reasons, the protection required by this Code uses smoke detectors as basic equipment to keep people safe to ensure adequate fire protection. Installing additional smoke or heat detectors, 72FC06fA-11-3-5-2b.eps 20 x 13 a higher degree of protection. Adding alarms in spaces that are normally isolated from the required alarms increases the escape time because the fire does not have to reach the highest level needed to expel smoke from the enclosed space for the required alarms. Therefore, it is recommended that the homeowner consider installing additional fire protection devices. However, it should be clear that Chapter 29 does not require additional smoke detectors beyond those listed in 29.5.1. See Figures A.29.5.1(a) to A.29.5.1(d) showing required smoke detectors.

FIGURE A.29.3.5.2(b) Temporal pattern parameters with 1.5 second speech mapping. (d) Transmits alarm signals to a remote monitor and continuously monitored work point. (e) It is tested frequently by the owner and tested by a qualified technician at least every 3 years. (3) Reliability of fire alarm systems without remote monitoring or wireless transmission. Residential fire alarm systems that have all of the above except (d) or systems that use low power wireless transmission to activate devices in residential buildings are considered 90% reliable. (4) Reliability of other systems. A functional reliability of 88% applies to fire alarm systems in residential buildings that have interconnected smoke detectors and whose integrity of connecting devices is monitored. Such systems are assumed to have 85% operational reliability if the connecting medium is not monitored or if the alarms are not connected.

G72-242

Location of required smoke detectors. 53% of deaths from house fires were reported between 11pm and 11pm. m. and 7 a.m. People in sleeping areas may be at risk from fires in the rest of the unit; Therefore, the best location for smoke alarms is in each of the rooms and between the rooms and the rest of the unit, as shown in Figure A.29.5.1(b). More than one smoke detector is required in homes with more than one sleeping area or rooms on more than one floor, as shown in Figure A.29.5.1(c). In addition to smoke detectors outside sleeping areas and in each bedroom, Chapter 29 requires smoke detectors to be installed.

A.29.5.1 All hostile fires in housing units produce smoke and heat. However, the results of large-scale experiments carried out in the United States over several decades using fire units

Alarm activation: at least eight T3 cycles. Optional voice allowed every T3 cycle Minimum two T3 cycles - repeat as desired. T3 cycle with voice

T3 cycle with voice

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Voice - maximum 10 seconds

T3 cycle with voice

(1)

(2)

FIGURE A.29.3.5.2(c) Temporal pattern parameters mapped to 10-second speech.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72FC06fA-11-3-5-2c.eps 42x4,9

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

G72-243

ANNEX Smoking on each additional floor of the house, including the basement. These installations are shown in Figure A.29.5.1(d). The smoke alarm for living areas must be installed in the living room or next to the upper level stairs, or both. The basement smoke detector should be installed near the stairs leading to the upper floor. If the smoke alarm is installed on an open beam ceiling, it must be at the bottom of the beams. The smoke alarm must be positioned relative to the stairway to intercept smoke from a basement fire before the smoke enters the stairway. Do I need to install more smoke detectors? The required number of smoke detectors may not provide reliable early warning protection for areas separated by a door from areas protected by the required smoke detectors. For this reason, the use of additional smoke detectors is recommended for these areas for additional protection. Other areas are the basement, bedroom, dining room, boiler room, laundry room and hallways that are not protected by the necessary smoke detectors. It is not normally recommended to install smoke detectors in kitchens, attics (finished or unfinished), or garages, as these locations may occasionally have conditions that cause them to malfunction.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.29.5.1.1 Uses where smoke detectors are normally required include nursing homes and nurseries. Residential occupancy is set at 3.3.243 and includes single-family and townhouses; pensions or pensions; hotels, motels and dormitories; and apartment buildings. The term nursing home occupancy is defined at 3.3.242 and includes small and large facilities. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, states that a small facility must be a sleeping accommodation for a maximum of 16 residents. Child care, as defined in 3.3.60, is a specific category of child care occupation. It should be noted that any applicable law, code or standard may contain conditions that may affect the application of these requirements. Details can be obtained from the local authority.

quarto

fourth room

Life

Keller

dining room

72- 297

A.29.5.1.1(1) The term dormitory is applied to a variety of occupations including: single- and two-family dwellings; pensions or pensions; hotels, motels and dormitories; apartment building; residential facilities for asylums and shelters; and nurseries. Guest bedroom, as defined in 3.3.120, is accommodation that includes sleeping accommodation. Applies to hotels and rooms. A.29.5.1.1(2) The term dwelling is defined in 3.3.81 and applies to single-family and attached dwellings and dwelling units in multiple dwellings (including condominiums). A.29.5.1.1(5) The term guest suite is defined in 3.3.121 and the term living room is defined in 3.3.143. A.29.5.1.3.1 The requirements do not preclude the installation of smoke detectors in walls in accordance with 29.8.3.3. Some building configurations, such as partitions and open lobbies or large rooms, may require alarms to be positioned so that they do not cover clearly separated 500 sq. A.29.5.2.1.1 Fire detection performance is improved when all alarms are linked together to achieve alarm notification in areas of potential occupancy. In some cases, the connection of alarms is specifically exempt from legal requirements in existing buildings. This approval takes into account the cost of interconnection with resistive wiring. A.29.5.2.2 One of the most common problems associated with smoke detectors and smoke detectors is false alarms, which are usually triggered by combustion products from cooking, smoking or other household activities. Although occupants of a housing unit may anticipate and tolerate the sound of an alarm in such circumstances, these types of devices are not permitted when triggering alarms in family units or common areas that are triggered by smoke generated in the kitchen. very common and inspection authorities should be aware of the potential implications if coverage exceeds the limits of the residential unit A.29.7.2 UL certification for smoke detectors includes two categories of these devices: one for applications where they require susceptibility testing (UTGT ) and another for applications where susceptibility testing is required (UTHA). See requirements for testing these devices in Chapter 14. A.29.7.4 The nominal linear distance is the maximum allowable distance between heat detectors. The nominal linear distance is also a measure of the detector's response time compared to a standard fire test when tested at the same distance. The greater the nominal linear distance, the faster the response time must be. This code only recognizes heat detectors with a nominal linear separation of 50 feet (15 m) or greater.

A.29.7.4.2 A heat detector with a temperature rating slightly higher than the recorded ambient temperature has been specified more FIGURE A.29..5.1(d) A smoke detector shall be located at 72FC06fA-11-5-1d. eps increased by the chance of premature activation of each level and in each room to avoid. 17x14.9

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 298

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Heat detector in situations where fire does not develop. Some areas or rooms in the home may be exposed to significantly higher ambient temperatures than the normally occupied functional rooms. Some examples are unfinished attics, rooms near hot air vents, and some furnace rooms. This information should be considered when selecting the correct temperature rating for fixed temperature heat detectors to be installed in such areas or rooms. A.29.7.7.7 These input and output devices include, but are not limited to, relay modules, signaling devices, telephone dialers, system controllers, heat detectors, and fire alarm triggers. --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

A.29.7.8.2.1 For radio frequency (RF) waves propagating along the earth's surface, the loss of signal power (in dB), LP, can be calculated by applying the following signal loss model signal for propagation on flat ground:

(A.29.7.8.2.1a)

where Dp is the distance between the transmitter and receiver, and hTX and hRX are the heights of the transmitter and receiver, respectively, above the ground. The flat propagation model is a simplification and requires that hTX, hRX 0.0469

at > 0.0445 No suppression

1055

10.550

heat release rate

Q (kW) 105 100

105.500 30,5

Fire near the wall k=2 50

15.2

12.2 Corner kick k=4

9.1

6.1

Shoot away from the wall k=1

3.0

1,5

1.2

0,9

0,6

(Video) Como ACCEDER a las normas NFPA gratis

1 100

1000

10.000 Q (Btu/Seg.) •

Flame height, h f (m)

Height of flame, h f (feet)

0,3 100.000

FIGURE B.2.3.2.4.1 Rate of heat release versus flame height. They grow exponentially until controlled by ventilation or fuel availability, or some form of suppression or fire suppression is initiated. Figure B.2.3.2.5 shows that, due to the exponential growth rate of the fire, there can be a significant increase in the rate of heat release with only a small change over time. B.2.3.2.5.1 After establishing the design objectives and design fires, the designer must determine two points on the design fire curve: QDO and QCR.

Q DO With suppression

Q CR t CR

don't make time

FIGURE B.2.3.2.5 Design intent and critical heat release rates as a function of time. Curve responsible for detection and response delays. This point represents the maximum allowable fire size at which detection must be activated for appropriate action to be taken to prevent the fire from exceeding the QDO. B.2.3.2.5.4 Delays are inherent both to the detection system and to the response of equipment or people who must react to the detection of a fire. Within the delays associated with the reporting system, we can highlight the delay in transporting combustible products from the fire to the detector and the detector response delay time, alarm verification time, detector processing time and response time. Delays can also occur when using automatic fire suppression or extinguishing systems. Delays can be introduced by cross-zone detection or alarm verification systems, response system loading and unloading times, delays in releasing the agent required to evacuate occupants (e.g. CO2 systems), and time required to reach extinction. B.2.3.2.5.5 Residents do not always respond immediately to a fire alarm. When assessing occupant safety, the following points should be considered:

B.2.3.2.5.2 QDO represents the heat release rate or product release rate that produces conditions representative of the design intent. This is known as "designer branding". However, QDO does not represent the exact time when detection is required. Detection should take place as early as possible during the development of the fire to take into account the reaction times caused by the detection and the operating time required to activate the extinguishing or extinguishing systems. From the moment the alarm sounds, there are delays in the detection of the fire, as well as in the response of equipment or people.

(1) Time it takes for residents to hear the alarm (due to sleep or production noise) (2) Time to decode the message (e.g. voice alarm systems) (3) Time until it is decided an evacuation (putting, taking) certain things with you, calling security personnel) (4) Time to move to an exit B.2.3.2.5.6 The fire department or service response to a fire includes a series of different actions that are performed must be performed sequentially before firefighting and fire suppression can begin. These actions must also be considered to properly design reconnaissance systems that achieve the design objectives. These actions usually include the following:

B.2.3.2.5.3 A critical fire rating (CCR) is marked on the

(1) Detection (detector delays, controller delays, etc.)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 312

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

(2) Control center notification (remote, headquarters, local, etc.) (3) Fire department notification (4) Fire department alarm processing time (5) Fire department response time Fire department at department (6) Travel time to incident location (7) ) Access to site (8) Onsite preparation time (9) Access to building (10) Access to fire floor (11) Access to affected area (12 ) Use of extinguishing elements Limiting the availability of fuel will not stop the fire from growing or causing damage until extinguishing has begun. The time required to complete each step of the fire response action sequence must be quantified and documented. When designing a detection system, the sum of the time required for each step during the reaction sequence (tdelay) should be subtracted from the time it takes for the fire to reach the design objective (tDO) to determine the shortest effective time. the size of

(QCR) within the development of the fire, where detection can be made and the system design objective can still be achieved. B.2.3.2.5.8 Specific fire locations and selected design fires should include best and worst conditions and probabilities of occurrence. When responding, it is important to consider different conditions and situations and their consequences. B.2.3.2.6 Information sources. B.2.3.2.6.1 To create a design fire curve, information about the fire properties of the objects involved is required. Information can be obtained from technical material or through small or large calorimetric tests. B.2.3.2.6.2 Some of the information is provided in Figure B.2.3.2.6.2 and Tables B.2.3.2.6.2(a) to B.2.3.2.6.2(e). Table B.2.3.2.6.2(e) Rates of heat release in different furniture [3, 14, 16]

Table B.2.3.2.6.2(a) Maximum heat release rates: materials in the tank

Storage Materials 1. Wooden pallets, stacked, 1½ feet (0.46 m) high (6-12% moisture) 2. Wooden pallets, stacked, 5 feet (1.52 m) high (6% moisture) -12% moisture) 3. Wood Pallets, Stacked, 3.05 m (10 ft) high (6%-12% moisture) 4. Wood Pallets, stacked, 4.88 m (16 ft) high height (6-12% moisture) 5 envelopes, stored 1.52 m (5 ft) 6. Boxes, compartmentalized, stacked 15 ft (4.57 m) high 7. Paper, rolls upright, stacked at 20 ft (6.10 m) high 8. Cotton (also PE, PE Cotton, acrylic/nylon, PE), garments 3.66 m (12 ft) high on shelves 9. Boxes on pallets, storage on shelves, 15 ft - 30 ft (4.57 m - 9.14 m) high 10. Paper products, densely packed in cartons, storage on shelves, 20 ft (6.10 m) high 11 Complete Letter Baskets PE stored 1.52 m (5 ft) high on carts 12. PE trash cans stored 4.57 m (15 ft) high 13. Chu GRP direct vessels in boxes stored at a height of 4.57 m (15 ft) 14. PE bottles packed as per item 6 15. PE bottles in boxes stored at a height of 15 f 4.57 m (t) height 16. PE pallets stored at 0.91 m (3 ft) high 17. PE pallets stored at 1.83 m - 2.44 m (6 ft - 8 ft) high 18. PU mattress, single, flat 19. PE insulation, rigid foam, stored 15 ft (4.57 m) high 20. PS jars, packed per item 6 21. PS drums, stored in 4 boxes, 14 ft (27 m) high 22. PS toy parts in boxes, stacked 15 ft (4.57 m) high 23. PS insulation, rigid, stacked 14 ft (4.27 m) high 24 PVC bottles packed per item 6 25. PP barrels packed per item 6 26. PP film and PE in stacked rolls 14 feet (4.27 m) high 27. Distillates in stacked barrels 20 feet (6.10 m) high 28. Methyl alcohol 29. Gasoline 30. Kerosene 31. Petrodiesel

Growth time (tg) (sec) 150-310 90-190 80-110 75-105 190 60 15-28 20-42

Heat release density (q) kW/m2 Btu/s×ft2 1.248 110 3.745 330 6.810 600 10.214 900 397 35 2.270 200 — — — — .

Sort fast-medium fast fast medium fast * *

40–280

—

fast-medium

470

—

eben

190

8.512

750

media

55 85 85 75 130 30–55 110 8 55 105 110 7 9 10 40 23–40 — — — —

2,837 1,248 6,242 1,929 — — — 1,929 13,619 5,107 2,042 3,291 3,405 4,426 3,972 — 738 2,270 2,270 2,043

250 110 550 170 — — — 170 1.200 450 180 290 300 390 350 — 65 200 200 180

fast fast fast fast * fast fast fast * * * * * — — — —

PE: polyethylene; PS: polystyrene; PVC: polyvinyl chloride; PP: Polypropylene; PU: polyurethane; GRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Note: Heat release rates per unit floor area are for fully enclosed fuels, assuming 100% combustion efficiency. The rise times listed are those that must exceed a heat release rate of 1000 Btu/s to start a fire, assuming 100% combustion efficiency. * Fire growth rate exceeds design data.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX B Table B.2.3.2.6.2(b) Maximum Heat Release Rates from Fire Department Analysis Approximate kW Values

Btu/sec

Medium trash can with milk cartons

105

100

Big barrel with milk cartons

148

140

Armchair upholstered with polyurethane foam

369

350

Latex foam mattress (heat at the bedroom door)

1265

1200

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

materials

Furnished living room (heating with open door)

4217–8435 4000–8000

Table B.2.3.2.6.2(c) Heat Release Rates Per Unit Burning Fuels Outdoors Heat Release Rates Object Accumulation of liquid combustible Spray of liquid combustible Stack of pallets Wood or PMMA* (vertical) 2 ft (0.6 m) tall 6 ft (1.8 m). ) high 2.4 m (8 ft) high 3.7 m (12 ft) high Wood or PMMA* Top of a horizontal surface Solid Styrofoam (vertical) 0.6 m (2 ft) high 1, 8 m (6 ft) tall 2.4 m (8 ft) tall 3.7 m (12 ft) tall Rigid Styrofoam (horizontal) Rigid Polypropylene (vertical) 0.6 m (2 ft) tall 1.8 m (6 feet) tall 2.4 m (8 feet) tall

kW 3291/m2 557/Lpm 3459/m

290 Btu/sec/ft2 surface 2000/gpm flow 1000/ft head

104/m 242/m 623/m 1038/m

30/ft wide 70/ft wide 180/ft wide 300/ft wide

715/m2

63/ft2 area

218/m 450/m 1384/m 2352/m 1362/m2

63/ft width 130/ft width 400/ft width 680/ft width 120/ft2 area

218/mes 346/mes 969/mes

63/ft wide 100/ft wide 280/ft wide

3.7 m Height 1626/m 470/ft Solid Surface Polypropylene (Horizontal) 795/m2 70/ft2 Surface * Polymethyl methacrylate (Plexiglas™, Lucite™, Acrylic). [92B: Table B.1, 1995.]

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 313

B.2.3.2.6.3 Heat release data values from the 40 colorimetric tests performed on furniture can be found in New Investigation of Sprinkler Sensitivity Test Approval [8]. immersion test Best-fit quadratic fire growth curves have been added to the figures. Curve information can be used in conjunction with this guide to design or analyze fire detection systems designed to respond when similar items burn under a flat roof. Table B.2.3.2.6.2 (e) is a summary of the information. B.2.3.2.6.4 In addition to information on heat release rates, the original NIST reports [3] include data on particle conversion and radiation from test samples. This information can be used to determine the threshold size of a fire (rate of heat release) at which the situation is no longer sustainable, or the point at which additional fuel packs can be added to the fire. B.2.3.2.6.5 The Fire Protection Handbook [22], the SFPE Fire Protection Engineering Handbook and Heat Release Rates for Upholstered Furniture Measured with a Furniture Calorimeter [3] provide more information on the heat release rates and heat release rates. . B.2.3.2.6.6 A variety of technical information searches can be performed using a large number of resources, such as: B. FIREDOC, a database for fire documents maintained by NIST. B.2.3.2.6.7 Several design fire curves are part of the "Fastlite" software available from NIST. B.2.3.2.6.8 There are also several test organizations that publish the results of many test data on their websites, including the British Research Establishment (BRE) in the UK, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, and the NIST FASTData Fire Test Database. B.2.3.3 Development and evaluation of possible fire alarm systems. B.2.3.3.1 Once the design objectives, specific locations of potential fires, and fire compartment characteristics are clear, the designer can choose an appropriate detection strategy to detect fires before they reach their critical size (CCR). Some important factors to consider are the types of detectors, their sensitivity to expected fire characteristics, the alarm threshold and duration.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 314

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table B.2.3.2.6.2(d) Characteristics of ignition sources Maximum flame height

typical heat output

flame width

maximum heat flow

mm pulg.

kW/Btu/sec. m2 x ft2

Btu/sec

Burning time (sec.)

millimeter

Em.

0,0047

1200

—

1.1g cigarette (placed on a firm surface without vacuuming) Completely dry

3.7

Conditioned at 50% relative humidity

0,0047

1200

—

3.1

Methenamine Pill, 0.15g (0.0053oz)

0,043

—

0,35

Wooden match placed on a solid surface

0,076

20–30

1.18

0,092

1,59–1,76

Cuna #4, 0.3 ounces (8.5 g)

1.000

0,95

190

—

1.32

Cuna n.º 5, 17 g (0,6 oz)

1.900

1,80

200

—

1,50

Cuna #6, 60 g (2.1 oz)

2.600

2.46

190

—

1,76

Cuna #7, 126 g (4.4 oz)

6.400

6.07

350

—

2.20

Ball-shaped paper bag, 6 g (0.21 oz)

1.200

1.14

—

Ball-shaped wax paper, 4.5 g (solid)

1.800

1,71

—

Ball-shaped waxed paper, 4.5g (loose)

5.300

5.03

—

Double Page Folded Newspaper, 0.78 oz (22 g) (fire side down)

4.000

3,79

100

—

Two-Sided Folded Newspaper, 0.78 oz (22 g) (Lightweight)

7.400

7.02

—

Rolled Double Sheet Newspaper, 22g (bottom light)

17.000

16.12

—

285 g (10.0 oz) polyethylene wastebasket with 12 cartons of milk [390 g (13.8 oz)]

50.000

47,42

200b

550

21.7

200

7.9

3.08

200b

—

Plastic trash bags filled with cellulosic waste [1.2-14 kg (42.3-493 oz)] and

120.000– 113,81– 350.000 331,96

Note: Based on Table B.5.3(b) of NFPA 92B, 2009 edition. a Flame duration of significant dimensions. bTotal burn time greater than 1800 seconds. cMeasured on a simulated burner. dMeasured at a distance of 25 mm. eResults vary widely depending on packing density.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Wooden beds, BS 5852 Part 2

ENGLISH

72- 315

Table B.2.3.2.6.2(e) Rates of heat release in different furniture [3, 14, 16] Coefficient of fire intensity (a)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Test # Item/Description/Mass 15 Metal Cabinet, 91.3 lbs. (41.4 kg) (total) 18 F33 Chair (Two Body Experimental Chair), 64.4 lbs. (29.2 kg) 19 F21 Chair, 28.15 kg (62.01 lb) (previous) 19 F21 Chair, 28.15 kg (62.01 lb) (latest) 21 metal box, 40.8 kg (90.0 lbs) (total) (front) 21 metal box, 40.8 kg (90.0 lbs) (total) (middle) 21 metal box, 40.8 kg (total) (rear) 22 F24 chair , 28.3 kg 23 F23 chair, 31.2 kg 24 F22 chair, 31.2 kg 25 F26 chair, 42.3 lbs. (19.2 kg) 26 Chair F27, 63.9 lbs. (29.0 kg) 27 F29 Chair, 30.9 lbs. (14.0 kg) 28 F28 Chair, 64.4 lbs. (29.2 kg) Chair 29 F25, 61.3 lbs. (27.8 kg) (rear) 29 F25 saddle, 27.8 kg (61.3 lbs) (starter) 30 F30 saddle, 25.2 kg (55.6 lbs) 31 F31 saddle (two pieces), 39, 6 kg (87.3 lbs.) 37 F31 frame chair (two-seat chair)), 89.1 lbs. (40.4 kg) 38 F32 armchair (sofa), 113.5 lbs. (51.5 kg) 39½ in. with cloth, 68.5 kg (151.0 lbs.) 40 1/2-in. with rags, 68.32 kg (150.6 lbs.) 41 1/8 in. plywood cabinet with fabrics, 79.4 lbs. (36.0 kg) 42 1/8" Plywood Enclosure with Fire Retardant Liner (Early Rise) 42 1/8" with Fire Retardant Liner (Late Rise) 43 ½" Plywood Enclosure Repeat 149.08 lbs. ( 67.62 kg) 44 1/8" plywood cabinet with fire retardant latex paint, 37.26 kg (82.14 lbs.) 45 F21 Chair, 62.48 lbs. (28.34 kg) 46 F21 Chair, 28.34 kg (62.48 lbs)

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Growth time (tg) (sec)

Maximum Heat Release Rates Virtual Time (tv) (sec) 10

kW 750

BTU/sec. 711

0,0063

140

950

901

0,0344

0,0326

110

350

332

fast

0,4220

0,4002

190

2000

1897

250

media

0,0169

0,0160

250

237

120

fast

0,0733

0,0695

250

237

100

fast

0,1055

0,1001

140

133

350 400 2000 200 200 100 425 60

medium slow slow medium medium fast slow fast

0,0086 0,0066 0,0003 0,0264 0,0264 0,1055 0,0058 0,2931

0,0082 0,0063 0,0003 0,0250 0,0250 0,1001 0,0055 0,2780

400 100 150 90 360 70 90 175

700 700 300 800 900 1850 700 700

664 664 285 759 854 1755 664 664

100

fast

0,1055

0,1001

100

2000

1897

60 60

Faster Faster

0,2931 0,2931

0,2780 0,2780

70 145

950 2600

901 2466

fast

0,1648

0,1563

100

2750

2608

100 35

fast *

0,1055 0,8612

0,1001 0,8168

50 20

3000 3250

2845 3083

0,8612

0,8168

3500

3320

0,6594

0,6254

6000

5691

fast

0,2153

0,2042

2000

1897

1.1722

1.1118

100

5000

4742

1.1722

1.1118

3000

2845

fast

0,1302

0,1235

2900

2751

100 45

* *

0,1055 0,5210

0,1001 0,4941

120 130

2100 2600

1992 2466

fast guy

kW/seg2 0,4220

BTU/seg3 0,4002

400

eben

0,0066

175

media

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 316

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table B.2.3.2.6.2(e) (continued) Fire intensity coefficient (a)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

At the. Growing Time Item/Description/Mass (tg) (sec) Rating 47 chair, metal frame with reclining backrest 170 medium, foam cushion, 45.90 lbs. (20.82 kg) 48 CO7 chair, 11 25.40 lbs 175 Medium 49 F34 Recliner 15.68 kg 200 Medium 34.57 lbs. 50 Recliner, Metal Frame, Pads 200 Medium Small 36.42 lbs. ) 51 Recliner, molded fiberglass, none 120 Quick Cushion, 11.64 lbs. (5.28 kg) 52 Semi-Plastic 275 Molded Patient Chair, 24.82 lbs. (11.26 kg) 53 Chair, metal frame, upholstered seat and 350 lbs. wood frame, 500 Lenta latex foam pads, 24.69 lbs. 120.37 lbs. kg) 64 Recliner, 1000 Molded Structure Flexible Urethane Slow, 35.23 lbs. (15.98 kg) 66 recliner, 50.75 lbs. (23.02 kg) 76 Rapid 67 mattress and box spring, 62.36 kg 350 medium (137.48 lbs) (rear) 67 mattress and box spring, 62.36 kg 1100 slow (137.48 lbs) (top)

Maximum heat release rates

kW/seg2 0,0365

Btu/seg3 0,0346

Virtual time (TV) (sec) 30

0,0344

0,0326

950

901

0,0264

0,0250

200

190

0,0264

0,0250

120

3000

2845

0,0733

0,0695

0,0140

0,0133

2090

700

664

0,0086

0,0082

280

266

0,0042

0,0040

210

300

285

0,0042

0,0040

0,0086

0,0082

500

1000

949

0,0469

0,0445

1200

1138

0,2497

0,2368

0,0011

0,0010

750

450

427

0,1827 0,0086

0,1733 0,0082

3700 400

600 500

569 474

0,0009

400

379

250 kW

Btu/sec. 237

Note: Different power law curves were used for tests 19, 21, 29, 42 and 67 to model the initial and final spheres of combustion. In examples like these, engineers must select the fire propagation parameter that best describes the sphere of combustion for which the detection system response is designed. *Fire growth exceeds design data.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX B specified application

1600

0,0028 (0,0027) 1688

1400

1477

1200

1266

Fast

1000

0,0065 (0,0062)

Half

1055

800

844

600

633

400

422

200

211

0 0

100

200

300 400 Time (sec)

500

Heat Release Index (kW)

Heat Release Index (Btu/sec)

Fuel fire intensity coefficient [kW/sec2 (Btu/sec3)] 0.0468 (0.0444)

600

FIGURE B.2.3.2.6.2 Quadratic growth rates of heat release.

required in this limit, the expected installation location (for example, distance from the fire or whether it is below the roof), and the lack of incorrect answers in the expected environmental conditions. (See Chapter 17 and Appendix A.) B.2.3.3.2 The reliability of the detection system and individual components shall be calculated and included in the selection and evaluation of the potential fire detection system. A performance-based alternative design cannot be considered equivalent unless the alternative design offers similar reliability to the established design it is intended to replace.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Reliability studies can be part of "RAMS" (Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety) studies. RAMS is a tool used to monitor reliability in "mission critical" systems. These are all factors that must be considered to ensure that the system continues to function for the purpose for which it was designed, as well as ease of use and safe maintenance. RAMS is based on a systematic system task and lifecycle focused process that: (1) helps the customer specify reliability-related system requirements, from an overall mission statement to availability objectives for system components ; systems and subsystems (including software) (2) Evaluates proposed designs using formal RAMS techniques to verify achievement of objectives and lack of objectives (3) Provides a means of making recommendations to designers and a risk register system to record and, finally, "tick" the identified needs. Measurements The technical concepts of availability and reliability are based on knowledge and means to assess: (1) All possible system failure modes between

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 317

(2) The probability (or rate) of occurrence of a system failure mode (3) The causes and impact of each failure mode on system functionality (4) Efficient fault detection and location (5) Efficient system recovery failed system (6) Cost-effective maintenance required over the life cycle of the system (7) Human factor aspects related to safety during inspection, testing and maintenance B.2.3.3.3 There are several methods to assess whether a likely design can meet to predetermined performance criteria. Some of these methods can be found in section B.3. B.2.3.3.4 Potential designs developed in the context of benchmarking may require that the response of the detection system developed using a performance-based approach be compared to standards-based design. It can also be evaluated against acceptance criteria previously established with relevant stakeholders. In addition to the above answer and operational characteristics that should be considered, there may be limitations on the amount of interference, visibility or impact the system will have at the installation site. This is of vital importance in historic buildings, where it is desirable that they go unnoticed and that decorated ceilings are not altered to detail the installation. B.2.3.4 Final design selection and documentation. B.2.3.4.1 The final step in the process is the preparation of design documentation and equipment and installation specifications. B.2.3.4.2 These documents shall contain the following information [25]: (1) Participants in the process: Persons involved, their background, roles, responsibilities, interests and contributions. (2) Scope of work: purpose of the analysis or design, part of the building evaluated, assumptions, etc. (3) Design Approach: The approach decided where and why assumptions were made and the engineering tools and methods applied. (4) Design information: hazards, risks, design, materials, building use, layout, installed systems, occupant characteristics, etc. (5) Objectives and Targets: Agreed objectives and targets, how they were developed, who accepted them and when. . (6) Performance criteria: unequivocal identification of the performance criteria and associated objectives, including the safety, reliability and uncertainty factors applied, and the necessary support for these factors. (7) Specific Fire Locations and Design Fires: Description of specific fire locations used, reasons for selecting and rejecting specific locations, assumptions and limitations.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 318

(8) Design alternatives: description of the chosen design alternatives, reasons for their selection or rejection, rate of heat release, assumptions and limitations. [This step should include the specific design objective (QDO) and critical heat release rate (QCR) used, comparison of results with performance criteria and design objectives, and sensitivity analysis of the alternative. content, fire characteristics, occupants, etc.] (9) Engineering tools and methods used: description of the engineering tools and methods used in the design analysis, including appropriate references (information, data, software version, etc. ), assumptions, constraints, construction calculations, input data, data validation procedures, and sensitivity analysis. (10) Drawings and specifications: Detailed design and installation drawings and specifications. (11) Testing, inspection and maintenance requirements (see Chapter 14). (12) Fire safety management issues: acceptable content and materials for the project to work properly, training, instruction, etc. (13) References: software documentation, technical information, white papers, technical bulletins, fire test results, etc. (14) Critical Design Assumptions – Must include any assumptions that must be maintained throughout the lifecycle of the building for the design to function properly. Critical Design Characteristics: These should include the design characteristics and parameters that must be maintained throughout the lifecycle of the building for the design to function properly. (15) Operations and Maintenance Manual: An operations and maintenance manual should be prepared that clearly states the requirements to ensure that performance-based design components are installed and functioning for their intended purpose. All subsystems must be identified, as well as their functioning and interaction with the fire detection system. It should also contain frequencies

Maintenance and testing, methods and forms. The importance of testing interconnected systems should be detailed (eg, elevator call, suppression systems, HVAC shutdown, etc.) (16) Inspection, Test, Maintenance and Evaluation: The system evaluation requirements and any special procedures or test method should be documented, as well as inspection, testing and maintenance procedures to address the project and any relevant features or systems that need to be evaluated. B.2.3.5 Administration. It is critical to ensure that systems are designed, installed, commissioned, maintained and tested on a regular basis, as described in Chapter 14. The need to evaluate not only the detector and its performance, but also any changes to the following Conditions: ( 1) changes to the risk to be protected (2) changes in the location of the risk (3) introduction of other risks in the area (4) environmental conditions (5) invalidity of any of the design assumptions B.3 Evaluation of the performance of heat detection systems. B.3.1 General. Section B.3. provides a method for determining application distance for fixed temperature heat detectors (including sprinklers) and rotating speed heat detectors. This method is only valid when the detectors are installed on a large flat ceiling. It predicts the detector's response to a fire flame that grows geometrically with a given fire size. This method takes into account the influence of ceiling height, the radial distance between the detector and the fire, the limiting size of the fire [critical heat release rate (CCR)], the rate of fire development and the rate of fire. , duration of fire. Fixed temperature detectors also take into account the ambient temperature and the detector's nominal temperature.

Table B.3.2.5 Time constants (t0) for all heat detectors listed [at a reference speed of 1.5 m/s. (5ft/sec)] Indicated distance

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

METRO

Pastel

53,3 °C (128 °F)

57,2 °C (135 °F)

62,8 °C (145 °F)

71,1 °C (160 °F)

76,7 °C (170 °F)

91,1 °C (196 °F)

Factory Mutual Research Corporation (todas as temperaturas)

3,05 4,57 6,10 7,62 9,14 12,19 15,24 21,34

10 15 20 25 30 40 50 70

400 250 165 124 95 71 59 36

330 190 135 100 80 57 44 24

262 156 105 78 61 41 30 9

195 110 70 48 36 18 — —

160 89 52 32 22 — — —

97 45 17 — — — — —

196 110 70 48 36 — — —

Notes: (1) These time constants are based on a review [10] of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. test methods. and Factory Mutual. (2) These time constants can be converted to Response Time Index (RTI) values using the equation RTI = t0 (5.0 ft/sec)1/2. (See also B.3.3.)

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

APPENDIX B This procedure also allows the spacing of fixed temperature heat detectors to be adjusted to account for variations in ambient temperature (Ta) from standard conditions. B.3.1.1 This method can also be used to estimate the fire size to be reported, given a range of listed heat detectors installed at known spacing, ceiling height and specified environmental conditions. B.3.1.2 The rate of fire spread and the size of a flaming fire can also be determined using this method, as can the effect of ceiling height on distance and response of smoke detectors. B.3.1.3 The methodology contained in this document uses theories of fire development, fire plume dynamics and detector performance. These are believed to be the factors that have the greatest impact on detector response. This methodology does not take into account a number of smaller events that are generally considered to be of low significant impact. References 4, 11, 16 and 18 of Appendix G.1.2.1e discuss ceiling air resistance, ceiling heat loss, radiation from a fire to the detector, heat reflection from a detector to the environment, and heat of fusion. of eutectic materials in the fusible elements of heat detectors and their possible limitations in the method of construction. B.3.1.4 The methodology in Section B.3 does not analyze the influence of ceiling projections, eg B. bars and bars, on the detector response. While these ceiling components have been shown to have a significant impact on heat detector response, a simplified method to quantify this effect has not yet been developed. Adjustments already made to detector spacing in Chapter 17 should be applied to the spray spacings derived from this methodology. Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) programs are available that can help analyze fire and the evolution and spread of heat and smoke, as well as the potential effects of different roof configurations and features, including pitched roofs and rafters. B.3.2 Data Entry Considerations. B.3.2.1 Required information. The following information is required to use the methods in this appendix, whether for design or analysis. B.3.2.1.1 Project. Information needed to determine design includes the following items: (1) Roof height or fuel clearance (H). (2) Size of the fire threshold at which a reaction must be triggered (Qd) or the detector reaction time (td). (3) Response Time Index (RTI) for the detector (heat detectors only) or its certified distance. (4) Ambient temperature (Ta). (5) Detector operating temperature (Ts) (heat detectors only). (6) Rate of change of temperature for thermal detectors with percentage increase (Ts/min). (7) Fuel fire intensity coefficient (α) or fire propagation time (tg). B.3.2.1.2 Analysis. The information needed for the determination.

72- 319

The analysis includes the following items: (1) Roof height or fuel gap (H). (2) Response Time Index (RTI) for the detector (heat detectors only) or its stated distance. (3) Actual installed distance (S) from existing detectors. (4) Ambient temperature (Ta). (5) Detector operating temperature (Ts) (thermal detectors only) (6) Rate of change of temperature for thermal detectors with percent increase (Ts/min). (7) Fuel fire intensity coefficient (α) or fire propagation time (tg). B.3.2.2 Ambient temperature considerations. B.3.2.2.1 The maximum expected ambient temperature for ceilings directly affects the choice of temperature rating on fixed temperature heat detectors. But the minimum ambient temperature that can be measured on the ceiling is also very important. As the ambient temperature in the ceiling drops, more heat from a fire is required for the detector's sensing element to reach its set (operating) temperature. This results in a slower response when the ambient temperature is lower. In a fire that grows over time, lower ambient temperatures will cause a larger fire at the time of detection. B.3.2.2.2 Therefore, the selection of a minimum ambient temperature has a significant influence on the calculations. The designer must decide which temperature to use for these calculations and document why it was chosen. Since the response time of a given detector to a given fire depends only on the detector's time constant and the temperature difference between the detector and room ratings, using the lowest expected ambient temperature results in a more prudent design. In unheated spaces, a record of historical temperatures can be used as an adequate indicator. However, this information may include extremely low temperatures, which occur very rarely, say every 100 years. Given actual design considerations, it would be more appropriate to use an average of minimum ambient temperatures. However, a sensitivity analysis must be performed to determine the impact of ambient temperature changes on design results. B.3.2.2.3 In a centrally heated room or work area, the minimum ambient temperature is approximately 20 °C (68 °F). On the other hand, some tanks have a minimum heater just to keep the water pipes from freezing, in which case the minimum ambient temperature should be 35°F (2°C), although over several months the actual ambient temperature can be much older taller. B.3.2.3 Ceiling height considerations. B.3.2.3.1 In general, a detector will work faster the closer it is to the fire. When ceiling height exceeds 4.9 m (16 ft), it becomes the dominant factor in detection system response. B.3.2.3.2 When flaming combustion begins, an ascending column of smoke is produced. The column of smoke rises

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72− 320

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

by the gases and fumes at high temperatures emanating from the fire. The column is similar in shape to an inverted cone. The smoke concentration and temperature inside the cone vary inversely as a varying exponential function of the distance from the source. This effect is very significant in the early stages of a fire because the cone angle is large. As the fire intensifies, the angle of the cone decreases and the importance of the height effect decreases. B.3.2.3.3 As the ceiling height increases, a larger fire is required to operate the same detector in a similar time. Given this situation, it is extremely important for the designer to consider the size of the fire and the rate of heat release that may be generated before the desired detection is achieved. B.3.2.3.4 The procedures contained in this article are based on data analysis for ceilings up to 30 feet (9.1 m) high. Data has not been analyzed for ceilings greater than 9.1 m (30 ft) in height. The article does not provide guidance for rooms where the ceiling exceeds this limit. [40] B.3.2.3.5 The ratios entered here refer to the difference between the ceiling height and the height of the fuel element involved in the fire. It is recommended that the designer assume the fire is at ground level and use the actual floor-to-ceiling distance for calculations. This leads to conservative design and the actual detector response exceeds the required response speed in cases where fire starts at the surface. B.3.2.3.6 If the designer wishes to consider the potential fuel height of the space, the distance between the fuel base and the ceiling should be used instead of the ceiling height. This optional design only makes sense if the minimum potential fuel height is always constant and the concept is approved by the responsible authority. B.3.2.4 Operating temperature. B.3.2.4.1 The required operating temperature or rate of change of temperature of the detector is determined from the manufacturer's information and is determined during the listing process. B.3.2.4.2 The difference between the nominal temperature of a fixed temperature sensor (Ts) and the maximum ambient temperature (Ta) at the ceiling must be as small as possible. However, to reduce the occurrence of false alarms, the difference between the operating temperature and the maximum ambient temperature should not be less than 11°C (20°F). (See Chapter 17). B.3.2.4.3 When using a combination of detectors that implement fixed temperature and rate of rise heat detection principles to detect a geometrically growing fire, the information in this document should be used for the rate of rise detectors to choose a space. installed, since the rising principle controls the response behavior. The fixed temperature setpoint is determined based on the maximum ambient temperature that can be expected. B.3.2.5 Time constant and response time index (RTI). The heat flow from the high pressure jet to the sensing element of a heat detector is not instantaneous. It happens over a period of time. The thermal response coefficient is needed as a measure of the rate at which heat transfer occurs.

to accurately predict the response of the heat detector. This is now known as the detector's time constant (t0). The time constant is a measure of the sensitivity of the detector. The sensitivity of a heat detector, t0 or RTI, must be determined by a validated test. FM Global research [43, 44, 45] showed that such an association exists and led to a testing procedure to determine the RTI. This test procedure is documented in Approval Standard FM 3210, Heat Detectors for Automatic Signaling of Fire Alarms. Heat detectors should be listed with their RTI so that spacing between heat detectors can be properly determined for different purposes and applications. For older or existing detectors, given the detector space and certified detector temperature (Ts), Table B.3.2.5, developed in part by Heskestad and Delichatsios [10], can be used to establish the time constant for the detector. B.3.2.6 Rate of fire growth. B.3.2.6.1 Fire growth varies according to the characteristics of combustion and the physical configuration of the fuels involved. Once lit, most fires grow in an accelerated pattern. This appendix already contains information on fire growth rates for a variety of fuels. B.3.2.6.2 If the heat release history of a given fire is known, a or tg can be calculated using curve-fitting techniques for implementing the method described in this document. [16] B.3.2.6.3 In most cases the exact fuels and growth rates will not be known. Therefore, engineering calculations must be used to select an a or tg that closely matches fire conditions. A sensitivity analysis should also be performed to determine the effect on the response when there are changes in the rate of fire spread. In some analyses, the impact on response should be negligible. Other cases indicate that a more thorough analysis of potential fuels and specific fire locations is needed. B.3.2.7 Limit the size of the fire. The user should refer to previous articles that discuss establishing fire limits (QDO and QCR) to achieve design objectives. B.3.3 Separation of heat detectors. B.3.3.1 Distance from fixed temperature heat detectors. The following procedure can be used to determine the response of fixed temperature heat detectors when designing or testing heat sensing systems. B.3.3.1.1 The objective of designing a detection system is to determine the detector spacing required to respond to a variety of conditions and targets. To achieve the objectives, the detector response must be activated when the fire reaches a critical rate of heat release or at a predetermined time. B.3.3.1.2 When analyzing an existing detection system, the designer tries to determine the magnitude of the fire at the time the detector is activated. B.3.3.2 Theoretical basis. [26, 28] The design and analysis methods included in Appendix B are the combined result of extensive experimental work and mathematical modeling of the

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ENGLISH

B.3.3.3 Heat detector correlations. Heat transfer to a detector can be described by the following equation: Q total = Q cond + Q conv + Q rad

(B.8)

where total Q = total heat transfer to a detector (kW or Btu/sec). Q cond = heat transfer by conduction. Q conv = convective heat transfer.

dTd / dt = temperature variation of the sensing element (degrees/sec). Q = heat release rate (kW or Btu/s). m = mass of the sensing element (kg or lbm). c = specific heat of the sensing element (kJ/kg×°C or Btu/lbm .°F). B.3.3.3.3 Substituting this into the above equation, the temperature change of the sensing element as a function of time can be expressed as follows:

(B.11) Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Heat and mass transfer processes involved. The original method was developed by Heskestad and Delichatsios [9, 10], Beyler [4] and Schifiliti [16]. It has been recently updated by Marrion [28] to introduce changes to the original correlations analyzed in the work of Heskestad and Delichatsios [11] and Marrion [27]. FM Global [43, 44, 45] did more research. Section B.3.3.2 discusses methods and data correlations used to model heat transfer for heat detectors and velocity and temperature correlations for fires growing at the detector location. Here only general principles are described. More detailed information should be available in references 4, 9, 10, 16 and 28 in G.1.2.13.

72- 321

B.3.3.3.4 Heskestad and Smith [8] proposed the use of a time constant (t) to define the convective heat transfer to the heat sensing element of a given detector. This time constant is a function of the mass, specific heat, convective heat transfer coefficient and area of the element and can be expressed as:

Q rad = heat transfer by radiation. (B.12) B.3.3.3.1 As detection usually occurs in the early stages of a fire, the radiant heat transfer (Qrad) component can be considered negligible. Furthermore, as the heat detection elements of most heat detectors are thermally isolated from the rest of the detector unit and the ceiling, it can be concluded that the conductive part of the heat release rate (Qcond) is also negligible. especially when compared to the convective heat transfer rate. Since most of the heat transfer to the sensing element is by convection, the following equation can be used to calculate the total heat transfer: Q = Q conv = Hc A (Tg - Td )

(B.9)

where: Q conv = heat transfer by convection (kW or Btu/sec). hc

= coefficient of convective heat transfer to the detector (kW/m2 . °C or Btu/ft2 .sec . °F).

= area of the detector element (m2 or ft2).

= Temperature of the fire gases at the detector (°C or °F).

= Nominal detector temperature or setpoint (°C or °F).

B.3.3.3.2 Assuming that the sensing element can be treated as a concentrated mass (m) (kg or lbm), its temperature variation can be defined as follows:

(B.10)

where: m = mass of the detector element (kg or lbm). c = specific heat of the sensing element (kJ/kg . °C or Btu/lbm . °F). Hc = convective heat transfer coefficient for the detector (kW/m2 . °C or Btu/ft2 .sec . °F). A = detector element surface area (m2 or ft2) t = detector time constant (seconds). B.3.3.3.5 As can be seen from Equation B.12, t is an indicator of detector sensitivity. If the mass of the sensing element is increased, the time constant and therefore the response time will also increase. B.3.3.3.6 If we make a substitution in equation B.11 the following happens:

(B.13) Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7. B.3.3.3.7 Research has shown [24] that the convection heat transfer coefficient for sprinklers and heat sensing elements is similar to that for spheres, cylinders, etc. and is therefore approximately proportional to the square root of the velocity of gases passing through the detector. Given that the mass, heat capacity, and area of the sensing element are held constant, the following relationship can be expressed in terms of the response time index (RTI) for a single detector:

Wo:

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

(B.14)

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 322

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Fire detection design and analysis worksheet. [28] Project example 1.

Determine the ceiling height at ambient temperature (Ta) or the height above the fuel (H).

2. 3a.

Determine the fire propagation properties (α or tg) for the expected design fire.

Ta = H = α = tg =

°C + 273 = m kW/sec.2 sec

Set detector properties.

Ts =

C + 273 =

dTd = dt

°C/minute

Design: Define the system targets (t CR or QCR) and perform an initial range estimate (r) and an initial range estimate.

tCR = QCR =

second kW

3b.

Analysis: Determine the spacing between existing detectors and make an initial estimate of response time or fire size during detector response (Q = αt 2).

r=Q=

*1,41 = kW td =

Using Equation B.21, calculate the dimensionless time (t *2ƒ) for the initial heat front to reach the detector.

t * = 0,861 1 + r 2ƒ H t* =

Calculate the factor A defined by the relation to A in Equation B.20.

Use the required response time (t CR ) along with the relationship for t *p in Equation B.19 and p = 2 to calculate the value of a. t*2

t* =

3b. o

5. 6.

7. 8.

If t* > t*, go to step 8. Otherwise, try a new detector position 2 2ƒ (r) and return to step 4. u Calculate the ratio u* using the relationship for U*p in Eq. B. 17.

τ0 = r =

(ΔT2)

himself

= S (m) segment

( ((

2ƒ

e = 2

g Cp Ta ρ0

–1 / (3 + p)

t* =

RC –1/ (3 + p)

H 4 / (3 + p)

u = A 1 / (3 + p) 1 / (3 + p) H ( p – 1) / (3 + p) α u*

tu *2 =

ΔT = A 2 / (3 + p) (Ta/g) α 2 / (3 + p) H – ( 5 – p) / (3 + p) ΔT *2

ΔT = ΔT *2

Use the relationship for ΔT 2 in Equation B.23 to calculate * ΔT 2 u *2. Use the ratio for in * 1/ 2

m1/2 seg1/2

KRT =

ΔT Calculate the ratio ΔT * using the ratio for ΔT*p in Equation B.18.

ΔT*2 =

[

t *2 – t *2ƒ

(0,146 + 0,242 U/H)

[

4/3

ΔT*2 =

(( ) ( ( ( ( [ [ ( ( ( ( ( [ [ [ ( ( ( [

of*

– 0,63

of*

Equation B.24 to calculate the ratio (ΔT * ) 1 / 2

(

2 1/2 ΔT *2

= 0,59

Use the relationships for Y and D in Equations B.27 and B.28 to calculate Y.

3 J = 4

you you *2

HD fixed temperature: Use the relationship for Td(t) – Td(0) in Equation B.25 to calculate the resulting detector temperature Td(t).

Td(t) =

– ΔT (1– e Y ) * + Td (0) ΔT *2 ΔT 2 1– Y

HD Rate Increment—Use the relationship for dTd(t) in Equation B.26.

dTd =

Si: 1. Td > Ts 2. Td < Ts 3. Td = T

Repeat process with design analysis 1. major r 1. major t r 2. minor r 2. minor t r 3. s = 1.41 x r = m 3. t r = sec

tu *2 2

15.

4 3

1/2

of*

2 (ΔT*2)1/2

1/2

ΔT*2

ITR

very t * 2

– ΔT (1– e Y ) (ΔT *2 ) 1/4 dt ΔT *2 * [ (t / t ) D]

1/2

Td(t) =

dTd =

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

FIGURE B.3.3.4.4 Fire detection design and analysis worksheet. [28]

72FC07fB-03-3-4-4.eps 40x50

G72-247

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

(ΔT*2)

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ENGLISH

special design. Sensitivity analyzes should also be performed with the analysis.

where: t = detector time constant (seconds). u = velocity of fire gases (m/sec or ft/sec). u 0 = instantaneous velocity of the fire gases (m/sec or ft/sec). RTI = Response Time Index.

72- 323

B.3.3.4.1 Heskestad and Delichatsios [9] established relationships for temperature and flue gas velocity in a smoke column. These were expressed as follows [26]:

B.3.3.3.8 If t0 is measured at a given reference velocity (u 0 ), t can be determined for any other gas velocity (u) for that detector. The immersion test is the simplest way to calculate t0. It was also related by calculation to the fringe spacing of a detector. Table B.3.2.5 shows the results of these calculations [10]. The RTI value is obtained by multiplying the values of 0 by or 01/2. B.3.3.3.9 It has become common to designate the time constant with a reference speed of u 0 = 1.5 m/sec (5 ft/sec). For example, if u 0 = 1.5 m/s (5 ft/s), a t0 of 30 seconds corresponds to an RTI of 36 s 1/2/m 1/2 (or 67 s 1/2/ft 1 /two ). On the other hand, a detector with an RTI of 36 sec1/2/m1/2 (or 67 sec1/2 / ft1/2) would have a t0 of 23.7 seconds if the measurement were taken at a speed of 2.4 min /s (8 feet/sec). B.3.3.3.10 Therefore, the following equation can be used to calculate the heat transfer to the sensing element and therefore determine the fire-induced temperature of its local environment.

(B.17)

(B.18) where:

(B.19) j

(B.20) (B.15)

Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7. B.3.3.4 Temperature and velocity correlations. [26, 28] To predict the performance of a detector, it is necessary to characterize the local environment created by the fire at the location of the detector. For a heat detector, the most important variables are the temperature and velocity of the gases in the detector. Through an extensive testing program and the use of mathematical modeling techniques, Heskestad and Delichatsios (see references 4, 9, 10 and 16 in Section G.1.2.13) have developed general expressions for temperature and velocity at the detector location . These expressions apply to fires that grow according to the following quadratic relationship:

Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7. B.3.3.4.2 Using the correlations above, Heskestad and Delichatsios [9], and with updates from another work by Heskestad [11], the following correlations for fires with increasing rates of heat release were computed quadratically according to the equation, with p=2. As before [10, 18], the p=2 fire growth model can be used to model the rate of heat release from a variety of fuels. Therefore, these fires are called T-squares.

(B.21) (B.22)

(B.16) where:

(B.23)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Q = Theoretical rate of heat release from a convective fire (kW or Btu/s). a = fire growth rate (kW/sec2 or Btu/sec3). t = time (seconds). p = positive exponent. Several high-pressure jet correlations [41] have been developed over the years, so the designer must also verify their applicability on a case-by-case basis.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

(B.24)

Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7. B.3.3.4.3 The work carried out by Beyler [4] showed that the

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 324

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Fire detection design and analysis worksheet. [28] Project example 10 4 0.047 150

Determine the ceiling height at ambient temperature (Ta) or the height above the fuel (H).

Ta = H =

Determine the fire propagation characteristics (a or tg) for the expected design fire.

a= tg=

3a.

Set detector properties.

Ts = dTd = dt

Design: Define the system targets (t CR or QCR) and perform an initial range estimate (r) and an initial range estimate. Analysis: Space existing detectors and make an initial estimate of response time or fire size during detector response (Q = at 2).

tCR = QCR =

146 1000

Using Equation B.21, calculate the dimensionless time (t *2ƒ) for the initial heat front to reach the detector.

t * = 0,861 1 + r 2ƒ H t * = 1,57

Calculate the factor A defined by the relation to A in Equation B.20.

Use the required response time (t CR ) along with the relationship for t *p in Equation B.19 and p = 2 to calculate the value of a. t*2

t* =

or 3b.

5. 6.

7. 8.

If t* > t*, go to step 8. Otherwise, try a new detector position 2 2ƒ (r) and return to step 4. u Calculate the ratio u* using the relationship for U*p in Eq. B. 17.

DTp in equation B.18.

kW/sec.2 sec. t0 =

°C/min se kW

r=Q=

yourself

3.3

*1,41 = kW td =

(DT2)

tu *2

= S (m) segment

2ƒ

g Cp Tar r0

A = 0,030 2

–1 / (3 + p)

t* = 12,98 2

RC –1/ (3 + p)

H 4 / (3 + p)

u = A 1 / (3 + p) a 1 / (3 + p) H (p – 1) / (3 + p) u*

tu *2 = 0,356

DT = A 2 / (3 + p) (Ta/g) a 2 / (3 + p) H – ( 5 – p) / (3 + p) DT *2

DT = 0,913 DT *

DT *2 =

[

t *2 – t *2ƒ

(0,146 + 0,242 U/H)

of*

2 * 1/ 2 2

= 0,59

((Rh

[

DT*2 = 105,89

of*

– 0,63

(DT)

Use the relationships for Y and D in Equations B.27 and B.28 to calculate Y.

3 J = 4

you you *2

HD fixed temperature: Use the relationship for Td(t) – Td(0) in Equation B.25 to calculate the resulting detector temperature Td(t).

Td(t) =

– DT (1– e Y ) * + Td (0) DT *2 DT 2 1– Y

HD Rate Increment—Use the relationship for dTd(t) in Equation B.26.

dTd =

15.

Si: 1. Td > Ts 2. Td < Ts 3. Td = T

4 3

of*

2 1/2 (DT *2)

1/2

(DT *2)

( ( ( ( [ [ ( ( ( ( [ ( ( [ [ ( ( ( ( [ 1/2

4/3

Equation B.24 to calculate the ratio (DT * ) 1 / 2 2

METRO

( ((

Use the relationship for DT 2 in Equation B.23 to calculate * DT 2 u *2. Use the ratio for in * 1/ 2

98 m1/2 Teil1/2

°C + 273 = 330 K RTI =

DT with reason for Calculate the DT ratio *

1/2

DT *2

ITR

very t * 2

– DT (1– e Y ) (DT *2 ) 1/4 dt * DT *2 [ (t / t ) D]

= 0,66

Y = 1,533 Td(t) = 57,25

dTd =

Repeat the process using Design Analysis 1. r larger 1. t r larger 2. r smaller 2. t r smaller 3. s = 1.41 x r = 4.7 m 3. t r = sec

72FC07fB-03-3-8.eps 40x50

FIGURE B.3.3.8 Fire detection design and analysis worksheet. [28] — Construction example

G72-248 2013 Edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

3b.

283

ºC + 273 = meter

ENGLISH

72- 325

Fire detection design and analysis worksheet. [28] Design review 2 1.

Determine the ceiling height at ambient temperature (Ta) or the height above the fuel (H).

Ta = H =

10 4

Determine the fire propagation properties (α or tg) for the expected design fire.

a= tg=

3a.

Set detector properties.

Ts =

0,047 150 57

°C + 273 = 330 K RTI = 98 m1/2 seg1/2 °C/min

Design: Define the system targets (t CR or QCR) and perform an initial range estimate (r) and an initial range estimate.

tCR = QCR =

second kW

3b.

Analysis: Determine the spacing between existing detectors and make an initial estimate of response time or fire size during detector response (Q = αt 2).

r=Q=

Using Equation B.21, calculate the dimensionless time (t *2ƒ) for the initial heat front to reach the detector.

t * = 0,861 1 + r 2ƒ H t * = 2,26

Calculate the factor A defined by the relation to A in Equation B.20.

Use the required response time (t CR ) along with the relationship for t *p in Equation B.19 and p = 2 to calculate the value of a. t*2

t* =

5. 6.

If t* > t*, go to step 8. Otherwise, try a new detector position 2 2ƒ (r) and return to step 4.

Calculate the ratio u * using the ratio for 2

U *p in equation B.17.

9. 10.

yourself

METRO

9,2 *1,41 = 180 kW td =

2ƒ

g Cp Ta ρ0

A = 0,030 2

–1 / (3 + p)

t* = 16 2

RC –1/ (3 + p)

H 4 / (3 + p)

u = A 1 / (3 + p) 1 / (3 + p) H ( p – 1) / (3 + p) α u*

tu *2 = 0,356

ΔT = A 2 / (3 + p) (Ta/g) α 2 / (3 + p) H – ( 5 – p) / (3 + p) ΔT *2

ΔT = 0,913 ΔT *2

Use the relationship for ΔT 2 in Equation B.23 to calculate * ΔT 2 u *2. Use the ratio for in * 1/ 2 (ΔT 2 )

tu *2

= S (m) segment

( ((

ΔT Calculate the ratio ΔT * using the ratio for ΔT*p in Equation B.18.

6,5 1.523

τ0 =

ΔT*2 =

[

t *2 – t *2ƒ

(0,146 + 0,242 U/H)

of*

2 1/2 ΔT *2

((Rh

4/3

ΔT*2 = 75,01

of*

– 0,63

1/2

(

Use the relationships for Y and D in Equations B.27 and B.28 to calculate Y.

3 J = 4

you you *2

HD fixed temperature: Use the relationship for Td(t) – Td(0) in Equation B.25 to calculate the resulting detector temperature Td(t).

Td(t) =

– ΔT (1– e Y ) * + Td (0) ΔT *2 ΔT 2 1– Y

HD Rate Increment—Use the relationship for dTd(t) in Equation B.26.

dTd =

Si: 1. Td > Ts 2. Td < Ts 3. Td = T

Repeat process with design analysis 1. major r 1. major t r 2. minor r 2. minor t r 3. s = 1.41 x r = m 3. t r = sec

15.

(ΔT*2)

= 0,435

Equation B.24 to calculate the ratio (ΔT * ) 1 / 2 2

)

= 0,59

[

( ( ( ( [ [ ( ( ( ( ( ( [ [ [ ( ( ( [ 4 3 )

1/2

of*

2 (ΔT*2)1/2

1/2

ΔT*2

ITR

very t * 2

– ΔT (1– e Y ) (ΔT *2 ) 1/4 dt ΔT *2 * [ (t / t ) D]

Y = 1,37 --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

kW/sec.2 sec

dTd = dt

3b.

283

ºC + 273 = meter

Td (t) = 41

dTd =

72FC07fB-03-3-8-3-4.eps 40x50

FIGURE B.3.3.8.3.4 Fire detection design and analysis worksheet. [28] — Analysis example 2

G72-249 Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 326

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

The above temperature and velocity correlations can be substituted and integrated into the detector's heat transfer equation. Its analytical solution is as follows:

The velocity of the fire gases is proportional to the square root of the temperature change of the fire gases. With heat transfer to the detector, the change in detector temperature is proportional to the change in gas temperature and the square root of the fire/gas velocity. Therefore, the expected errors maintain the same relationships.

(B.25)

Based on the information above, the errors in predicted temperatures and flue gas velocities should be greater for low-ceiling, fast-moving fires. Example calculations simulating these conditions show errors in calculated detector spacings of the order of a meter or less.

(B.26) where:

(B.27) and (B.28) Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7. B.3.3.4.4 The steps to solve these equations for a design or analysis situation can be found in Figure B.3.3.4.4 [28]. B.3.3.5 Restrictions. [26] B.3.3.5.1 [26] Failure to accurately determine the velocity and temperature of the fire gases flowing through the detector will result in errors in the calculation of the detector response. The figures presented by Heskestad and Delichatsios indicate the errors in the calculated fire/gas temperatures and velocities [10]. Although this appendix is not intended to provide a detailed analysis of these errors, some considerations are made. When using the method described above, the user should be aware of the limitations of the aforementioned correlations, as indicated in reference 26. The designer should also refer to the original reports. Figures with real and calculated information show that errors in T2* can reach up to 50%, although in general they are a much smaller percentage. Maximum errors occur at r/H values close to 0.37. All other numbers for actual and calculated data for a range of r/H indicate minor errors. For the actual change in ambient temperature, maximum errors are on the order of 5°C to 10°C (9°F to 18°F). The biggest mistakes happen when fires are faster and ceilings are lower. With r/H = 0.37, the errors are conservative when the equations are used in a design problem. That is, the equations predicted lower temperatures. Plotting the data for other r/H values shows that the equations predict slightly higher temperatures. Errors in fire/gas velocities are related to errors in temperatures. The equations show that

B.3.3.5.2 The methods contained in this appendix are based on the analysis of test data for ceilings up to 30 feet (9.1 m) high. Data has not been analyzed for ceilings greater than 9.1 m (30 ft) in height. For more information, see reference 40. B.3.3.6 Project Examples. B.3.3.6.1 Definition of project scope. A fire alarm system must be designed for installation in a warehouse without sprinklers. The building has a large flat roof about 4 m high. Ambient temperature is typically 10°C (50°F). The city's fire department indicated it could begin extinguishing the fire 5.25 minutes after receiving the alarm. B.3.3.6.2 Target identification. grant protection to property. B.3.3.6.3 Define stakeholder objectives. Let no fire spread from an initial fuel pack. B.3.3.6.4 Definition of project objectives. Avoid radiation ignition of adjacent fuel containers. B.3.3.6.5 Development of performance criteria. After discussion with the plant's fire department regarding its capacity and analysis of the radiant energy required to ignite adjacent fuel packs, it was determined that the fire would need to be identified and extinguished before reaching 10,000 kW (9,478 Btu/s). . B.3.3.6.6 Development of specific fire sites and fire design. The evaluation of possible storage contents showed that the areas where wooden pallets are stored are more subject to fire risk. B.3.3.6.6.1 Therefore, the site-specific fire starting a pile of wooden pallets is evaluated. Wooden pallets are stored at a height of 0.5 m (1.5 ft). Fire test information [see Table B.2.3.2.6.2(a)] indicates that this class of fire responds to the t2 quadratic equation with a tg of approximately 150 to 310 seconds. As a precaution, the fastest fire growth rate is used. Therefore, we use Equation B.16,

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ENGLISH

72- 327

first test with the required detector distance. For this example, an initial guess of 4.7 m (15.3 ft) is used. This corresponds to a radial distance of 3.3 m (10.8 ft). Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7. B.3.3.6.6.2 Using the growth equation with p = 2, the time after an open flame for the fire to rise to 10 000 kW (9478 Btu/sec) can be calculated as follows:

Ê 1055 ˆ 2 Q = Á 2˜t DO = bei 2 (for SI equations) Ë tc¯

(B.29a)

Ê 1000 ˆ 2 Q = Á 2 ˜t DO = en 2 (for inch-pound units) t Ë c ¯ t DO = 461 seconds (B.29b)

B.3.3.8 Evaluation of potential projects. To evaluate the possible sizing, these values can be entered in the sizing and analysis worksheet in Figure B.3.3.8. B.3.3.8.1 After 146 seconds, when the fire has increased to 1000 kW (948 Btu/sec) and is 3.3 m (10.8 ft) radially from the center of the fire, the fire temperature will increase as per your detector estimate . 57°C (135°F). This forms the operating temperature. If the calculated detector temperature was higher than the controller temperature, the radial distance could increase. The calculation must be repeated until the calculated detector temperature is approximately equal to the trigger temperature. B.3.3.8.2 The final step is to use the final calculated value of r with the equation that relates the distance to the radial distance. This will determine the maximum spacing of installed detectors that will produce a response within the specified targets. (B.33)

Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7. B.3.3.6.6.3 Therefore, the critical heat release rate and detection time can be calculated as follows, assuming that the response is equal to the 5.25 minutes it takes the fire department to respond to the alarm and start draining the water.

tCR = t DO - t respuesta (B.30)

and so (B.31)

Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7.

B.3.3.8.3.1 The following example shows how an existing fire detection system or proposed design can be analyzed to determine the response time or size of the fire at the time of response. The specific location discussed in the previous example is again used, except that the warehouse already has heat detectors. The fire, building, and detectors have the same properties as in the previous example, except for the distance. Detectors are evenly spaced along the ceiling at 30-foot (9.1 m) intervals. B.3.3.8.3.2 The following equation is used to determine the maximum radial distance from the fire axis to the detector:

S = 1,414 ro

B.3.3.7 Development of probable projects. B.3.3.7.1 Fixed temperature heat detectors were selected for the warehouse installation with an operating temperature of 57°C (135°F) and a UL Listed distance of 30 feet (9.1 m). From Table B.3.2.5, the time constant is given as 80 seconds based on a gas velocity of 1.5 m/s (5 ft/s). When used with Equation B.14, the detector RTI can be calculated as follows: RTI = t0u01/ 2 RTI = 98 m½sec½

of RTI = 179 pie½seg½

(B.32) B.3.3.7.2 To start the calculations, a

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

B.3.3.8.3 The following analysis example is presented.

S1,414

r = 6.5 m (21.2 ft) (B.34) where: S = distance between detectors. r = radial distance from the axis of the fire columns (m or ft). B.3.3.8.3.3 Next, the detector response time or fire size is calculated. In the previous design, the fire increased to 1000 kW (948 Btu/s) in 146 seconds when the detector 3.3 m (10.8 ft) away began to respond. Since the radial distance is greater in this example, a

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

tCR = 461 - 315 = 146 seconds

where: S = distance between detectors. r = radial distance from the axis of the fire columns (m or ft).

72- 328

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

slower reaction time and therefore a larger fire. A first approximation of the reaction time is produced in 3 minutes. The corresponding fire size is calculated using the quadratic growth equation B.16, with p = 2 and that of B.3.3.6.6.1:

Table B.3.3.8.5(b) Operating temperature vs. Distance [Qd = 1000 kW (948 Btu/sec)] Operating temperature °C °F 57 135 74 165 93 200

m 4,7 3,5 2,5

abst. weight 15.4 11.5 8.2

Table B.3.3.8.5(c) RTI as a function of heat release rate [S = 9.1 m (30 feet)] RTI

or m½ sec½ 50 150 300 B.3.3.8.3.4 This information can be included in the Fire Detection Design and Analysis Worksheet shown in Figure B.3.3.8.3.4 to perform the remaining calculations. B.3.3.8.3.5 Using a radial distance of 6.5 m (21 ft) from the centerline of the fire, calculate the detector temperature as 41 °C (106 °F) after 3 minutes of exposure. The detector activation temperature is 57°C (135°F). Therefore, the detector response time is greater than the estimated 3 minutes. If the calculated temperature is higher than the drive temperature, a smaller t will be used. As in the previous example, the calculations must be repeated varying the response time until the calculated detector temperature is approximately equal to the activation temperature. For this example, the response time is calculated to be 213 seconds. This corresponds to a fire size of 2132 kW (2022 Btu/s) at the time of reaction. B.3.3.8.4 The examples above assume that the fire continues to grow at the rate t squared until the detector is activated. These calculations do not verify that this happens, nor do they show how the detector temperature changes when the fire is no longer square. Therefore, the user must determine whether there will be enough fuel, as the above correlations do not perform this type of analysis. If there is not enough fuel, there is a chance that the heat release rate curve will flatten or slow down before the rate needed to release the engine is reached. B.3.3.8.5 Tables B.3.3.8.5(a) to B.3.3.8.5(k) provide a comparison of heat release rates, response times and distances when variables characteristic of fires, detectors and spaces are modified from parsing. example. Table B.3.3.8.5(a) Operating temperature vs. Heat transfer rate [S = 9.1 m (30 ft)] Operating temperature °C 57 74 93

°F 135 165 200

Heat Release Rate/Response Time kW/sec. BTU/sec/sec 2132/213 2022/213 2798/244 2654/244 3554/275 3371/275

Heat Release Rate/Response Time kW/sec. Btu/sec/sec 1609/185 1526/185 2640/237 2504/237 3898/288 3697/288

Kuchen½seg½ 93 280 560

Table B.3.3.8.5(d) RTI versus distance [Qd = 1000 kW (948 Btu/sec)] RTI m½ sec½ 50 150 300

Kuchen½seg½ 93 280 560

m 6,1 3,7 2,3

Table B.3.3.8.5(e) Ambient temperature versus heat release rate [S = 9.1 m (30 ft)] Ambient temperature °C 0 20 38

Heat Release Rate/Response Time kW/sec. BTU/sec/sec 2552/233 2420/233 1751/193 1661/193 1058/150 1004/150

°F 32 68 100

Table B.3.3.8.5(f) Ambient temperature versus distance [Qd = 1000 kW (948 Btu/s)] 0 20 38 °C

Ambient temperature °F 32 68 100

Abstância m ft 3,8 12,5 5,7 18,7 8,8 28,9

Table B.3.3.8.5(g) Ceiling height versus heat release rate [S = 9.1 m (30 feet)] Ceiling height m 2.4 4.9 7.3

pastel 8 16 24

Heat Release Rate/Response Time kW/sec. BTU/sec/sec 1787/195 1695/195 2358/224 2237/224 3056/255 2899/255

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

abst. weight 20.0 12.1 7.6

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ENGLISH

ceiling height m feet

METRO

Pastel

2.4

5.8

19,0

4.9

sixteen

4.0

13.1

7.3

2.1

6.9

Distance

Table B.3.3.8.5(j) Fire growth rate vs. Heat Release Rate [S = 9.1 m (30 ft)] Heat Release Rate/Response Time Fire Growth Rate

kW/sec

Btu/Seg/Seg

Lenta tg = 400 sec

1250/435

1186/435

Media Tg = 250 s

1582/306

1499/306

fixed tg = 100 sec

2769/162

2626/162

Table B.3.3.8.5(k) Fire growth rate vs. distance [Qd = 1000 kW (948 Btu/s)] Slow fire growth rate, tg = 400 s

metro 8,2

Spacer feet 26.9

Medium, tg = 250 sec

6.5

21.3

Fixed, tg = 100 sec

3.7

12.1

B.3.3.9 Heat detector response rate distance. B.3.3.9.1 The above procedure can be used to calculate the response rate of heat detectors for design or analysis purposes. In this case, it must be assumed that the response of the heat detector can be reproduced by a lumped mass heat transfer model. B.3.3.9.2 In step 3 of Figures B.3.3.4.4, B.3.3.8 and B.3.3.8.3.4, the user must determine the temperature rise rate (dTd /dt) at which he will operate the detector in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications activated. [Note that the rate of rise temperature detectors listed are designed to activate at a nominal rate of rise of 15°F (8°C) per minute.] The user must use the relationship for dTd(t)/dt in Equation B.26 instead of the relationship for Td(t) - Td(0) in Equation B.25 to calculate the rate of change of detector temperature. This value is then compared to the rate of change that the selected detector must respond to. NOTE: The assumption that heat transfer to a detector can be modeled as a concentrated mass may not apply to rate-of-change thermal detectors. This is due to the operating principle of this class of detectors, as most speed-of-response detectors work when the air in a chamber expands at a speed greater than theirs.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Possibility of output through a hole. To properly reproduce the response rate detector response, it would be necessary to double the heat transfer from the detector body to the air in the chamber and the air flowing through the orifice. B.3.3.10 Rate compensated heat detectors. Index compensated detectors are not discussed in detail in Appendix B. However, a conservative approach to predicting their performance is to use the fixed temperature thermal detector guide provided here. B.4 Distance to smoke detectors in flaming fires. B.4.1 Introduction. B.4.1.1 Unlike heat detectors, searching the list of smoke detectors does not return a "listed distance". Instead, manufacturers recommend a loophole. Since the greatest distance that can be evaluated in the full-scale test lab is 7.6 m (25 ft), it has become standard practice to recommend a spacing of 30 ft (9.1 m) for alarms. smoke when installed on flat surfaces, smooth ceilings can be installed. Spacing between smoke detectors is empirically narrowed to account for factors that may affect response, such as: B. High ceilings, beams or rafters, and areas with high rates of air movement. B.4.1.2 However, the location of smoke detectors shall be based on a study of column flows and high pressure flows at ceiling level, smoke generation rates, particulate changes due to aging and the operational characteristics of the specific detectors used. The heat detector distance information in Section B.3 is based on knowledge of smoke plume and high pressure jet streams. Knowledge of smoke development and aging lags far behind knowledge of heat development. Furthermore, the operational characteristics of smoke detectors in specific fire environments are generally not evaluated and are only available for a few combustible materials. Therefore, the current knowledge base prevents the development of complete design information for the location and spacing of smoke detectors. B.4.1.3 For design applications where predicting the smoke detector response is not critical, the distance criteria given in Chapter 17 should provide sufficient information to permit the design of a very simple smoke detection system. However, if the targets defined for the detection system require a response within a certain time period, optical density, heat release rate or temperature rise, an analysis must be performed. For these situations, information is needed on the expected characteristics of the fire (fuel and its growth rate) and characteristics of the vehicle, detector and compartment. Therefore, the following information is provided in the context of smoke detector response and various performance-based approaches to evaluating smoke detector response.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Table B.3.3.8.5(h) Ceiling height versus distance [Qd = 1000 kW (948 Btu/sec)]

72- 329

72- 330

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

B.4.2 Response behavior of smoke detectors. To determine whether a smoke detector will respond to a given QCR, several factors must be evaluated. These factors include smoke characteristics, smoke transport, and detector characteristics. B.4.3 Smoking properties. B.4.3.1 Smoke characteristics are a function of fuel composition, combustion mode (with or without flame) and percentage of mixture with ambient air (dilution). These factors are important in determining the properties of combustion products, such as particle size, distribution, composition, concentration, refractive index, etc. The importance of these properties in relation to the response of smoke detectors is well documented. [29, 30] B.4.3.2 Smoke detectors are particle detectors even if the detection method uses scattered light, loss of light transmission (light blackout) or reduced ion current. Therefore, particle concentration, size, color and size distribution, among other things, affect each detection technology differently. It is generally accepted that a well-ventilated flaming fire produces smoke with a significant proportion of submicron particles, in contrast to a smoldering fire, which produces smoke with predominantly large and supermicron particles. It is also known that as smoke cools, smaller particles clump together, forming larger particles over time and moving away from the source of the fire. More research is needed to predict the properties of smoke at source and during transport. In addition, response models must be developed that can predict the response of a given detector to different types of smoke, such as smoke that has aged during the passage of the fire to the detector location. B.4.4 Shipping Considerations. B.4.4.1 All smoke detection methods rely on high pressure jets and clouds of smoke moving from the fire location to the detector. Several considerations must be made during transport time, including changes in smoke properties that occur with time and distance from the source and the time of transport of smoke from the source to the detector. B.4.4.2 The changes in smoke properties that occur during transport are mainly related to the particle size distribution. Changes in particle size occur as a result of sedimentation and agglomeration.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

B.4.4.3 The transport time is a function of the properties of the travel path from the source to the detector. Important features to consider include ceiling height and configuration (eg, sloped or beamed), intermediate barriers such as doors or beams, and dilution and buoyancy effects such as bedding that can slow or stop growth. B.4.4.4 In smoldering fires, thermal energy provides the energy needed to transport the smoke particles to the sensors. However, in the context of smoke detection, the energy (heat) release rate is generally small and the fire propagation rate is slow. Consequently, other factors will be reflected such as ambient airflow from HVAC systems, uneven solar heating of the structure and cooling of the structure.

Wind can have a significant impact on the movement of smoke particles towards the sensor when dealing with low power fires. B.4.4.5 In the early stages of progressive fire development, the same internal environmental influences, eg. B. Ambient airflow from HVAC systems, uneven solar heating of the structure, and wind cooling of the structure have a major influence on smoke transport. This is especially important in rooms with high ceilings. Overcoming these effects in the indoor environment requires a greater release of thermal energy from the fire. Because the fire must reach a sufficiently high level of heat release before it can overcome the air currents in the room and move the moisture towards the detectors mounted in the ceiling, the use of smaller moisture detectors would not improve significantly your answer. Therefore, when considering ceiling height only, a smoke detector spacing of less than 30 ft (9.1 m) would not be warranted, except where engineering analysis indicates the possibility of additional benefit. Other design features should also be considered. (See the relevant sections in Chapter 17 for a discussion of smoke detectors and their use to control the spread of smoke.) B.4.5 Smoke dilution. Smoke dilution reduces the amount of smoke per unit volume of air reaching the detector. Dilution typically occurs due to air entrapment in ceiling plumes or smoke plumes, or impact from HVAC systems. Forced ventilation systems with high air exchange rates are often of greatest concern, especially in the early stages of fire development when the smoke rate and plume velocity are low. The air currents of the inlet and outlet vents can create different patterns of air movement within a space that can remove the moisture from the detectors outside these paths or prevent the air from entering a detector that is directly on the path donate. [26] Currently, there are no quantitative methods to calculate smoke dilution or airflow incidence over smoke detector locations. Therefore, these factors must be analyzed qualitatively. The designer must understand that the effects of airflow increase as the fire size at detection (QCR) decreases. Depending on the application, it may be useful for the designer to obtain airflow and velocity profiles within the room or even to perform small scale smoke tests under various conditions to aid in the design of the system at that time. B.4.6 Stratification. B.4.6.1 The possibility of smoke stratification is another issue in detector design and response analysis. This is an issue of great concern with regard to the detection of low energy fires and fires in rooms with high ceilings. B.4.6.2 The upward movement of smoke in the smoke column depends on the smoke suspended in the surrounding air. Stratification occurs when smoke or hot gases from a fire do not rise due to the lack of buoyancy of smoke detectors mounted at a certain height (usually on the ceiling). This phenomenon occurs due to the continuous drag of cooler air inside the column of fire as it rises, which

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ANNEX B, which cools the column fumes and gases. Column cooling causes a reduction in buoyancy. Eventually, the column cools to a point where its temperature equals that of the surrounding air and its buoyancy drops to zero. Once this equilibrium point is reached, the smoke stops rising and forms a blanket that must maintain its height above the fire, regardless of the ceiling height, until the fire provides enough additional thermal energy to raise the blanket due to greater buoyancy. The maximum height to which the column of liquid (smoke) rises, especially in the early stages of a fire, depends on the rate of convective heat release from the fire and the ambient temperature of the room.

Case 2. Ambient air in a room has a constant, uniform temperature gradient (temperature change per unit height) from floor to ceiling. This is common in industrial and storage facilities that are typically unmanned. The middle layer analysis is shown in Figure B.4.6.3(b). The center column temperatures of the two fires, 1000 kW (948 Btu/s) and 2000 kW (1896 Btu/s), are plotted based on the correlation calculations discussed in this section. In case 1, a step function is used to show a temperature change of 30 °C/m (16.5 °F/ft) at 15 m (49.2 ft) above the ground, since the top of the lobby does not have air conditioning. Case 2 is arbitrarily assumed to have a temperature gradient of 1.5 °C/m (0.82 °F/ft) in an atrium with a ceiling height of 20 m (65.6 ft).

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

B.4.6.3.1 Rooms with stepped function temperature gradient. When the indoor air temperature shows a discrete change in height above ground level, the potential for stratification can be assessed using the column centerline temperature correlation. When the column centerline temperature equals the ambient temperature, the column stops rising, loses its upward force, and stratifies at that height. The column centerline temperature can be calculated using the following equation:

Temperature Profile: Autumn 1 Temperature Profile: Autumn 2

FIGURE B.4.6.3(a) Pre-fire temperature profiles.

200 (392) Temperature, °C (°F)

Case 1. The ambient temperature is relatively constant up to an altitude above which there is a layer of warm air of uniform temperature. This situation can occur when the area above a mall, atrium, or other large space is unoccupied and without air conditioning.

(Video) Normas NFPA gratis - ¿Cómo acceder?

Tc = column centerline temperature (°C or °F) Qc = convection component of the heat release rate of a fire (kW or Btu/s). z = height above the top of the corresponding fuel pack (m or ft).

temperature gradient. Stufenfunktion Columna, 1000 kW (948 Btu/sec) Columna, 2000 kW (1896 Btu/sec)

150 (302) 100 (212) 50 (122) 0 5 (16,4)

10 (32,8)

15 (49,2)

20 (65,6)

Altitude, m (pes)

FIGURE B.4.6.3(b) Indoor air temperature profiles and smoke columns with potential for interstitial stratification. 111 (200)

Temperature change, °C (°F)

B.4.6.3 As warm air rises, there is often a temperature gradient across the compartment. Cases when the air temperature in the upper part of the room before ignition is higher than in the lower part are of particular interest. This can happen due to solar charging in places where roofs contain glass materials. There are calculation methods for assessing the stratification potential in the following two cases, described in Figure B.4.6.3(a).

72- 331

The fire protection classes given are given as total heat release rates, not convective heat release rates.

83.3 (150) 106 kW (100 Btu/s) 264 kW (250 Btu/s) 528 kW (500 Btu/s) 791 kW (750 Btu/s) 1055 kW (1000 Btu/s)

55,0 (100)

27,6 (50)

0 (0) 0 2 / 3 −5 / 3 Tc c = 25 Q c2 / 3z −5 / 3

Tc = 25Q

+ 20 +(for SI units) SI) 20 (for SI units)

2 / 3 −5 / 32 / 3 −5 / 3 c c

(B.35a)

+ 70 (for inch-pound units) Tc = 316TQ = c 316 z Q +z70 (for inch-pound units) (B.35b) where:

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

7,6 (25)

15,2 (50)

22,9 (75)

30,5 (100)

38,1 (125)

45,7 (150)

53,3 61,0 (175) (200)

Maximum smoke lift height, m (ft)

FIGURE B.4.6.3.2.2 Temperature change and maximum smoke rise height for a given fire size.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 332

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table B.4.7.4.3 Optical Density Values in Response to Flaming Fires [18] Optical Density in Response Dur(m-1) Material Wooden Storage Boxes Cotton Fabric Polyurethane Foam PVC Variation

Hard (Cake-1)

ionization 0.016

Photocell 0.049

0,002 0,164 0,328

0,026 0,164 0,328

Ionization 0.005 0.0005 0.05 0.1 200:1

Photocell 0.015

Transparent Relative Smoke Color

0,008 0,05 0,1 12,5:1

light dark dark

Table B.4.7.5.1 Relationship between optical density and temperature increase Du/DT [(m°C)-1]

Du/DT [(pie°F)-1]

Material

representative value

range of values

Wood (sweet pine, 5% damp) Cotton (unbleached muslin cloth) Paper (in the trash can)

1.20E-03

Polyurethane foam Polyester fiber (bed pad) PVC (cable insulation) PU foam (chair pad) medium

range of values

8.9E-4–3.2E-3

Representative value 2.00E-04

1.5E–5.5E-4

Maximum: Minimum 3.7:1

5.9E-4/1.2E-3

3.0E-4–1.8E-3

1.0E-04/2.0–4

5.0E-5–3.0E-4

6:1

1.80E-03

Information not available 1.2E-2–3.2E-2 Information not available 5.9E-3–5.9E-2

3.00E-04

Information not available 2.0E-3–5.5E-3 Information not available 1.0E-3–1.0E-2

—

2.40E-03 1.80E-02 3.0E-2/5.9E-2 7.70E-02 2.10E-02

−3 / 8

(for SI units)

−3 / 8

⎛ ΔT−03 /⎞8 Z m = 5.54 Q c⎛1/Δ4 T ⎜ ⎞ ⎟ (for SI units) 1/ 4 ⎠ Z m = 14.7 Q c ⎜ ⎝ 0dZ inch-pound units) ⎟ ( for ⎝ dZ ⎠

(B.36a)

−3 / 8

⎛ ΔT ⎞ Z m = 14.7 Q c1/ 4 ⎜ 0 ⎟ (for inches-pound units) ⎝ dZ ⎠

3.00E-03

Information not available 3.0E-4 - 7.7E-2

B.4.6.3.2 Spaces with a Linear Temperature Gradient To determine if rising smoke or heat from an axisymmetric fire column is stratifying below the detectors, the following equation can be applied where the ambient temperature increases linearly at a higher altitude at a rate: ⎛ ΔT ⎞ Z m = 5.54 Q c1/ 4 ⎜ 0 ⎟ ⎝ dZ ⎠

4.00E-04 5.0E-3/1.0E-2

(B.36b)

where: Zm = maximum smoke height above the fire surface (m or ft). ΔT0 = difference between the ambient temperature at the location of the detectors and the ambient temperature at the surface of the fire (°C or °F). Qc = convection fraction of heat release rate (kW or Btu/sec).

1.30E-02

Information not available 5.0E-05-1.3E-2

3.60E-03

10:1 – 260:1

B.4.6.3.2.1 The convection portion of the heat release rate (Qc) can be estimated to be 70% of the heat release rate. B.4.6.3.2.2 As an alternative to using the expression above to directly calculate the maximum height of smoke or heat rise, Figure B.4.6.3.2.2 can be used to determine Zm for specific fires. If Zm (calculated or plotted) is greater than the detectors' installation height, smoke or heat from an ascending fire column is expected to reach the detectors. If the compared values of Zm and the installation height of the detectors are of similar heights, the prediction that smoke or heat will reach the detectors is no longer reliable. B.4.6.3.2.3 Assuming that the ambient temperature varies linearly with altitude, the minimum Qc required to overcome the ambient temperature difference and direct the smoke towards the ceiling (Zm = H) can be determined by the following equation: Q c = 0.0018 H5/2DT03/2

Q c = 0,0018 H 5 / 2 DT03 / 2

Q c = 2,39 × 10 H –5

5/2

DT03/2

3/2 0

(for SI units) (B.37a) (for SI units)

(for inch-pound units)

(B.37b)

Note that the variables are identified in Section B.7.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2,8:1 —

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX B B.4.6.3.2.4 The theoretical basis for calculating the stratification can be found in the works of Morton, Taylor and Turner [15] and Heskestad [9]. For more information on the derivation of the term that defines Zm, see the work of Klote and Milke [13] and NFPA 92, Standard for Smoke Control Systems. (Standard for smoke extraction systems) B.4.7 Detector properties.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

B.4.7.1 General. Once the smoke moves towards the detector, some additional factors become important in determining whether there will be a response. These include the aerodynamic properties of the detector and the type of sensor. Detector aerodynamics refers to the ease with which smoke can pass through the detector housing and enter the unit's sensor. Another important factor is the position of the input part relative to the sensor in relation to the high pressure jet velocity profile. Finally, taking into account the properties of smoke (color, particle size, optical density, etc.), different detection methods (eg ionization or photoelectric) will react differently. Within the family of photoelectric devices there will be variations in the wavelength of light and the diffusion angles used. In the following sections, some of these problems and a number of calculation methods are discussed. B.4.7.2 Resistance to smoke penetration. B.4.7.2.1 For all point detectors, smoke must enter the detection chamber for a trigger to be achieved. This requires additional factors to be considered when trying to estimate smoke detector response, as smoke entering the detection chamber can be affected in many ways, such as mosquito netting, detector chamber configuration, and the relative position of the detector. to ceiling B.4.7.2.2 In an attempt to quantify this situation, Heskestad [32] developed the idea of smoke detector delay to explain the difference in external (Dur) and internal (Duo) optical density of a detector when active. It has been shown that this difference can be explained by the following relationship using a Duc correction factor:

duc =

d (you) dt V

(B.38)

where: L = characteristic length of a given detector design; represents the ease of entry of smoke into the detector chamber d(Du)/dt = rate of increase in optical density outside the detector. V = Velocity of smoke at detector. B.4.7.2.3 Several studies examining this association provided additional information on smoking initiation and associated delays [33, 34, 34a, 34b, 34c, 34d, 34e]; however, the difficulty of quantifying and relating L to different detectors

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 333

on distance requirements it may be of limited usefulness and the critical speed (uc) concept may be more applicable. [21] B.4.7.3 Critical speed. The critical velocity of a smoke detector refers to the minimum velocity of smoke required to enter the detection chamber and activate an alarm without significant delay due to a delay in smoke entry. Alarms can occur at speeds below the critical speed value, but their response can be delayed or require a higher smoke concentration than normally required. Flow through the detector causes a pressure difference between the top and bottom of the detector. This pressure difference is the main force that causes smoke to enter the device. Experimental work has shown this critical velocity to be around 0.15 m/s (0.49 ft/s) for the ionization detectors tested in a specific study. [21] Once velocities were reduced below this level, the smoke concentration outside the detector during an alarm condition increased dramatically compared to smoke concentration levels when velocities were above the critical level. Another study found that measured alarm velocities for photoelectric and ionization detectors in large-scale fire flame tests generally sustained this velocity value with an average of 0.13 m/s. (0.43 ft/sec) and a standard deviation of 0.07 m/sec. (0.23 ft/sec) [46]. Therefore, calculating the critical velocity can be useful for design and analysis. Interestingly, this critical velocity value (0.15 m/s or 0.49 ft/s) is very close to what a smoke detector must respond in the UL Smoke Detector Sensitivity Chamber to be listed. [35] Therefore, the location in the high pressure flow where this velocity is achieved for a given fire and the ceiling height can be taken as a first approximation for detector placement. This is true as long as the roofs are horizontal and flat. Care must also be exercised when using this mapping; Consideration must be given to the potential effects of coagulation, agglomeration and smoke formation within the high pressure stream as it moves away from the fire source and loses its buoyancy. Smoke entry velocity may be present, but the smoke concentration may not be sufficient to activate the detector. B.4.7.4 Smoke color response. Some smoke detectors that use an optical medium for detection respond differently to smoke of different colors. B.4.7.4.1 Manufacturers currently provide little information about the functioning of smoke detectors in their specifications, as well as information on labels on the back of the detectors. This response information only provides nominal response values for gray smoke, not black smoke, and is often provided with a response range rather than an exact response value. This range complies with ANSI/UL 268, the standard for smoke detectors in fire detection systems. B.4.7.4.2 Table B.4.7.4.2 lists UL approved gray smoke response ranges. Previous editions of ANSI/UL 268 include black smoke limits and are also included for comparison.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

Table B.4.7.4.2 ANSI/UL 268 Acceptance Criteria for Testing Smoke Detectors Using Differently Colored Smoke [35] Smoke Color Gray Black

Acceptable response range %/m %/ft 1.6-12.5 0.5-4.0 5.0-29.2 1.5-10.0

B.4.7.4.3 Detectors respond to different levels of optical density, different fuels and different types of smoke. Examples of this can be seen in Table B.4.7.4.3, which contains the response optical density values recommended by Heskestad and Delichatsios [10] based on their tests. Note the large variations in response to materials that produce smoke of relatively the same color, but also the different color smoke that is much more pronounced. It should also be noted that in the Heskestad and Delichatsios test there was an optical density variation in the response values for a given material which is not detailed in Table B.4.7.4.3. The values given in Table B.4.7.4.3 are given as an example of the optical density variation in response, but these values are not necessarily appropriate for all analyses. For example, the results presented for polyurethane and PVC included relatively large and rapidly developing fires, and fires with lower growth rates could lead to lower DO values in the reaction [10]. Geiman and Gottuk [48] and Geiman [46] should provide more detailed information on the optical density variation in response. B.4.7.5 Optical density and temperature. In the case of a flaming fire, the response of the smoke detector is influenced in the same way as with the heat detector by the height of the ceiling and the size and speed of the fire. The thermal energy from the burning fire moves the smoke particles towards the sensing chamber in the same way that it heats the thermal sensor. Although the relationship between the amount of smoke and the amount of heat from a fire is highly dependent on the fuel and its combustion, several studies have shown that the relationship between temperature and the optical density of smoke remains fairly constant within the plume. the roof. close to the column. B.4.7.5.1 These results are based on the work of Heskestad and Delichatsios [10] and are presented in Table B.4.7.5.1. It should be noted that for a given fuel, the ratio of optical density to temperature rise between the maximum and minimum values is 10 or less. B.4.7.5.2 In situations where the optical density at the time of the detector response is known and is independent of the particle size distribution, the detector response can be approximated as a function of the rate of heat released fuel, growth rate of fire, and ceiling height, assuming the above correlations are valid. B.4.7.5.3 When Appendix C of NFPA 72E (out of print) was first published in 1984, a temperature rise of 13°C (20°F) was used to indicate detector response.

Schifiliti and Pucci [18] combined some of the information from Heskestad and Delichatsios [10] to produce Table B.4.7.5.3 showing the temperature rise at the time of the detector response. It should be noted that the temperature rise associated with detector response varies significantly depending on detector type and fuel. Table B.4.7.5.3 Temperature rise for detector response [18]

Material wood cotton polyurethane PVC media

Temperature increase by ionization °C °F 13.9 25 1.7 3 7.2 13 7.2 13 7.8 14

It is also important to note that the values in Table B.4.7.5.3 are not based on temperature measurements made at detector response times, but were calculated by Heskestad and Delichatsios [10] from their recommended values for the optical sensor density . response (Table B.4.7.4.3) and recommended ratios of optical density to temperature rise (Table B.4.7.5.1). Several experimental studies have reported temperature rises after detection as low as 1°C to 3°C (1.8°F to 5.4°F). In particular, Geiman [46] found that in flaming fires, 80% of the ionization detectors studied in large-scale smoke detection tests activated their alarms when the measured temperature increased by less than or equal to 3 °C (5.4 °C). °F). . B.4.8 Methods for calculating the response of smoke detectors. B.4.8.1 General. There are several methods for calculating the smoke detector response. More research is needed in this area to reflect smoke generation, transport to the detector, detector response, and smoke detector performance measurements. Designers need to be aware of the advantages, disadvantages and limitations of these methods, perform sensitivity analyzes and use multiple methods when appropriate. B.4.8.1.1 Method 1 – Optical density versus temperature. B.4.8.1.2 An attempt is made to determine whether an existing fire detection system can detect a fire in a part of a store where cabinets are stored long enough to prevent radiation ignition of adjacent cabinets. The analyzed area has flat and wide coverage, which is 5 m. (16.5 feet) tall. The ambient temperature in the enclosure is 20 °C (68 °F). The compartment does not have a sprinkler system. Cabinets are mainly made of chipboard. Ionization smoke detectors are spaced 20 feet (6.1 m) off center. The design objective is to keep the maximum heat release rate (QDO) below 2 MW (1897 Btu/s) to ensure that there is no radiation ignition of cabinets in the adjacent corridor. There is a fire brigade on site that can respond and start draining within 90 seconds of receiving the alarm. It can be assumed that there will be no more delays between the

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Temperature increase by dispersion °C °F 41.7 75 27.8 50 7.2 13 7.2 13 21.1 38

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72- 334

ANNEX B Time in which the detector reaches its response threshold and notifies the fire department. Given this information, should the current system suffice? B.4.8.1.3 For this example, the following assumptions are used:

Temperature rise during operation = 14°C (25°F) See Table B.4.7.5.3 for the temperature rise during operation of an ionization smoke detector on a wood fire. B.4.8.1.4 Using a quadratic equation, the project response time is calculated as follows: 2 Q DO = αt DO 22 Q DO Q = ααt DO t DO DO =

72- 335

for certain fuels it can be used as an additional method to evaluate the response of detectors. B.4.8.2.2 We will include the following example: The stated design objective for this specific location is to detect smoke from a fire in a 400 g (1.0 lb) polyurethane chair pad in less than 2 minutes. The chair is located in a room measuring 40 m2 (431 ft2). The ceiling is 3 m high. The pad was found to have a stable firing rate of 50 g/min (0.09 lbs/min). It must be determined whether the objective is being achieved. B.4.8.2.3 The total mass loss of the pad in firing for 2 minutes is 100 g (0.22 lb). Therefore, the optical density within the gap produced by the pad can be calculated from the following equation. [5]

(B.39)

2 2000 kW = 0.047 kW/s 22(t DO 2 ) 2 )2 2000 kW = 0.047 kW/s ( t 2000 kW = 0.047 kW/s DO(t DO ) t DO = 210 seconds t = 210 seconds

(B.42)

t DODO = 210 seconds

Wo: 3 3

2 2 TUN TUN

1897 1897 Btu/s Btu/s ==0,044 0,044 Btu/s Btu/s ((tt ))

3 2 1897 Btu/s t == 0,044 210 s Btu/s (t DO )

I KNOW

= 210 seconds

t DO = 210 sec B.4.8.1.5 The time required for fire brigade intervention shall then be subtracted to determine when post-ignition detection should occur. It should be noted that the firefighters' reaction time increased to a safety factor of 30 seconds.

tCR = 210 sec. − 120 sec. = 90 seconds

(B.40)

B.4.8.1.6 Next, the critical rate of heat release at which detection must occur must be calculated:

Dm = mass optical density (m2/g) [26] M = mass (g) Vc = volume of space. D = [(0.22 m2/g)(100 g)]/(40 m2)(3 m) = 0.183 m-1 or where: Dm = mass optical density (ft2/lb) [26] M = mass (lb) M = volume of space. D = [(1075 ft2/lb)(0.22 lb)]/(431 ftv)(9.8 ft) = 0.056 ft-1 B.4.8.2.4 Assume the detector responds to an optical density of 0.15 m-1 (0.046 ft-1), the maximum allowable optical density of black smoke in a sensitivity test [35] of the previous edition of ANSI/UL 268, the detector can be expected to operate within 2 minutes.

2 QCR == α αttCR Q Q CR = αt 2 CR CR

(B.41)

= 0,047 kW/sec. (90 sec.) 2= 380 kW 2

2 CR 2 QCR 90 sec. themselves. = 380 QCR = =00.047 .047 kW/sec. kW/sec.2 ((90 kWkW))= 380

Q CR = 0,044 Btu/s3 (90 s) = 360 Btu/s 2.044 Btu/s Btu/s 33 ((90 Btu/s)) = 2 360 Q Q CR= =0,0044 90 s s = 360 Btu/s CR

B.4.8.2.5 It should be noted that this method is a very simple approach and a number of assumptions have to be made, eg. B. That the smoke is confined to the room, well mixed, and can reach the ceiling and enter the detector. . B.4.8.2.6 The above calculation assumes that the smoke is evenly distributed throughout the room volume. This Vc = πr 2h r

B.4.8.1.7 Using the numbers from the Fire Detection Design and Analysis worksheet, after 90 seconds of fire when the heat release rate is 380 kW (360 Btu/s), the increase in detector temperature is approximately 17°C (30.6°C). F). Therefore, this may be a reasonable approximation to show that the detector will respond.

B.4.8.2 Method 2: Apparent bulk density B.4.8.2.1 Information on smoke properties

FIGURE B.4.8.2.6 Smoke layer volume model.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 336

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

this happens very rarely, but it sets a very conservative threshold. For design purposes, the smoke layer can be modeled as a cylindrical volume centered near the column of fire and with a depth equal to or multiple of the thickness of the high-pressure jet. See Figure B.4.8.2.6.

(B.49) This relation is rearranged to be explicit at t,

The volume of the cylinder can now be substituted into the equation

(B.50) (B.43)

Used as a substitute for (B.44)

This time calculation must be corrected for the delay time caused by the detector's smoke input resistance. Currently, this delay, which is a function of detector design and high-pressure jet velocity, is not quantified in the listing process. Therefore, the designer must calculate the delay due to smoke ingress, te. Therefore, the response time calculation becomes:

To obtain the maximum radius from the centerline of the fire column where a detector response is expected, the nominal optical density criterion of 0.14 m-1 is substituted into the relationship and an explicit relationship for r is obtained. ,

(B.45) --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

It should be noted that the results of this calculation are highly dependent on the assumed layer thickness h. For this reason, the designer must carefully document the value used for the high pressure flow thickness. This method does not assume a maximum velocity through the detector, nor does it allow for a delay due to smoke entry. Finally, a uniform smoke concentration is assumed throughout the volume of the solution. If the selected high pressure jet thickness values are not used judiciously, and if this relationship is used outside the constraints imposed by the assumptions, they can lead to invalid designs. B.4.8.2.7 The optical bulk density method also allows the designer to analyze existing systems. If we accept the assumption that UL Listed smoke detectors respond to an optical density of 0.14 m-1, we can write the following relationship:

(B.46) and therefore (B.47) for a cylindrical volume of solution. Since H(t) = MΔHc and H(t) = (αt3)/3, we can write the relation

(B.48) If we provide compensation, we get the relationship

(B.51) This relationship predicts when the volume optical density reaches the alarm limit of the detector in the solution volume, derived from the detector spacing and an assumed high pressure jet thickness. The results of this calculation, in turn, depend largely on However, the assumed layer thickness of the high-pressure jet is time (t), if the fire can be characterized as t squared, the magnitude of the fire can be calculated using the relation (B.52). Therefore, replacing this relationship with the previous one, the final analytical relationship for the rate of heat release at the time of alarm, Qa, is obtained.

(B.53)

This ratio provides an estimate of the detector's response based on assumptions and selected values or relevant parameters. The calculation cannot be better than the information used to create it. B.4.8.3 Critical Velocity Method. Research shows that a minimum critical velocity is required for smoke to enter the smoke detector's detection chamber. (See B.4.7.3.) This method assumes that when the critical velocity is reached there is a sufficient concentration of smoke in the high pressure gas jet to generate an alarm signal. High pressure jet velocity correlations exist for normal fires and not for t-square fires. However, a T-shaped fire can be modeled as a regular fire sequence for slow to medium fire rates. For UL smoke chamber tests, the minimum flow velocity through the detector is 0.152 m/s (30 ft/min).

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ENGLISH

Correlation is used. Ur must be 0.152 m/s. With this substitution, the relationship becomes: (B.55) This relationship is solved to obtain the maximum distance between the centerline of the fire smoke plume and the detector at which the critical velocity of the fire stream is expected to be the pressure for the convective heat release rate and the ceiling height. B.4.9 Projected Beam Smoke Detection. B.4.9.1 Projected beam smoke detectors are typically used in large open spaces with high ceilings where the use of point detectors is impractical due to smoke stratification issues. In these spaces there is a questionable basis for using the distances already established in Section 17.7. However, beams can be installed in such a way that the smoke column must be retained by at least one beam, regardless of the source of the fire. To apply this strategy, the smoke column divergence is calculated based on the height at which the projection beam detectors are installed. The region of relatively uniform temperature and smoke density in a floating cloud diverges at an angle of about 22 degrees, as shown in Figure B.4.9.1. Another method involves evaluating smoke obstruction by the smoke cloud to determine the light reduction from receiver to emitter of the projection beam smoke detector to determine if the detector can respond. [47]

0.2 standard

FIGURE B.4.9.1 Unrestricted fire smoke plume divergence. B.4.10 Effects of HVAC systems. Historically, the requirement to consider the impact of HVAC systems on the performance of smoke detectors has been reduced to a "three foot rule". However, research under the auspices of the Fire Protection Research Foundation showed that such a simple rule was not enough in many cases. Theoretically, the impact of HVAC flows on smoke detector performance is measurable

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Flow rate and smoke concentration at the detector as a function of fire propagation and HVAC operating parameters. In the case of complex roofs, this often requires the use of computer-aided flow simulation models. One such model is the FDS, developed and supported by NIST - National Institute of Standards and Technology. However, for simple, flat roofs at elevations commonly encountered in conventional construction, the impact of the HVAC system can be estimated using a simplified calculation derived from accepted correlations to determine where a likely problem exists. These simple calculations are not a substitute for a complete modeling scenario, although they have the advantage that they can be easily performed in a short period of time. Air supply and exhaust louvers in ceiling mounted HVAC systems are designed to create specific airflow patterns. The exact shape of the volume and velocity flow profiles is determined by the physical construction of the grid. A business network might have a flow profile as shown in Figure B.4.10. Two cases are considered in this section. The first is when an HVAC system feed acts on a smoke stream that extends to the ceiling. The second is when a backflow from the HVAC system hits a smoke stream that extends to the ceiling. Each of the cases is considered in its limit state to make a worst-case estimate of the resulting velocity at the detector. In the first case, the airflow from the ceiling supply can deflect, impede and dilute the smoke flow towards the ceiling, thus slowing the detector's response. This effect can be estimated by a one-dimensional vector analysis of the velocity generated by the HVAC system versus the velocity generated by the fire. The velocity profile generated by the HVAC supply network is determined by the design of the network and the rate of flow fed into it. The velocity generated by the fire at the detector is an artificial element of the smoke flow that reaches the ceiling. The sum of these two speeds versus the minimum response rate can be used to determine if the smoke flow reaching the ceiling is fast enough for the detector to sound an alarm.

Shipping Airflow Pattern 72FC07fB-04-9-1.eps 20 x 11.6

Return airflow pattern

FIGURE B.4.10 Typical HVAC flow patterns in commercial and corporate uses.

G72-250

In the second case, the HVAC return draws air from the lowest levels of the compartment, diluting the smoke density in the flow that extends to the ceiling close to the HVAC return. This case is much more complex to assess, as

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(B.54)

72- 337

72- 338

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

involves performing a volume flow analysis to determine when return flow to the ceiling-mounted HVAC is distorting the concentration profile of the smoke flow reaching the ceiling to an extent that affects detector response. Unfortunately, smoke detector listings do not include an explicit measurable value of the detector's sensitivity to project fire. B.4.10.1 Mains Effects for Rooftop HVAC Systems. This method employs the recognition that a minimum critical velocity is required for a smoke detector to function reliably. The use of 30 ft/min (0.15 m/s) flow velocity in smoke detector sensitivity tests for point smoke detectors described in UL 268 and 217 has led to the development of state-of-the-art smoke detectors. Points optimized by the aforementioned flow speed. The listing survey determined that when the smoke flow velocity reaching the ceiling is less than the 30 ft/min (0.15 m/s) velocity rating of commercially available spot smoke detectors, their performance begins to deteriorate. harmed. (See point B.4.7.3.)

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

To predict point smoke detector response, we assume that the smoke flow velocity reaching the ceiling at the detector must exceed this critical velocity of 0.15 m/s (30 ft/min) inside the detector. The flow of an HVAC system supply network also creates a flow velocity. If a fire occurs in a space equipped with a ceiling-mounted HVAC supply, the velocity at the detector is the vector sum of the velocity due to the HVAC supply and the smoke flow from the fire reaching the ceiling.

80 pages 40 pages 20 pages 10 pages

1 cake 2 cakes 3 cakes 4 cakes

v = k(PCM)/d 2 (converted to metric units)

FIGURE B.4.10.1(a) Typical HVAC graph of velocity versus flow volume that can be used to describe utility network operation. R.

To estimate the resulting flow rate in a smoke detector, the ceiling supply flow rate is determined based on the grid design, flow rate, and distance from the supply grid. The velocity generated by the smoke stream hitting the ceiling is calculated based on the distance from the column. The worst case boundary condition occurs when the detector is placed where the smoke flow reaching the ceiling is directly opposite the flow of the HVAC system power supply. Consequently, it is assumed that the smoke flow reaching the ceiling is in the opposite direction to the flow leaving the ceiling grate.

FIGURE B.4.10.1(b) Smoke flow reaching ceiling versus HVAC system flow.

Airflow entering a compartment through the HVAC system can be estimated using volume flow and a flow factor related to the flow characteristics of the supply grid. See Figure B.4.10.1(a) which shows an example of such features.

The velocity of the smoke flow reaching the ceiling can be modeled using the critical velocity relation developed by Alpert.

The ceiling grid manufacturer provides a velocity graph showing flow rate versus flow volume for each grid they manufacture. In the United States, these tables generally use conventional units of feet per minute (PPM) and cubic feet per minute (CFM). Since fire safety correlations are usually expressed in metric units, it is necessary to convert the air handling unit volume flow and flow rate to metric units. If the CFM is replaced by the flow volume per unit time, this relationship becomes:

where vr is the velocity due to the grid.

(B.57)

The flow rate at the detector is the sum of the velocity of the smoke flow hitting the ceiling and the ceiling feed grid. As the worst case scenario is one where the fire is located such that the smoke flow reaching the roof is in direct opposition to the utility HVAC system flow, this scenario forms the basis for the analysis shown in Figure B. 4.10. 1(b).

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

(B.56)

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ENGLISH

72- 339

The velocity of the smoke flow reaching the ceiling is derived from the Alpert correlations. (B.58)

Wo:

vd = velocity of smoke flow reaching ceiling at detector Qc = convective heat release, 0.65 Q H = ceiling height r = radius, distance from column centerline to detector All in metric units. With opposing flows, the resulting velocity at the detector is the velocity of the smoke flow reaching the ceiling minus the velocity due to the HVAC power flow. The relation becomes: --`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(B.59)

You can assume that the smoke detector response is as indicated if the value of vd is greater than or equal to 0.15 m/s. So the relationship becomes:

However, the worst-case borderline scenario is one in which the upward velocity is modeled to flow directly opposite that of the smoke flow reaching the ceiling. This boils down to the same supply cap analysis. These calculations are NOT a substitute for Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) modeling. They are limited only to the ceiling heights normally found in commercial construction. In that limited context, they can be used to predict the performance of smoke detectors. B.5 Radiant energy detection. B.5.1 General.

(B.60) If the right side of Equation B.60 exceeds the left side, the airflow from the louver of the HVAC system must not be sufficient to reduce the flow of smoke reaching the ceiling of the column to the ceiling. No smoke detector is expected. On the other hand, if the resulting calculated velocity is below the 0.15 m/s limit, design adjustments must be made to place the smoke detector where the velocity of the smoke flow reaching the ceiling is sufficient to predict the smoke response. alarm. B.4.10.2 Effects of HVAC System Returns. When detectors are located close to the ceiling mounted HVAC system's return air louvers, the airflow to the return air louvers often dilutes and cools the smoke flow reaching the ceiling. This generally delays the response of detectors. Unfortunately, the geometry in this case is more complex. The smoke flow reaching the ceiling moves horizontally across the ceiling, while the flow to the ceiling-mounted return grille moves essentially vertically. Most roof return grates typically have a flow velocity profile that is approximately hemispherical and centered on the centerline of the duct. Figure B.4.10.2 illustrates this flow velocity profile. As the radial distance from the HVAC system return increases, the velocity rapidly decreases, proportional to 4p times the square root of the distance increase. Again, the relative velocity contributions can be used to calculate the relative effect, but not in this case.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

FIGURE B.4.10.2 Velocity profile of a roof-mounted return grid. an explicit sensitivity parameter related to the design fire. Percent obscuration per foot cannot be reliably applied.

B.5.1.1 Electromagnetic radiation. During the combustion process, electromagnetic radiation is emitted in a wide range of the spectrum. The portion of the spectrum in which radiant energy sensor detectors operate has been divided into three bands: ultraviolet (UV), visible, or infrared (IR). These wavelengths are defined with the following ranges: [3] (1) Ultraviolet 0.1 - 0.35 microns. (2) Visible 0.35-0.75 microns. (3) Infrared 0.75-220 microns. B.5.1.2 Wavelength. These wavelength ranges correspond to the quantum mechanical interaction between matter and energy. Photonic interactions with matter can be characterized by wavelengths, as shown in Table B.5.1.2. Table B.5.1.2 Wavelength ranges Wavelength l < 50 µm 50 µm < l < 1.0 µm 1.0 µm < l < 0.05 µm 0.3 µm < l < 0.05 µm

Photonic interaction Coarse molecular translations Molecular vibrations and rotations Valence electron bond vibrations Electron removal and recombination

B.5.1.3 Photon transfer. When a fuel molecule is oxidized during the combustion process, the intercombustion molecule must lose energy to convert.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 340

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

(B.61) where: e = energy (joules) h = Planck's constant (6.63E-23 joule-s) c = speed of light (m/s) l = wavelength (micrometer) [1, 0 joules = 5.0345E +18 (l), where l is measured in microns].

B.5.1.4 Type of detector. The choice of type of radiant energy detection detector to use is determined by the type of emissions expected from the incendiary source. B.5.1.4.1 Fuels that produce a flame, a fuel stream or fuel gases that are part of the reaction with a gaseous oxidizer emit quantum emissions. These fuels include flammable gases and liquids, flammable liquids and solids that contain a flame. B.5.1.4.2 Fuels that oxidize in the solid phase or radiators that emit an emission (sparks and embers) due to their internal temperature emit Planckian emissions. These fuels include carbonaceous materials such as coal, charcoal, wood and cellulosic fibers that burn without a stable flame and metals that have been heated by mechanical action or friction. B.5.1.4.3 Almost all types of combustion produce Planckian emissions, which result from the thermal energy of the fuel mass. Therefore, spark/ember detectors designed to detect these emissions are not specific to any particular fuel. Flame detectors detect quantum emissions resulting from changes in molecular structure and energy state during the gas phase. These emissions are associated only with certain molecular structures. This can result in a highly fuel specific flame detector. B.5.1.5 Environmental influences. The choice of a detector with a radiant energy sensor is also limited by the influence of environmental conditions. The design must take into account the absorption of radiant energy from the atmosphere, the presence of radiation sources other than a fire that may cause false alarms, the electromagnetic energy from sparks, embers or fires to be detected, the distance from the source considered to the fire for the sensor and the characteristics of the sensor. B.5.1.5.1 Space heaters without fire. Most environments contain non-fire emitters that can emit at the wavelengths used by radiant energy detection detectors for fire detection. The designer must perform a thorough environmental assessment to identify radiators that have the potential to cause an inadequate alarm response from radiant energy detection detectors. Since detectors with radiant energy sensors use components

For electronics that can function as an antenna, the assessment should include radio bands, microwaves, infrared, visible, and ultraviolet sources. B.5.1.5.2 Absorption of ambient radiation. The medium through which radiant energy reaches the detector from the fire source has a finite transmission factor. The transmission factor is often quantified by its reciprocal absorbance. Absorption by atmospheric elements varies with wavelength. Gaseous species absorb at the same wavelength as they emit. Particle species can transmit, reflect or absorb radiant emissions, and the fraction absorbed is expressed as the reciprocal of their emissivity, ε. B.5.1.5.3 Contamination of optical surfaces. Radiant energy can be absorbed or reflected by materials that contaminate the optical surfaces of detectors with radiant energy sensors. The designer must assess the possibility of surface contamination and take precautions to keep these surfaces clean. Special care is needed when replacing windows. Plain glass, acrylic and other vitrified materials are opaque at the wavelengths used by most flame detectors and some spark/ember detectors. Placing a window between the detector and a hazardous area that is not listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for use with this detector is a violation of the detector's listing and will prevent the system from detecting a detector fire. the area can be a dangerous area. B.5.1.5.4 Design factors. The following factors are important for several reasons. First, a radiation sensor is primarily a line-of-sight device and must "see" the source of the fire. If there are other sources of radiation in the area, or if atmospheric conditions are such that a large part of the radiation in the atmosphere can be absorbed, the type, position and spacing of sensors can be affected. Furthermore, sensors respond to specific wavelengths and the fuel must emit radiation in the sensor bandwidth. For example, an infrared detector with a single sensor set to 4.3 microns (peak CO2 emissions) would not be able to detect a fire without coal. In addition, the sensor must be able to respond reliably within the required time, especially when an explosion suppression system or similar fast-acting suppression or control system is activated. B.5.1.6 Detector Response Model. The response of detectors with radiant energy sensors is modeled with a modified inverse square relationship as can be seen in the following equation [5]:

(B.62) where: S = enough radiant energy reaching the detector (W or Btu/s) to produce an alarm response. k = proportionality constant for the detector. P = radiant energy emitted by fire (W or Btu/s). z = extinction coefficient of the air in the detector, which works with wavelength. d = distance between fire and detector (m or ft)

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

in a stable molecular species, this energy is emitted as a photon with a single wavelength determined by the following equation:

ENGLISH

B.5.2 Design of flame detection systems. B.5.2.1 Detector sensitivity. Flame detector sensitivity has traditionally been quantified as the distance at which the device can detect a fire of a given size. The most common fire used by NRTLs in North America is 0.9 m2 (1.0 ft2) and uses regular unleaded gasoline. Some special target detectors are tested with 150 mm (6 in) diameter fires fed with isopropanol. B.5.2.1.1 This means of determining sensitivity does not take into account that flames are best modeled as an optically dense radiator in which radiant emissions emanating from the opposite side of the flame towards the detector are reabsorbed by the flame. Consequently, the energy radiated by a flame is not proportional to the area of the fire, but rather to the shape of the flame and therefore to the height and width of the fire. B.5.2.1.2 Since flame detectors detect radiant emissions produced during the formation of flame products and intermediates, the intensity of radiation produced by the flame at a given wavelength is proportional to the relative concentration of the intermediate product or flame and the fraction of the total fire heat release rate resulting from the formation of such specific products or intermediate products. This means that a detector's response can vary widely as different fuels are used to create a flame area and a fire area. B.5.2.1.3 A large number of flame detectors are designed to detect products such as water (2.5 microns) and CO2 (4.35 microns). These detectors cannot be used on fires that do not produce these products as a result of the combustion process. B.5.2.1.4 A variety of flame detectors use the time variation of radiant emissions from a flame to distinguish between an unlit radiator and a flame. If there is a risk of lightning, the designer must determine the sampling time for such flame detectors and how they will function in the event of an outbreak of flammable vapors or gases. B.5.2.2 Fire design. Using the procedure described in Section B.2, determine the fire size (kW or Btu/sec) at which detection is to be achieved. B.5.2.2.1 Calculate the area the design fire is expected to occupy using the correlations in Table B.2.3.2.6.2(a) or other sources. Use the flame height correlation to determine the height of the flame column: (B.63a) or (B.63b)

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

where: hf = flame height (m or ft) Q = heat release rate (kW or Btu/s) k = wall effect factor If there are no walls nearby, use k = 1. If there is one wall, use k = 2 if the fuel pack is in a corner, k = 4 should be used Determine the minimum expected flame area width (wf). If there are flammable or combustible liquids in the fuel pack and they are not contained, the fuel should be modeled as a circular puddle. To calculate the radiant area (Ar), the following equation should be used:

(B.64) where: Ar = radiant area (m2 or ft2) hf = flame height (m or ft) wf = flame width (m or ft) B.5.2.2.2 The generation of radiant energy from fire towards to the detector can be proportional to the radiant area (Air) approaching the flame. (B.65) where: Air = radiant area (m2 or ft2) c = power proportionality constant per unit area. P = radiated power (W or Btu/sec) B.5.2.3 Calculation of detector sensitivity. Calculate the radiant area of the test fire caused by NRTL in the listing process (At) using equations B.58a or B.58b. The radiant energy output of the test fire directed at the listing process detector is proportional to the radiant area (At) of the listing test flame. B.5.2.4 Calculation of detector reaction to design fire. Since the sensitivity of a flame detector is determined during the manufacturing process, the following relationship determines whether enough radiant energy will reach the detector to produce an alarm response.

(B.66) where: S = enough radiant energy reaching the detector (W or Btu/s) to produce an alarm response. k = proportionality constant for the detector. At = radiant area of the listed test fire (m2 or ft2)

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

The relationship represents the fire as a point emitter of uniform radiant power per steradian at a distance (d) from the detector. This relationship also models the effect of air absorption between the fire and the detector as a function of uniform extinction. The designer must verify that these assumptions are valid for the application in question.

72- 341

72- 342

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

z = extinction coefficient of the air in the detector, which works with wavelength. d = distance between the fire and the detector during the listed fire test (m or ft) c = the correlation function of the emitted power per unit area of the jet Because the sensitivity of the detector is constant throughout the range of environments listed .

Performance for a list of specific fuels. Unless the listed manufacturer's published instructions contain specific instructions for applying the detector to fuels not used in the listing process, the device cannot be considered listed for use in hazardous locations that do not contain the fuels used in the process. of listing.

(B.67)

B.5.2.6.2 When the burn factor correction is expressed as a function of the normalized size of the fire, the correction shall be applied before calculating the detection distance.

where: S = enough radiant energy reaching the detector (W or Btu/s) to produce an alarm response. k = proportionality constant for the detector. c = the correlation function of the emitted power per unit area of the jet. Air= radiant area of design fire (m2 or ft2) z = extinction coefficient of air at detector wavelength. d' = distance between projected fire and detector (m or ft) Therefore, the following equation should be used to determine:

(B.68)

To find the solution of d' use the following equation:

B.5.2.6.1 When the fuel factor correlation is expressed as a reduction in the detection distance, the correction shall be applied after calculating the detection distance.

B.5.2.7 Atmospheric extinction factors. B.5.2.7.1 As the atmosphere is not a perfect emitter at any wavelength, all flame detectors are affected to some degree by atmospheric absorption. The effect of atmospheric extinction on the performance of flame detectors is determined to some extent by the wavelengths used as sensors and the electronic architecture of the detector. Atmospheric Extinction Coefficient (z) values should be obtained from the instructions published by the detector manufacturer. B.5.2.7.2 The numerical value of z can be experimentally determined for each flame detector. The detector should be tested with two test fires of different sizes to determine how well the detector can detect each of the fires. The greater the difference between the sizes of the flames, the more accurate the determination of z must be. In theory, one fire test would have approximately four times the heat release rate (surface area) of the other. Therefore, the data used in the relationship:

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(B.69)

This relation is iteratively solved for d', the distance at which the detector can detect a projected fire. B.5.2.5 Angle change correction. B.5.2.5.1 Most flame detectors show a loss of sensitivity as the fire moves away from the optical axis of the detector. This detector sensitivity correction is shown in polar coordinates in Figure A.17.8.3.2.3. B.5.2.5.2 When the angular displacement correction is expressed as a reduction in the normalized sensing distance, the correction is for the sensing distance (d'). B.5.2.5.3 When angular displacement correction is expressed as normalized sensitivity (increase in fire size), a correction in Ar shall be entered before calculating the response distance (d'). B.5.2.6 Corrections for fuels. Most flame detectors have some degree of fuel specificity. Some manufacturers provide "fuel factors" that relate the fire response performance of a detector to a fuel to the response performance of a reference fuel. Other manufacturers provide criteria for

(B.70)

where: "l" = the indices refer to the first test fire "2" = the indices refer to the second test fire d = maximum distance between the flame detector and the fire in which the fire is detected A = the fire test radiation area according to B.5.2.2.1. This relationship allows the designer to determine the z-value for detectors that are already installed or for those that were evaluated for listing prior to the inclusion of the z-posting requirement in ANSI/FM-3260. B.5.3 Design of spark/ember detection systems. B.5.3.1 Fire design. Using the procedure described in Section B.2, determine the fire size (kW or Btu/sec) at which detection is to be achieved.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX B B.5.3.1.1 Fire quantification generally results from the expenditure of sufficient energy per unit time to propagate the combustion of solid fuel particles within the fuel stream. Since energy per unit time is power expressed in watts, the fire sizing criterion is usually expressed in watts or milliwatts. B.5.3.1.2 The radiative emissions of a non-ideal integrated Planckian radiator at all wavelengths are expressed in the following form of the Stefan-Boltzmann equation:

72- 343

where: S = enough radiated power reaching the detector (W or Btu/s) to produce an alarm response. k = proportionality constant for the detector. P'= Radiant power emitted by the project lamp (W or Btu/s). z = extinction coefficient of the air in the detector, which works with wavelength. d' = distance between projected fire and detector (m2 or ft2)

(B.71) where: P = radiated power (W or Btu/sec)

Therefore, the following equation must be used to find the solution

e = emissivity, a material property expressed as a fraction between 0 and 1.0. Air = Radiator area (m2 or ft2)

(B.74) To solve d',

s= Constante de Stefan-Boltzmann 5.67E-8 W/m2K4 T = temperatura (K o R) (B.75)

B.5.3.2 Fire environment. Spark/ember detectors are commonly used in piping of pneumatic conveying systems to monitor solid combustible particles as they flow through the detector. This environment deposits large concentrations of combustible solid particles between the fire and the detector. A value of ζ must be calculated for the monitored medium. The assumption that absorption in the visible is equal to or greater than that of infrared wavelengths leads to conservative designs and is used. B.5.3.3 Calculation of detector response to design fire. As the sensitivity of the spark/ember detector is determined during the manufacturing process,

(B.72) where: S = enough radiant energy reaching the detector (W or Btu/s) to produce an alarm response. k = proportionality constant for the detector. P = radiated power (W or Btu/sec) emitted by the test spark. z = extinction coefficient of the air in the detector, which works with wavelength. d = distance between the fire and the detector during the listed fire test (m2 or ft2) Since the sensitivity of the detector is constant across the range of environments for which it is listed

(B.73)

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

This relation is iteratively solved for d', the distance at which the detector can detect a projected fire. B.5.3.4 Angle change correction. B.5.3.4.1 Most spark/ember detectors show a loss of sensitivity as the fire moves away from the optical axis of the detector. This detector sensitivity correction is shown in polar coordinates in Figure A.17.8.3.2.3. B.5.3.4.2 When the correction for angular misalignment is expressed as a reduction in the normalized sensing distance, the correction is for the sensing distance (d'). B.5.3.4.3 When angular displacement correction is expressed as normalized sensitivity (increase in fire size), a correction in P' must be entered before calculating the response distance (d'). B.5.3.5 Fuel corrections. As spark/ember detectors respond to Planckian emissions in the near-infrared part of the spectrum, corrections for combustibles are rarely needed. B.6 Computational models of fire. Various special application computer models are available to aid in the analysis and design of thermal detectors (eg, fixed temperature, slew rate, fusible links) and smoke detectors. These computer models typically work on personal computers and are available from the NIST website: http://fire.nist.gov. B.6.1 DETACT - T2. DETACT – T2 (DETECTOR Actuation – Time Squared) calculates the activation time of heat detectors (fixed temperature or rate of rise) and sprinklers on user defined fires that rise based on time squared. DETACT - T2 assumes the detector is in a storage compartment.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

B.5.3.1.3 This models the spark or ember as a focus

72- 344

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

large dimensions with unrestricted roof where hot gases do not accumulate on the roof. Therefore, heating of the detector occurs only due to the flow of hot gases along the ceiling. Input information includes H, t0, RTI, Ts, S, and a. The program calculates the rate of heat release when the detector is activated and the time it takes to activate. B.6.2 DETAKT – QA. DETACT – QS (DETector ACTuation quasi-steady) calculates the activation time of heat detectors and sprinklers in response to growing fires as defined by the user. DETACT - QS assumes the detector is in a large room with an open ceiling where hot gases do not collect in the ceiling. Therefore, heating of the detector occurs only due to the flow of hot gases along the ceiling. Input information includes H, t0, RTI, Ts, detector distance from fire axis and heat release rates for user defined times. The program calculates the rate of heat release at the time of detector activation, the activation time and the temperature of the high pressure jet.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

DETACT - QS can also be found in HAZARD I, FIREFORM, FPETOOL. For a complete evaluation of DETACT QS, see SFPE, Engineering Guide: DETACTQS Computer Fire Model Evaluation. This guideline provides information on the theoretical basis, mathematical soundness, sensitivity from discharge to admission, and assessment of the model's predictive ability. B.6.3 LAVENDER. LAVENT (Link Actuated VENT) calculates the activation time of sprinklers and ceiling fans activated by fuse link for fires in compartments with ventilation curtains. Information received includes ambient temperature, enclosure size, thermophysical properties, ceiling height, fire location, size and growth rate, ceiling vent area and location, RTI, and fuse rating temperature. Model output information includes co-release temperatures and times, open vent areas, the radial temperature distribution in the mantle, and the temperature and elevation of the upper layer. B.6.4 JET is a computer model with two zones and one camera. It is designed to calculate smoke/fire plume centerline temperature, high pressure jet temperature, and high pressure jet velocity. JET can model ceiling-mounted fuse links as well as ceiling-activated vents. JET evolved from the model platform used for LAVENT and shares many of the same features. Some of the key differences between them include the high pressure jet speed and temperature algorithms, the fusion bonding algorithm, and the use of a variable radioactive fraction. [57] B.6.5 References. (1) Alpert, R. "Ceiling Jets," Fire Technology, August 1972.

(2) „Fire Risk Assessment without Sprinklers“, SFPE Technology Report 83-2. (3) Babrauskas, V., Lawson, J. R., Walton, W. D. und Twilley, W. H. „Wärmefreisetzungsraten von Polstermöbeln, gemessen mit einem Möbelkalorimeter“ (NBSIR 82-2604) (December 1982). National Institute of Standards and Technology (Ehemals National Bureau of Standards), Fire Research Center, Gaithersburg, MD 20889. (4) Beyler, C. "A Design Method for Flaming Fire Detection," Fire Technology, vol. 3, no. 20, no. 4, November 1984. (5) DiNenno, P., Hrsg. Kapitel 31, SFPE Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, von R. Schifiliti, September 1988. (6) Evans, D. D. und Stroup, D. W. „Methods for calculating the response time of heat and smoke detectors installed under large unobstructed ceilings“ (NBSIR 85 - 3167) (February 1985, ausgegeben im Juli 1986). National Institute of Standards and Technology (ehemals National Bureau of Standards), Center for Fire Research, Gaithersburg, MD 20889. (7) Heskestad, G. "Characterization of Smoke Entry and Response for Products-of-Combustion Detectors" Proceedings, 7th International Tagung über Probleme der automatischen Branderkennung, Rheinisch-Westfälische Technische Hochschule Aachen (March 1975). (8) Heskestad, G. „Untersuchung eines neuen Sprinklerempfindlichkeits-Zulassungstests: Der Tauchtest“, FMRC Tech. Bericht 22485, Factory Mutual Research Corporation, 1151 Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA 02062. (9) Heskestad, G. und Delichatsios, M. A. "The Initial Convective Flow in Fire: Seventeenth Symposium on Combustion", The Combustion Institute, Pittsburgh, PA (1979). (10) Heskestad, G. und Delichatsios, M. A. „Umgebungen von Brandmeldern – Phase 1: Auswirkung von Brandgröße, Deckenhöhe und Material“, Measurements vol. 1, No. I (NBS-GCR-77-86), Analysis vol. 1, No. II (NBS-GCR-77-95). National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Springfield, VA 22151. (11) Heskestad, G. und Delichatsios, M. A. „Update: The Initial Convective Flow in Fire“, Fire Safety Journal, vol. 3, no. 15, no. 5, 1989. (12) International Organization for Standardization, Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal, ISO 8201, 1987. (13) Klote, J. und Milke, J. „Principles of Smoke Management“, American Society for Heating, Cooling and Air Conditioning Engineers, Atlanta, GA, 2002. (14) Lawson, J.R., Walton, W.D., und Twilley, W.H. „Brandverhalten von Einrichtungsgegenständen, gemessen im NBS-Möbelkalorimeter, Teil 1“ (NBSIR 83-2787) (August 1983). National Institute of Standards and Technology (ehemals National Bureau of Standards), Fire Research Center, Gaithersburg, MD 20889. (15) Morton, B. R., Taylor, Sir Geoffrey, und Turner, J. S. „Turbulent gravitational convection of maintained sources and snapshots, Proz . Royal Society A, 234, 1–23, 1956. (16) Schifiliti, R. „Use of Fire Plume Theory in the Design and Analysis of Fire Detector and Sprinkler Response“, Masterarbeit, Worcester Polytechnic Institute, Center for Safety Studies Protection, Worcester, MA, 1986. (17) Title 47, Code of Federal Regulations, Kommunikationsgesetz von 1934, geändert. (18) Schifiliti, R. und Pucci, W. „Fire Detection Modeling, State of the Art“, May 6, 1996, gesponsert vom Fire Detection Institute, Bloomfield, CT.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ENGLISH

(19) Forney, G., Bukowski, R., Davis, W. "Field Modeling: Effects of Flat Beam Roofs on Detector and Sprinkler Response," Technical Report, Year 1. International Detection Research Project Research, Fire Protection Research Foundation, Quincy, MA, October 1993. (20) Davis, W., Forney, G., Bukowski, R. "Field Modeling: Simulating the Effect of Pitched Roof Roofs on Detector and Sprinkler Response", Year 1. Project International Fire Protection Research Report, National Fire Protection Research Foundation, Quincy, MA. October 1994. ("Field Modelling: Simulating the Effect of Sloped Radiant Ceilings on Detector and Sprinkler System Response", Year 1. International Fire Detection Research Project, National Fire Protection Research Foundation, Quincy, MA. October from 1994). (21) Brozovski, E. "A Preliminary Approach to Situating Smoke Detectors Based on Design Fire Size and Detector Aerosol Entry Lag Time", MS thesis, Worcester Polytechnic, Worcester, MA, 1989. Smoke Based on Fire Design Size and delay time for Aerosol Entry to Detector”, MSc thesis, Worcester Polytechnic, Worcester, MA, 1989. (22) Cote, A. NFPA Fire Protection Handbook, 20th edition, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 2008. (NFPA Fire Protection Manual , XVII Edition, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 2008.) (23) Tewarson, A., Generation of Heat and Chemical Compounds in Fires, SFPE Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, Second Edition, NFPA and SFPE , 1995. NFPA and SFPE, 1995). (24) Hollman, J.P. Heat Transfer, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1976. (Heat Transfer). (25) Custer RL P and Meacham B Introduction to Performance-Based Fire Safety, SFPE, 1997. (26) Schifiliti RP, Meacham B, Custer RL P Detection System Design, SFPE Fire Protection Engineering Handbook. (“Detection Systems Design”, SFPE Fire Protection Engineering Handbook). (27) Marrion, C. “Fastening Heat Correction Factors in NFPA 72”, Appendix B, Fire Protection Engineering, SFPE, 1998. Fire Protection Engineering, SFPE). (28) Marrion, C. Design and Response Analysis of Detection Systems: An Update on Previous Correlations, 1988. (29) Custer, R. and Bright, R. Fire Detection: The State-of-the-Art", SBS Technology Note 839, National Bureau of Standards, Washington, 1974. SBS Technique 839).(30) Meacham, Brian J. "Smoke Characterization of Burning Materials to Evaluate the Response of Fire-Type Smoke Detectors". WPI Fire Safety Center

72- 345

Studies, Worcester, MA, 1991. ("Characterization of Smoke from Burning Materials to Assess Light Scattering Smoke Detector Response" Master's Thesis, WPI Center for the Study of Fire Safety, Worcester, MA, 1991) . (31) Delichatsios, M. A. "Category Flammability of Cables, Fire Detection in Burning and Smoldering Cables", Zwischenbericht, Factory Mutual Research Corporation, Norwood, MA, NP-1630, November 1980. , Fire Detection in Cables with Flames and flames” Zwischenbericht, Mutual Factories Research Corporation, Norwood, MA, NP-1630, November 1980). (32) Heskestad, G. FMRC Serial number 21017, Factory Mutual Research Corp., Norwood, MA, 1974. (33) Marrion, C.E. of smoke", MS Diplomarbeit, WPI Center for Fire Safety Studies, Worcester, MA, 1989. MS, WPI Center for Fire Safety Studies, Worcester, MA, 1989). (34) Kokkala, M. et al. „Measurements of characteristic lengths of smoke detectors“, Fire Technology, Bd. 28, no. 2, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA, 1992. Fires, Bd. 28, no. 2, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA, 1992). (34a) Yamauchi et al. "Eine Berechnungsmethode zur Vorhersage der Reaktion von Wärme- und Rauchmeldern". (34b) Cleary et al. „Particle Entry Delay in Point Type Smoke Detectors“, Proceedings of the International Association for Fire Safety Sciences (IAFSS), Boston, MA 2000. (34c) Keski-Rahkonen, „Review of Particle Penetration Modeling fluids in smoke detectors“, AUBE 2001 (34d) Bjoerkman und andere. „Bestimmung dynamischer Modellparameter von Rauchmeldern“, Fire Safety Journal, Nr. 37, S. 395 – 407, 2002. (34e) Keski-Rahkonen, „A New Model for Time Lag of Smoke Detectors“, International Collaborative Project to Evaluate Fire Models for Applications in Nuclear Power Plants Fire Models for Nuclear Power Plant Applications), Gaithersburg, MD, May 2002. (35) UL 268, Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems. Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Northbrook, IL, 2009. --". ,,`,``,`````,```,```, ` ,-` -`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 346

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

(36) Good deal, Scott. „Technisches Referencezhandbuch für FPEtool Version 3.2“, NISTIR 5486, National Institute for Standards and Technology, USA Handelsministerium, Gaithersburg, MD, August 1994. (“Technical Reference Guide for FPEtool Version 3.2“, NISTIR 5486, National Institute of Standards and Technology, US Department of Commerce, Gaithersburg, MD, August 1994). (37) Mowrer, F. W. „Lag Times Associated with Detection and Suppression“, Fire Technology, Bd. 26, no. 3, S. 244-265, 1990. ("Delay Times Associated with Fire Detection and Suppression" Fire Protection Technology). (38) Newman, J.S. "Principles of Fire Detection", Fire Technology, Bd. 24, no. 2, S. 116-127, 1988. ("Principles for fire detection" Brandschutztechnik). (39) Custer, R., Meacham, B., Wood, C. "Performance-based design techniques for special detection and suppression applications", Proceedings of SFPE Engineering Seminars on Advances in Detection and Suppression Technology, 1994. in Performance for Special Detection and Suppression Applications” Proceedings of SFPE Engineering Seminars on Advances in Detection and Suppression Technology, 1994). (40) SFPE Engineering Guide to Performance-Based Brand Protection Analysis and Design. ("Engineering Guide to Performance-Based Fire Protection Analysis and Design, SFPE"), 2007, SFPE, Bethesda, MD. (41) SFPE-Handbuch für Brandschutztechnik, pour Ausgabe. (SFPE Fire Protection Engineering Handbook, Third Edition), SFPE, Bethesda, MD, 2008 (42) Drysdale, Dougal, An Introduction to Fire Dynamics, John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1985, ISBN 0 471 90613 1, Zweite Auflage. (Einführung in Fire Dynamics John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1998, ISBN 0 471 90613 1, zweite Auflage). (43) Nam S., Donovan L.P. and Kim S.G.; Ermittlung der thermischen Empfindlichkeit von Wärmemeldern durch Tests im Labormaßstab; Fire Safety Journal, Band 39, Number 3, 191-215; April 2004. (Nam S., Donovan L.P. and Kim S.G.; Determining the thermal sensitivity of heat detectors using volumetric array testing; Fire Safety Journal, Volume 39, Number 3, 191-215; April 2004) (44) Nam S.; Thermischer Reaktionskoefziient TRC von Wärmemeldern und ihre Feldanwendungen; Symposium für Brandmelde- und Forschungsanwendungen; NFP-Forschungsstiftung; Jan 2003. (Nam S.; Thermal Response Coefficient (TRC) of Heat Detectors and Their Field Applications; Fire Detection and Applications Symposium; NFP Research Foundation; Jan 2003) (45) Nam S.; Leistungsbasierter Wärmemelderabstand; Interflam 2004; S. 883-892. (Nam S.; Performance Based Heat Detector Spacing; Interflam 2004; Seiten 883892). (46) Geiman, J.A., “Evaluation of Smoke Detector Response Estimation Methods,” MSc thesis, University of Maryland, College Park, MD, December 2003. (Geiman, J.A., “Evaluation of Smoke Detector Response Estimation Methods,” estimation response of smoke detectors“, Detector“, Master's Dissertation, University of

Maryland, College Park, MD, December 2003). (47) Projektionsrauchmelder – mehr als nur ein Ersatz für Punktmelder; Brandschutztechnik; summer of 2004; SFPE (point beam smoke detectors; more than a replacement for point type detectors; fire protection engineering; summer 2004; SFPE). (48) Geiman, J.A., and Gottuck, D.T., „Alarm Thresholds for Smoke Detector Modeling“, Fire Safety Science – Proceedings of the Seventh International Symposium, 2003, S. 197-208. (Geiman, J.A., und Gottuck, D.T., „Alarm Thresholds for Smoke Detector Models“, Fire Safety Scientific Proceedings of the Seventh International Symposium, 2003, S. 197-208). (49) Guide for Review and Analysis of Performance-Based Design for Buildings, by SFPE Code Officials, Society of Fire Protection Engineers, Bethesda, MD, 2004. (50) NFPA 101, Human Safety Code, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA, 2009. (51) NFPA 909, Kodex zum Schutz des kulturellen Erbes – Museen, Bibliotheken und Andachtsstätten, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 2010. (52) NFPA 914, Brandschutzkodex für historische Gebäude, National Fire Protection Association Fire Control , Quincy, MA, 2010. (53) Performance-Based Building Design Concepts, International Code Council), Washington DC, 2004. (54) Mitigation of Extreme Events in Buildings: Analysis and Design, Meacham, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy MA , 2006. (55) Geiman, Gottuk und Milke „Evaluation of smoke detector response estimation methods: optical density, temperature rise and alarm speed“ and alarm speed a“), aus dem Journal of Fire Protection Engineer ing, 2006. (56) Su et al. „Kemano Fire Studies—Part 1: Response of Residential Smoke Alarms“, Research Report 108, NRCC, April 2003. (57) Davis, W, The Zone Model Jet, „A Model for the Prediction of Detector Activation and Gas Temperature in the Vorhandensein einer Rauchschicht“ von Gas in Gegenwart einer Rauchschicht“) NISTIR 6324, NIST, May 1999. B.7 Nomenklatur. Die in Anhang B verwendete Nomenklatur ist in Tabelle B.7 defined. Table B.7 Nomenclature

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

ENGLISH

= = = = =

c Cp Dm d d' d(Du)/dt D t ∆T ∆td ∆t*pe e f g h H

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

∆Hc hf Hf L k m p P q Q Qc Qcond Qconv Qd Qrad Qtotal

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

ein A A0 Ar At

72- 347

Fire Intensity Coefficient (kW/sec2 or Btu/sec3) Area (m2 or ft2) g/(CpTar) [m4/(sec2kJ) or ft4/(sec2Btu)] Radiant Area (m2 or ft2) Fire Test Radiant Area Fire Element Specific Heat of Detector (kJ/kg.°C or Btu/lbm.°F) Speed of Light (m/sec or ft/sec) Specific Heat of Air [kJ/(kg K) or Btu/lbm R (1040 kJ/kg K)] Optical Mass Density (m2/g or ft2/lb) Distance between fire and detector with radiant energy sensor Distance between fire and detector Rate of increase in optical density External detector 0.146 + 0.242r/H Change over time (seconds) Increase in ambient gas temperature around a detector (°C or °F) Increase in ambient temperature of a detector (°C or °F) Change in reduced gas temperature Energy (Joule or Btu) Functional ratio Gravitational constant (9.81 ) m/sec2 or 32 ft/sec2) Planck's constant (6.63E- 23 Joule-sec) Ceiling height or fire height (m or ft) of heat transfer heat coefficient conve te de ng (kW/m2×°C or Btu/ft2×sec×°F) Heat of combustion (kJ/mol) Height of flame (m or ft) Heat of formation (kJ/mol) Characteristic length of a detector of particular detector design constant dimensionless mass (kg or lbm ) radiant power positive exponent (watts or Btu/sec) rate of heat release density per unit area (watts/m2 or Btu/s×ft2 ) rate of convective heat release (kW or Btu/sec) portion of fire heat release rate (kW or Btu/sec) conductive heat transfer (kW or Btu/sec) convective heat transfer (kW or Btu/sec) /s) Fire size limit at which a reaction must be triggered Radiant heat transfer (kW or Btu/s) Total heat transfer (kW or Btu/s)

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 348

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

QCR QDO Qm Qp QT r r0 RTI S S tDO tCR t tc

= = = = = = = = = = = = = =

td tg tr

answer tv t2f

= = = = = =

t*2f

t*p T Ta Tc Td Tg Ts u0

= = = = = = = =

u uc U*p V wf Y z l Zm t t0 e

= = = = = = = = = = = =

Critical heat release rate (kW or Btu/sec) Design heat release rate (kW or Btu/sec) Maximum heat release rate (kW or Btu/sec) Design heat release rate (kW or Btu/sec) s) Heat Release Rate Response Limit (kW or Btu/s) Radial Distance from Fire Column Centerline (m or ft) Ambient Air Density [kg/m3 or lb/ft3 (1.1 kg /m3) )] response time (m1/2 sec1/2 or ft1/2 sec1/2) detector or sprinkler spacing (m or ft) radiant energy Time (seconds) at which target heat release rate will be achieved (QDO Project ) Time (seconds) for the critical heat release rate (CCR) to be reached Time (seconds) critical time: time for the fire to reach a heat release rate of 1055 kW (1000 Btu/s) (seconds) Time before detector activation Time before fire reaches 1055 kW (1000 Btu/s) seconds) Response time (seconds) Time available or required to respond to an alarm condition in (seconds) Temp o of virtual emergency (seconds) Time of arrival of the heat front (for a square fire with p = 2) at a point r/H (seconds) Reduced time of arrival of the heat front (for a square fire with p = 2 ) at a point r/ H (seconds) Short Time Temperature (°C or °F) Ambient Temperature (°C or °F) Column Centerline Temperature (°C or °F) Detector Temperature (°C or °F) F) Smoke temperature (°C or °F) Nominal operating temperature of a detector or sprinkler (°C or °F) Instantaneous fire gas velocity (m/s or ft/s) Velocity (m/s or ft) /s) Critical velocity Reduced gas velocity Velocity of smoke at detector Flame width (m or ft) defined in equation B.27 height above the top of the fuel package in question (m or ft) wavelength (m microns) maximum smoke height above fire detector surface (m or ft) time constant mc/ HcA (seconds) detector time constant measured at reference speed u 0 (seconds) Emissivity, a material property expressed as a fraction between 0 and 1.0

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX C

This appendix is not part of the requirements of this NFPA document, but is included for informational purposes only. C.1 Scope. Chapter 23 requirements for protected facilities cover minimum levels of protection for fire detection systems to protect life and property, regardless of the building's features, contents, or use. This system design and performance guide outlines additional considerations for National Fire Alarm Code (NFAC) users when planning, designing, and installing fire detection systems in protected installations for buildings that are atypical in size, mission, use, symbology. or other critical elements may or high-profile features. This guide suggests possible system features to improve durability, mission, and property protection performance in important and other critical buildings. These features include signal path integrity, redundancies, survivability, backup fire control centers, non-volatile writes, multiple points of call, and the benefits of networked and peer-to-peer configurations. C.2 Scale of the building. The size of the building to be protected affects the fire alarm system's operating characteristics, control functions, functional integrity, announcements and other factors to protect life, property or building function. C.2.1 Location(s) of the fire department. C.2.1.1 Location(s). Determine the location(s) of firefighters in consultation with firefighting personnel (and building operations personnel, if applicable). C.2.1.2 Quantity. The fire department may want to have more than one scene. Building operators may provide redundancies for safety reasons or for operation under emergency conditions. C.2.1.3 Functions. The primary location is usually the designated Fire Command Center (FCC) location. In general, the fire control center provides information and assumes control functions for the entire building. One or more redundant or downscaled fire control centers may be desirable for safety reasons or for operations under emergency conditions. C.2.1.3.1 Information. Non-primary response locations can be used to include pager equipment that is used to send information throughout the building or to a section of the building associated with the response location. C.2.1.3.2 Control. Non-primary sites can be used to act as a full or partial fire control center to perform control functions for the entire building or for a section of the building associated with the site.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

C.2.2 System operating characteristics. C.2.2.1 Onsite response. Establish an alarm response plan that takes into account National Fire Alarm Code (NFAC) requirements, local codes and regulations, the availability and responsibility of building operations personnel, and the mobility of occupants. C.2.2.1.1 Investigation. Building operations and security personnel should investigate all alarm signals, and the alarm response plan may include investigating initial alarm signals before activating a general alarm or evacuating or relocating building occupants. C.2.2.1.2 Communication. Determine appropriate methods for providing alarm information and instructions, if necessary, to security and building operations personnel, supervisory and administrative personnel, and building occupants. Consider the need for predetermined messages, single- or multi-channel communication systems, and coordination of communication system coverage and zoning with building subdivisions, including coverage and zoning of smoke compartments and smoke systems. Consider the need to use multiple languages in emergency communications. C.2.2.1.3 Evacuation/Relocation. Determine the extent to which the escape plan relies on full evacuation, relocation and partial evacuation, rescue zones and/or existing defenses. C.2.2.1.4 Survival. Consider means for fire detection circuits/routes to withstand a fire attack for the period of time necessary to notify operations personnel and building occupants of a fire emergency and/or issue instructions as appropriate. C.2.2.1.5 Control. Fire alarm control units can be configured to activate other building systems and condition passive fire barriers to improve building fire safety. C.2.2.1.6 Construction systems. Consider activating or enabling building systems and components, including but not limited to air locks and fire/smoke door closures, elevator recovery, stairway door unlocking, security system activation, smoke control, and/or or shutting off fans to prevent smoke recirculation. C.2.2.1.7 Interventions at the fire site. Compartments, water supply, firefighter access and communication links are important for manual firefighting operations. The monitoring, reporting, display and control functions of fire alarm systems that improve the maintenance and operation of the components that support operations at the fire site must be considered in the design, installation and maintenance of fire alarm installations. An example would be attaching a flashing light to the connection device for fire hoses. C.2.2.2 External Response.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Appendix C System Design and Performance Guide

72- 349

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

C.2.2.2.1 Resources available. Determine the availability and responsibility of firefighting resources. An example of using this information might be to determine how the phases of an evacuation should be implemented. C.2.2.2.2 Time required. Consider the time it takes the fire department to respond to the building call. Consider travel time at different times of the day and year. C.2.2.2.3 Notification. Determine one or more acceptable means of automatic and manual notification to the fire department to initiate building response actions. Consider the amount of information that can be shared with the fire department to improve the building's response and provide information about the incident before it occurs. C.2.2.2.4 Evacuation/Relocation. Consider system operating features that can improve coordination of control and instruction for operating personnel and building occupants. Consider means of control and change of control over evacuation direction or transfer from building operations personnel to fire department command. C.2.2.2.5 Knowledge of the facilities. Harmonize the operational characteristics of the dispatch system with fire and building operations and security personnel. C.2.2.2.6 Communication and Control. Provide means of communication with firefighters through two-way communication systems or consider implementing some means of improving the performance of radio communication with firefighters in protected facilities. C.3 Order/Use/Protection of Facility Assets. The loss of use or abandonment of the facilities due to the effects of an accidental fire can have a significant impact on the community or organization that develops its activities in the facilities. In this case, it is advisable to reinforce the functional characteristics of the protected premises system. Issues to consider include: (1) Mission Criticality/Continuity (a) Community: Failure in facility operations may affect the community in addition to impacting the facility itself. Consider the sensitivity of fire detection and the effectiveness of alarm processing, emergency response and fire suppression to minimize the impact on the community in which you operate due to facility closures due to fire. (b) Operations i. Onsite: A fire can cause business interruption or reduce effectiveness. ii. Elsewhere: Services provided by facilities in remote locations may be suspended or restricted. (2) Human Security (a) Evacuation/Relocation: Scope, Distribution and Mobility

of the workforce should be considered with knowledge of the facility's emergency planning and the availability of emergency procedures to determine the extent to which movement of people can be controlled during a fire event. (b) Site Defense: The protected installation system can be used to activate fire protection elements necessary for the defense of site residents or to enhance rescue assistance. (3) Characteristics (a) Value: The cost, availability, and time required to recover the facility's contents must be considered when determining the level of fire detection effectiveness and the effectiveness of alarm processing, emergency response, and fire suppression . (b) Replacement - The availability and time needed to replace damaged facility contents must be taken into account when determining the level of fire detection effectiveness and the effectiveness of alarm processing, emergency response and fire suppression. (c) Redundancy: Duplicating the facility's contents elsewhere may reduce the need for highly effective fire detection or other property protection system functions. C.4 Characteristics of signaling systems at protected installations. C.4.1 Incident records. Computer processor-based systems have the ability to organize event logs by date and time and include an alarm history. These recordings are an important source for assessing system performance or deficiencies and for understanding or reconstructing a fire event after the fact. It is imperative that such records be retained and protected from deletion until it is confirmed that they do not need to be retained. It is recommended to pay close attention to ensure that system history records are not deleted when changes are made to the software. C.4.2 Network Configuration Systems that use digital media to transmit signaling information may have cost advantages in terms of installing and distributing the information to multiple locations to allow for accurate processing and alarm response. Transmitting digital alarm information to remote locations can help emergency services by providing incident information before arriving at the scene of a fire. C.4.3 Data communication via the peer network. Systems that mirror operational and historical databases across multiple network controllers provide redundant monitoring and control points within a system, allowing for greater system reliability and performance during degraded or emergency conditions.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

72− 350

APPENDIX D Appendix D Speech Intelligibility This appendix is not part of the requirements of this NFPA document and is included for informational purposes only. Users of Appendix D should read the text of the NFPA 72 code to become familiar with the specific requirements for planning, design, installation, and testing of voice communications systems. D.1 Introduction. D.1.1 The purpose of this appendix is to provide guidelines for the planning, design, installation, and testing of voice communication systems. Most of this appendix contains recommendations for testing the intelligibility of speech systems. D.1.2 As with most systems, proper performance of these systems depends on proper planning, construction, installation, and maintenance. Similarly, test results provide a valuable feedback mechanism for the people who plan, design, and install the systems.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

D.1.3 This appendix describes when, where and how speech intelligibility tests are carried out. It is also not the purpose of this test protocol to describe how to interpret the results or how to correct systems or environments that cause poor speech intelligibility. D.1.4 For non-existent uses, the designer must be aware of the acoustic characteristics of the architectural project and the acoustic performance characteristics of the available loudspeakers. Architecturally, this includes the physical shape and size of the space, as well as the acoustic properties of walls, floors, ceilings and interior fittings. Sometimes a proper design analysis can show that a comprehensible system will not be achieved unless some features of the architectural design are changed. The designer must be prepared to defend such conclusions and, if necessary, refuse to certify the installation of such a system. While "hand calculations" and experience work well for simpler installations, more complex designs are often easier to analyze and less expensive when using one of the many readily available computer design programs. D.1.5 Both the designer and the competent authority should be aware that the acoustic performance parameters of the chosen loudspeakers, as well as their position in the structure, play an important role in determining the number of devices required for adequate intelligibility. The number of fixtures for a given project and protected space cannot be used alone to determine whether the system is appropriate. Sometimes the acoustic problems of certain location constraints can be satisfactorily resolved by carefully selecting loudspeakers with the required performance characteristics rather than increasing the number. D.2 Principles of Testing Protocol. D.2.1 Measurement method.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 351

D.2.1.1 ITS/STIPA. (Voice transmission rate for public address). D.2.1.1.1 When the speech measurement method is Speech Transmission Index (STI), this test protocol shall be followed. D.2.1.1.2 There are several methods to measure the STI. A common technique for the emergency communications systems industry uses a test signal called STIPA, STIPublic Address (Voice Broadcast Index for Public Announcements). D.2.1.2 Other methods. When the method for measuring speech intelligibility is the Phonetically Balanced Word (BP) Test, the Modified Rhyme Test (MRT) or the Speech Intelligibility Index (SII) method, the same methods should be used to determine speech intelligibility measurement sites. D.2.2 References. D.2.2.1 IEC 60268-16, "Sound system equipment - Part 16: Objective certification of speech intelligibility by speech transmission index", International Electrotechnical Commission, Geneva, Switzerland, 22 May 2003. D.2.2.1 2.2.2 ISO 7240-19, "Fire detection and alarm systems - Part 19: "Design, installation, commissioning and maintenance of emergency sound systems", International Organization for Standardization, Geneva, Switzerland, 1 15th Edition, 15 August 2007. D.2.2 .3 NEMA Standard Publication SB 50-2008, "Guide to Applications of Audio intelligibility for Emergency Communications", National Electrical Manufacturers Association, Rosslyn VA, 2008. D. 2.3 Terminology D.2.3. 1 Acoustically Distinguishable Space (ADS) D.2.3.1.1 Acoustically Distinguishable Space (ADS) may be a notification area of the emergency communications system, or a subdivision thereof, which may be a physically enclosed or other defined space, or which can be distinguished from other spaces by the u different acoustic, environmental or usage characteristics, such as reverberation time and ambient sound pressure level. The ADS may have acoustic design features that promote speech intelligibility, or it may be located in a room where speech intelligibility may be difficult or impossible to achieve. D.2.3.1.2 All sectors of a building or area designated for occupant notification are divided into ADSs as defined. Some ADSs may be designed with voice communication capability and require those communications to be intelligible. Other rooms may not require speech intelligibility or may not be able to provide reliable speech intelligibility. However, each of them is called an ADS.

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 352

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

D.2.3.1.3 In smaller areas, such as those less than 400 ft2 (40 m2), only the walls define the ADS. For larger areas, other factors may need to be considered. In spaces that may be divided by temporary or movable partitions, such as large ballrooms or meeting rooms, each individual configuration should be considered a separate ADS. Physical characteristics, such as a change in ceiling height of more than 20 percent, or a change in acoustic surface, such as carpet in one area and tile in another, may require these areas to be treated as separate ADSs. In larger areas, there may be noise sources that require a sector to be treated as a separate ADS. Any significant change in ambient sound pressure level or frequency may cause an area to be considered a separate ADS.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

D.2.3.1.4 In areas with an ambient sound pressure level of 85 dBA or greater, it may not be possible to meet pass/fail criteria for intelligibility and other means of communication may be required. For example, the space immediately around a printer or other machine that generates high levels of noise may be designated as a separate ADS, and the design may require some form of effective notification, but not necessarily communication capability. Brokers or operator stations may present a separate ADS where intelligible voice communications may be desirable. D.2.3.1.5 Significant differences in furnishing, for example an area with low tables, desks or dividers next to an area with high shelves, may require separate consideration. The entire table area can be a single acoustic zone, while each area between the shelves can be a single zone. Basically, any significant change in the acoustic environment within an area requires that a sector of the area be treated as an acoustic zone. Corridors and stairwells are generally regarded as individual acoustic zones. D.2.3.1.6 The spaces delimited by carpeted walls and acoustic ceilings can be considered as a single ADS. An ADS must be an area of adequate size and materials. A change in material from carpet to hard tile, the presence of sound sources such as decorative waterfalls, large areas of glass and changes in ceiling height are factors that can differentiate one ADS from another. D.2.3.1.7 Each ADS may require different components and design features to achieve intelligible voice communications. For example, two ADSs with similar acoustic treatments and noise levels may have different ceiling heights. The 2.6 m (8.5 ft) ADS

71.5 feet (21.8 meters)

A lower ceiling height may require a larger number of ceiling speakers to ensure that all listeners are in a direct sound field. See Figure D.2.3.1.7. Other ADSs may benefit from using alternative loudspeaker technologies such as B. Line arrays to achieve intelligibility. D.2.3.1.8 An ADS that differs from another in frequency and ambient sound pressure level may require the use of loudspeakers and system components with a greater frequency bandwidth than conventional emergency communication equipment. However, designers should not use higher bandwidth speakers in all locations unless necessary to overcome specific acoustic and environmental conditions. This is because the higher bandwidth device requires more power to function properly. This increases the size of the amplifier and cables and power supply requirements. D.2.3.1.9 In some spaces it may not be possible to achieve intelligibility, in which case alternatives to voice evacuation may be required in these areas. D.2.3.1.10 There may be some areas of the facility where there are several rooms of approximately the same size and with the same acoustic properties. For example, there might be an office room with several individual offices, each with a speaker. If one or two tests show satisfactory results, it is not necessary to test all of them to determine speech intelligibility. D.2.3.2 Listening test. Measurement of the sound pressure level of an audio signal in accordance with the requirements specified in NFPA 72. D.2.3.3 Comprehensibility test. Testing method used to predict the degree to which a listener will understand speech. D.2.3.4 Ambient sound pressure level of occupied areas. Period during which the test building is adequately occupied and closed to minimize background noise. For example, this could include operating HVAC equipment, an industrial process, or the maximum number of people that can be in a public gathering place. D.2.3.5 STI or STIPA test signal. D.2.3.5.1 A special audio signal played on the system

45.5 feet (13.9 m) 15 feet (4.6 m)

117 twists (35.7 m)

FIGURE D.2.3.1.7 Illustration showing the effect of ceiling height. (Source: R.P. Schifiliti Associates, Inc.)

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX D for the emergency communications being tested. D.2.3.5.2 Instruments that measure STI using a STIPA signal use a special signal consisting of signals in seven-octave bands. The sound in each of the octave bands is modulated with two (separate) modulation frequencies. STI and STIPA have been standardized in IEC 60268. However, at present, the implementation of the measurement software and the correlations with the test signal may differ between device manufacturers. Therefore, pending further standardization with the instrument manufacturer, only the signal recommended by the instrument manufacturer should be used. Although the STIPA test signals may appear similar, there may be differences in speed or other differences that affect results when using one manufacturer's test signal with another manufacturer's instrument. D.2.3.6 Sound effects device (talk box). An instrument that typically consists of a high-quality audio speaker and a CD player or other method used to reproduce a STI or STIPA test signal. D.2.3.7 Ambient sound pressure levels of unoccupied areas. Period when the main occupants of the building are not present or when the ambient sound pressure level does not reach its maximum value. D.2.4 Acceptance Criteria. D.2.4.1 The intelligibility of an emergency communication system is considered acceptable when at least 90% of the measurement sites within each ADS have a measured STI of not less than 0.45 STI (0.65 CIS) and an STI mean not less than 0.50 ITS (0.70 CIS).

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

D.2.4.2 Speech intelligibility is not a physical quantity like meters, feet, amps, volts or decibels. It is a measure of the degree to which we understand spoken language and, as such, is a complex phenomenon influenced by several variables (Refs: Jacob, K. and Tyson, T., "Computer-Based Prediction of Speech Intelligibility for Mass Notification Systems," SUPDET 2008, Fire Protection Research Foundation, March 2008. There are two basic categories of intelligibility testing: (1) subject-based testing and (2) instrument-based testing methods that involve human subjects are just statistical predictions of the extent to which speech can be well understood by a different group of listeners at a different point in time. Various subject-related testing methods have been extensively researched and tested for reliability, ease, and standardization. Examples include scores of phonetically balanced (BP) words (256 words or 1000 words) and the modified rhyme test (MRT) (Reference: ANSI S3.2-1989, revised 2009, "Metodo para mim dir inte speech ligibility in communication systems". Ref: ISO/TR 4870, "Acoustics - Design and calibration of speech intelligibility tests"). D.2.4.3 Subject-based testing methods can accurately measure how much spoken information is understood by an individual or group of people for that particular test.

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

72- 353

When done correctly, the resulting score is a prediction of how well others will correctly understand the spoken word at a later point in time. Therefore, speech intelligibility test results are often referred to as predictions rather than measurements. However, most device users refer to the results as measurements rather than predictions. As the use of portable instruments is the most common method in the emergency alarm and communications industry, results are referred to as measurements in this document to avoid confusion. However, in general acoustics and scientific literature, readers may find that measured values are correctly called predictions. D.2.4.4 Various instrument-based methods for predicting speech intelligibility have been extensively studied, tested for accuracy and repeatability, and standardized methods, notably the Speech Intelligibility Index (SII) (formerly AI) and the Transmission Index for Public Announcements (ESTIPA). (Ref: IEC 60268-16, "Sound system equipment - Part 16: Objective certification of speech intelligibility by speech transmission index", 2003. Ref: ANSI/ASA S3.5, " American National Standards Methods for Calculation of the Speech Intelligibility Index", 1977). Accuracy indicates how closely the meter reading matches actual human test results. Therefore, even when an instrument is used, the results are subjective in the sense that they correlate with how people perceive speech quality. D.2.4.5 Each of the established methods for measuring speech intelligibility has its own scale. The Common Intelligibility Scale (CIS) was developed in 1995 to show the relationship between different methods and allow codes and standards to require a specific level of performance, allowing the use of all accepted measurement methods (Ref: Barnett, P.W. and Knight , A.D., "The Common Intelligibility Scale", Proceedings of the Institute of Acoustics, Vol. 17, Part 7, 1995). The Speech Transmission Index (STI) is widely used and has been implemented on laptops using a modified technique called STIPA (STI for Public Announcement). For this reason, the benchmarks quoted in this document use STI units with CIS units in parentheses. The relationship between the two is: CIS = 1+log (STI). Relationships to other methods can be found in the literature (Reference: IEC 60849, Annex B, Sound systems for emergency purposes, February 1998) D.2.4.5 If the value at this single measurement point is less than 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS) was , additional measurements can be taken at the same single measurement site. As with simple sound pressure level measurements, intelligibility measurements vary at any given point. If the average of all measurements at that location was 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS) or greater, the ADS would meet the speech intelligibility requirement. D.2.4.6 If an ADS is small enough to require only one measurement location (see Measurement Point Spacing Requirements), the result must be 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS) or greater so that the ADS meets the requirement

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 354

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

speech intelligibility. This is based on the requirement of an average of 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS) or more on such ADSs. Therefore, a single measurement of 0.45 STI (0.65 CIS) would not be considered acceptable as such a measurement would fall below the required minimum average of 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS) in such an ADS. D.2.4.7 If the value at that measurement location is less than 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS), additional measurements may be taken at the same single measurement location. Because with simple sound pressure level measurements, the intelligibility measurements vary at each point. If the average of all measurements at that location was 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS) or greater, the ADS would meet the speech intelligibility requirement.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

D.2.4.8 Some ADSs may require multiple measurement points due to their size. (See measurement point spacing requirements.) But even on a small ADS where a single measurement point would be acceptable, a designer could, due to conditions that would cause those specific points to fall below the minimum, take multiple measurements. If an ADS has multiple measurement points, the requirement is that at least 90 percent of the measurement points have values of not less than 0.45 STI (0.65 CIS) and that the average of all measurement points is 0, 50 STI (0.70 CIS). or higher. D.2.4.9 Using an average understandability score as part of the requirement allows for a wider range of measurements within an ADS compared to a simple minimum requirement. A range of acceptable values is not appropriate, as no upper bound is required for intelligibility, perfect intelligibility is perfectly acceptable. D.2.4.10 The requirement that only 90% of the points measured in the ADS meet the minimum and the average for the entire ADS must be 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS) or greater recognizes this in any room with any system and In any acoustic condition, there may be points where intelligibility may drop below the minimum. See also the description of the ADS definition and how an ADS should be designed so that it does not require speech intelligibility. For example, in an acoustically similar room, the room around a noisy machine might be an ADS, while the rest of the room is a separate ADS. ADSs around the machine may be designed to provide some form of notification to the occupant, but not provide intelligible voice communication. This type of ADS marking allows you to assess the rest of the room without being penalized by the fact that intelligible communication may not be possible near some loud sound sources. D.2.4.11 The readability performance requirement quoted here intentionally uses two decimal places. Portable instruments that use the STIPA method to measure speech transmission index (STI) generally have an accuracy of around 0.02 to 0.03 (Ref: Sander J. van Wijngaarden and Jan A. Verhave, Past Present and Future of the Speech Transmission Index, Chapter 9, Measuring and predicting speech intelligibility in road tunnels with the STI application, page 113, TNO Human Factors, The Netherlands, 2002). Other methods that measure the STI may have greater measurement accuracy. other methods of

Measures such as the Modified Rhyme Test (MRT), Phonetically Balanced (BP) Word Lists, and the Speech Intelligibility Index (SII) are also accurate to within hundredths when performed and scored correctly. However, there may be slight variations in readings between two meters, or between two people taking measurements with the same instrument, or between two listening panels when using physical testing methods. This applies to any measuring method or measuring instrument, including simple scales used to measure length or mass. D.2.4.12 Measurements must be made and recorded with two decimal places. Averages can be calculated and rounded to three decimal places. The calculated average should be rounded to the nearest five hundredths (0.05) to reflect possible errors in measurements and the intent of the requirement (Ref: Mapp, P., "Systematic & Common Errors in Sound System STI and Intelligibility Measurements" ( "Common and Systematic Errors in STI and Sound System Intelligibility Measurements," Convention Article 6271, Audio Engineering Society, 117th Convention, San Fran, CA, 28-31 October 2004. Ref: Peter Mapp, Past Present and Future of the Speech Transmission Index , Chapter 8, Practical Application of STI to Evaluate Public Announcement Systems and Emergency Tone Systems), Human Factors TNO, The Netherlands, 2002). For example, average values of 0.47-0.525 STI would be rounded to arrive at an average of 0.50 STI (0.70 CIS). Readings other than 10 percent on an ADS must be 0.45 STI (0.65 CIS) or greater. For example, values of 0.44 STI are below the minimum; they are not rounded to 0.45 STI. D.2.5 Test Procedure Limitations. D.2.5.1 Equipment designed to UL 864 and fire loudspeakers designed to UL 1480 are only tested for frequencies from 400 to 4000 Hz and need only produce frequencies from 400 to 4000 Hz. Speech intelligibility measurements using STI and STIPA include octave band measurements ranging from 125 Hz to 8000 Hz. The STI results are based primarily on the 2000, 1000, 500, and 400 octave bands (in weighted order) and less so on the 8000 and 250 Hz bands. octave band and, to a lesser extent, in 125 Hz Band (again in weighted order). D.2.5.2 Although the lowest and highest octave bands are weighted much less than the rest in the STI calculations, systems that produce neither highs nor lows may, under certain acoustic conditions, produce audio intelligibility that is less than wanted. This does not mean that all systems must use devices capable of playing higher bandwidth audio. While a higher frequency response will likely sound better and be more understandable to a listener, the minimum power required may not require it. Using higher bandwidth devices requires larger power supplies, amplifiers, and cable sizes to drive the speakers.

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX D

72- 355

D.2.5.3 Areas with high levels of ambient sound pressure ("noise") may not meet the acceptance criteria set out in D.2.4.

Design and installation of the emergency communication or fire alarm system, the supplier and/or manufacturer of the system equipment and the competent authority.

D.2.5.4 In areas where the ambient sound pressure level exceeds 90 dBA, it is difficult to obtain satisfactory speech intelligibility using conventional communication equipment and design practices. A better system design might include alternative methods of communication, such as signs and displays, or it might include occupant notification but no on-site communication.

D.3 Planning ahead.

D.2.5.5 Impulse noise generated during measurements can affect measurement accuracy or cause instrument errors. D.2.5.6 Impulsive noises, p. B. Accidentally touching the meter's microphone or hitting a nearby door may cause a measurement error. Some indicators display an error message. If impulse noise occurs during the measurement, you must perform another measurement to verify the results. This process is equivalent to ignoring temporary sound sources as permitted by the NFPA code when making sound pressure level measurements. D.2.5.7 Natural variations in ambient sound pressure levels can affect the results. D.2.6 General requirements. D.2.6.1 Qualified personnel shall be identified in system design documents. Acceptable evidence of qualifications or certification must be provided when required by the relevant authority. Qualified personnel must include, among others, one or more of the following: (1) Personnel who have been trained and certified at the factory in the construction of fire detection systems of the specific type and brand of the system mentioned in this protocol of proof. (2) Personnel certified by a nationally recognized certification body and accepted by the authority having jurisdiction (3) Personnel registered, licensed or certified by a state or local authority D.2.6.2 All necessary arrangements must be made for the owner of the facility cooperate with suitably qualified personnel in administering or performing functions with the emergency communication system control unit. D.2.6.3 Defect checking test and record keeping requirements per NFPA 72, Chapter 14 apply. --`,,`,``,`````,```,` `` ,`, -`-` ,,`,,`,`,,`---

D.2.6.4 Test measurements and other documentation shall be retained as required by the competent authority. D.2.6.5 The procedures for correcting deficiencies established in NFPA 72 Section 10.21 shall be followed. D.2.6.6 Examiner. Test takers must include representatives and/or coordination with: building owners, responsible organizations

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

D.3.1 Occupancy and use of premises. D.3.1.1 Types of employment/use. Prior to testing, pre-planning actions should identify the type of occupancy or use to further minimize disruptions that may affect facility occupants during testing. D.3.1.2 Normal hours of operation. Prior to the assessment, pre-planning measurements should identify normal operating times when ambient sound pressure levels are most likely to be in occupied areas and ambient sound pressure levels to unoccupied areas. D.3.1.3 Tests before final installation of furniture in the building. Tests to permit partial use may be required before the building takes on its final acoustic configuration. The results of the comprehensibility tests in this phase can differ from those obtained in the final execution of the system. It may be necessary to work with the relevant authority to develop a test plan. Pending the conclusion of the acoustic treatment of carpets, linings and other furniture, the system can be submitted to partial tests to verify compliance with the audibility requirements, but not necessarily with the intelligibility requirements. Other test plans or mitigation methods may be acceptable. D.3.1.4 Construction and state of facilities. The designs of the devices to be tested must be completed in the areas that will be subject to the intelligibility tests. In particular, this requires the command center and all microphone locations on the system under test to be completed. Any remote system microphone locations not tested during this phase must be recorded and these locations must be fully tested with positive results obtained within 90 days of occupying the area or as required by the appropriate authority. In addition, all utility systems in the building, such as B. Room air conditioners, must be fully installed and operational as they generate noise and include the sound paths of the noise. In addition, any floor treatments and any acoustic treatments should have been applied to the walls or ceilings. D.3.1.5 Status of tested system. The system to be tested must be fully installed in all areas where comprehensibility tests are performed. D.3.1.6 Tested system performance. The system under test shall be powered by a permanent primary power source as defined in NFPA 72. D.3.1.7 Secondary power system under test. Secondary power must be fully functional, if needed and/or supplied to the system under test. If batteries are used for this purpose, they must be fully charged by a

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 356

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

at least 48 hours before the start of any of the tests. D.3.2 Emergency communication equipment. D.3.2.1 As described in D.3.2.1, not all ADSs will require or have intelligible voice communication. It is up to the designer to define which areas will have voice communication versus those that can have tone-only signage, as well as which rooms will have strobe lighting, text signage or other forms of notification and/or communication. As used in this document, "notification" refers to all forms of notification, not just voice communication, whether audible, visual, or using other human senses. D.3.2.2 There may be applications where not all spaces require intelligible voice signaling (Ref: NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, 2007, Section A.7.4.1.4). For example, in a residential occupancy such as an apartment, the authority having jurisdiction and the designer may agree on a system that achieves the required audibility throughout the occupancy, but is not used for intelligible voice signals in rooms. The system should at least be able to wake and alarm, but in rooms with the doors closed and the siren in the anteroom or the next room, intelligibility should not be achieved. In some cases, this may require messages to be repeated a sufficient number of times to ensure that occupants can arrive at a location where the system is intelligible enough to be understood. Systems that use tone signaling in some areas and voice signaling in others may not require speech intelligibility in tone-only areas. D.3.2.3 Emergency communication system control panel. The system to be tested for the emergency call communication system must be located and identified prior to testing and its performance characteristics required for testing must be clarified. The test requires authorized personnel to access, maintain and repair the control panel and must be part of the test equipment. If necessary, agencies other than the facility to be controlled (for example, the fire department or a control center) should be made aware of the controls and, if necessary, their automatic reporting function should be disabled. Upon completion of the tests, the emergency communication system shall be restored to its normal operating condition. D.3.2.4 Configuration for testing. The function and operation of the emergency communication system control unit must be verified by personnel authorized to access and operate this equipment. Information should be obtained about the operation of the voice notification portion of the system and whether it has zoning features that minimize disruption to building occupants, allowing testing to be done zone by zone. The test plan should also indicate whether other system functions, such as B. Lift recovery and ventilation unit control, can be disabled during the emergency communication system test.

D.3.2.5 Calibration of the system under test. The audio path of the entire system under test must be fully calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. On systems with adjustable technology, if the manufacturer's instructions are not included, the alternate calibration procedure described below can be used to calibrate the system under test. D.3.2.5.1 Alternative calibration method. D.3.2.5.1.1 This calibration shall be performed with the system under test powered by normal AC power and then verified with the system powered by secondary power (if applicable). D.3.2.5.1.1 The output of the amplifier or circuit under test must have a minimum load of 1 watt during the calibration process. D.3.2.5.1.3 Prior to testing, the remote monitoring station and occupant notification requirements of NFPA 72-2013, Chapter 14 shall be met. D.3.2.5.1.4 Insert a warning tone 1 kHz (± 100 Hz) sine wave at 90 dBA fast 4 inches (4 inches) into the microphone on the axis of the system, perpendicular to the front of the microphone. D.3.2.5.1.5 Place test system in manual paging mode (microphone “powered” and connected to repeater circuit with notification appliance circuit active). D.3.2.5.1.6 Set the output audio notification appliance circuits of the system under test to between 24 and 25 Vrms for 25.2 volt systems or on an AC current scale using a 4-digit RMS meter between 69 and 17 Vrms for 70.7 volt systems. D.3.2.5.1.7 After calibrating the manpage mode of the system under test, the pre-recorded audio (if any) should be tested by playing it back on the system under test to ensure there is no difference greater than 3 dBA between the manual announcement via the system microphone and the pre-recorded announcement. The dBA measurement should be taken with an integration/averaging meter and averaged approximately 10 seconds of voice message to compensate for the amplitude modulation of the voice. D.3.2.5.1.8 In a system under test with more than one emergency microphone and/or pre-recorded message units, the primary units must be calibrated and then the secondary units must be tested to ensure they produce system-wide signals when activated. try. for the same amplitude as the primary units. D.3.3 Drawings and specifications. D.3.3.1 The approved plans and specifications for the system shall be used to plan and document the tests. D.3.3.2 Testing is best performed using full scale plans showing all detectors. D.3.3.3 Plans shall show the different system notification zones.

--`,,`,``,`````,```,```,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2013 edition

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

Licensed=Enerflex Locations Canada, USA/5987367002 Not for Resale 09/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

APPENDIX D D.3.3.4 The type and location of notification devices used in the emergency communication system must be identified prior to testing. D.3.3.5 Notification device icons shall distinguish device type when more than one type is used.

72- 357

intelligible voice communication and which are not. The same charts or tables can be used to list audibility requirements when using tones and to list any forms of visual notification or other communication methods used in ADS.

D.3.3.6 Icons for notification devices shall include the design power for each loudspeaker device.

D.3.5.6 ADS provisions that deviate from the originally approved design documents shall be approved by the appropriate authority.

D.3.3.7 The plans must present the ambient sound pressure levels used as a basis for the system design.

D.3.6 Rooms that do not require rehearsal.

D.3.4 Calculation of the percentage loss of consonant articulation (%ALCONS). In some cases, space may not be available for test measurements before the project is complete. One method of calculating the speech intelligibility index is to calculate the percentage of consonant articulation loss (%ALCONS). The formula is:

where: D 2 RT 60 N V Q M

= Distances from loudspeaker to farthest listener = Reverberation time (in seconds) = LW power ratio causing LD to LW of all devices except those causing LD = Room volume (ft3) = Directionality ratio ( ratio) = CC modifier (usually 1)

For reference, DC is the critical distance. N is further defined as: LW = sound power level (dB) LD = total forward power LW = 10log (Wa/10−12W) Wa = acoustic watts 10-12 = specified reference LD = LW + 10log (Q/4π2) + 10.5 The conversion factor from %ALCONS to STI: STI = [–0.1845 × ln(%ALCONS)] + 0.9482 --`,,`,``,```` ` ,```, ```, `, -`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

D.3.5 Allocation of acoustically distinguishable rooms. D.3.5.1 ADSs must be assigned prior to testing and reviewed by all test stakeholders. D.3.5.2 ADS assignments shall form part of the initial design process. See description in point D.2.3.1. D.3.5.3 Layout diagrams should be used to plan and indicate the boundaries of each ADS when there are more than one. D.3.5.4 All areas that must provide audible notification to occupants, whether by sound or voice only, must be designated as one or more ADSs. See point D.2.3.1. D.3.5.5 Charts or a table listing all ADSs should be used to indicate which ADSs are required

Copyright National Fire Protection Association Provided by IHS Markit under license from NFPA No reproduction or networking allowed without an IHS license

D.3.6.1 Buildings and building areas that do not present an acoustic challenge, such as traditional office environments, hotel rooms, housing units, and carpeted and furnished spaces, generally meet intelligibility levels when audibility levels are compatible with the NFPA requirements of code 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. Intelligibility tests may not be required in these areas. Areas of a typical building that can present an acoustic challenge include parking lots and large lobbies with hard material floors and highly reverberant surfaces of walls, stairs, and other spaces. Intelligibility that satisfies the requirements set out in this document may be difficult to achieve around the entire perimeter of such spaces. Special sound system design processes, principles, and devices may be required to achieve speech intelligibility in areas with high noise levels or in areas that present an acoustic challenge. Alternatively, intelligibility can be provided near exits and in specific areas (a garage level elevator lobby) where occupants can receive clear instructions after being alerted. This is achieved in part by proper planning and naming of ADSs. D.3.6.2 Factors influencing the decision to measure speech intelligibility include: D.3.6.2.1 Possible reasons for not testing speech intelligibility are: (1) Listener-to-speaker distance less than 9.1 m (30 feet) in the room (assuming reasonable audibility and low reverberation) (2) Ambient noise level is less than 50 dBA and average English sound pressure level (SPL) voice prompt is more than 10-15 dBA tile , metal, etc.) (4) Not significantly high ceilings (ie ceiling height equals speaker spacing, ideal ratio 1:1 or 1:2 max.) D.3.6.2.2 In Possible Reasons for intelligibility not tested, except possibly for spot tests, include the following: (1) The room has been acoustically researched and uniquely designed by persons sufficiently competent in building a voice/alarm system. items that are suitable for the occupancy to be protected (for example, the room was designed using commercially available computer modeling software accepted by the authority having jurisdiction)

2013 Edition Licensee = Enerflex Canada, USA/5987367002 Locations Not For Resale, 9/21/2017 10:01:00 AM m. MDT

72- 358

NATIONAL ALERT AND FIRE SIGNALING CODE

D.3.6.2.3 Possible reasons for testing include: (1) Significant hard surfaces (eg glass, marble, tile, metal, etc.) (2) Significant ceiling heights (eg atriums, multiple ceiling heights) D .3.6. 3 In situations where there are multiple ADSs with exactly the same physical configuration and system configuration, it may be possible to test only a representative sample and then test only the remainder to ensure the functioning of the system and device to confirm; B. Hotel rooms with similar layout or offices of similar size and equipment, each with speakers. In these cases, there should be no difference in the intelligibility of the system. The only possible problem would be a device that doesn't work or is conne